Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout17003 91st Ave Ne_BLD6216_2025 COMMERCIAL BUILDING PERMIT APPLICATION Community and Economic Development City of Arlington • 18204 59th Ave NE • Arlington, WA 98223 • Phone (360) 403-3551 The following information is required for Commercial, Multi-Family, and Mixed-Use Building Permit Applications. Mark each box to designate that the information has been provided. Please submit this checklist as part of the submittal documents. See ASSISTANCE BULLETIN #30 for detailed design requirements. EACH BUILDING OR STRUCTURE REQUIRES A SEPARATE SUBMITTAL. SUBMIT ELECTRONIC FILES FOR EACH OF THE FOLLOWING; Incomplete applications will not be accepted. REQUIRED DOCUMENTS Site Plan Architectural Plans Structural Plans Structural Calculations Mechanical System Modifications, (if applicable) Plumbing System Modifications, (if applicable) Project Specification Manuals, (if applicable) WSEC Compliance Forms, (if applicable) https://waenergycodes.com/ Special Inspection and Testing Agreement Deferred Submittal Request Airport Property Lease (if building is located within the Arlington Airport Property Boundary) 1. Plan Review fee is due at time of submittal and remaining balance will be due at time of issuance. 2. The City of Arlington does not review or inspect electrical systems. Contact Labor and Industries at lni.wa.gov or 360-416-3000. A. DEFERRED SUBMITTALS If the project requires any of the following, a Deferred Submittal Request MUST be completed. Deferred submittals require separate applications, plans and plan review. 1. Mechanical Plans (if not included in the plan set) 2. Plumbing Plans (if not included in the plan set) 3. Fire Sprinkler 4. Fire Alarm 5. Signage B. SPECIAL INSPECTION AND TESTING AGREEMENT A Special Inspection Firm is required to perform special inspections for the following type of work. *The Special Inspection and Testing Agreement MUST be submitted with the Building Application. Reinforced Concrete Structural Steel and Welding Bolting in Concrete High-Strength Bolting Pre-stressed Concrete Spray-Applied Fireproofing Shotcrete Smoke-Control Systems Structural Masonry Other - Specify: ______________________________________ I acknowledge that all items designated as submittal requirements must accompany my Commercial Building Permit Application to be considered a complete submittal. COMMERCIAL BUILDING INSTALLATION, MODIFICATION OR REMOVAL MAY REQUIRE A SEPARATE PERMIT SUBMITAL *CHECK ALL THAT APPLY Automatic fire extinguishing systems Compressed gas systems Fire pumps Flammable and combustible liquids (tanks, piping etc.) Standpipe systems Hazardous materials Private fire hydrants Industrial ovens/furnace Fire alarm and detection systems Spraying or dipping operations High piled/rack storage Temporary membrane structure, tents (>200 sq. ft.) or canopies (>400 sq. ft.) Provide details on any of the above checked items: _________________________________________________________________________ PLC on skid mounted pump station. Diesel tank for backup generator.________________________________________________________________________________________ Type of Permit: Commercial Mulit-Family Mixed-Use Property Address: Project Valuation: Lot #: Parcel ID No.: Subdivision: Project Scope of Work: IBC Construction Type: IBC Occupancy Type: Building/Space Square Footage: Number of Stories: Square Footage Per Floor: 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th Primary Contact: Owner Architect Engineer Contractor Owner Name: Office No.: Email Address: Cell No.: Mailing Address: City: State: Zip: Architect Name: Office No.: Email Address: Cell No.: Mailing Address: City: State: Zip: Professional License Number: Expiration Date: Engineer Name: Office No.: Email Address: Cell No.: Mailing Address: City: State: Zip: Professional License Number: Expiration Date: Primary Contractor: Office No.: Email Address: Cell No.: Mailing Address: City: State: Zip: L&I Contractor License Number: Expiration Date: REV03.2022 Page 2 of 6 COMMERCIAL BUILDING MECHANICAL SYSTEM INFORMATION Type of Permit:  New Installation Gas Piping Mechanical Contractor: Office No.: Email Address: Cell No.: Mailing Address: City: State: Zip: L&I Contractor License Number: Expiration Date: ï‚· New gas piping requires a pressure test hooking to any appliance ï‚· Sediment traps (drips) are required on all gas lines ï‚· Gas lines are required to be supported/secured per IFGS, Section 415 ï‚· Proper Combustion air and venting required for all appliances ï‚· A shut-off valve is required within 6 feet of each appliance Gas Piping Specification and complete Schematic PAGE 4  Not Applicable Proposed Piping Material:  CSST  Brass  Black Steel  Galvanized Steel  Other Proposed Piping Size:  ½”  ⅝”  ¾”  1”  1½”  2” Inlet Pressure: Pressure Drop: Specific Gravity: MECHANICAL PERMIT FEES (per unit) Type of Fixture No. of Units Cost per Unit Subtotal Additional Plan Review fees x $ 75.00 = $ Air Cond. Unit ≤100Btu/h x $ 15.00 = $ Air Cond. Unit >100Btu/h x $ 25.00 = $ Air Cond. Unit >500Btu/hp x $ 50.00 = $ Air Handling Units x $ 15.00 = $ Base Mechanical Fee $ 25.00 $ 25.00 Boiler <100Btu/h >3hp x $ 15.00 = $ Boiler >1 million Btu/h<50hp x $ 25.00 = $ Boiler >1.5 million Btu/h<50hp x $ 50.00 = $ Boiler >100Btu/h 3-15hp x $ 15.00 = $ Boiler >500Btu/h 15-30hp x $ 25.00 = $ Diffusers x $ 15.00 = $ Dryer Ducting x $ 15.00 = $ Ductwork (drawings required) x $ 25.00 = $ Evaporative Coolers x $ 15.00 = $ Exhaust/Ventilation Fans x $ 15.00 = $ Fireplace/Insert/Stove x $ 15.00 = $ Forced Air Heat ≤100 Btu/h x $ 15.00 = $ Forced Air Heat >100 Btu/h x $ 25.00 = $ Gas Clothes Dryer x $ 15.00 = $ Gas Fired AC ≤100 Btu/h x $ 15.00 = $ Gas Fired AC >100 Btu/h x $ 25.00 = $ Gas Fired AC > 500 Btu/h x $ 50.00 = $ Gas Piping ≤ 5 units x $ 15.00 = $ REV03.2022 Page 3 of 6 COMMERCIAL BUILDING MECHANICAL PERMIT FEES (per unit) Gas Piping > 5 units (plus <5 units) x $ 2.00 = $ Heat Exchangers x $ 15.00 = $ Heat Pump-Condensing Unit x $ 25.00 = $ Hot Water Heat Coils x $ 15.00 = $ Miscellaneous Appliance - regulated by $ 15.00 $ x = mechanical code, not otherwise specified Pkg. Units ≤100btu x $ 25.00 = $ Pkg. Units >100btu x $ 50.00 = $ Range/Cook top-Gas Fired x $ 15.00 = $ Refrigeration Unit ≤100Btu/h x $ 15.00 = $ Refrigeration Unit >100Btu/h x $ 25.00 = $ Refrigeration Unit >500Btu/h x $ 50.00 = $ Re-inspection fee (all) x $ 75.00 = $ Unit Heaters ≤ 100 Btu/h x $ 15.00 = $ Unit Heaters >100 Btu/h x $ 25.00 = $ VAV Boxes (Variable Air Volume, part of air $ 10.00 $ x = conditioning system) Wall Heaters - Gas Fired x $ 25.00 = $ Water Heater - Gas Fired x $ 25.00 = $ Permit Fee $ Table 4-8; Plan Review Fee $ Processing/Technology Fee $25.00 Total $ PRESSURE PIPING SCHEMATIC COMPLETE FOR GAS PIPING ONLY – USE A SEPARATE SHEET, IF NECESSARY  SCHEMATIC IS TO SCALE  SCHEMATIC NOT TO SCALE Show Pipe Size(s) and Length(s) from meter to all appliances NOTE: Any interior pressure regulators must be indicated REV03.2022 Page 4 of 6 COMMERCIAL BUILDING PLUMBING SYSTEM INFORMATION Plumbing Contractor: Office No.: Email Address: Cell No.: Mailing Address: City: State: Zip: L&I Contractor License Number: Expiration Date: The following items need to be specified on the plans:  Fixture specifications and equipment with locations.  Location and type of all backflow assemblies for each fixture.  Calculations for Grease Interceptor.  Pipe size and location of sanitary and potable water systems.  Riser diagram of waste, vent, and rain water systems, including sizes.  Medical gas piping riser diagram, type of gas, storage room and size of piping. PLUMBING PERMIT FEES (per fixture) Commercial plumbing permits are required to submit line drawings. A plan review fee of 65% per Table 4-6 for plumbing permits will be assessed at time of submittal. Includes two (2) inspections with permit. Type of Fixture No. of Fixtures Cost per Fixture Subtotal Additional Plan Review fees x $ 75.00 = Alteration/repair piping x $ 15.00 = Backflow Assembly x $25.00 = Base Plumbing Fee $ 25.00 $25.00 Bath/Shower Combo x $ 15.00 = Building Main Waste x $ 25.00 = Clothes Washer x $ 15.00 = Dishwasher x $ 15.00 = Drinking Fountain x $ 15.00 = Floor Drains x $ 15.00 = Grease Interceptor x $ 75.00 = Grease Trap x $ 25.00 = Hose Bibb x $ 15.00 = Icemaker/Refrigerator x $ 15.00 = Irrigation – per meter x $ 25.00 = Kitchen Sink & Disposal x $ 15.00 = Laundry Tray x $ 15.00 = Lavatory x $ 15.00 = Med Gas Piping ≤ 5 inlets/outlets x $ 60.00 = Med Gas Piping > 5 inlets/outlets (plus ≤ 5 x $ 5.00 = inlets/outlets) Miscellaneous – regulated by plumbing x $ 15.00 = code, not otherwise specified Pretreatment Interceptor x $ 15.00 = REV03.2022 Page 5 of 6 COMMERCIAL BUILDING PLUMBING PERMIT FEES (per fixture) Re-inspection Fee (all) x $ 75.00 = Roof Drains x $ 15.00 = Shower (only) x $ 15.00 = Sink (bar, service, etc.) x $ 15.00 = Toilets x $ 15.00 = Urinal x $ 15.00 = Vacuum Breakers x $ 25.00 = Water Heater x $ 25.00 = Water Heater - Tankless x $ 25.00 = Permit Fee Table 4-6; Plan Review Fee Processing/Technology Fee $25.00 Total PROPOSED BUILDING USE  New  Retail  Medical  Automotive Based  Industrial  Office  Restaurant  Machine Shop  Other: ____________________________________ CROSS CONNECTION Please check all appliances that are proposed or permanently connected to the water supply.  Ice Machine  Dialysis Equip.  Air washers  Coffee Urn/Espresso  Hydrotherapy Equip.  Steam Generators  Carbonated Bev.  Dental Equip.  Dye Vats  Fume Hoods  Laboratory Equip.  Pressure Washers  Degreasers  Autoclave/Sterilizers  Cooling Towers  Hot Tub/Spa  Decorative Fountain  Fire Sprinkler  Aquarium  Swimming Pools  Sprinkler w/chemicals  Lawn Irrigation  Well on property  Other: ________________________ WASTEWATER DISCHARGE Does the plumbing system currently have a grease interceptor?  Yes  No  Don’t Know Does the plumbing system currently have an oil/water  Yes  No  Don’t Know separator? Is water used in the business process (washing, rinsing,  Yes  No  Don’t Know cooling)? Does your business require a NPDES permit?  Yes  No  Don’t Know I hereby certify that the above information is correct and that the construction on, and the occupancy and the use of the above-described property will be in accordance with the laws, rules and regulation of the State of Washington. Signature Print Name Date REV03.2022 Page 6 of 6 Y O IT F CITY OF ARLINGTONCITY OF ARLINGTON C A 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION PROJECT640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION PROJECT R N L O I N G T PROJECT VICINITY MAP CITY OF ARLINGTON MAYOR ARLINGTON APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION DON VANNEY CITY COUNCIL HIGHWAY 530 JAMES KELLY, P.E. HEATHER LOGAN PUBLIC WORKS DIRECTOR ROB TOYER CITY OF ARLINGTON DEBORA NELSON MICHELE BLYTHE DATE APPROVED JAN SCHUETTE YVONNE GALLARDO-VAN ORNAM SOUTH FORK OF STILLAGUAMISH RIVER LEISHA NOBACH DRAWING INDEX PROJECT DESCRIPTION 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION BURN RD THIS PORTION OF THE PROJECT CONSISTS OF WATER MAIN Sheet Sheet Title Dwg No CONSTRUCTION, PUMP AND CONTROL SKID OFFLOAD AND Number INSTALLATION, WOOD FRAMED BUILDING REMODEL, PIPING 1 COVER COV CONNECTIONS, POWER DROP, CONTROLS STARTUP, TESTING HIGHWAY 9 ARLINGTON 2 GENERAL NOTES G01 AND INTEGRATION. MUNICIPAL AIRPORT PRESSURE 3 WATER MAIN PLAN I W01 REDUCING STATION 4 WATER MAIN PLAN II W02 PRESSURE REDUCING STATION AT SnoPUD INTERTIE 67TH AVE NE PROJECT LOCATION 5 WATER MAIN PLAN III W03 THIS PORTION OF THE PROJECT ENTAILS INSTALLING A 6 WATER MAIN CONNECTION DETAILS W04 PRESSURE REDUCING STATION ASSEMBLY, INSTALLING A PRECAST VAULT, AND CONNECTING TO THE EXISTING WATER 7 PRESSURE REDUCING STATION PLAN W05 MAIN AT THE INTERTIE TO THE SnoPUD WATER SYSTEM. 8 SITE DETAILS I D01 HIGHWAY 531 9 SITE DETAILS II D02 10 SITE DETAILS III D03 11 STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES S01 12 STRUCTURAL DEMOLITION PLAN S02 13 PROPOSED BPS STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS S03 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION 91ST AVE NE PROJECT LOCATION 14 ELECTRICAL SHELTER DETAIL S04 APPROXIMATE SCALE: 1" = 2,500' 15 STRUCTURAL DETAILS S05 16 MECHANICAL PLAN - PUMP STATION M01 17 MECHANICAL PLAN - PRV M02 PROJECT VICINITY MAP - 640 ZONE BPS PROJECT VICINITY MAP - PROPOSED INTERTIE PRV 18 MECHANICAL DETAILS M03 19 ELECTRICAL LEGEND E01 20 ONE-LINE DIAGRAM E02 21 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN E03 22 ELECTRICAL PLAN 1 E04 23 ELECTRICAL PLAN 2 E05 24 POWER DISTRIBUTION AND SIGNAL DIAGRAM E06 PRESSURE REDUCING STATION 25 GENERATOR PAD DETAILS E07 640 ZONE BPS PROJECT SITE PROJECT SITE 17003 91ST AVE NE BURN RD & 172ND ST NE 26 VENTILATION CONTROL PANEL DETAILS E08 ARLINGTON, WA 98223 ARLINGTON, WA 98223 27 ELECTRICAL DETAILS E09 28 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES E10 CONTACT PERSONNEL BURN RD 172ND ST NE CONTACT AGENCY PHONE JAMES KELLY, P.E. (PUBLIC WORKS DIRECTOR) CITY OF ARLINGTON 360.403.3512 DAN BURWELL, P.E. (PROJECT MANAGER) RH2 ENGINEERING 360.684.1548 MARK BRAAKSMA, P.E. (ELECTRICAL ENGINEER) RH2 ENGINEERING 360.684.1552 91ST AVE NE DEREK FINK (STRUCTURAL ENGINEER) RH2 ENGINEERING 360.569.1453 BRIAN COYNE (ELECTRICAL STAFF ENGINEER) RH2 ENGINEERING 360.684.1556 KAYLIE DENNEHY (STAFF ENGINEER) RH2 ENGINEERING 360.699.7474 APPROXIMATE SCALE: 1" = 100' APPROXIMATE SCALE: 1" = 250' Aug. 20, 2024 640BPS-D-COV.DWG GENERAL NOTES WATER SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION NOTES LEGEND 1. ALL WORKMANSHIP, CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS SHALL BE PERFORMED OR SUPPLIED IN ACCORDANCE WITH CITY OF ARLINGTON WATER SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION NOTES: EXISTING LEGEND PROPOSED LEGEND THESE SPECIAL PROVISIONS, PLANS, CITY OF ARLINGTON (CITY) STANDARD DETAILS, AND THE WSDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD, BRIDGE, AND MUNICIPAL CONSTRUCTION, 2024 EDITION, AS ISSUED BY THE 1. ALL WORK SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPROVED PLANS AND CURRENT EDITION OF DEMOLITION LEGEND WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION AND THE AMERICAN PUBLIC WORKS ASSOCIATION, THE CITY OF ARLINGTON STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS. ANY CHANGES TO THE DESIGN WHICH IS HEREINAFTER REFERRED TO AS THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS. UTILITY POTHOLE REQUIRE CITY APPROVAL. 2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT THE CITY'S PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT (360.403.3500) TO SCHEDULE A SAWCUT LINE PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE AFTER PLANS ARE APPROVED AND BEFORE STAKING AND CONSTRUCTION 2. ALL MATERIALS SHALL CONFORM TO THE CITY STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS AND SHALL BE APPROX. EXCAVATION LIMITS START. THE CONFERENCE SHALL INCLUDE THE CONTRACTOR, REPRESENTATIVES FROM THE PERMIT AGENCIES, APPROVED BY THE CITY PRIOR TO DELIVERY TO THE JOB SITE. MATERIAL SUBMITTALS ARE OTHER UTILITY COMPANIES, AND CITY STAFF. ARRANGE A MEETING A MINIMUM OF 48 HOURS PRIOR TO REQUIRED AND MUST BE APPROVED PRIOR TO SCHEDULING A PRE-CONSTRUCTION TEMPORARY SIGN COMMENCING CONSTRUCTION. CONFRERNCE. CONSTRUCTION LIMITS 3. STAKING SHALL BE PERFORMED BY OR UNDER THE DIRECT SUPERVISION OF THE CONTRACTOR’S LAND SURVEYOR 3. WATER MAINS SHALL BE CEMENT-LINED DUCTILE IRON PIPE CLASS 52 UNLESS OTHERWISE LICENSED IN THE STATE OF WASHINGTON. PROVIDE THE CITY WITH TWO (2) BUSINESS DAYS NOTICE TO INSPECT WATER MAIN LEGEND APPROVED BY THE CITY. CONSTRUCTION STAKING BEFORE CONSTRUCTION BEGINS. WATER MAIN PIPE 4. THE EXISTING TOPOGRAPHIC AND PHYSICAL FEATURES SHOWN ON DWG NOS. W01, W02, AND W03 ARE BASED ON 4. ALL SERVICE LOCATIONS SHALL BE FIELD APPROVED BY THE CITY PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. THRUST BLOCK AVAILABLE GIS DATA, RECORD DRAWINGS, AND FIELD RECONNAISSANCE BY RH2. THE EXISTING TOPOGRAPHIC WATER VALVE AND PHYSICAL FEATURES SHOWN ON DWG NO. W05 ARE BASED ON FIELD SURVEY BY METRON AND ASSOCIATES 5. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO LOCATE UNDERGROUND UTILITIES BY CALLING (SEE SURVEY NOTES), RECORD DRAWINGS, AND FIELD RECONNAISSANCE BY RH2. ONE-CALL UNDERGROUND UTILITY LOCATOR (1-800-424-5555) 48 HOURS PRIOR TO RESTRAINT JOINT FITTING CONSTRUCTION. 5. THE LOCATIONS AND ELEVATIONS OF EXISTING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES SHOWN ON THE PLANS ARE REDUCER (FLXFL) APPROXIMATE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DETERMINE THE EXACT LOCATION OF ALL EXISTING UTILITIES PRIOR TO 6. ADEQUATE TRENCH SHEETING AND/OR SHORING SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR AS ADAPTER (FLXRJ) COMMENCING WORK TO AVOID DAMAGE OR DISTURBANCE, AND AGREES TO BE FULLY RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY AND REQUIRED BY OSHA AND WISHA. ALL DAMAGES WHICH MIGHT BE CAUSED BY THE CONTRACTOR'S FAILURE TO EXACTLY LOCATE AND PRESERVE AIR/COMBINATION VALVE ALL UNDERGROUND UTILITIES. IT IS UNDERSTOOD THAT OTHER ABOVE GROUND AND UNDERGROUND FACILITIES NOT SHOWN ON THE PLANS MAY BE ENCOUNTERED DURING THE COURSE OF THE WORK. 7. THE PIPE SHALL BE INSTALLED BY FOLLOWING THE FINISHED GRADE PROFILE WHEREVER BLOW OFF ASSEMBLY POSSIBLE. THE DEPTH OF COVER SHALL BE TYPICALLY 36 INCHES (3 FEET), AND MAY BE UP TO 60 INCHES (5 FEET) WITH THE APPROVAL OF THE CITY ENGINEER. WATER MAINS UNDER THE APPROX. TRENCH LIMITS 6. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROTECT IN PLACE BUILDINGS, FENCES, APPURTENANCES, ABOVE GROUND UTILITIES, AND OTHER PROPERTY ADJACENT TO ALL CONSTRUCTION AREAS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE SOLELY STATE (OR COUNTY) HIGHWAYS SHALL MEET THE MINIMUM COVER DEPTHS REQUIRED BY APPROX. OVERLAY LIMITS RESPONSIBLE FOR REPAIRING ALL DAMAGE CAUSED BY CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES. WSDOT (OR SNOHOMISH COUNTY). SIGN 7. IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE DEPARTMENT OF ECOLOGY AIR QUALITY STANDARDS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE 8. PIPE JOINT DEFLECTIONS SHALL NOT EXCEED ONE-HALF OF PIPE MANUFACTURER'S RESPONSIBLE FOR CONTROLLING ALL FUGITIVE DUST THAT MAY BE GENERATED BY THE CONSTRUCTION PROJECT. RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM DEFLECTIONS. BENDS MAY BE REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN PROPER WATER MAIN ALIGNMENT WITHIN EASEMENTS OR PUBLIC RIGHT-OF-WAY. 8. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTAIN WORK TO WITHIN RIGHT-OF-WAY, CONSTRUCTION LIMITS AS SHOWN ON PLAN SHEET W05, AND EXISTING EASEMENTS AS DESCRIBED IN APPENDIX A OF THE SPECIFICATIONS. 9. WATER MAIN SHALL NOT BE PLACED UNDER SIDEWALK, CURBS, GUTTERS, OR ANY PERMANENT STRUCTURES WITHOUT THE PRIOR APPROVAL OF THE CITY ENGINEER. 9. SEE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR FURTHER INFORMATION REGARDING PERMITS. 10. ONSITE TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL (TESC) MEASURES SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE 10. NO CONNECTION TO THE CITY WATER SYSTEM IS ALLOWED UNTIL THE NEW CONSTRUCTION SECTION AND DETAIL REFERENCES CONTRACTOR AND BE IN PLACE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. ANY PROBLEMS OCCURRING BEFORE FINAL PASSES PRESSURE AND PURITY TESTS, AND HAS BEEN APPROVED AND ACCEPTED BY THE CITY. ACCEPTANCE BY THE CITY SHALL BE CORRECTED BY THE CONTRACTOR. UPON FINAL ACCEPTANCE BY THE CITY, THE FOLLOWING CONVENTIONS HAVE BEEN USED WITHIN THESE DRAWINGS TO REFER THE READER OR AS OTHERWISE DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ALL TEMPORARY, 11. PRIOR TO MAKING CONNECTIONS TO THE EXISTING SYSTEM, CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY BETWEEN THE SECTION/DETAIL AND THE PLAN FROM WHICH IT IS REFERENCED. NON-DEGRADABLE TESC MEASURES. THE STORM DRAIN INLET PROTECTION DEVICE SHALL BE SILT SACK OR THE LOCATION, DEPTH AND MATERIAL OF EXISTING WATER MAINS AT THE POINT OF REFERENCE BUBBLES EQUAL. ALL CATCH BASINS WITHIN THE VICINITY OF THE CONSTRUCTION SHALL HAVE INLET PROTECTION CONNECTION. MEASURES. X PLAN REFERENCE BUBBLE - REFERS READER BACK TO THE PLAN FROM WHICH CITY OF ARLINGTON 12. ALL WATER LINES SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 10 FEET HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE FROM SANITARY THE DETAIL OR SECTION ORIGINATED. 11. ANY REVISIONS TO PLANS MUST BE MADE BY THE ENGINEER AND APPROVED BY THE CITY PRIOR TO ANY GENERAL NOTES SEWERS. WHEN WATER LINES CROSS SEWER LINES, THE MINIMUM VERTICAL CLEARANCE SHALL IMPLEMENTATION IN THE FIELD. X DETAIL/SECTION REFERENCE BUBBLE - REFERS READER TO THE DRAWING ON BE 18 INCHES. 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION WHICH THE DETAIL OR SECTION IS LOCATED. 12. ALL PAVEMENT MARKINGS, SIGNING AND TRAFFIC CONTROL AS REQUIRED BY THE CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE MUTCD. 13. TO FILL THE MAIN FOR FLUSHING, PRESSURE AND PURITY TESTS, THE CONTRACTOR IS WHERE, ID = SECTION/DETAIL REFERENCE NUMBER REQUIRED TO USE AN APPROVED METER AND DCVA. THE HYDRANT SHALL REMAIN IN THE FULL ## = DRAWING NUMBER ON WHICH DETAIL ORIGINATED OR RESIDES. N 13. A COPY OF THE APPROVED PLANS MUST BE ON THE JOB SITE WHENEVER CONSTRUCTION IS IN PROGRESS. OPEN POSITION TO PREVENT BACK-SIPHONAGE THROUGH THE DRAIN HOLE. AFTER F O T O SUCCESSFUL TESTING, THE CONTRACTOR WILL TIE INTO THE EXISTING SYSTEM, USING Y G N 14. WHERE NEWLY CONSTRUCTED PAVING MEETS EXISTING PAVING, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SAW CUT TO PROVIDE DISINFECTED SLEEVES AND SPOOL PIECES. TI I C L A SMOOTH TRANSITION FROM EXISTING TO PROPOSED PAVING. APPLICATION OF A THIN TACK COAT OF AR EMULSIFIED ASPHALT SHALL BE APPLIED TO INSURE PROPER BONDING. 14. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT THE CITY FOR VALVE OPERATION. ONLY AUTHORIZED ABBREVIATIONS REPRESENTATIVES OF THE CITY CAN OPERATE VALVES IN THE CITY WATER SYSTEM. 15. THE COMPLETED SURFACE OF ALL COURSES SHALL BE OF UNIFORM TEXTURE, SMOOTH, UNIFORM AS TO CROWN REVIEW AND GRADE, AND FREE FROM DEFECTS OF ALL KINDS. THE COMPLETED SURFACE OF THE WEARING COURSE 15. THE CONTRACTOR IS HEREBY NOTIFIED THAT, SINCE FILLING AND FLUSHING WILL BE DONE APPROX APPROXIMATE GS GALVANIZED STEEL SHALL NOT VARY MORE THAN 1/8 INCH FROM THE LOWER EDGE OF A 10-FOOT STRAIGHTEDGE PLACED ON THE THROUGH A CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL DEVICE, LOW VELOCITY FLOWS MAY BE CONC CONCRETE HMA HOT MIXED ASPHALT SURFACE PARALLEL TO THE CENTERLINE. THE TRANSVERSE SLOPE OF THE COMPLETED SURFACE OF THE BY ENCOUNTERED. THEREFORE, EVERY ATTEMPT SHALL BE MADE TO KEEP THE PIPE CLEAN CL CENTERLINE L LEFT WEARING COURSE SHALL VARY NOT MORE THAN 1/4 INCH IN 10- FEET FROM THE RATE OF TRANSVERSE SLOPE 21-0233 DURING INSTALLATION. THIS MAY INCLUDE SWABBING THE PIPE WITH CHLORINATED WATER. CLR CLEAR LF LINEAR FEET SHOWN ON THE PLANS. CSBC CRUSHED SURFACING BASE COURSE LTF LENGTH TO FIT CSTC CRUSHED SURFACING TOP COURSE N NORTHING JOB NO.: 16. MATERIALS SAMPLING AND TESTING SHALL BE AT A FREQUENCY AND MAGNITUDE AS SPECIFIED IN THE TECHNICAL 16. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM TEMPORARY SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL, DIAM DIAMETER NO NUMBER SPECIFICATIONS OR DETERMINED BY THE ENGINEER. A PRIVATE AND INDEPENDENT TESTING LABORATORY SHALL DUST CONTROL, NOISE CONTROL, AND TRAFFIC CONTROL AS REQUIRED BY THE CITY OR OTHER DI DUCTILE IRON PROP PROPOSED PERFORM TESTING AND SAMPLING. CERTIFIED TEST REPORTS SHALL BE FURNISHED FOR ALL TESTS PERFORMED APPLICABLE AGENCIES. DWG DRAWING R RIGHT BY PRIVATE TESTING LABORATORIES. THE CITY WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ACCEPTANCE TESTING. IF TESTS FAIL, E EASTING RJ RESTRAINED JOINT RETESTS SHALL BE PAID FOR BY THE CONTRACTOR. 17. CUTTING AND PATCHING OF ROAD WAYS SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE ELEV ELEVATION ROW RIGHT-OF-WAY RIGHT-OF-WAY PERMIT OF THE CITY OR OTHER APPLICABLE AGENCY. EOP EDGE OF PAVEMENT SPECS SPECIFICATIONS 640BPS-D-COV.DWG EX EXISTING SS STAINLESS STEEL ARL 18. ALL IN-LINE PIPE JOINTS SHALL BE RESTRAINED WITH FIELD LOCK GASKETS. FO FIBER OPTIC TYP TYPICAL GIS GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEM W WATER CLIENT:FILENAME:REVISIONS SURVEY NOTES 19. ALL FITTINGS SHALL BE RESTRAINED JOINTS AND HAVE THRUST BLOCKING. DATA FOR THIS SURVEY* HAS BEEN GATHERED THROUGH FIELD OBSERVATIONS BY METRON AND ASSOCIATES AND THE Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 CITY OF ARLINGTON. DESCRIPTION UNDERGROUND UTILITY NOTE: SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: UNDERGROUND UTILITY LOCATIONS FOR SEWER, WATER, ELECTRIC SERVICE, COMMUNICATION SERVICES AND GAS, AS PROJECT DATUM DATE SHOWN HEREON, ARE BASED UPON THE CITY OF ARLINGTON UTILITY LOCATES AND “CALL BEFORE YOU DIG” UTILITY LOCATE KMDDWB SERVICE ALL PROVIDED BY CITY OF ARLINGTON. THE USE OF THIS MAP FOR THE PRECISE LOCATION OF THE UTILITY LINES IS HORIZONTAL DATUM: NOT WARRANTED OR GUARANTEED. NO. WASHINGTON NORTH ZONE SPC NORTH AMERICAN DATUM 1983/2011 GEODETIC PROJECTION ENGINEER:REVIEWED: RCW 19.122 REQUIRES 48 HOUR NOTIFICATION PRIOR TO UNDERGROUND CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY. CONTACT “CALL SCALE:SHOWN VERTICAL DATUM: BEFORE YOU DIG” UTILITY LOCATE SERVICE AT 811 OR 1-800-424-5555. NAVD 88 0" 1" 2" * SURVEY GATHERED FOR EXISTING TOPOGRAPHIC AND PHYSICAL FEATURES SHOWN ON DWG NO. W05 ONLY. DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: G01 2 28 N:422353.76 E:1329564.77, PROVIDE: T.P.N. 31052500102900 N:422328.61 E:1329558.38, PROVIDE: (1) - 12" DI 45° BEND (RJxRJ) WITH 103 JAMES & THERESA GRAY 12" DI SPOOL APPROX. LENGTH 3'-1" (FLXPE) WITH THRUST BLOCK PROVIDE APPROX 28 LF of PIPE REVERSE THRUST BLOCK PER DETAIL PROVIDE APPROX 18 LF of PIPE PROVIDE APPROX 17 LF of PIPE N:422334.13 E:1329601.47, PROVIDE: N:422340.64 E:1329551.75, PROVIDE: (1) - 12" DI 45° BEND (RJxRJ) WITH (1) - 12" DI 45° BEND (RJxRJ) WITH N:422353.82 E:1329581.64, PROVIDE: THRUST BLOCK THRUST BLOCK (1) - 12" DI 45° BEND (RJxRJ) WITH PROVIDE APPROX 5 LF of PIPE THRUST BLOCK PROVIDE APPROX 62 LF of PIPE N:422335.2 E:1329551.76, PROVIDE: N:422334.34 E:1329663.9, PROVIDE: (1) - 12" DI 45° BEND (RJxRJ) WITH 1 (1) - 12" DI 45° BEND (RJxRJ) WITH THRUST BLOCK THRUST BLOCK N:422277.15 E:1329721.5, PROVIDE: PROVIDE APPROX 35 LF of PIPE (1) - 12" DI 45° BEND (RJxRJ) WITH POSSIBLE TESTING 200 THRUST BLOCK AND FLUSHING N:422314.68 E:1329694.12, PROVIDE: GENERAL NOTES 00 LOCATION PER DETAIL FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY PROVIDE APPROX 25 LF of PIPE 1 PROVIDE APPROX 5 LF of PIPE PROVIDE APPROX 46 LF of PIPE 00 N:422251.66 E:1329721.59, PROVIDE: · EXISTING UTILITIES HAVE NOT BEEN POTHOLED TO IDENTIFY N:422330.64 E:1329556.35, PROVIDE: 0 (1) - 12" DI 45° BEND (RJxRJ) WITH LOCATION, MATERIAL, SIZE OR GEOMETRY. 12" DI EBAA FLEX-TEND EXPANSION THRUST BLOCK · SITE FEATURES SHOWN WERE APPROXIMATED FROM JOINT, (RJXRJ) PROVIDE APPROX 31 LF of PIPE AVAILABLE AS-BUILT INFORMATION, GIS DATA AND BASED ON AERIAL IMAGERY. CONTOUR AND ELEVATION DATA WAS PIPE AND FITTINGS N:422230.03 E:1329743.37, PROVIDE: APPROXIMATED FROM AVAILABLE LIDAR DATA. NO SURVEY PER DWG NO. M01 00 (1) - 12" DI 45° BEND (RJxRJ) WITH WAS CONDUCTED FOR THE WATER MAIN ALIGNMENT AND 2 THRUST BLOCK RESERVOIR SITE. AERIAL IMAGERY IS SCHEMATIC AND MAY NOT ALIGN GEOGRAPHICALLY WITH SITE FEATURES. N:422230.25 E:1329808.56, PROVIDE: CONTRACTOR SHALL LOCATE EASEMENT BOUNDARY PRIOR (1) - 12" DI 45° BEND (RJxRJ) WITH TO CONSTRUCTION. THRUST BLOCK T.P.N. 31052500103100 · BOULDERS MAY BE FOUND DURING TRENCH EXCAVATION. PROVIDE APPROX 37 LF of PIPE ROBERT & MARCELLE WILSON ANY BOULDERS/ROCKS LARGER THAN 1.0 CY (MEASURED ON AVERAGE DIMENSIONS) ENCOUNTERED DURING EXCAVATION 4 SHALL BE REMOVED AND SHALL BE PAID PER DIVISION 18 OF THE SPECIFICATIONS. 2 4 · ALL WATER MAIN PIPE AND FITTINGS SHALL BE DUCTILE IRON 3 N:422198.32 E:1329822.29, PROVIDE: WITH RESTRAINT PER SPECIFICATION DIVISION 15. (1) - AIR RELEASE & VACUUM VALVE ASSEMBLY AT HIGH POINT · CITY INSPECTOR MAY DIRECT WATER MAIN ALIGNMENT IN THE 00 FIELD. N:422204.44 E:1329834.54, PROVIDE: 3 (1) - 12" DI 45° BEND (RJxRJ) WITH · WATER MAIN VERTICAL PROFILE IS ESTIMATED BASED ON THRUST BLOCK AVAILABLE GIS SURFACE DATA. CONTRACTOR TO ADJUST AIR VAC LOCATIONS AS NEEDED BASED ON FIELD IDENTIFIED HIGH POINTS OF INSTALLED WATER MAIN. AIR VAC ASSEMBLY PROVIDE APPROX 65 LF of PIPE PER CITY STANDARD DETAIL W-260. 3 T.P.N. 31052500103200 · HYDRANT ASSEMBLY, PAD, AND GUARD POSTS PER CITY SCOTT THOMAS STANDARD DETAILS W-010, W-020, AND W-030. W02 MATCH LINE W02 MATCH LINE CITY OF ARLINGTON W01 MATCH LINE W01 MATCH LINE · THRUST BLOCKING PER CITY STANDARD DETAILS W-160, W-165, AND W-175 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. PLAN VIEW WATER MAIN PLAN I · PROVIDE VALVE BOXES PER CITY STANDARD DETAIL W-190. 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION · PROVIDE OVERLAY TRANSITION PER DETAIL AT 102 INTERSECTION WITH EXISTING GRAVEL DRIVEWAY OR SHOULDER. N O F T O · CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALTERNATING FLAGGER Y G N 520' 520' CONTROLLED 1-LANE, 2-WAY TRAFFIC FOR ANY WORK WITHIN TI I C L PROFILE NOTES: WATER MAIN PROFILE IS APPROXIMATE BASED ON THE ACCESS ROAD. MAINTAIN ACCESS TO RESIDENTS FOR AR AVAILABLE LIDAR DATA. ADJUST WATER MAIN AS NEEDED TO THE DURATION OF CONSTRUCTION. NO FULL CLOSURES WILL AIR VAC PER PLAN PROVIDE A MINIMUM 3-FEET AND MAXIMUM OF 5-FEET OF COVER BE ALLOWED WITHOUT APPROVAL FROM THE CITY. OVER THE WATER MAIN. ANY CROSSING UTILITIES ARE UNKNOWN, REVIEW ADJUST MAIN AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE A MINIMUM OF 12-INCHES OF VERTICAL CLEARANCE TO ALL CROSSING UTILITIES. KEY NOTES BY 21-0233 510' 510' HYDRANT LOCATION AT LOW PROP. POWERCROSSING 1 WATER MAIN TRENCH PER CITY STANDARD DETAIL W-270. JOB NO.: POINT PER PLAN VIEW HORIZONTAL BEND EXISTING GRADE 2 ELECTRICAL TRENCH PER DETAIL ON DWG NO. E09. PER PLAN, TYP 3 PROTECT EXISTING FENCE, GATE, AND POSTS IN PLACE. 4 APPROX. ASPHALT OVERLAY LIMITS. ASPHALT 101 640BPS-P-WATER.DWG OVERLAY PER DETAIL. ARL 500' 500' CLIENT:FILENAME: REVISIONS VICINITY MAP Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 DESCRIPTION SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: 172ND ST NE DATE 490' 490' OMPDWB 0 LF 100 LF 200 LF 300 LF 395 LF HWY 9 NO. WATER MAIN PROFILE I ENGINEER:REVIEWED: SCALE:SHOWN 91ST AVE NE 0" 1" 2" DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: W01 3 28 T.P.N. 31052500103200 T.P.N. 31052500103300 N:421928.75 E:1329835.18, PROVIDE: 1 5 SCOTT THOMAS BRUCE QUINN (1) - 12" DI 45° BEND (RJxRJ) WITH THRUST BLOCK PROVIDE APPROX 276 LF of PIPE W02 MATCH LINEW01 MATCH LINE PROVIDE APPROX 51 LF of PIPE 00 00 00 6 5 4 00 7 T.P.N. 31052500100500 JAMES TANIS GENERAL NOTES · EXISTING UTILITIES HAVE NOT BEEN POTHOLED TO IDENTIFY N:421892.94 E:1329799.53, PROVIDE: LOCATION, MATERIAL, SIZE OR GEOMETRY. (1) - 12" DI 45° BEND (RJxRJ) WITH THRUST BLOCK · SITE FEATURES SHOWN WERE APPROXIMATED FROM AVAILABLE AS-BUILT INFORMATION, GIS DATA AND BASED ON AERIAL IMAGERY. CONTOUR AND ELEVATION DATA WAS APPROXIMATED FROM AVAILABLE LIDAR DATA. NO SURVEY WAS CONDUCTED FOR THE WATER MAIN ALIGNMENT AND RESERVOIR SITE. AERIAL IMAGERY IS SCHEMATIC AND MAY NOT ALIGN GEOGRAPHICALLY WITH SITE FEATURES. CONTRACTOR SHALL LOCATE EASEMENT BOUNDARY PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. · BOULDERS MAY BE FOUND DURING TRENCH EXCAVATION. ANY BOULDERS/ROCKS LARGER THAN 1.0 CY (MEASURED ON AVERAGE DIMENSIONS) ENCOUNTERED DURING EXCAVATION SHALL BE REMOVED AND SHALL BE PAID PER DIVISION 18 OF 8 00 THE SPECIFICATIONS. · ALL WATER MAIN PIPE AND FITTINGS SHALL BE DUCTILE IRON WITH RESTRAINT PER SPECIFICATION DIVISION 15. · CITY INSPECTOR MAY DIRECT WATER MAIN ALIGNMENT IN THE W02 MATCH LINEW01 MATCH LINE W03 MATCH LINE W03 MATCH LINE FIELD. W02 MATCH LINE W02 MATCH LINE PLAN VIEW · WATER MAIN VERTICAL PROFILE IS ESTIMATED BASED ON AVAILABLE GIS SURFACE DATA. CONTRACTOR TO ADJUST AIR VAC LOCATIONS AS NEEDED BASED ON FIELD IDENTIFIED HIGH POINTS OF INSTALLED WATER MAIN. AIR VAC ASSEMBLY PER CITY STANDARD DETAIL W-260. CITY OF ARLINGTON · HYDRANT ASSEMBLY, PAD, AND GUARD POSTS PER CITY STANDARD DETAILS W-010, W-020, AND W-030. WATER MAIN PLAN II 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION · THRUST BLOCKING PER CITY STANDARD DETAILS W-160, W-165, AND W-175 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. · PROVIDE VALVE BOXES PER CITY STANDARD DETAIL W-190. N O F T O · PROVIDE OVERLAY TRANSITION PER DETAIL AT 102 Y G N INTERSECTION WITH EXISTING GRAVEL DRIVEWAY OR TI I C L SHOULDER. AR 520' 520' · CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALTERNATING FLAGGER PROFILE NOTES: WATER MAIN PROFILE IS APPROXIMATE BASED ON CONTROLLED 1-LANE, 2-WAY TRAFFIC FOR ANY WORK WITHIN AVAILABLE LIDAR DATA. ADJUST WATER MAIN AS NEEDED TO THE ACCESS ROAD. MAINTAIN ACCESS TO RESIDENTS FOR REVIEW PROVIDE A MINIMUM 3-FEET AND MAXIMUM OF 5-FEET OF COVER THE DURATION OF CONSTRUCTION. NO FULL CLOSURES WILL OVER THE WATER MAIN. ANY CROSSING UTILITIES ARE UNKNOWN, BE ALLOWED WITHOUT APPROVAL FROM THE CITY. ADJUST MAIN AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE A MINIMUM OF 12-INCHES OF BY VERTICAL CLEARANCE TO ALL CROSSING UTILITIES. 21-0233 JOB NO.: EXISTING GRADE KEY NOTES 510' 510' HORIZONTAL BEND 1 WATER MAIN TRENCH PER CITY STANDARD DETAIL W-270. PER PLAN, TYP 5 CONTINUE ROAD OVERLAY ALONG WATER MAIN 101 TRENCH. ASPHALT OVERLAY PER DETAIL. 640BPS-P-WATER.DWG ARL CLIENT:FILENAME:REVISIONS 500' 500' VICINITY MAP Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 DESCRIPTION 172ND ST NE SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: DATE OMPDWB HWY 9 490' 490' NO. 390 LF 400 LF 500 LF 600 LF 700 LF 800 LF 820 LF ENGINEER:REVIEWED: SCALE:SHOWN WATER MAIN PROFILE II 91ST AVE NE 0" 1" 2" DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: W02 4 28 W03 MATCH LINE T.P.N. 31052500100500 JAMES TANIS 6 W02 MATCH LINE 4 N:421891.5 E:1329153.34, PROVIDE: 201 CONNECTION TO EXISTING N:421891.33 E:1329165.31, PROVIDE: (1) - 12" DI VERTICAL 11.25° BEND 1 (RJXRJ) WITH THRUST BLOCK 91st AVE NE T.P.N. 31052500103300 BRUCE QUINN PROVIDE APPROX 643 LF of PIPE 00 00 00 00 9 63 00 10 11 12 13 13 W03 MATCH LINE N:421883.82 E:1329289.53, PROVIDE: (1) - AIR RELEASE & VACUUM VALVE T.P.N. 31052500102300 ASSEMBLY AT HIGH POINT WING & SHARON YU W02 MATCH LINE PLAN VIEW GENERAL NOTES · EXISTING UTILITIES HAVE NOT BEEN POTHOLED TO IDENTIFY LOCATION, · WATER MAIN VERTICAL PROFILE IS ESTIMATED BASED ON AVAILABLE GIS MATERIAL, SIZE OR GEOMETRY. SURFACE DATA. CONTRACTOR TO ADJUST AIR VAC LOCATIONS AS NEEDED BASED ON FIELD IDENTIFIED HIGH POINTS OF INSTALLED WATER MAIN. AIR VAC KEY NOTES VICINITY MAP · SITE FEATURES SHOWN WERE APPROXIMATED FROM AVAILABLE AS-BUILT ASSEMBLY PER CITY STANDARD DETAIL W-260. INFORMATION, GIS DATA AND BASED ON AERIAL IMAGERY. CONTOUR AND ELEVATION DATA WAS APPROXIMATED FROM AVAILABLE LIDAR DATA. NO · HYDRANT ASSEMBLY, PAD, AND GUARD POSTS PER CITY STANDARD DETAILS WATER MAIN TRENCH PER CITY STANDARD DETAIL W-270. 1 SURVEY WAS CONDUCTED FOR THE WATER MAIN ALIGNMENT AND RESERVOIR W-010, W-020, AND W-030. SITE. AERIAL IMAGERY IS SCHEMATIC AND MAY NOT ALIGN GEOGRAPHICALLY 101 · THRUST BLOCKING PER CITY STANDARD DETAILS W-160, W-165, AND W-175 4 APPROX. ASPHALT OVERLAY LIMITS. ASPHALT 172ND ST NE WITH SITE FEATURES. CONTRACTOR SHALL LOCATE EASEMENT BOUNDARY OVERLAY PER DETAIL. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. · PROVIDE VALVE BOXES PER CITY STANDARD DETAIL W-190. 6 PROVIDE INLET PROTECTION PER WSDOT STANDARD · BOULDERS MAY BE FOUND DURING TRENCH EXCAVATION. ANY PLAN I-40.20-00. HWY 9 BOULDERS/ROCKS LARGER THAN 1.0 CY (MEASURED ON AVERAGE DIMENSIONS)· PROVIDE OVERLAY TRANSITION PER DETAIL AT INTERSECTION WITH 102 CITY OF ARLINGTON ENCOUNTERED DURING EXCAVATION SHALL BE REMOVED AND SHALL BE PAID EXISTING GRAVEL DRIVEWAY OR SHOULDER. PER DIVISION 18 OF THE SPECIFICATIONS. · CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALTERNATING FLAGGER CONTROLLED 1-LANE, 91ST AVE NE WATER MAIN PLAN III · ALL WATER MAIN PIPE AND FITTINGS SHALL BE DUCTILE IRON WITH RESTRAINT 2-WAY TRAFFIC FOR ANY WORK WITHIN THE ACCESS ROAD. MAINTAIN ACCESS 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION PER SPECIFICATION DIVISION 15. TO RESIDENTS FOR THE DURATION OF CONSTRUCTION. NO FULL CLOSURES WILL BE ALLOWED WITHOUT APPROVAL FROM THE CITY. · CITY INSPECTOR MAY DIRECT WATER MAIN ALIGNMENT IN THE FIELD. N O F T O Y G N TI I C L PROFILE NOTES: WATER MAIN PROFILE IS APPROXIMATE BASED ON AR AVAILABLE LIDAR DATA. ADJUST WATER MAIN AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE A MINIMUM 3-FEET AND MAXIMUM OF 5-FEET OF COVER OVER THE WATER MAIN. ANY CROSSING UTILITIES ARE UNKNOWN, REVIEW 500' 500' ADJUST MAIN AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE A MINIMUM OF 12-INCHES OF VERTICAL CLEARANCE TO ALL CROSSING UTILITIES. BY AIR VAC PER PLAN 21-0233 JOB NO.: EXISTING GRADE 490' 490' TEE PER PLAN 640BPS-P-WATER.DWG ARL GATE VALVE CLIENT:FILENAME: REVISIONS PER PLAN 480' 480' Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 DESCRIPTION SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: DATE OMPDWB 11.25° VERTICAL BEND NO. PER PLAN ENGINEER:REVIEWED: SCALE:SHOWN 470' 470' 1355 LF 1300 LF 1200 LF 1100 LF 1000 LF 900 LF 820 LF 0" 1" 2" DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN WATER MAIN PROFILE III BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: W03 5 28 EXISTING 12" DI WATER MAIN CONTRACTOR DESIGNED TEMPORARY THRUST RESTRAINT SHOWN SCHEMATICALLY PROVIDE: (1) - TEMPORARY 12" DI PLUG TAPPED FOR BLOW-OFF PROPOSED BEND PER PROPOSED 12" RJ DI DWG NO. W03 WATER PIPE AND FITTINGS, TYP PROVIDE: (1) - TEMPORARY 12" DI PLUG TAPPED FOR DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY CONTRACTOR DESIGNED TEMPORARY THRUST RESTRAINT SHOWN SCHEMATICALLY POSSIBLE DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY LOCATION, CONTRACTOR TO DEVELOP AND SUBMIT POSSIBLE TEMPORARY BLOW OFF TESTING AND FLUSHING PLAN TO CITY FOR ASSEMBLY LOCATION, CONTRACTOR APPROVAL; HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE TESTING TO TO DEVELOP AND SUBMIT TESTING CONFORM TO REQUIREMENTS OF CITY DESIGN AND FLUSHING PLAN TO THE CITY STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 4-3.32 FOR APPROVAL; HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE TESTING TO CONFORM TO REQUIREMENTS OF CITY STANDARD 4-3.32 TESTING CONFIGURATION TESTING CONFIGURATION CITY OF ARLINGTON 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION PROVIDE: EXISTING 12" DI WATER MAIN (2) - 12" DI RJ COUPLING PROVIDE: N 12" DI PIPE, LTF O F T O REMOVE TEMPORARY PLUG, RESTRAINT AND PROVIDE: Y G N TESTING EQUIPMENT TI I WATER MAIN CONNECTION DETAILS (1) - 12" DI TEE, (FLXFL) WITH THRUST BLOCK C L AR PROVIDE: PROVIDE: REMOVE EXISTING 12" DI 12" DI PIPE, APPROX. (3) - 12" DI GATE VALVE, (FLXRJ) PROPOSED 12" RJ DI WATER MAIN AS NECESSARY LENGTH 2'-10" WATER PIPE AND FITTINGS, TO MAKE CONNECTION PROPOSED BEND PER REVIEW TYP DWG NO. W03 INSTALL PIPE AND FITTINGS PER DWG NO. M01 BY 21-0233 THRUST BLOCK PER 103 PROVIDE: DWG NOS. W01 AND D03 12" DI PIPE, LTF JOB NO.: REMOVE TEMPORARY PLUG, RESTRAINT AND TESTING EQUIPMENT 640BPS-D-WATERCONN.DWG ARL CLIENT:FILENAME:REVISIONS EXISTING ALTITUDE VALVE HOUSE/PUMP STATION BUILDING EDGE Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 DESCRIPTION SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: FINAL CONFIGURATION FINAL CONFIGURATION DATE KMDDWB NO. 200 CONNECTION TO PROPOSED SYSTEM AT EXISTING 201 CONNECTION TO EXISTING SYSTEM ON 91ST AVE NE ENGINEER:REVIEWED: ALTITUDE VALVE HOUSE/PUMP STATION BUILDING SCALE:SHOWN 0" 1" 2" DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: W04 6 28 SIGN TO TEMPORARILY POWER POLE AND T.P.N. 31062000300500 KEY NOTES REMOVE AND REINSTALL METER TO PROTECT IN KLEIN PLACE T.P.N. 31061900400700 EXISTING SnoPUD HARRIS METER VAULT 1 POTHOLE EXISTING WATER MAIN AT PROPOSED SIGN TO TEMPORARILY CONNECTION TO DETERMINE ELEVATION AND FENCE TO PROTECT IN REMOVE AND REINSTALL CONFIGURATION. NOTIFY CITY IF ELEVATIONS ARE PLACE, TYP SIGN TO PROTECT IN DIFFERENT THAN SHOWN ON THIS SHEET. PLACE 2 REMOVE SIGN, POST, AND FOOTING, RETAIN SIGN AND MAIL BOX TO PROTECT POST FOR REINSTALLATION PER DWG NO. D02. IN PLACE 2 BURN ROAD 1 172ND ST NE 3 PROTECT EXISTING SITE FEATURE IN PLACE. 4 7 01 4 SAWCUT AND REPLACE ASPHALT FOR PROPOSED UTILITY INSTALLATION, REPLACE PER DWG NO. D03. 6 APPROX. EXCAVATION LIMITS FOR VAULT AND WATER 5 5 MAIN INSTALLATION. 2 6 PROVIDE TEMPORARY REVERSIBLE CHEVRON SIGNS (W1-8) DURING CONSTRUCTION. 6 3 1 PHOTO 1 2 7 CONSTRUCTION LIMITS. CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE CONDUCTED WITHIN THE CONSTRUCTION LIMITS AND RIGHT OF WAY SHOWN ON THE PLANS. 1 3 8 FENCE, TYP 8 REMOVE THRUST BLOCK ON CAPPED END OF EXISTING 12" DI TEE (SEE BURN ROAD NORTH WATER MAIN 3 EXTENSION PLANS SHEET 22 IN SPECIFICATION APPENDIX D). CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE TEMPORARY 3 THRUST RESTRAINT DURING CONSTRUCTION. SIGN T.P.N. 31063000100100 3 T.P.N. 31062900200300 EMILY PROPERTIES LLC MAIL BOX RENGEN PRV SITE PREPARATION PLAN T.P.N. 31062000300500 N:422526.48 E:1337227.11, PROVIDE: N:422525.04 E:1337227.09, PROVIDE: GENERAL NOTES KLEIN (1) - 12" x 6" DI TEE (RJxFL) WITH (1) - 6" GATE VALVE (FLxRJ) T.P.N. 31061900400700 THRUST BLOCK HARRIS NE VAULT CORNER (2) - 12" DI COUPLING PROVIDE APPROX 2 LF of 6" DI PIPE · EXISTING UTILITIES HAVE NOT BEEN POTHOLED TO IDENTIFY N:422521.76 (2) - 12" DI PIPE, APPROX LENGTH 1'-0" LOCATION, MATERIAL, SIZE OR GEOMETRY. E:1337230.64 N:422523.01 E:1337227.04, PROVIDE: · AERIAL IMAGERY IS FOR SCHEMATIC PURPOSES AND MAY ELEV:494.80 (1) - 6" DI 11-1/4° BEND (RJxRJ) WITH NOT ALIGN GEOGRAPHICALLY WITH SITE FEATURES. CITY OF ARLINGTON THRUST BLOCK 172ND AVE NE · BOULDERS MAY BE FOUND DURING TRENCH EXCAVATION. ANY BOULDERS/ROCKS LARGER THAN 1.0 CY (MEASURED ON BURN ROAD AVERAGE DIMENSIONS) ENCOUNTERED DURING EXCAVATION 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION SEE PRV CONNECTION DETAIL SHALL BE REMOVED AND SHALL BE PAID PER DIVISION 18 OF THIS SHEET FOR WATER MAIN 10 172ND ST NE THE SPECIFICATIONS. PIPE AND FITTINGS · PROVIDE WATER MAIN PIPE AND FITTINGS PER SPECIFICATION N O DIVISION 15. F T O Y G N CONSTRUCTION LIMITS · WATER MAIN TRENCH PER CITY STANDARD DETAIL W-270. TI I C L PRESSURE REDUCING STATION PLAN AR N:422521.33 E:1337232.44, PROVIDE: · THRUST BLOCKING PER CITY STANDARD DETAILS W-160, 9 W-165, AND W-175 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. PROVIDE SAMPLING STATION PER CITY 12 STANDARD DETAIL W-240. SEE DWG NO. · PROVIDE VALVE BOXES PER CITY STANDARD DETAIL W-190. REVIEW M02 FOR CONTINUATION SEE DWG NO. · CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALTERNATING FLAGGER M02 FOR CONTROLLED 1-LANE, 2-WAY TRAFFIC FOR ANY WORK WITHIN BY 9 CONTINUATION BURN RD AND 172ND ST NE. MAINTAIN ACCESS TO RESIDENTS 21-0233 FOR THE DURATION OF CONSTRUCTION. NO FULL CLOSURES 11 WILL BE ALLOWED WITHOUT APPROVAL FROM THE CITY. CONSTRUCTION JOB NO.: LIMITS · FINISHED GRADE SURFACE SHALL BE FLUSH WITH TOP OF SW VAULT CORNER VAULT IN VEGETATED AREAS. GRADE AWAY FROM VAULT TO N:422509.83 MATCH EXISTING WITH MAXIMUM 10% SLOPE. DISTURBED E:1337227.64 GRAVEL AND ASPHALT AREAS SHALL BE REPLACED TO MATCH ELEV:494.80 EXISTING SLOPE AND GRADE. T.P.N. 31062900200300 T.P.N. 31063000100100 · PRV ASSEMBLY TO BE FLUSHED AND CLEANED PER 640BPS-P-WATER.DWG EMILY PROPERTIES LLC RENGEN ARL CORE DRILL AND CONNECT EXISTING 12" TEE PER SPECIFICATION DIVISION 15.05. PRV ASSEMBLY TEST DRAIN PIPE DIRECTLY ASBUILT PRESSURE: 100 PSI. CLIENT:FILENAME: REVISIONS THROUGH VAULT SIDE N:422513.15 E:1337236.29, PROVIDE: PRV SITE PLAN (1) - 12" x 6" DI REDUCER (FLxFL) APPROX. 6' OF 6" PVC @ 2.00% VICINITY MAP N:422512.8 E:1337234.72, PROVIDE: Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 DESCRIPTION KEY NOTES (1) - 6" GATE VALVE (FLxRJ) BURN RD BURN RDPROVIDE ROCK DRAINAGE PIT SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: PER DETAIL ON DWG NO. D03 DATE SEE DWG NO. M02 FOR PRV ASSEMBLY 9 REINSTALL SIGN AND POST PER SNOHOMISH 12 RESTORE SURFACE TO MATCH EXISTING. GRAVEL CONTINUATION AND THRUST BLOCKING KMDDWB COUNTY STANDARD DETAIL 7-180A. RESTORATION SHALL BE 6" MIN CSTC. RESTORE NO. LANDSCAPED AREA PER SWPP BMP T5.13: POST 101 172ND ST NE ENGINEER:REVIEWED: 10 REINSTALL SIGN AND POST PER SNOHOMISH CONSTRUCTION SOIL QUALITY AND DEPTH. PROVIDE PRESSURE REDUCING COUNTY STANDARD DETAIL 7-180B. REFER TO DETAIL FOR ASPHALT RESTORATION. ASSEMBLY PER DWG NO. M02 SCALE:SHOWN 11 REPLACE FOG LINE DISTURBED BY 0" 1" 2" CONSTRUCTION PER SNOHOMISH COUNTY DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN STANDARD DETAIL 7-070. PRV CONNECTION DETAIL BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: W05 7 28 CITY OF ARLINGTONSITE DETAILS I 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION N O F T O Y G N TI I C L A R REVIEW BY 21-0233 JOB NO.: 640BPS-D-DET.DWG ARL CLIENT:FILENAME:REVISIONS Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 DESCRIPTION SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: DATE KMDDWB NO. ENGINEER:REVIEWED: SCALE: SHOWN 0" 1" 2" DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: D01 8 28 CITY OF ARLINGTON SITE DETAILS II 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION N O F T O Y G N TI I C L A R REVIEW BY 21-0233 JOB NO.: 640BPS-D-DET.DWG ARL CLIENT:FILENAME:REVISIONS Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 DESCRIPTION SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: DATE KMDDWB NO. ENGINEER:REVIEWED: SCALE: SHOWN 0" 1" 2" DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: D02 9 28 ASPHALT REPLACEMENT DEPTH TABLE GENERAL NOTES: DWG NO(S). CSTC DEPTH HMA DEPTH 3" CLR, 1. WHERE EXISTING ASPHALT EDGE OR JOINT IS TYPICAL W01, W02, W03 4 INCHES TO MATCH EXISTING TYP 3" CLR, TYP TRENCH WITHIN 2.0' OF SAWCUT LINE, PAVEMENT SHALL BE REMOVED AND REPLACED TO THE EDGE OR JOINT. WITHIN 6-INCHES OF W05* 6 INCHES 2. TACK EDGES PER WSDOT 5-04.3(4) AND SEAL ALL EXISTING ROAD GRADE JOINTS WITH HOT ASPHALT, AR4000 OR EQUAL. 12" DI SPOOL 3.6' MIN #4 @ 12" OC EW COMPACTED DEPTH OF COMMERCIAL HMA CL. 1/2 IN. REINFORCING (TYP) 3.6' MIN EX. ASPHALT PG 58H-22. DEPTH PER TABLE 18" MIN THRUST COLLAR SAWCUT EXISTING ASPHALT FOR 12" DI SPOOL PAVEMENT RESTORATION. TACK EDGES PRIOR TO PAVING AND SEAL CSTC PER WSDOT SPEC 9-03.9(3) COMPACTED TO 95% MAXIMUM DENSITY ELEVATION BLOCK "KEYED" INTO END VIEW ALL ASPHALT JOINTS WITH AR-4000W PER ASTM D1557. DEPTH PER TABLE UNDISTURBED SOIL OR EQUAL IMMEDIATELY AFTER FINISH ROLLING. 12" MIN. NOTES UNDISTURBED NATIVE SOIL SEE NOTE 4 1. MAINTAIN 18" MINIMUM COVER OVER THE TOP OF BLOCK. TRENCH IF APPLICABLE 2. BOTTOM OF BLOCK IS TO BE ON UNDISTURBED SOIL. THRUST COLLAR 3. TRENCH TO BE BACKFILLED AND COMPACTED TO 95% DENSITY ON ALL SIDES OF 12" DI SPOOL BLOCK AND A DISTANCE OF 4' MIN. IN FRONT OF BLOCK TO FULL DEPTH OF BLOCK. 7.5' MIN 4. IF BLOCK CANNOT BE KEYED INTO UNDISTURBED SOIL TO THE SATISFACTION OF DO NOT INSTALL THE CITY, a) THE BLOCK LENGTH SHALL BE EXTENDED TO PROVIDE AN ADEQUATE 100 ASPHALT REPLACEMENT DETAIL 6" MIN, TYP BLOCK ON TOP OF KEY OR b) CDF SHALL BE USED TO FILL BACK TO NATIVE SOIL OR c) THE TRENCH PIPE JOINT, TYP SHALL BE BACKFILLED AND COMPACTED TO 95% DENSITY A MINIMUM DISTANCE OF 15 FEET IN FRONT OF THE BLOCK TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE CITY. 24" MIN 5. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS: TEST PRESSURE: 100 PSI* SOIL BEARING CAPACITY: 4,000 PSF 2' MIN FACTOR OF SAFETY: 1.5 REINFORCING BLOCK BEARING AREA (MIN): 10.2 SF BOTH FACES * THRUST BLOCKS SHALL BE SIZED FOR 100 PSI AND DURING ACTUAL WATER MAIN TESTING, THE RESTRAINED JOINT SYSTEM SHALL PROVIDE THRUST RESTRAINT FOR PLAN VIEW ANYTHING IN EXCESS OF 100 PSI. OVERLAY 2" COMPACTED WIDTH TO MATCH EXISTING DEPTH OF COMMERCIAL ROADWAY ASPHALT LIMITS HMA CL. 1/2 IN. PG 58H-22 103 WATER MAIN REVERSE THRUST BLOCK DETAIL EX. ASPHALT WIDTH VARIES TRENCH PATCH CITY OF ARLINGTON WIDTH VARIES SITE DETAILS III 101 ASPHALT OVERLAY DETAIL 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION N O F T O 6"Ø PVC CLEANOUT ADAPTER AND Y G N TI I CAP SET FLUSH WITH FINISHED C L GRADE AR RESTORE 6" MIN TOPSOIL, ADJUST SURFACE TO DEPTH SO SLOPE MATCHES REVIEW MATCH EXISTING EXISTING GRADE PROVIDE HMA OVERLAY PER BY ROAD CROSS SECTION EXISTING ACP 21-0233 TRENCH PATCH JOB NO.: DRIVEWAY/SHOULDER ROAD SHOULDER VARIES, MATCH EXISTING. 2-FEET FOR DRIVEWAYS. TRENCH BACKFILL PER CITY STANDARD DETAIL W-270 WRAP DRAINAGE PIT WITH UNDERGROUND DRAINAGE GEOTEXTILE, PROVIDE SHOULDER BALLAST CONFORMING TO EXISTING SUBGRADE 640BPS-D-DET.DWG MODERATE SURVIVABILITY, CLASS A ARL SECTION 9-03.9(2) AND COMPACT TO 95% OF THE 6" PVC PIPE, MAXIMUM DENSITY PER SPECIFICATION SECTION CONSTRUCT SAFETY EDGE WITH HOT MIX 6" PVC COUPLER CLIENT:FILENAME: LENGTH TO FIT REVISIONS 2-03.3(14)D. TAPER BALLAST FROM THE TOP EDGE ASPHALT. DEPTH VARIES-MATCH DEPTHS 6" PVC PER PLAN OF THE PROPOSED PAVING AND FEATHER INTO OF HMA OVERLAY AND ANY PRELEVEL 6" PVC TEE. TEE SHALL BE CENTERED THE EXISTING GRAVEL DRIVEWAY. HORIZONTALLY AND VERTICALLY COMPACT EXISTING SUBGRADE BELOW SHOULDER WITHIN BURIED ROCK DRAINAGE PIT. BALLAST TO FIRM AND UNYIELDING CONDITION Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 6" PERFORATED PVC DESCRIPTION PIPE, LENGTH TO FIT SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: 6" PERFORATED PVC PIPE, 102 6" PVC CAP, SET CAP AT SET LEVEL IN DRAINAGE PIT, DATE OVERLAY TRANSITION AT GRAVEL DRIVEWAY OR SHOULDERS BOTTOM OF DRAINAGE PIT LENGTH TO FIT KMDDWB NATIVE MATERIAL, 3'x3'x3' WASHED ROCK NO. PROTECT FROM (3 " - 11 ") DRAINAGE PIT ENGINEER:REVIEWED: 4 2 COMPACTION DURING SCALE:SHOWN CONSTRUCTION. 0" 1" 2" DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN ROCK DRAINAGE PIT DETAIL BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: D03 10 28 GENERAL ABBREVIATIONS REINFORCEMENT SPLICE AND DEVELOPMENT SCHEDULE MINIMUM Ldh, MINIMUM SCOPE ACI - AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE Ld, MINIMUM STRAIGHT LAP SPLICE HOOKED THE NOTES ON THIS SHEET AND THE STANDARD STRUCTURAL DETAILS ARE GENERAL AND APPLY TO AL - ALUMINUM DEVELOPMENT LENGTHS LENGTHS DEVELOPMENT THE ENTIRE PROJECT WHETHER SPECIFICALLY CALLED OUT OR NOT, EXCEPT WHERE THERE ARE ASCE - AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS LENGTHS BAR BOT MIN BOT OTHER TOP MIN TOP OTHER CLASS B SPECIFIC INDICATIONS TO THE CONTRARY ON STRUCTURAL SHEETS. IF THERE ARE QUESTIONS, CHK - CHECKERED THEY SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER AND ANSWERED IN WRITING PRIOR TO CL - CENTERLINE #3 15" 22" 19" 28" 1.3xLd 6" CONSTRUCTION. CLR - CLEAR #4 19" 29" 25" 37" 1.3xLd 9" EA - EACH #5 24" 36" 31" 47" 1.3xLd 12" APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS AND CODES EF - EACH FACE #6 29" 43" 37" 56" 1.3xLd 16" ALL MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP, DESIGN, AND CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORM TO THE DRAWINGS, EW - EACH WAY SPECIFICATIONS, ASCE 7-22 AND THE 2021 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE. FB - FLAT BAR #7 42" 63" 54" 81" 1.3xLd 20" GR - GRADE #8 48" 72" 62" 93" 1.3xLd 24" GENERAL HORZ - HORIZONTAL #9 54" 81" 70" 105" 1.3xLd 29" LINES SHOWN ON DRAWINGS MAY BE ASSOCIATED WITH CAD MODELING AND MAY NOT REPRESENT HDG - HOT-DIPPED GALVANIZED REQUIRED OR ALLOWED JOINTS. SEE DETAILS FOR CLARIFICATION ON REQUIRED AND ALLOWED IBC - INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE #10 61" 91" 79" 118" 1.3xLd 35" JOINTS. LB - POUND #11 67" 101" 87" 131" 1.3xLd 41" LLV - LONG LEG VERTICAL REFERENCE: ACI 318-19 CHAPTER 25 APPLICABLE SHOP DRAWINGS AND STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS SHALL BE STAMPED BY A MPH - MILES PER HOUR 1.) REINFORCEMENT FY = 60 KSI, CONCRETE F'C = 4000 PSI PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER IN WASHINGTON STATE. O.C. - ON CENTER 2.) REINFORCEMENT UNCOATED, NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE PL - PLATE 3.) "MIN" IF: CLEAR SPACING OF BARS OR WIRES BEING DEVELOPED OR LAP SPLICED THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS OF EXISTING PJF - PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER NOT LESS THAN BAR DIA., CLEAR COVER AT LEAST BAR DIA., AND CONSTRUCTION AS REQUIRED TO COORDINATE NEW CONSTRUCTION. SUBMIT REQUIRED CHANGES PSF - POUNDS PER SQ FT STIRRUPS OR TIES THROUGHOUT Ld NOT LESS THAN CODE MIN FOR APPROVAL. RB - ROUND BAR 4.) "OTHER" IF: DOES NOT MEET REQUIREMENTS FOR MIN DEVELOPMENT LENGTH RST - REINFORCING STEEL 5.) "BOT" IF: LESS THAN 12" FRESH CONCRETE PLACED BELOW HORZ. REINFORCEMENT SAFETY SST - STAINLESS STEEL 6.) "TOP" IF: MORE THAN 12" FRESH CONCRETE PLACED BELOW HORZ. REINFORCEMENT SAFETY AND STRUCTURAL STABILITY DURING CONSTRUCTION ARE THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF T&B - TOP AND BOTTOM 7.) CONTACT ENGINEER FOR ADJUSTED PARAMETERS THE CONTRACTOR. STRUCTURES HAVE BEEN DESIGNED TO RESIST THE DESIGN LOADS ONLY AS VERT - VERTICAL COMPLETED STRUCTURE. CONCRETE ANCHORS REINFORCED CONCRETE ANCHOR BOLTS NOT SPECIFIED BY ENGINEER SHALL BE DESIGNED AND CERTIFIED BY A OPENINGS REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER RETAINED BY THE CONTRACTOR, IN ACCORDANCE OPENINGS FOR PIPES, DUCTS, CONDUITS, ETC. ARE NOT ALL SHOWN ON THE STRUCTURAL DESIGN STANDARDS AND REFERENCES: WITH APPLICABLE PROJECT AND CODE REQUIREMENTS. SUBMIT AS A SHOP DRAWING FOR DRAWINGS. COORDINATE AND PROVIDE OPENINGS AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE ALL WORK GENERAL CONCRETE STRUCTURES: ACI 318-19 REVIEW AND APPROVAL BY THE ENGINEER. COORDINATE LOCATION, SIZE AND SHOWN OR SPECIFIED IN TECH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND OTHERWISE REQUIRED FOR CONCRETE LIQUID HOLDING STRUCTURES: ACI 350-06 AND ACI 350.3-06 EMBEDMENT PRIOR TO CASTING CONCRETE. FURNISHING OF A FUNCTIONALLY COMPLETE PROJECT. REINFORCE AROUND OPENINGS PER STANDARD STRUCTURAL DETAILS UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN. CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS: ALL CAST IN PLACE AND POST-INSTALLED ANCHOR INDICATED IN THE STRUCTURAL SPEC 3.31 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE: F'C = 4500 PSI DOCUMENTS SHALL COMPLY WITH CHAPTER 17 OF ACI 318 AND CHAPTER 19 OF ALL THE STANDARD DETAILS SPEC 3.31.32 HYDRAULIC CONCRETE: F'C = 4500 PSI IBC. ALL EXPANSION AND ADHESIVE ANCHORS SHALL HAVE THE ICC REPORT SHOWING THE STANDARD DETAILS DEPICT TYPICAL DETAILING TO BE USED ON THIS PROJECT. IF EXISTING CONCRETE: F'C = 4000 PSI (JULY 1993 AS-BUILTS) EQUIVALENT LOAD CAPACITY. SUBMIT AND INSTALL PER THE ICC EVALUATION REPORT CONDITIONS ARE NOT EXPLICITLY SHOWN ON THE DRAWING THEY SHALL BE MADE SIMILAR TO REINFORCING STEEL: FY = 60 KSI UNLESS NOTED THE STANDARD DETAILS. OBTAIN APPROVAL OF ENGINEER IN WRITING FOR SIMILAR CONDITIONS OTHERWISE CONCRETE ANCHORS SHALL BE EITHER HILTI HIT-RE 500-V3 INJECTABLE MORTAR OR PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. SIMPSON STRONG-TIE SET-XP ANCHORING ADHESIVE ADHESIVE ANCHORS AS SPECIFIED. CONCRETE COVER PROTECTION UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED: WHERE SIZE IS CALLED OUT ON THE DRAWINGS, PROVIDE MINIMUM EMBEDMENT DEPTHS FOOTINGS AND OTHER UNIFORMED SURFACES CAST DESIGN CRITERIA AS SHOWN ON THE FOLLOWING TABLES. PROVIDE MINIMUM EDGE DISTANCES AND AGAINST AND PERMANENTLY EXPOSED TO EARTH. . . . . . . . . . . .. 3" SPACING AS SHOWN ON THE FOLLOWING TABLES UNLESS SPECIFICALLY DETAILED GENERAL: OTHERWISE. SPECIAL INSPECTION REQUIRED. FORMED SURFACES EXPOSED TO EARTH (WALLS BELOW CODE IBC 2021 GRADE), WATER OR WEATHER (#6 BARS OR LARGER) . . . . . . . . . . 2" LATITUDE, LONGITUDE: 48.150523, -122.106572 INSTALL ANCHORS IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. OCCUPANCY/USE U (UTILITY/MISC.) COLUMN TIES OR SPIRALS AND BEAM STIRRUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2" CONSTRUCTION TYPE V-B NOTIFY OWNER 48 HOURS IN ADVANCE OF INSTALLATION OF ALL ANCHORS. FLOOR AREA 572 SF CITY OF ARLINGTON SLABS AND INTERIOR FACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2" WHERE SIZE IS NOT CALLED OUT, ANCHOR SHALL BE SELECTED BASED ON DESIGN LOADS. DEAD LOADS: IF THE MINIMUM EDGE DISTANCE AND/OR MINIMUM SPACING CAN NOT BE ACHIEVED, SEE DRAWINGS FOR EXCEPTIONS GENERAL CONCRETE 150 PCF REFER TO PRODUCT INFORMATION FOR REDUCTION IN ALLOWABLE LOADS. 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION GENERAL WOOD: 26 PCF (HEM-FIR #2) REINFORCING STEEL REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE DETAILED (INCLUDING HOOKS AND BENDS) IN ACCORDANCE WITH ACI LIVE LOADS: CONCRETE ANCHORS 315-99 AND 318-14. LAP ALL REINFORCEMENTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE "REINFORCING SPLICE AND N SLAB ON GRADE 125 PSF HILTI HIT-RE 500-V3 AND SIMPSON STRONG-TIE SET-XP O STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES F DEVELOPMENT LENGTH SCHEDULE" - SEE THIS SHEET. PROVIDE CORNER BARS AT ALL WALL T O ROOF LIVE LOAD 20 PSF INTERSECTIONS PER STRUCTURAL DETAILS. LAP ADJACENT MATS OF WELDED WIRE FABRIC A DIA. OF ROD MIN. EDGE MIN. MIN. ANCHOR ALLOWABLE LOAD BASED ON Y NG TI I MINIMUM OF 8" AT SIDES AND ENDS. (INCHES) OR DISTANCE EMBEDMENT SPACING BOND STRENGTH (POUNDS) C L SNOW LOAD DATA: AR REBAR SIZE NO. (INCHES) (INCHES) (INCHES) GROUND SNOW LOAD, pg: 25 PSF (PER SEAW WABO WHITE PAPER) TENSION SHEAR ABSOLUTELY NO WELDING OF REINFORCING BARS OR TORCHING TO BEND REINFORCING BARS FACTORED FLAT ROOF SNOW LOAD, pf: 30 PSF SHALL BE ALLOWED WITHOUT SPECIFIC APPROVAL FROM THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. 1/2 2-1/2 2-3/4 2-1/2 1,027 2,210 SNOW EXPOSURE FACTOR, Ce: 1.0 SNOW IMPORTANCE FACTOR, Is: 1.20 5/8 3-1/8 3-1/8 3-1/8 1,312 2,827 REVIEW NO BARS PARTIALLY EMBEDDED IN HARDENED CONCRETE SHALL BE FIELD BENT UNLESS THERMAL FACTOR, Ct: 1.0 3/4 3-3/4 3-1/2 3-3/4 1,556 3,351 SPECIFICALLY DETAILED OR APPROVED BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. SLOPE FACTOR, Cs: 1.0 7/8 4-3/8 3-1/2 4-3/8 1,556 3,351 BY EMBEDDED ITEMS AND PENETRATIONS 21-0233 #4 2-1/2 4-1/2 2-1/2 1,520 3,618 OTHER LOADS: REFER TO OTHER DISCIPLINE DRAWINGS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION FOR EMBEDDED ITEMS WOOD SHEAR WALL: 12 PSF AND PENETRATIONS NOT SHOWN ON STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. AS REQUIRED TO #5 3-1/8 5-5/8 3-1/8 1,775 5,494 JOB NO.: WOODEN TRUSS ROOF: 12.5 PSF ACCOMMODATE ALL WORK SHOWN OR SPECIFIED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND #6 3-3/4 6-3/4 3-3/4 2,225 7,570 OTHERWISE REQUIRED FOR THE FURNISHING OF A FUNCTIONALLY COMPLETE PROJECT #7 4-3/8 7-7/8 4-3/8 2,440 9,428 WIND DESIGN DATA: REINFORCE AROUND OPENINGS PER STANDARD STRUCTURAL DETAILS UNLESS BASIC WIND SPEED, V 109 MPH OTHERWISE SHOWN. #8 5 9 5 4,520 11,507 RISK CATEGORY IV WIND EXPOSURE B JOINTS APPLICABLE INTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENT ±0.18 CONTINUOUS WATERSTOP SHALL BE INSTALLED IN JOINTS SUBJECT TO STATIC WATER WOOD 640BPS-D-S01.DWG ARL PRESSURE. TRUSSES PER TRUSS MANUFACTURER EARTHQUAKE DESIGN DATA: RISK CATEGORY IV CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT CONCRETE PLACEMENT PLAN IDENTIFYING JOINT TYPES, FRAMING LUMBER CLIENT:FILENAME:REVISIONS A. STUDS: HEM FIR #2 SEISMIC IMPORTANCE FACTOR, Ie 1.5 JOINT LOCATIONS AND CONCRETE PLACEMENT SEQUENCE. B. HEADERS: HEM FIR #2 MAPPED SPECTRAL RESPONSE PARAMETERS Sms = 1.36, Sm1 = 0.77 FASTENERS IN TREATED LUMBER: HOT-DIPPED GALVANIZED SITE CLASS D - DEFAULT CHAMFERS DESIGN SPECTRAL RESPONSE PARAMETERS Sds = 0.91, Sd1 = 0.51 PROVIDE 3/4" CHAMFERS AT ALL EXPOSED EDGES (AND 1/2" CHAMFERS AT JOINTS AS Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 DESCRIPTION SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY D SHOWN) NOT ALL CHAMFERS MAY BE SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. BASIC SEISMIC FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM WOOD FRAMED SHEAR WALL SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: DESIGN BASE SHEAR 4013 LBS DATE SEISMIC RESPONSE COEFFICIENT, Cs 0.2 RESPONSE MODIFICATION FACTOR, R 7 (LIGHT FRAMED WOOD WALLS ) DMFDWB NO. ENGINEER:REVIEWED: SCALE:SHOWN 0" 1" 2" DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: S01 11 28 STUDS IN END WALLS TO BE REMOVED FOR LOUVERS. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR TEMPORARY WALL SUPPORT REMOVE EXISTING REMOVE EXISTING EXTERIOR TRIM PROTECT EXISTING ROOF SHEATHING ALONG ON TWO SOUTHEAST CORNERS STRUCTURE IN PLACE SOUTHEASTERN REMOVE EXISTING NON-LOAD BEARING WALL DOOR, TYP. OF 2 EXISTING CENTRAL WALL TO BE REMOVE EXISTING T-111 SIDING REMOVE EXISTING WALL FRAMING REMOVED FROM ENTIRE SOUTHEAST WALL AS NECESSARY (APPROX. FRAMING REMOVAL SHOWN) TO INSTALL NEW REMOVE EXISTING TYVEK AND COMMERCIAL AND ENTRY DOOR SHEATHING AS NECESSARY TO SHOWN ON DWG NO. S03 EXISTING FRAMING IN INSTALL PROPOSED DOOR OPENING. SOUTHEAST WALL TO REMOVE EXISTING SILL PLATE AS BE REMOVED AS NECESSARY TO INSTALL NEW NEEDED FOR DOOR REMOVE EXISTING STEEL COMMERCIAL AND ENTRY DOOR INSTALLATION DOOR, TYP. OF 2 REMOVE INTERIOR SHOWN ON DWG NO. S03 2 SHEATHING ON SOUTHEAST WALL PROTECT EXISTING REMOVE AND REPLACE WHOLE FOUNDATION IN PLACE. SHEET OF T-111 SIDING WHERE WATER DAMAGE IS PRESENT STUDS IN END WALLS TO BE REMOVED FOR LOUVERS. 3 SOUTH EAST ELEVATION CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR TEMPORARY WALL SUPPORT 1 BUILDING PHOTO 1 EXISTING DOOR SWING PLAN VIEW NOTE: CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL TEMPORARY SUPPORT AND BRACING AS NEEDED DURING BUILDING RECONFIGURATION REMOVE EXISTING INTERIOR WALL SHEATHING AND FRAMING. REFER TO THE ELECTRICAL PLANS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT REMOVAL REQUIREMENTS. DO NOT REMOVE EXISTING CITY OF ARLINGTON INTERIOR SHEATHING WHERE POSSIBLE TEMPORARILY REMOVE FIRE PROTECT EXTERIOR WALLS IN PLACE, EXTINGUISHER. REINSTALL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED IN THESE PLANS REUSING THE EXISTING 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION EXISTING MECHANICAL BRACKETS FOLLOWING EQUIPMENT, PROTECT CONSTRUCTION. IN PLACE EXISTING INTERIOR WALL FRAMING AND SHEATHING TO BE REMOVED N O F (SHEATHING NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY) T STRUCTURAL DEMOLITION PLAN O Y G N TI I C L AR KEEP TOP SILL PLATE INTACT OVER ALL EXTERIOR WALLS 2 BUILDING PHOTO REVIEW BY 21-0233 REMOVE EXISTING SILL PLATES AS NEEDED REFER TO THE ELECTRICAL PLANS FOR JOB NO.: FOR GARAGE DOOR INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT REMOVAL REQUIREMENTS. REMOVE EXISTING INTERIOR WALL 640BPS-D-STR_DEMO.DWG SHEATHING AND FRAMING. ARL EXISTING DOOR SWING CLIENT:FILENAME:REVISIONS REMOVE STUDS AS NEEDED FOR DOOR INSTALLATION AND FRAMING, TYP. PROTECT EXISTING FOOTING AND FLOOR IN PLACE Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 DESCRIPTION SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: DATE DMFDWB OBLIQUE VIEW NO. ENGINEER:REVIEWED: SCALE:SHOWN 0" 1" 2" DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN 3 BUILDING PHOTO BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: S02 12 28 INSTALL SPLASH BLOCK CONNECT ROOF OVERHANG DOWNSPOUT TO 4" A UNDER DOWNSPOT SCHEDULE 40 PVC PERFORATED PIPE. PERFORATIONS PROPOSED CONCRETE PAD, SEE E07 FOR REINFORCING SHOULD BE SET AT SPRINGLINE. JOINTS SHALL BE SSW. SLOPE 1% TO DRAIN TO DAYLIGHT. PROPOSED GENERATOR, 5'-10" 7'-4" SEE ELECTRICAL PLAN LOUVER FRAMING, 604 TYP. POSTS FOR ELECTRICAL SHELTER 0.5% SEPARATE GENERATOR AND ELECTRICAL SHELTER PROPOSED MECHANICAL, SEE MECHANICAL SHEETS INSTALL NEW SLAB WITH 1/4" PJF, TYP. FOR DETAILS INTERIOR SHEATHING 10'-5" WHERE UNSHEATHED. MATCH EXISTING 1/2" SHEATHING DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE BUILDING OBLIQUE 20'-5" NOTES: INCLUDE PANIC HARDWARE ON INSIDE OF MAN DOOR DOOR WIDTH TRUSS HOLD DOWN DOOR WIDTH IMPROVEMENTS, TYP. EACH END OF TRUSS 606 DOOR DOOR HEIGHT 0.5% HEIGHT EXISTING BUILDING ROOF OUTLINE 0.5% 3'-0", DOOR JAMB EACH SIDE OF 602 DOOR, TYP. TYP APPROX. 3'-3" PIPE SIZE AND LOCATION (3) BOLLARD TYPE 2 PER WSDOT STANDARD PER MECHANICAL B CONTROL DENSITY FILL PLAN H-60.20-01 WITH UNDER FOUNDATION ROUND FOOTING CORE SIZE EQUAL TO PIPE O.D. 3'-11" 3'-0" 3'-1" 12'-0" 4'-0" 5'-6" 4'-0" 4'-0" ± 6", FILL SPACE AROUND PIPE INCLUDE FLEXIBLE JOINT AFTER CONTROL WITH NON-SHRINK GROUT CITY OF ARLINGTON DENSITY FILL, OUTSIDE OF BUILDING PROPOSED BUILDING PLAN EXISTING FOUNDATION FOOTPRINT AS PER MECHANICAL IMPROVEMENTS AND SLAB 607 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION GABLE END DETAIL 605 601 EXTERIOR WALL GARAGE DOOR HEADER N PROPOSED BPS STRUCTURAL EXISTING 6" CRUSED O F T PUMP SKID PER O SURFACING PER AS-BUILTS Y G N 603 EXTERIOR MAN MECHANICAL INSTALL GUTTER ON NORTH-EAST SIDE OF TI I C L DOOR HEADER BUILDING, DRAIN TO NORTH. INSTALL SPLASH AR BLOCK TO DRAIN TO BACK OF SITE REVIEW SHELTER OVER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT B CONTROL DENSITY FILL MIN BY NATIVE SOIL 6" BELOW BOTTOM OF PIPE 21-0233 JOB NO.: BOLLARD TYPE 2 PER PIPE PENETRATION SECTION A WSDOT STANDARD PLAN H-60.20-01 WITH ROUND FOOTING PIPE SIZE AND LOCATION FILL SPACE AROUND PER MECHANICAL PIPE WITH NON-SHRINK EXISTING FOUNDATION 640BPS-D-S01.DWG ARL 5'-0", FOR PAD REINFORCING, CORE SIZE EQUAL TO GROUT, TYP. TYP REFER TO E07 PIPE O.D. ± 6" CLIENT:FILENAME:REVISIONS MIN 6" THICK LAYER OF CSBC Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 DESCRIPTION SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: DATE DMFSAE NO. EXISTING FOUNDATION ENGINEER:REVIEWED: CONTROL DENSITY FILL MIN 6" CONTROL DENSITY FILL SCALE:SHOWN NATIVE SOIL NATIVE SOIL BELOW BOTTOM OF PIPE UNDER FOUNDATION 0" 1" 2" PIPE PENETRATION SECTION B DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN PROPOSED BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: S03 13 28 ELECTRICAL SHELTER OBLIQUE C L 4'-6" 10" 2X6 PRESSURE TREATED 5/16" APA RATED SHEATHING W/ 6d LEDGER AT BUILDING @ 6" O.C. TYP. ROOFING MATERIAL INTERFACE. ADD FLASHING TO MATCH MATERIAL FOR ROOF OF AT TOP EDGE OF ROOF MAIN STRUCTURE 2X6 PRESSURE TREATED NAILER WITH CONCEALED FASTENER METAL TRIM PROPOSED GENERATOR, TO MATCH EXISTING ROOF SEE ELECTRICAL GUTTER, DRAIN TO NORTH OF SITE. SEE S03 12 2 PRESSURE TREATED 2X4 DFL RAFTER @ CONNECT 2X4 RAFTER TO LEDGER 24" O.C. CONNECTORS PER ELEVATION. WITH SIMPSON SLOPED HANGER OR EQUAL CITY OF ARLINGTON PROPOSED PRESSURE TREATED DBL 2X6 DFL BEAM, CONNECT TO POSTS WITH SIMPSON STRONG FINISH CEILING WITH APA TIE GALVANIZED CC COLUMN CAP 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION RATED SHEATHING N ELECTRICAL SHELTER DETAIL O F T O Y G N TI I CONNECT 2X4 RAFTER TO C L AR DBL 2X6 BEAM WITH SIMPSON STRONG TIE A34 REVIEW 7'-0" BY 21-0233 JOB NO.: CONNECT WOODEN POST TO CONCRETE SLAB WITH SIMPSON ABA ADJUSTABLE POST TIE BASE PROPOSED PRESSURE TREATED 4X4 DFL COLUMN, CONNECTORS PER ELEVATION VIEW, TYP. 640BPS-D-S01.DWG ARL CLIENT:FILENAME:REVISIONS 8" 8" Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 DESCRIPTION 8" 8'-8" 8" SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: C DATE L CL DMFSAE NO. MIN 6" OF CSBC BELOW SLABS ENGINEER:REVIEWED: SCALE:SHOWN 0" 1" 2" DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN ELECTRICAL SHELTER ELEVATION NATIVE SOIL ELECTRICAL SHELTER SIDE BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: S04 14 28 603 PROPOSED NOTE: GARAGE DOOR ASSEMBLY NOT BATT INSULATION LOUVER HEADER SHOWN. ADDITIONAL BLOCKING MAY BE REQUIRED PER THE MANUFACTURER. PROPOSED HEM-FIR #2 OR PROPOSED 2X6 VERIFY AND ADD BLOCKING AS NEEDED BETTER (3) 2x8 HEADER W/ BATT INSULATION JACK STUD PRIOR TO DOOR INSTALLATION. 1 " SHEATHING BETWEEN BATT INSULATION 2 (3) 2x8 HEADER W/ 1 " 2 PROPOSED 2X6 SHEATHING BETWEEN LAP SIDING OVER KING STUD LAP SIDING OVER SHEATHING (2) 2x6 STUDS EA PLYWOOD SIDING OVER SHEATHING SHEATHING APA RATED SHEATHING PER SIDE OF DOOR SHEATHING DETAIL 605 FLASHING INTERIOR TRIM EXISTING STUDS INTERIOR TRIM 2x4 TRIM W/ FLASHING 1x4 CEDAR TRIM W/ FLASHING 1x4 CEDAR TRIM 1 "-1 " REVEAL 8 4 1 "-1 " REVEAL 8 4 INTERIOR EXTERIOR PROPOSED 36" X 36" 1 "-1 " INTERIOR EXTERIOR INTERIOR 8 4 EXTERIOR 1 1 18"-14" REVEAL LOUVER REVEAL 8"- 4" 1x CEDAR TRIM, TYP FULL PERIMETER REVEAL DOOR FRAME DOOR FRAME PROPOSED 2X6 SILL GARAGE DOOR HEADER 601 EXTERIOR DOOR JAMB PLAN VIEW 602 EXTERIOR DOOR HEADER 603 LOUVER FRAMING DETAIL 604 EXISTING FIBERGLASS SHINGLES EXISTING 5/8" CDX ROOF SHEATHING VENTILATION BAFFLE. INSTALL TO KEEP INSULATION AWAY FROM EAVE VENTS IF NOT ALREADY INSTALLED EXISTING TRUSS @ 24" O.C. R-49 KRAFT PAPER FACED BATT INSULATION ON ALL CEILING SURFACES, INSTALL WITH KRAFT FACED SIDE OF INSULATION FACING CITY OF ARLINGTON INSTALL SIMPSON SDWC15600 6" TRUSS SCREW AT EACH INTERIOR OF BUILDING. REPLACE EXISTING TRUSS, ATTACH AT BOTH ENDS. IF EXISTING SHEATHING IS INSULATION WHERE IT EXISTS. PRESENT, DRILL PILOT HOLE THROUGH SHEATHING SO SCREW IS FLUSH WITH SILL PLATE FINISH CEILING TO MATCH EXISTING 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATIONSTRUCTURAL DETAILS EXISTING DOUBLE 2x6 TOP PLATE, CONTINUOUS. INSTALL R-21 BATT INSULATION WHERE ADD 1/2" APA RATED SHEATHING PER N REMOVED OR NOT EXISTING O F DETAIL 605 WHERE NOT EXISTING T O Y G N TI I 1 C L 2" APA RATED SHEATHING AR PAINTED WHITE WITH 6d NAILS @ WALL/TRUSS CONNECTIONS 6" O.C. EDGES AND 24" O.C. FIELD. LAP SIDING EQUAL TO HARDIEPLANK OVER 606 EXISTING SHEATHING, TYP. REPLACE SIDING PER DEMO ON SHEET S02 REVIEW EXISTING 2X FULL-DEPTH BY EXTERIOR BREATHABLE VAPOR VENTED BLOCKING 21-0233 MATCH BARRIER OVER SHEATHING EXISTING ROOFING SHEATHING EXISTING JOB NO.: WALL HEIGHT, KEEP EXISTING 1/2" CDX APPROX. 10'-0" SHEATHING PROPOSED R-21 KRAFT PAPER-FACED BATT INSULATION. INCLUDE WHERE UN-INSULATED AND UNSHEATHED. EXISTING 18" 640BPS-D-STR_DET.DWG OVERHANG, ARL EXISTING 2x6 EXTERIOR STUDS @ 16" O.C. EXISTING TRUSS @ 24" O.C. CLIENT:FILENAME:REVISIONS ADD 1/2" ANCHOR ON SILL PLATE EVERY 48" EXISTING FRAMED O.C. TO MAKE 24" O.C. SPACING IN R-49 KRAFT PAPER FACED BATT INSULATION GABLE END WALL CONJUNCTION WITH EXISTING ANCHORS. ON ALL CEILING SURFACES, INSTALL WITH EMBED MIN 6" INTO CONCRETE AND SECURE KRAFT FACED SIDE OF INSULATION FACING PROPOSED SIMPSON A34 @ 32" O.C. MIN TO WITH HILTI HIT-RE 500 V3 EPOXY INTERIOR OF BUILDING. REPLACE EXISTING SECURE GABLE END TO TOP PLATE, TYP. Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 DESCRIPTION INSULATION WHERE IT EXISTS. EXISTING SILL SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: PLATE PROPOSED SIDING OVER DATE FINISH CEILING TO MATCH SHEATHING PER DETAIL 605 EXISTING WHERE UNFINISHED DMFSAE EXISTING CONCRETE NO. ENGINEER:REVIEWED: THICKENED EDGE FOOTING SCALE:SHOWN 0" 1" 2" EXTERIOR WOOD-FRAMED WALL 605 GABLE END SECTION 607 DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: S05 15 28 PROPOSED ROLL UP PROPOSED DOOR PER DOOR PER DWG NO. S03 DWG NO. S03 PROVIDE 12"X6" DI REDUCER, NOTE: BUILDING WALLS, ROOF, AND (FLXFL) FOUNDATION, AND THRUST BLOCKING NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY. PROVIDE 6" DI 90° BEND, (FLXFL) SEE DWG NO. W01 FOR INSTALL 6" DI SPOOL, LENGTH 1'-0" CONTINUATION (FLXFL), PROVIDED BY CITY, PROVIDE PIPE SUPPORTS. LOCATIONS SHOWN 300 INSTALLED UNDER THIS CONTRACT ARE CONCEPTUAL. CONTRACTOR TO ADJUST AND ADD PIPE SUPPORTS AS NECESSARY TO THRUST BLOCKING PER INSTALL 6" METER, (FLXFL), 103 FULLY SUPPORT PIPING, TYP DWG NOS. W01 AND D03 PROVIDED BY CITY, INSTALLED UNDER THIS CONTRACT PROVIDE 6" DI SPOOL, APPROX. LENGTH 2'-6" (FLXPE) PROVIDE 6" DI 90° BEND, (FLXFL) PROVIDE 6" DI SPOOL, APPROX. LENGTH 11 1 " (FLXPE) 4 PROVIDE 6" DI REFER TO DWG NO. M03 LOCKING FCA, FOR LOUVER, DAMPER, AND TYP OF 2 VENTILATOR SCHEDULE, TYP V01 PROVIDE 6" DI PROVIDE 6" DI GATE VALVE, LOCKING FCA (FLXFL). INSTALL GATE PUMP VALVE ON EXISTING 16"X6" SKID,PROVIDED BY CROSS CITY, INSTALLED PIPE AND FITTINGS A UNDER THIS PER SECTION PROVIDE 6" DI SPOOL, APPROX. CONTRACT LENGTH 3'-5 1 " (FLXPE) 2 PROVIDE 6" DI 90° BEND, (FLXFL) PROVIDE 6" DI 90° PRESSURE A BEND, TYP OF 2 PROVIDE 6" DI SPOOL, RELIEF LINE PIPE PENETRATION AND CDF LENGTH 2'-0" (FLXFL) PER SECTION ENCASEMENT PER DETAILS A B A REFER TO DWG NO.W01 FOR CONTINUATION CITY OF ARLINGTON 01 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION PUMP STATION OBLIQUE LOOKING SOUTH WEST REFER TO DWG NO. S03 FOR LOUVER PLACEMENT N O F T O Y G N TI I MECHANICAL PLAN - PUMP STATION MECHANICAL LEGEND C L AR PUMP STATION PLAN 640 ZONE SUCTION LINE REVIEW 640 ZONE DISCHARGE LINE PROVIDE PIPE SUPPORTS. LOCATIONS ARE 300 BY CONCEPTUAL, CONTRACTOR TO ADJUST 12-INCH WATER MAIN 21-0233 AND ADD PIPE SUPPORTS AS NECESSARY TO FULLY SUPPORT PIPING. PRV LINE JOB NO.: PROVIDE 6" DI SPOOL, LENGTH 2'-9" (FLXPE) LOUVER/DAMPER/EXHAUST PROVIDE 3" CLA-VAL MODEL 58-01 VALVE PER SPECIFICATION PROVIDE 6" DI LOCKING FCA PROVIDE 3" DI SPOOL, APPROX. PROVIDED BY CITY 1 DIVISION 15 LENGTH 1'-4 4" (FLXPE) PROVIDE 6" DI 11.25° BEND, PUMP SKID, PROVIDED BY CITY (FLXFL), TYP OF 2 PROVIDE 3" DI LOCKING FCA PROVIDE 3" DI GATE VALVE, (FLXFL), TYP OF 2 REMOVE EXISTING 6" BLIND 640BPS-D-MECH01.DWG EXISTING ALTITUDE VALVE LINE ARL FLANGE TO PROTECT IN PLACE CLIENT:FILENAME:REVISIONS 1'-7" GENERAL NOTES PER PUMP SUPPLIER. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 DESCRIPTION · INSTALL PUMP SKID PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATION. SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: · CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY CENTERLINE ELEVATION OF EXISTING 6" DATE 3'-0" PER FLANGE AS SHOWN IN PHOTO 1 AND FIELD ADJUST PUMP SKID ASBUILTS LOCATION TO INSTALL PROPOSED 640 ZONE SUCTION LINE AS SHOWN. KMDDWB IF EXISTING 6" FLANGE AND PROPOSED PUMP SKID CENTERLINES VARY SUCH THAT SHOWN CONFIGURATION IS NOT ACHIEVABLE, CONTACT NO. ENGINEER:REVIEWED: ENGINEER TO DETERMINE ALTERNATE CONFIGURATION. SCALE:SHOWN · CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE PUMP STATION POTABLE WATER CONNECTION PLAN TO CITY OF ARLINGTON THREE DAYS (MIN) PRIOR 0" 1" 2" DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN A SUCTION CONNECTION SECTION 01 SITE PHOTO TO CONNECTING TO EXISTING 16” X16” X6” CROSS BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: M01 16 28 PROVIDE 1" GS TEE, INNER HATCH LIMITS PROVIDE 1" PRV PER (THDXTHD) TYP OF 2 NOTE: VAULT NOT SPECIFICATION DIVISION 15 PROVIDE 1" SS STRAINER, PROVIDE 6" DI GATE VALVE, PROVIDE 6" DI SHOWN FOR CLARITY. (THDXTHD) (FLXFL), TYP OF 2 DISMANTLING JOINT PROVIDE 6"X1" DI PROVIDE 1" SS BALL VALVE, BLIND THREADED (THDXTHD), TYP OF 3 PROVIDE 1" GS PIPE, LTF FLANGE, TYP OF 2 (THDXTHD) TYP PROVIDE 1" GS 90° BEND, (THDXTHD) TYP OF 2 PROVIDE 6"X6" DI TEE, (FLXFL) TYP OF 2 PROVIDE 6" LOCKING FCA, TYP OF 2 PROVIDE 6" DI SPOOL, (FLXPE), LENGTH APPROX. 3'-8". SEE DWG NO. W05 FOR CONTINUATION PROVIDE PRESSURE GAUGE 303 PER DETAIL, TYP OF 2 8" MIN DRAIN PIPE PER DWG NO. PROVIDE INTERIOR LINK SEAL 302 W05 AND GROUT PER DETAIL, TYP OF 4 INSTALL SAMPLING STATION PER CITY 5'-8" STANDARD DETAIL W-240. SEE DWG PROVIDE 6" CLA-VAL MODEL 93-01 NO. W05 FOR CONTINUATION VALVE PER SPECIFICATION DIVISION 15 PROVIDE FRP LADDER, STRONGWELL OR PROVIDE 6" BASKET STRAINER PER APPROVED EQUAL, MOUNTED TO VAULT WALL SPECIFICATION DIVISION 15 PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS PROVIDE 6" DI SPOOL, (FLXPE), C L LENGTH APPROX. 4'-0". SEE DWG NO. A W05 FOR CONTINUATION 4" PRESSURE REDUCING STATION OBLIQUE THRUST BLOCK. SEE 8" 1'-6" NOTE: VAULT LID NOT SECTION B THIS SHEET B SHOWN FOR CLARITY. 11'-2" 3'-0" PRESSURE REDUCING STATION PLAN PROVIDE OLDCASTLE 5106-1-LA VAULT WITH ADJUSTABLE TOP SLAB (INTERIOR DIMENSIONS CITY OF ARLINGTON 5'-0"X10'-6") OR APPROVED EQUAL WITH INTEGRAL FINISHED GRADE SURFACE ELEV. 494.60'. REFER TO DWG PROVIDE INTEGRAL H-20 FOOTING SIZED FOR BUOYANCY CONTROL. SEE NO. W05 FOR VAULT LOCATION RATED HATCH. LW PRODUCTS BUOYANCY NOTES THIS SHEET FOR CONDITIONAL 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION AND GRADING NOTES. HD-3 E (48"X96") OR APPROVED ASSUMPTIONS. REFER TO DWG NO. M02 FOR EQUAL ADDITIONAL VAULT INSTALLATION NOTES. MECHANICAL PLAN - PRV N O SURFACE PER PLAN F T O Y G N SELECT BORROW PER TI I C L WSDOT STD SPEC AR 9-03.12(2) PRV VAULT BUOYANCY NOTES: 1. ASSUME GROUND WATER DEPTH OF 1' TO SIZE VAULT FOOTING TO PREVENT BUOYANT CONDITION. ACCESS HATCH REVIEW 2. BUOYANCY CALCULATIONS MUST ASSUME VAULT PROVIDE BENTONITE WATER REMAINS DRY DURING HIGH GROUND WATER EVENTS. STOP BETWEEN VAULT PRE-CAST VAULT. PRE-CAST VAULT SUPPLIER 3. CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT BUOYANCY CALCULATIONS BY SECTIONS SHALL PROVIDE ADDITIONAL REINFORCEMENT TO DISTRICT FOR APPROVAL. 21-0233 SAMPLING STATION AS NECESSARY TO ALLOW FOR THRUST PIPING BLOCK TO BEAR ON VAULT WALL. ANTICIPATED THRUST IS BASED ON 100 PSI TEST PRESSURE. JOB NO.: EXPECTED VAULT HEIGHT: 9'-2" PROVIDE ADJUSTMENT SECTIONS AS NEEDED DEPENDING ON EXISTING PIPE INVERT ELEVATIONS AND TO ACHIEVE VAULT LID ELEVATION EXISTING VALVES AND PER THIS SHEET AND DWG NO. W05 FITTINGS PER PROVIDE PIPE SUPPORTS, TYP. LOCATIONS 300 ARE CONCEPTUAL, CONTRACTOR TO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS. 640BPS-D-MECH02.DWG SEE APPENDIX D IN ARL ADJUST AND ADD PIPE SUPPORTS AS SPECIFICATIONS NECESSARY TO FULLY SUPPORT PIPING. CLIENT:FILENAME:REVISIONS 8" PROVIDE THRUST COLLAR Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 1'-6" MIN DESCRIPTION PROVIDE 6" OF CRUSHED SURFACING SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: 3'-0" BASE COURSE COMPACTED TO FIRM DATE AND UNYIELDING CONDITION KMDDWB NATIVE SOIL COMPACT TO FIRM VAULT FOOTING SIZED TO NO. AND UNYIELDING CONDITIONS IN PREVENT BUOYANT 304 PROVIDE CAST IN PLACE THRUST ENGINEER:REVIEWED: THE PRESENCE OF ENGINEER CONDITION. SEE BUOYANCY BLOCK. REINFORCEMENT PER DETAIL SCALE:SHOWN NOTES THIS DETAIL 0" 1" 2" A PRESSURE REDUCING STATION SECTION I B PRESSURE REDUCING STATION SECTION II DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: M02 17 28 PRESSURE GAUGE PER SPECIFICATIONS TYPE A - FLANGE SUPPORT TYPE B - SADDLE SUPPORT 1 4" 45° BRASS ELBOW (TYP. AT VALVES, METERS, AND FITTINGS) (AS SPECIFIED OR WITH ENGINEER APPROVAL) 1 " BRASS NIPPLE 4 1 " BRASS BALL VALVE 4 1 " BRASS NIPPLE 4 1" THREADED TAP 1" SHORT BRASS NIPPLE SEE PIPE STANCHION DETAIL FOR MORE 301 1" DIELECTRIC UNION CORE DRILLED EQUAL TO WATTS 3003 INFORMATION,TYP EXTERIORINTERIORPENETRATION IN VAULT 1" TO 1 " BRASS BUSHING 4 1. FLANGE, SADDLE, AND SADDLE CLAMP SUPPORTS SHALL BE "STANDON" BRAND TYPE C - SADDLE CLAMP SUPPORT AS MANUFACTURED BY MATERIAL RESOURCES OR EQUAL. PIPE PER PLAN (TYP. AT PIPING) LINK-SEAL, FULL PERIMETER. LINK-SEAL MODEL SHALL BE PER MANUFACTURER PS1 - STANDON PIPE SUPPORT BASED ON PIPE MATERIAL AND SIZE. 300 WATERTIGHT GROUT, FULL PERIMETER CONCRETE VAULT WALL PIPE STANCHION, SIZE AS 302 PIPE PENETRATION DETAIL 303 PRESSURE GAUGE DETAIL REQUIRED CONC. ANCHOR, SIZE AND QUANTITY AS REQUIRED. PIPE STANCHION BASE SEE STRUCTURAL DETAILS PLATE, SIZE AS REQUIRED FOR SPACING AND LOADING INFO LEVELING NUT, TYP FINISHED FLOOR 1" GROUT AFTER LEVELING MIN. CITY OF ARLINGTON 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATIONMECHANICAL DETAILS PIPE STANCHION DETAIL 301 N O F T O Y G N TI I C L AR (1) #5 VERTICALLY PER SIDE OF PIPE, TYP REVIEW NOTE: THRUST BLOCK REINFORCEMENT TYPICAL EACH FACE. BY 21-0233 JOB NO.: TYPICAL REINFORCEMENT: 3'-0" 640BPS-D-MECH02.DWG #4 @ 12" O.C., NOT SHOWN ARL 1-#5 HOOP, DIA OF OPENING +8" CLIENT:FILENAME:REVISIONS EF FOR PIPES 12" & LARGER VENTILATOR SCHEDULE LOUVER AND DAMPER SCHEDULE (2) #5 HORIZONTALLY PER VOLTAGE/ NO. FLOW MANUFACTURER MODEL FLOW RATE MOTOR HP NO. FLOW MANUFACTURER MODEL FLOW RATE SIZE DAMPER SIDE OF PIPE, TYP PHASE Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 V01 DESCRIPTION 1 1/2" CLEAR COVER MIN AROUND PIPE PENETRATION SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: VENTILATOR NOTES: 1. PROVIDE MOTOR SIDE GUARD. DATE 6" DI WATER MAIN LOUVER NOTES: 2. MOTOR SHALL BE ECM OR HAVE A RATED EFFICIENCY OF AT LEAST 70% PER WSEC-2015. KMDDWB 1. CHANNEL FRAME SHALL BE FLUOROPOLYMER COATED EXTRUDED ALUMINUM WITH FACE MOUNTED 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL SECURE FAN TO CEILING AS RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. STAINLESS STEEL INSECT SCREEN ON THE INTERIOR OF THE LOUVER. 4. VENTILATOR TO BE CONTROLLED BY WALL THERMOSTAT. NO. 3'-0" 2. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE PROPER TRANSITION FROM FAN TO LOUVER AS SHOWN ON PLANS. ENGINEER:REVIEWED: 5. PROVIDE SHEET METAL SHROUD AS REQUIRED. 3. PROVIDE LOUVER WITH 16" LONG SLEEVE TO ACCOMMODATE DAMPERS. SCALE:SHOWN 4. PROVIDE LOUVER WITH ADEQUATE FREE AREA THAT MAINTAINS THE VELOCITY BELOW THE 304 MANUFACTURERS LISTED WATER PENETRATION VELOCITY. THRUST BLOCK REINFORCEMENT DETAIL 5. DAMPER SHALL BE EQUAL TO POTTORFF CD-45 OR EQUAL. 0" 1" 2" DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN 6. ON INTAKE LOUVERS ONLY, PROVIDE 1" FILTERS AND HOUSING. BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: M03 18 28 ONE-LINE DIAGRAM SYMBOLS PANELBOARDS, SWITCHES, AND EQUIPMENT LIGHTING FIXTURES/DEVICES ABBREVIATIONS LADDER LOGIC SYMBOL LEGEND FIRE SYSTEM SYMBOLS INDICATE TYPE BY INSTRUMENT METER LETTER RACEWAY LEGEND ADDITIONAL SYMBOLS SITE PLAN LEGEND VALVE SYMBOLS BUILDING OR FACILITY PLAN LEGEND RECEPTACLES AND JUNCTION BOX SYMBOLS CITY OF ARLINGTON 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATIONELECTRICAL LEGEND N O F T O Y G N TI I C L AR REVIEW GROUNDING SYSTEM SYMBOLS BY 21-0233 JOB NO.: ONE-LINE DIAGRAM INFORMATION 640BPS-D-ELEC01.DWG ARL CLIENT:FILENAME:REVISIONS SWITCH OUTLETS ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN SYMBOLS GENERAL NOTES Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 DESCRIPTION SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: DATE BPCMWB NO. ENGINEER:REVIEWED: SCALE:SHOWN 0" 1" 2" DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: E01 19 28 POWER SERVICE OUTSIDE SECONDARY. SEE DWG NO. E03 FOR DETAILS. PACKAGED PUMP STATION, PROVIDED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR POLE-MOUNTED M AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH, MAIN SERVICE TRANSFORMER, BY "ATS", PROVIDED BY OWNER, DISCONNECT SWITCH UTILITY INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR 300/3 TM, LSI, SE ATS MOTOR CONTROL PANEL (MCP) OVERHEAD PRIMARY 480/277 VOLT SERVICE 80/2 NEUTRAL POWER HAND HOLE. SEE DWG NO. E03 FOR DETAILS. 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% REACTORS REACTORS REACTORS REACTORS REACTORS STANDBY GENERATOR, GND BUS PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OTHERS 125KW PUMP 1 PUMP 2 PUMP 3 JOCKEY PUMP 1 JOCKEY PUMP 2 LIGHTING TRANSFORMER CITY OF ARLINGTON 480V 25KVA, ONE-LINE DIAGRAM 1Ø 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION 240/120V EXISTING UTILITY METER, TO BE REMOVED N O F T O Y G N TI I C L AR M STATION LOAD CALCULATIONS PUMP 1 (25 HP) 34A X 1.25 = 42.5 AMPS EXISTING 240/120V REVIEW PUMP 2 (25 HP) 34A X 1.00 = 34 AMPS SERVICE, TO BE EXISTING PUMP 3 (25 HP) 34A X 1.00 = 34 AMPS REMOVED LIGHTING PUMP 4 (FUTURE) (25HP) 34A X 1.00 = 34 AMPS PANEL BY JOCKEY PUMP 1 (7.5 HP) 11A X 0.00 = 0 AMPS 21-0233 JOCKEY PUMP 2 (7.5 HP) 11A X 0.00 = 0 AMPS LIGHTING TRANSFORMER (25 kVA) 52.08A X 1.00 = 52.08 AMPS JOB NO.: TOTAL 196.6 AMPS ELECTRICAL NOTES INSIDE 1. SEE GROUNDING DETAIL, THIS SHEET. 640BPS-D-ELEC02.DWG S/N MAIN SERVICE ARL LIGHTING 2. UTILITY METER. METER BASE AND ENCLOSURE BY CONTRACTOR, TO MEET DISCONNECT PUMP STATION SKID TRANSFORMER CLIENT:FILENAME:REVISIONS UTILITY REQUIREMENTS. METER BY SNOHOMISH COUNTY PUD. SWITCH 3. NEMA 3R CURRENT TRANSFORMER ENCLOSURE PER UTILITY REQUIREMENTS. CURRENT TRANSFORMER AND METER WIRING BY GND BUS SNOHOMISH COUNTY PUD. Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 ONE-LINE DIAGRAM #6 MIN. DESCRIPTION 4. GROUND ROD PER N.E.C. (TYPICAL). SEE DWG NO. E09 FOR DETAIL. #1/0 MIN. SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: 5. EXISTING LIGHTING PANEL TO BE RELOCATED. CONTRACTOR SHALL BOND TO PIPE DATE EXTEND CIRCUITS AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE RELOCATED PANEL. BPCMWB PROVIDE JUNCTION BOXES, RACEWAYS, AND CONDUCTORS AS NEEDED. CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE EXISTING GROUND-NEUTRAL BOND. NO. ENGINEER:REVIEWED: 6. SEE DWG NO. E10 FOR CONDUIT AND CONDUCTOR SCHEDULE. SCALE:SHOWN 7. SEE DWG NO. E10 FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE. GROUNDING 0" 1" 2" DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: E02 20 28 T.P.N. 31052500102900 JAMES & THERESA GRAY ALTITUDE VALVE HOUSE/PUMP STATION BUILDING STANDBY GENERATOR, PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OTHERS APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF EXISTING LADDER AND RECTIFIER ENCLOSURE T.P.N. 31052500103100 ROBERT & MARCELLE WILSON CITY OF ARLINGTON POWER POLE 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN N O F T O Y G N T.P.N. 31052500103200 TI I C L SCOTT THOMAS AR T.P.N. 31052500103200 REVIEW SCOTT THOMAS SERVICE ROAD BY 21-0233 T.P.N. 31052500103000 CITY OF ARLINGTON JOB NO.: 640BPS-D-ELEC03.DWG ARL CLIENT:FILENAME:REVISIONS ELECTRICAL NOTES 1. POWER SERVICE SECONDARY. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND RESTORATION PER SNOHOMISH COUNTY PUD DESCRIPTION AND CITY REQUIREMENTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL 4" SCHEDULE 40 PVC CONDUIT FROM POWER HAND HOLE TO BASE OF POWER SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: POLE. SNOHOMISH COUNTY PUD WILL PROVIDE AND INSTALL CONDUIT RISER, DATE POLE MOUNTED TRANSFORMER, AND CONDUCTORS FROM POLE MOUNTED BPCMWB TRANSFORMER TO POWER HAND HOLE. NO. ENGINEER:REVIEWED: ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN 2. POWER HAND HOLE. INSTALL HAND HOLE PER SNOHOMISH COUNTY PUD AND CITY REQUIREMENTS. HAND HOLE SHALL BE CUZ CONCRETE MODEL 554 SCALE:SHOWN EV WITH BOTTOM. 0" 1" 2" 3. SEE DWG NO. E10 FOR CONDUIT AND CONDUCTOR SCHEDULE. DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: E03 21 28 EXISTING TELEMETRY PANEL TO BE REMOVED. CONTRACTOR SHALL EXTEND EXISTING CIRCUITS AS EXISTING SECONDARY EXISTING COMMUNICATIONS REQUIRED TO REACH MOTOR EXISTING RECTIFIER CIRCUIT EXISTING HEATER SHALL BE EXISTING LIGHTING PANEL, FEEDER SHALL BE CUT AT CONDUIT TO BE CUT AT CONTROL PANEL ON OWNER SHALL BE CUT AT FLOOR, CAPPED, REMOVED AND RETURNED TO CITY TO BE RELOCATED FLOOR, CAPPED, AND FLOOR, CAPPED, AND PROVIDED PUMP STATION SKID. AND ABANDONED IN PLACE. ABANDONED IN PLACE. ABANDONED IN PLACE. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE JUNCTION BOXES, RACEWAYS, AND CONDUCTORS AS NEEDED TO REACH OWNER PROVIDED PANEL. EXISTING HEATER EXISTING LIGHTING PANEL EXISTING INCOMING CIRCUITS EXISTING TELEMETRY PANEL CITY OF ARLINGTON CONTRACTOR SHALL EXTEND CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL CONTRACTOR SHALL EXTEND ELECTRICAL PLAN 1 EXISTING CIRCUITS AS REQUIRED CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION JUNCTION BOX TO INTERCEPT EXISTING CIRCUITS AS REQUIRED TO REACH MOTOR CONTROL JUNCTION BOX TO INTERCEPT CIRCUITS. CONTRACTOR SHALL SPLICE TO ACCOMMODATE RELOCATED PANEL ON OWNER PROVIDED CIRCUITS. CONTRACTOR SHALL AND EXTEND EXISTING CIRCUITS FROM PANEL. CONTRACTOR SHALL PUMP STATION SKID. SPLICE AND EXTEND EXISTING THE JUNCTION BOX TO MOTOR PROVIDE JUNCTION BOXES, CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CIRCUITS FROM THE JUNCTION BOX N O CONTROL PANEL ON OWNER RACEWAYS, AND CONDUCTORS AS F T JUNCTION BOXES, RACEWAYS, TO THE PROPOSED PANEL LOCATION. O PROVIDED PUMP STATION SKID. NEEDED TO RELOCATE PANEL. Y G AND CONDUCTORS AS NEEDED. N TI I C L AR REVIEW BY 21-0233 JOB NO.: ELECTRICAL NOTES 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL TRACE EXISTING LIGHTING PANEL AND TELEMETRY PANEL CIRCUITS TO IDENTIFY EACH CIRCUIT. CONTRACTOR SHALL INTERCEPT EXISTING CIRCUITS WITH JUNCTION BOXES AND RE-ROUTE CIRCUITS TO PROPOSED LOCATIONS. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE JUNCTION BOXES, RACEWAYS, AND 640BPS-D-ELEC04.DWG ARL CONDUCTORS AS NEEDED TO ACCOMMODATE PROPOSED LOCATIONS. CONTRACTOR SHALL MATCH CONDUCTOR TYPE (TYPE AND MATERIAL) FOR CLIENT:FILENAME:REVISIONS EXTENDED CIRCUITS. Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 DESCRIPTION SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: DATE BPCMWB NO. ENGINEER:REVIEWED: SCALE:SHOWN EXISTING TELMETRY PANEL REAR EXISTING TELEMETRY CONDUITS EXISTING LIGHTING PANEL REAR EXISTING LIGHTING PANEL CONDUITS 0" 1" 2" DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: E04 22 28 EXISTING RECTIFIER POWER CIRCUIT SHALL BE CUT AT GROUND, CAPPED, AND ABANDONED IN PLACE. EXISTING POWER CIRCUIT DO NOT DISTURB OTHER TO BE REPLACED RECTIFIER WIRING, TYP. DO NOT DISTURB OTHER RECTIFIER CIRCUITS EXISTING RECTIFIER EXISTING RECTIFIER INTERIOR CITY OF ARLINGTON ELECTRICAL PLAN 2 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION N O F T O Y G N TI I C L AR EXISTING RESERVOIR REVIEW BY EXISTING RESERVOIR 21-0233 LADDER DOOR. INSTALL INTRUSION SWITCH ON JOB NO.: EXISTING DOOR 640BPS-D-ELEC04.DWG ARL CLIENT:FILENAME:REVISIONS Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 DESCRIPTION SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: DATE BPCMWB NO. ENGINEER:REVIEWED: ELECTRICAL NOTES SCALE:SHOWN 1. SEE DWG NO. E03 FOR RECTIFIER AND RESERVOIR LADDER LOCATIONS. 0" 1" 2" 2. SEE DWG NO. E10 FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND HEATER SCHEDULES. EXISTING RESERVOIR DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: E05 23 28 STANDBY GENERATOR, PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY VENTILATION FAN, "V01" OTHERS PROPOSED GENERATOR PAD EXISTING LIGHTING PANEL LOUVER, "L101" OWNER PROVIDED "VCP" FLOW METER APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF EXISTING LIGHTING PANEL MOUNTED ON EXISTING INTERIOR WALL LIGHTING APPROXIMATE TRANSFORMER. LOCATION OF EXISTING MOUNT BOTTOM OF TELEMETRY PANEL TRANSFORMER 6' MOUNTED ON EXISTING ABOVE FINISHED INTERIOR WALL "VCP" FLOOR EXISTING LIGHTING PACKAGED PUMP PANEL, PROPOSED STATION, PROVIDED BY A1 LOCATION OWNER, INSTALLED BY AUTOMATIC CONTRACTOR TRANSFER SWITCH, "ATS", PROVIDED BY VENTILATION CONTROL OWNER, INSTALLED PANEL, "VCP" BY CONTRACTOR SECURITY EQUIPMENT LOUVER, "L100" DIAGRAM "VCP" CITY OF ARLINGTON MOTOR CONTROL PANEL, PROVIDED BY OWNER WITH PACKAGED PUMP STATION MAIN SERVICE 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION DISCONNECT SWITCH ELECTRICAL NOTES 1. GROUND ROD PER N.E.C. (TYPICAL OF 2). SEE E09 FOR DETAILS. LOCATE N O EXISTING LIGHTING PANEL F GROUND RODS 2' FROM BUILDING FOUNDATION, MINIMUM. T O CURRENT TRANSFORMER Y G N EXISTING ENCLOSURE TI I POWER DISTRIBUTION AND SIGNAL 2. BOND GROUND SYSTEM TO WATER PIPING (TYPICAL OF 2). C L SECURITY LIGHTING AR EQUIPMENT 3. BOND GROUND SYSTEM TO PUMP STATION SKID. PANEL 4. CONDUIT CONTINUES TO INTRUSION SWITCH ON EXISTING RESERVOIR REVIEW LADDER DOOR. SEE DWG NO. E03 FOR LOCATION. A1 5. CONDUIT CONTINUES TO EXISTING RECTIFIER MOUNTED ON RESERVOIR BY WALL. SEE DWG NO. E03 FOR LOCATION. 21-0233 OWNER PROVIDED DOOR JOB NO.: 6. REFER TO GENERATOR SUBMITTAL INCLUDED IN THE APPENDICES TO THE ACCESS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONDUIT STUB UP LOCATIONS. EXTEND AND CAP CONDUITS 3" ABOVE FINISHED GRADE FOR FUTURE GENERATOR INSTALLATION. UTILITY METER BOLLARD TYPE 2 PER 7. OWNER PROVIDED SECURITY EQUIPMENT. CONFIRM FINAL LOCATION OF WSDOT STANDARD PLAN SECURITY EQUIPMENT WITH OWNER. H-60.20-01 WITH ROUND 640BPS-D-ELEC04.DWG ARL FOOTING, TYP. OF 3 8. OWNER PROVIDED SECURITY CAMERA. CONFIRM FINAL LOCATION OF SECURITY CAMERA WITH OWNER. TYP. OF 2. CLIENT:FILENAME:REVISIONS CONDUIT CONTINUES TO 9. SECURITY SYSTEM DEDICATED RECEPTACLE POWER HAND HOLE. SEE 10. ROUTE GROUND CONDUCTOR IN OVERHEAD CONDUIT. SUPPORT ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN, DWG NO. E03, FOR CONTINUATION. Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 CONDUIT PER N.E.C. DESCRIPTION 11. PROVIDE JUNCTION BOXES IN ATTIC TO INTERCEPT EXISTING CIRCUITS SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: AND EXTEND TO PROPOSED LOCATIONS. PROVIDE RACEWAYS AND DATE CONDUCTORS AS NECESSARY TO EXTEND CIRCUITS. BPCMWB 12. SEE DWG NO. E10 FOR CONDUIT AND CONDUCTOR SCHEDULE. NO. ENGINEER:REVIEWED: 13. SEE DWG NO. E10 FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND HEATER SCALE:SHOWN SCHEDULES. 0" 1" 2" A# 14. SEE DWG NO. E10 FOR LIGHTING SCHEDULE. POWER DISTRIBUTION AND SIGNAL DIAGRAM DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: E06 24 28 APPROX. 10'-0" EXISTING BUILDING WALL STANDBY GENERATOR AND SUB-BASE FUEL TANK, PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OTHERS APPROX. 13'-2" APPROX. 7'-4" APPROX. 20'-6" BOLLARD TYPE 2 PER PROPOSED CONCRETE PAD WSDOT STANDARD PLAN H-60.20-01 WITH ROUND FOOTING, TYP. OF 3 CITY OF ARLINGTON GENERATOR AND FUEL TANK PLAN VIEW 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION GENERATOR PAD DETAILS N O F T O Y G N TI I C L AR REVIEW BY PROPOSED CONCRETE PAD, 0.5% 21-0233 SLOPE AWAY FROM GENERATOR PER STANDBY GENERATOR, DWG NO. S03 PROVIDED AND INSTALLED JOB NO.: BY OTHERS SUB-BASE FUEL TANK, PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OTHERS 640BPS-D-ELEC05.DWG ARL 3" CLR. 2" CLR. CLIENT:FILENAME:REVISIONS 2" TYP. 8" Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 DESCRIPTION SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: DATE #5 @ 12" O.C. EW T&B BPCMWB NO. MIN 12" CRUSHED SURFACING PROOF ROLLED NATIVE SOIL ENGINEER:REVIEWED: COMPACTED TO FIRM AND ELECTRICAL NOTES SCALE:SHOWN UNYIELDING CONDITION GENERATOR AND FUEL TANK SIDE ELEVATION VIEW 1. REFER TO DWG NO. S03 FOR CONCRETE PAD SLOPES. 0" 1" 2" DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN 2. REFER TO GENERATOR SUBMITTAL INCLUDED IN THE APPENDICES TO THE BAR MEASURES 2" SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONDUIT STUB UP LOCATIONS. DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: E07 25 28 1'-6" MAX NEMA 12 ENCLOSURE, 8" DEEP VENTILATION CONTROL PANEL L N VENTILATION CONTROL PANEL, "VCP" 20A OFF HAND AUTO CR COOLING SYSTEM CALL 1 COOLING THERMOSTAT CB 120P 120N COOLING SYSTEM EXHAUST FAN HAND OFF AUTO RUNNING NORMALLY CLOSED, 20A POWER TO OPEN CR1-1 LOUVER ACTUATOR, "L100" 2'-0" MAX NORMALLY CLOSED, CITY OF ARLINGTON 20A POWER TO OPEN CR1-2 LOUVER ACTUATOR, "L101" 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION 20A CR1-3 VENTILATION FAN, "V01" N O F T O Y G N TI I C L AR VENTILATION CONTROL PANEL DETAILS CR1-4 G "EXHAUST FAN RUNNING" REVIEW BY 21-0233 WARNING LABEL JOB NO.: WARNING 120 VAC KEEP OUT 640BPS-D-ELEC08.DWG ARL CLIENT:FILENAME:REVISIONS Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 DESCRIPTION SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: DATE BPCMWB NO. ENGINEER:REVIEWED: VENTILATION CONTROL PANEL LAYOUT VENTILATION CONTROL PANEL CONTROL LOGIC SCALE:SHOWN 0" 1" 2" DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: E08 26 28 ROOF TRUSSES (TYP) GRADE C-CHANNEL OFFSET BRACKET. SECURE CONDUIT TO BRACKET. PROPOSED GROUND ROD CONDUIT (TYPICAL). CONDUIT BOX WITH COVER. SEE SHALL BE NEATLY AND EQUALLY SPECIFICATIONS. SPACED. CONDUIT SHALL BE EXISTING BUILDING EXISTING BUILDING PARALLEL WITH WALLS. INTERIOR WALL EXTERIOR WALL CONTRACTOR SHALL GROUT FILL CONDUIT PENETRATION. 5/8"X8' LONG COPPER TYPICAL WALL-MOUNTED ENCLOSURE GROUT SHALL BE DYED TO GROUND ROD MATCH EXISTING BLOCK. 8-0" PROPOSED CONDUIT "LB", TYPICAL. 1.) SIZE AND NUMBER FINISHED GRADE TO INTERIOR EQUIPMENT OF CONDUIT VARIES. 2.) THIS DETAIL TYPICAL FOR ALL SURFACE PROPOSED CONDUIT MOUNTED CONDUIT. FLOOR (TYP) EXISTING BUILDING CONDUIT PENETRATION DETAIL GROUND ROD DETAIL SURFACE MOUNTED CONDUIT DETAIL CITY OF ARLINGTON 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATIONELECTRICAL DETAILS N CADWELD TYPE TA. O F CADWELD TYPE RR. T O CADWELD CABLE TO CABLE Y G CADWELD END CABLE TO N TEE CONNECTION. COPPER CONDUCTOR TI I UPPER REBAR CONNECTION. C L AR RED ELECTRICAL WARNING NATIVE MATERIAL COMPACTED REBAR TAPE CENTERED OVER EACH TO 95% PER ASTM D1557 OR AS COPPER CONDUCTOR CONDUIT IN TRENCH (TYP) FINISH SURFACE PER PLAN REQUIRED PER PLAN REVIEW BY 21-0233 9" GROUND TEE DETAIL GROUND REBAR DETAIL JOB NO.: CONDUITS 24" MIN (<600V) COVER OVER 6" 3" PRIMARY SERVICE HIGHEST CONDUIT 36" MIN-48" MAX FORSAND BEDDING 3" IN TRENCH MATERIAL PER WSDOT CADWELD TYPE XA. SPECIFICATION 9-03.13 CADWELD TYPE GR CADWELD CABLE TO CABLE MINIMUM DEPTH BELOW 3" ELECTRICAL CONDUIT NUMBER AND CROSS CONNECTION. BOTTOM OF DEEPEST 640BPS-D-ELEC06.DWG CADWELD CABLE TO SIZE VARY AS PER SITE PLAN. MAINTAIN ARL COPPER CONDUCTOR GROUND ROD CONNECTION. CONDUIT INSTALLED IN 12" SPACING BETWEEN TELEMETRY TRENCH CONDUITS AND OTHER CONDUITS. CLIENT:FILENAME:REVISIONS TYPICAL ELECTRICAL TRENCH DETAIL 5/8" X 8' COPPER GROUND COPPER CONDUCTOR ROD. (TYPICAL) Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 NOTE: BURY DEPTH OF CONDUIT AND HORIZONTAL SPACING SHALL DESCRIPTION BE CONFIRMED WITH SERVING UTILITY BEFORE CONSTRUCTION. SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: DATE GROUND TEE DETAIL GROUNDING CROSS DETAIL BPCMWB NO. ENGINEER:REVIEWED: SCALE:SHOWN 0" 1" 2" DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: E09 27 28 POWER CONDUIT AND CONDUCTOR SCHEDULE PANEL SCHEDULE - EXISTING LIGHTING PANEL ɸ ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND INSTRUMENTATION SCHEDULE CONTROL CONDUIT AND CONDUCTOR SCHEDULE ɸ · · · LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE INSTRUMENTATION CONDUIT AND CONDUCTOR SCHEDULE CITY OF ARLINGTON 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP STATION ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES HEATER SCHEDULE N O F T O Y G N TI I C L AR REVIEW BY 21-0233 JOB NO.: 640BPS-D-ELEC07.DWG ARL CLIENT:FILENAME:REVISIONS Aug 20, 2024Aug 20, 2024 DESCRIPTION SAVE DATE:PLOT DATE: DATE BPCMWB NO. ENGINEER:REVIEWED: SCALE:SHOWN 0" 1" 2" DRAWING IS FULL SCALE WHEN BAR MEASURES 2" DWG NO.: SHEET NO.: E10 28 28 TECHNICAL MEMORANDUM Client: City of Arlington Project: 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Project File: ARL 0210233.01.0002 Project Manager: Dan Burwell, PE Composed by: Orin Paul, PE, and Derek Fink, EIT Reviewed by: Shannon Emerick, PE Subject: Structural Assessment of BPS Building Signed: 04/16/2024 Date: April 16, 2024 Introduction The City of Arlington (City) is designing the 640 Zone Booster Pump Station (BPS) as the first phase of system improvements to serve a high growth area southeast of downtown. The area is currently served by the 710 Zone; hydraulic analyses performed by RH2 Engineering, Inc., (RH2) confirm that this high growth area can be supported by a 640 Zone. In the first phase, service will be provided by the 640 Zone BPS acting as a closed zone system in combination with an existing Snohomish County Public Utility District intertie until a new 640 Zone Reservoir has been designed and constructed and is operational. The City has selected the altitude valve building located on the 520 Zone Reservoir site (Site) as the location for the proposed BPS. The existing altitude valve building (Building) at the Site presents an opportunity to house a skid-mounted booster pump station, thus serving as the initial infrastructure for the phased system improvements. The Site is situated on a City-owned parcel in the NW ¼ NE ¼, Section 25, Township 31N, Range 5E at 17003 91st Avenue NE. This technical memorandum documents RH2’s review of the existing Building, identifies any existing deficiencies, and provides recommendations for structural revisions to the Building to accommodate installation and future removal, if needed, of the proposed BPS. Altitude Valve Building Background General Building Information The existing Building was erected in 1994 to house the altitude valve for the adjacent 520 Zone Reservoir. The Building exterior measures 22 feet wide by 26 feet long with a wall height of 10 feet and has an interior non-load bearing partition wall separating the altitude valve room from a storage area. The structure is wood framed and consists of 2 by 6 studs at 16 inches on center for the interior and exterior walls and engineered trusses at 24 inches on center. The exterior of the building is sheathed with ½-inch type CDX plywood, covered with Tyvek vapor barrier and finished with Type T1-11 plywood. Interior finishes consist of ½-inch type ACX 4/15/2024 3:43 PM J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\20 Design\Structural\ARL 640 BPS Structural Assessment Technical Memorandum.docx City of Arlington April 16, 2024 Structural Assessment of BPS Building Page 2 plywood and wood trim in the altitude valve room; the storage area is unfinished. Two existing hollow metal pedestrian doors with metal frames sized at 3 feet by 7 feet and 4 feet by 7 feet provide access to the storage room and the altitude valve room, respectively. Foundation The Building foundation consists of a monolithic 4,000 pounds per square inch compression strength concrete slab with a thickened edge of 2 feet by 1 foot, 4 inches thickened portion and a 6-inch interior floor. Refer to Appendix A for plans of the existing Building and additional Building information. The slab is placed over 6 mil polyvinyl chloride plastic and 6 inches of crushed surfacing material. The slab and thickened edge are reinforced using No. 4 bars placed at 12 inches on center each way within the slab. The walls and sill plate are anchored to the floor using ½-inch by 12-inch anchor bolts at 4 feet on center around the perimeter of the slab. Insulation Insulation in the altitude valve room consists of R-19 fiberglass batt insulation with a vapor barrier placed in the wall cavities. The attic of the altitude valve room is insulated with R-30 fiberglass batt insulation. Roofing The gable roof has a 5V:12H slope and consists of wood trusses at 24 inches on center. The roofing material is 25-year, 3-tab fiberglass asphalt shingles placed over 30-pound roof felt and 5⁄8 -inch type CDX plywood sheathing. The shingles appear to be the original shingles installed during Building construction in 1994. Altitude Valve Building Deficiencies During RH2’s initial review, the Building exhibited signs of aging, including the following noted issues: • There is minor deterioration on the fascia trim. • The drip edge trim under the roofing is missing. • There is localized deterioration along the eastern perimeter of the type T1-11 siding that may have propagated to the sheathing material. • The roofing is reaching the end of its lifetime. It is unknown if the roofing is original to the Building or if it has been replaced. It is suggested that it be replaced as part of this project. • There are missing hold downs or similar connections between the top sill plate and the roof trusses. • The doors are damaged due to a break in. While the majority of these issues do not cause concern to the building structurally, failure of these items can lead to future rot and damage to the structural, mechanical, and electrical 4/15/2024 3:43 PM J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\20 Design\Structural\ARL 640 BPS Structural Assessment Technical Memorandum.docx City of Arlington April 16, 2024 Structural Assessment of BPS Building Page 3 elements of the Building. RH2 recommends addressing these issues as part of the Building improvement process to increase the longevity and security of the Building. Proposed Building Modifications To accommodate the placement of the new pump assembly, RH2 designed the installation of a commercial garage door and a hollow metal pedestrian door. The garage door ensures sufficient space for maneuvering the proposed BPS skid into the building, and the man door maintains standard building access and emergency exits. The process for making these necessary improvements to the Building is outlined in the following sections. Remove Existing Doors and Frames • Two existing hollow metal doors and frames are to be removed from their respective positions. Remove Exterior Siding, Insulation, Tyvek, and Sheathing • Remove the existing T1-11 siding, Tyvek, and sheathing along the exterior face of the southeastern wall to prepare for the door replacement and additional structural connections. • Ensure that the Tyvek vapor barrier is neatly cut and temporarily wrapped away from the opening for reinstallation following door installation, retaining sufficient material to meet the manufacturer's overlap requirements. Remove Existing Framing • Remove the existing 2 by 6 framing as needed to accommodate the new garage and pedestrian doors. • Remove the existing non-load bearing partition wall between the storage room and the altitude valve room to create a larger space for the BPS installation. Install New Framing and Headers • Install new 2 by 6 king and jack studs and door headers as required. Install three 2 by 8s as a header for the garage door and two 2 by 8s as a header for the pedestrian door. • Install hold downs and shear wall nailing as described in the calculations in Appendix B. Connectors between the trusses and supporting walls shall be Simpson type SDWC truss screws or equal at each end of each truss. Connectors between the gable end trusses and supporting members shall be Simpson A34s or better at 32 inches on center. Install New Doors • Install a new commercial 12-foot-wide by 9-foot-tall garage door and a 4-foot-wide by 7-foot-tall hollow metal door with a metal frame. 4/15/2024 3:43 PM J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\20 Design\Structural\ARL 640 BPS Structural Assessment Technical Memorandum.docx City of Arlington April 16, 2024 Structural Assessment of BPS Building Page 4 Install New Exterior Sheathing and Siding • Install new exterior ½-inch APA-rated sheathing and replace the Tyvek vapor barrier where removed. • Install Hardie siding or a similar material over the T1-11 sheathing (where not replaced), as recommended by RH2 for improved longevity. Install New Insulation, Interior Sheathing, and Finishes • Remove any exposed existing wall insulation and replace it with R-21 fiberglass batt insulation with vapor barrier. Insulation is required to be R-21 per Table C402.1.3 in the 2021 Washington State Energy Code. • Remove the existing exposed insulation and replace with R-49 fiberglass batt insulation. The existing attic insulation does not meet the current 2021 Washington State Energy Code. Insulation is required to be R-49 per Table C402.1.3 in the 2021 Washington State Energy Code. • Install new interior ½-inch APA-rated sheathing and wood trim to match the existing Building interior finishes. Alternative Items to Consider • Replace the existing roofing with new 3-tab asphalt shingles or metal roofing. • Replace any damaged or deteriorated trim. Building Design Values Refer to the Building structural calculations in Appendix B. Applicable Specifications and Codes The Building improvements recommended in this technical memorandum are based on the 2021 International Building Code and the 2021 Washington State Energy Code. Loading Parameters Roof Live Load 20 pounds per square foot Wind Load 109 miles per hour, Exposure B Roof Snow Load 25 pounds per square foot Earthquake Load Latitude 48.1507, Longitude -122.1069, Soil Profile Type D Default Design base shear 3,848 pounds 4/15/2024 3:43 PM J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\20 Design\Structural\ARL 640 BPS Structural Assessment Technical Memorandum.docx City of Arlington April 16, 2024 Structural Assessment of BPS Building Page 5 Other Design Values Occupancy Category Essential Facility Seismic Design Category D Response Modification Factor 6.5 – Light framed walls with wood structural panels 4/15/2024 3:43 PM J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\20 Design\Structural\ARL 640 BPS Structural Assessment Technical Memorandum.docx City of Arlington April 16, 2024 Structural Assessment of BPS Building Page 6 Attachments Appendix A – Existing Building Plans Appendix B – Structural Calculations References Washington State Building Code Council. (2021). Washington State Energy Code – Commercial 2021 Edition. Retrieved from https://sbcc.wa.gov/sites/default/files/2024- 01/2021_WSEC_C_2ndEd_012824.pdf 4/15/2024 3:43 PM J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\20 Design\Structural\ARL 640 BPS Structural Assessment Technical Memorandum.docx Appendix A Existing Building Plans Appendix B Structural Calculations CITY OF ARLINGTON 640 BPS STATION STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS By Derek Fink, E.I.T. Reviewed by Shannon Emerick. P.E. RH2 Engineering, Inc. April 2024 INDEX TO CALCULATIONS Page Description i Index to Calculations 1 Project Description and Layout 2 Building dimensions and Material properties 3 – 5 Door Lintel Design 6 – 8 Lateral Analysis – Wind 9 Lateral Analysis – ASCE 7-22 Seismic 10 - 11 Lateral Analysis – ASCE 7-16 Seismic 12 – 13 Sheathing and top plate design 14 – 16 Shear Wall design 17 Roof ventilation 16 - 18 Out-of-plane Forces Appendix A: ASCE Hazard Report, ASCE 7-16 Appendix B: ASCE Hazard Report, ASCE 7-22 Signed: 04/16/2024 City of Arlington 640 BPS Building Calculations Single Story Wood Framed Building Structural Calculations Design procedure: Check the design of the existing wood frame building located in Arlington, Washington to be retrofit for use as the 604 booster pump station (BPS) with the proposed modifications for the rollup door. Known values from as-builts: Calculated by: Derek Fink, E.I.T2x6 stud walls @ 16" o.c. (ASSUMED as Hem-fir stud grade) Reviewed by: Shannon Emerick, P.E.10'-0" wood frame wall height over 6" thick concrete slab on gradePage 1 04/11/2024 Trusses @ 24" o.c. 1/2" x 12" anchor into 2x6 treated sill @ 4' o.c. City of Arlington 640 BPS Building Calculations Known values from as-builts: 2x6 stud walls @ 16" o.c. (ASSUMED as Hem-fir stud grade) 10'-0" wood frame wall height over 6" thick concrete slab on grade Trusses @ 24" o.c. 1/2" x 12" anchor into 2x6 treated sill @ 4' o.c. 5 tsheathing_roof≔―in CDX Roof sheathing 8 1 tsheathing_wall≔―in CDX Sheathing on all outside walls 2 Fb_stud≔675 psi Bending stress, NDS 2018 Table 4A Ft_stud≔400 psi Tension stress parallel to grain, NDS 2018 Table 4A Fv_stud≔150 psi Shear stress parallel to grain, NDS 2018 Table 4A Fc_stud≔800 psi Compression stress (parallel to grain), NDS 2018 Table 4A E'min_stud≔440000 psi Minimum modulus of elasticity, NDS 2018 Table 4A Estud≔1200000 psi Modulus of elasticity, NDS 2018 Table 4A Gravity Load Distribution OH≔1 ft+6 in=1.5 ft Roof overhang lb≔26 ft Length of building wb≔22 ft Width of building hw≔10 ft Height of wall hgarage≔9 ft Height of garage door pitch≔5 in Roof rise in 12" struss≔24 in Truss spacing sstud≔16 in Stud spacing Ld≔12.5 psf Roof dead load (psf) including 1.5 psf roofing, 2.5 psf sheathing, 2.0 psf trusses, 0.5 psf insulation, 3.0 psf gypboard and 3.0 psf miscellaneous mechanical equipment. Ld_wall≔12 psf Wall dead load (2x6 studs @ 16" with sheathing) pg≔25 psf Ground snow load (per SEAW WABO snow load white paper 8 - 2021) lb pitch h≔―⋅――+hw=15.42 ft Total building height 2 1 ft h+hw hr≔――=12.71 ft Mean roof height 2 Wood Lintel Design Calculated by: Derek Fink, E.I.T Reviewed by: Shannon Emerick, P.E. Page 2 04/11/2024 City of Arlington 640 BPS Building Calculations Wood Lintel Design Try a built up beam of (3) 2 x 8's Bending check for Lintel: spanlintel≔12 ft Max span over Double Doors Ce_snow≔1 Exposure Factor, Snow, ASCE Table 7.3-1 Ct_snow≔1.1 Thermal Factor, Snow, ASCE Table 7.3-2 Is≔1.2 Importance Factor, Snow, ASCE Table 1.5-2 pf≔max⎛⎝0.7â‹…Ce_snowâ‹…Ct_snowâ‹…Isâ‹…pg,25 psfâ‹…Is⎞⎠=30 psf Flat roof snow load, ASCE 7.3-1 Csnow≔1 Slope Factor, Snow, ASCE Table 7.4-1 ps≔Csnowâ‹…pf=30 psf Balanced sloped roof snow load, ASCE 7.4-1 ⎛s ⎞ L ≔⎛⎝L +p ⎞⎠⋅⎜――truss +OH⎟=106 plf Typical roof load at gable end wall w d s ⎝ 2 ⎠ ⎛h-hgarage⎞ wlin≔Lw+⎜―――⎟⋅Ld_wall=145 plf Max load to lintel (roof load and wall load ⎝ 2 ⎠ above the lintel) w ⋅⎛⎝span ⎞⎠2 M ≔―――――lin lintel =31266 in lbfâ‹… Moment to lintel lintel_demand 8 b2x8≔1.5 in h2x8≔7.25 in countlintel≔3 Lintel dimensions and count ⎛⎝count â‹…b ⎞⎠⋅h 2 S ≔―――――――lintel 2x8 2x8 =39.42 in3 Section modulus for lintel lintel 6 Mlintel_demand fb_lintel≔――――=793 psi Calculated bending stress in lintel Slintel Fb_lin≔850 psi Allowable unfactored bending stress, Hem Fir #2 2x8 CD_lin≔1.15 Load duration factor (NDS 2018, Table 2.3.2) Cm_lin≔1 Wet service factor for lintel (NDS 2018, Table 4A) Ct_lin≔1 Temperature factor (NDS 2018, 4.3.4) CL_lin≔1 Beam stability factor (NDS 2018, 3.3.3) CF_lin≔1.2 Size factor for lintel (NDS 2018, Table 4A) Cfu_lin≔1 Flat use factor (NDS 2018, 4.3.7) Ci_lin≔1 Incising factor (NDS 2018, 4.3.8) Cr_lin≔1 Repetitive member factor for lintel (NDS 2018, Table 4A) Fb_lintel'≔Fb_linâ‹…CD_linâ‹…Cm_linâ‹…Ct_linâ‹…CL_linâ‹…CF_linâ‹…Cfu_linâ‹…Cr_linâ‹…Ci_lin Fb_lintel'=1173 psi Allowable factored bending stress for Hem Fir #2 2 x 8 checklintel_bending≔if⎛⎝fb_lintel≤Fb_lintel',“OK” “NG”, ⎞⎠=“OK” Shear check for Lintel: Calculated by: Derek Fink, E.I.T Reviewed by: Shannon Emerick, P.E. Page 3 04/11/2024 City of Arlington 640 BPS Building Calculations checklintel_bending≔if⎛⎝fb_lintel≤Fb_lintel',“OK” “NG”, ⎞⎠=“OK” Shear check for Lintel: wlinâ‹…spanlintel Vlintel≔――――=869 lbf Shear to lintel 2 A ≔b â‹…h =0.08 ft2 2x8 2x8 2x8 A≔count â‹…A =32.63 in2 Area of lintel: assuming (3) 2x8 lintel 2x8 3 Vlintel fv_lintel≔―――――――=40 psi Shear demand in lintel 2⋅⎛⎝countlintelâ‹…b2x8⎞⎠⋅h2x8 Fv_lin≔150 psi Allowable unfactored shear stress, Hem Fir 2x8 CD_lin=1.15 Load duration factor (NDS 2018, Table 2.3.2) Cm_lin=1 Wet service factor for lintel (NDS 2018, Table 4A) Ct_lin=1 Temperature factor (NDS 2018, 4.3.4) Ci_lin=1 Incising factor (NDS 2018, 4.3.8) (Not visually incised) Fv_lintel'≔Fv_linâ‹…CD_linâ‹…Cm_linâ‹…Ct_linâ‹…Ci_lin=173 psi Allowable factored shear stress for Hem Fir #2 2 x 8 checklintel_shear≔if⎛⎝fv_lintel≤Fv_lintel',“OK” “NG”, ⎞⎠=“OK” Check Deflections: h2x8=7.25 in Depth of single lintel member b2x8=1.5 in Width of single lintel member countlintel=3 Number of members in lintel EHem_Fir≔1300000 psi Modulus of elasticity, Hem Fir #2 count â‹…b â‹…h 3 I ≔――――――lintel 2x8 2x8 =142.9 in4 Moment of inertia of built up lintel lintel 12 5 w ⋅⎛⎝span ⎞⎠4 Δ ≔――――――lin lintel =0.36 in Max deflection at lintel lintel 384â‹…EHem_Firâ‹…Ilintel spanlintel Δlintel_allow≔―――=0.4 in Allowable deflection at lintel (conservatively 360 selected as live load limit) checklintel_def≔if⎛⎝Δlintel_allow≥Δlintel,“OK” “NG”, ⎞⎠=“OK” Check Compression Perpendicular to Grain (supported ends): Calculated by: Derek Fink, E.I.T Reviewed by: Shannon Emerick, P.E. Page 4 04/11/2024 City of Arlington 640 BPS Building Calculations Check Compression Perpendicular to Grain (supported ends): bjack≔1.5 in hjack≔3.5 in Jack stud dimensions (Try single 2x4) A ≔b â‹…h =5.25 in2 Actual jack stud area jack_stud jack jack Fcp_lintel≔405 psi Allowable unfactored compression perpendicular to grain Hem Fir #2 Cm_lin=1 Wet service factor for lintel (NDS 2018, Table 4A) Ct_lin=1 Temperature factor (NDS 2018, 4.3.4) Ci_lin=1 Incising factor (NDS 2018, 4.3.8) bjack+0.375 in Cb_lin≔―――――=1.25 Bearing area factor (NDS 2018, 3.10.4) bjack Fcp_lintel'≔Fcp_lintelâ‹…Cm_linâ‹…Ct_linâ‹…Ci_linâ‹…Cb_lin=506.25 psi Allowable factored compression perpendicular to grain for jack stud Vlintel 2 Amin_jack_stud≔―――=1.72 in Required end support for lintel Fcp_lintel' checkjack_stud≔if⎛⎝Amin_jack_stud≤Ajack_stud,“OK” “NG”, ⎞⎠=“OK” Built-up lintel using (3) 2 x 8" Hem Fir #2 or better OK. Check Roof Sheathing Thickness - IBC Table 2304.8(5) Calculated by: Derek Fink, E.I.T Reviewed by: Shannon Emerick, P.E. Page 5 04/11/2024 City of Arlington 640 BPS Building Calculations Check Roof Sheathing Thickness - IBC Table 2304.8(5) tsheathing_roof=0.63 in Existing CDX roof sheathing thickness struss=2 ft Existing truss spacing Ld=12.5 psf Roof dead load Ls≔ps=30 psf Unbalanced Roof Snow Load for gable roofs per ASCE Fig. 7-5 Lr≔Ld+Ls=42.5 psf Total roof load Lsheathing_capacity_out≔65 psf Out of plane sheathing capacity (SDPWS 2021 Table 3.2.1A) Existing roof sheathing on existing building sufficient for updated building loads given that the sheathing is still of adequate quality and strength. Lateral Analysis - Wind - ASCE 7-16 Ch 28 Iw≔1.0 Importance factor - ASCE 7 Table 1.5-2 pitch=5 in Roof rise in 12" V3s≔109 mph basic wind speed Exp≔“B” Wind Exposure lb=26 ft Building width without roof overhang wb=22 ft Building length without roof overhang OH=1.5 ft Typical roof overhang hw=10 ft Wall height h=15.42 ft Total building height hr=12.71 ft Mean roof height λ≔1.00 Adjustment for building height/exposure Calculated by: Derek Fink, E.I.T factor - ASCE 7 Figure 28.5-1 Reviewed by: Shannon Emerick, P.E. Page 6 04/11/2024 City of Arlington 640 BPS Building Calculations λ≔1.00 Adjustment for building height/exposure factor - ASCE 7 Figure 28.5-1 K1≔0 K2≔0 K3≔0 Topographic factor for wind K ≔⎛⎝1+K â‹…K â‹…K ⎞⎠2 =1 speed-up - Figure 26.8-1 zt 1 2 3 A B C D E F G H Simplified design wind pressure for structure Ps30=⎡⎣25.4 -1.8 17.6 -0.1 -30.2 -24.4 -21.1 -18.9⎤⎦ psf zones A thru H - ASCE 7 fig 28.5-1 (negative indicates uplift), Exposure B @ 30 ft Ps≔λ Kâ‹… ztâ‹…Iwâ‹…Ps30 A B C D E F G H Ps=⎡⎣25.4 -1.8 17.6 -0.1 -30.2 -24.4 -21.1 -18.9⎤⎦ psf Adjusted design wind pressures for zones A thru H EOH≔λ Kâ‹… ztâ‹…Iwâ‹…-25.8 psf=-25.8 psf Adjusted design wind pressures for overhangs -- (negative indicates uplift) from ASCE 7-16 Table 28.5-1, Exposure B @ 30 ft GOH≔λ Kâ‹… ztâ‹…Iwâ‹…-20.95 psf=-20.95 psf a1≔0.10â‹…wb=2.2 ft a2≔0.4â‹…hr=5.08 ft a3≔0.04â‹…wb=0.88 ft a≔‖if a <a ∧a <a | |=3 ft ‖ 3 2 3 1 | ‖ | ‖ ‖a3 || | ‖ | ‖if a2<a3∧a2<a1| | ‖ ‖ | | Width of Zones A and B per notation in ‖ ‖a2 || | ASCE 7-16 Figure 28.5-1 ‖if a1<a2∧a1<a3| | ‖ ‖ | | ‖ ‖a1 || | ‖if a1<3 ft∨a2<3 ft∨a3<3 ft|| ‖ || ‖ ‖‖ ‖3 ft ||| Wmin≔16 psf⋅⎛⎝lbâ‹…h⎞⎠=6413.33 lbf Minimum Design Wind Load demand Calculated by: Derek Fink, E.I.T Reviewed by: Shannon Emerick, P.E. Page 7 04/11/2024 a≔‖if a <a ∧a <a | |=3 ft ‖ 3 2 3 1 | ‖ | ‖ ‖a3 || | ‖ | ‖if a2<a3∧a2<a1| | ‖ ‖ | | ‖ ‖a2 || | ‖if a1<a2∧a1<a3| | ‖ ‖ | | ‖ ‖a1 || | City of Arlington ‖if a1<3 ft∨a2<3 ft∨a3<3 640 BPS Building Calculationsft|| ‖ || ‖ ‖‖ ‖3 ft ||| Wmin≔16 psf⋅⎛⎝lbâ‹…h⎞⎠=6413.33 lbf Minimum Design Wind Load demand Transverse loading: WT≔Ps â‹…((2â‹…a))â‹…hw+Ps ⋅⎛⎝lb-((2â‹…a))⎞⎠⋅hw-Ps â‹…((2â‹…a))⋅⎛⎝h-hw⎞⎠-Ps ⋅⎛⎝lb-((2â‹…a))⎞⎠⋅⎛⎝h-hw⎞⎠ 0 0, 0 2, 0 1, 0 3, WT=5110 lbf Longitudinal loading: wb 4 WL≔Ps â‹…wbâ‹…hw+Ps ⋅―⋅⎛⎝h-hw⎞⎠+⎛Ps -Ps ⎞⋅((2â‹…a))â‹…hw+⎛Ps -Ps ⎞⋅aâ‹…2â‹…a⋅― 0 2, 0 2, 2 ⎜⎝ 0 0, 0 2, ⎟⎠ ⎜⎝ 0 0, 0 2, ⎟⎠ 12 WL=5427 lbf Wdesign≔max⎛⎝WL,WT,Wmin⎞⎠=6413 lbf Max total lateral wind load demand Check uplift for roof hold downs (Ref: components and cladding, see ASCE Fig. 30.7-2: For Zone G, away from corner of building: Ωwind≔0.6 ASD load factor for wind load Ωdead≔1 ASD load factor for dead load ⎛ wb⎞ ⎛ wb⎞ Wuplift_G≔Ωwind⋅⎜Ps ⋅―⎟+Ωdead⋅⎜Ld ―⎟+Ωwindâ‹…GOHâ‹…OH=-21 plf Max factored uplift at Zone E of ⎝ 0 6, 2 ⎠ ⎝ 2 ⎠ roof minus roof DL For Zone E, near corner of building: ⎛ wb⎞ ⎛ wb⎞ Wuplift_E≔Ωwind⋅⎜Ps ⋅―⎟+Ωdead ⎜Ld⋅―⎟+Ωwindâ‹…EOHâ‹…OH=-85 plf Max factored uplift at Zone E of roof ⎝ 0 4, 2 ⎠ ⎝ 2 ⎠ minus Truss DL, Trusses at 24" oc Ctruss_screw_uplift≔590 lbf SDWC15600 Simpson Screw uplift capacity from narrow face of stud to double 2x top plate sscrew_spacing≔strussâ‹…3=6 ft Spacing of truss screws (multiple of truss spacing) Ctruss_screw_uplift Cuplift_capacity≔―――――=98.33 plf Capacity of uplift per foot sscrew_spacing Since no hold downs are called out in the original design of the building, use Simpson SDWC15600 6" screws in the narrow face of the 2x6 studs into the (2) 2x6 top plate. Install at corners and every 3 trusses minimum. Check uplift at overhang at gable end truss, components and cladding, including uplift anchors: Wuplift_gable≔Ωwindâ‹…EOHâ‹…OH=-23 plf Max uplift at gable end Ωwindâ‹…Ps â‹…h 0 0, w≔―――――=118 plf Wind load transmitted from top of each stud to 2 gable end truss/roof diaphragm. Use Simpson A34 at 32" o.c. max along gable. OK for 400 lbs each, 150 plf Conclusion: It is necessary to include additional roof hold downs, shearwall hold downs, and nailing in order for the building to resist wind loads. Simpson A34 installed at gable end connecting framing to top sill. Trusses not located along the gable end to have SDWC15600 6" screws at each end of each truss for uplift. Lateral Analysis - Seismic - ASCE 7-22 Calculated by: Derek Fink, E.I.T Reviewed by: Shannon Emerick, P.E. Page 8 04/11/2024 Conclusion: City of Arlington It is necessary to include additional roof hold downs, shearwall hold downs, and nailing in order f640 BPS Building Calculations or the building to resist wind loads. Simpson A34 installed at gable end connecting framing to top sill. Trusses not located along the gable end to have SDWC15600 6" screws at each end of each truss for uplift. Lateral Analysis - Seismic - ASCE 7-22 OC22≔4 Occupancy Category from ASCE Table 1-1 Sds_22≔0.91 Response parameter at short periods Sd1_22≔0.51 Response parameter at 1 second period IE_22≔1.5 Seismic Importance Factor from ASCE Table 11.5-1 TL_22≔6 Approximate Fundamental Period (sec) DC22≔“D” Seismic design category from ASCE Tables 11.6-1 & 2 R22≔7 Response Modification factor ASCE Table 12.2-1 (Light framed wood walls with wood structural panels.) Equivalent Lateral Force Procedure: ASCE 12.8 Ct_22≔0.02 x22≔0.75 Parameters used to calculate fundamental period - Table 12.8-2 ⎛h ⎞x22 T ≔C ⋅⎜―w⎟ =0.11 Approximate Fundamental Period (sec) 22 t_22 ⎝ ft ⎠ C ≔‖if T ≤T | |=0.97 max_22 ‖ 22 L_22 | ‖ | ‖ ‖ Sd1_22â‹…IE_22 | | ‖ ――――| | Maximum Value of response coefficient ‖ ‖‖ T22â‹…R22 | | ‖if T22>TL_22 || ‖ || ‖ ‖ ‖ Sd1_22â‹…TL_22â‹…IE_22 || ‖ ――――――2 || ‖ ‖‖ T22 â‹…R22 || ‖ | ‖ S â‹…I || C ≔‖if ――――ds_22 E_22 ≤C |=0.2 Seismic Response Coefficient s_22 max_22| ‖ R22 || ‖ ‖ || ‖ ‖ Sds_22â‹…IE_22 || ―――― ‖ ‖ R || ‖ ‖ 22 | | ‖else || ‖ ‖C || ‖‖ ‖ max_22 ||| Lateral Analysis - Seismic - ASCE 7-16 Calculated by: Derek Fink, E.I.T Reviewed by: Shannon Emerick, P.E. Page 9 04/11/2024 City of Arlington 640 BPS Building Calculations Lateral Analysis - Seismic - ASCE 7-16 OC16≔4 Occupancy Category from ASCE Table 1-1 Sds_16≔0.83 Response parameter at short periods S1_16≔0.37 Mapped response acceleration at 1s period Fv_16≔1.93 Long period site coefficient Sm1_16≔Fv_16â‹…S1_16=0.71 ASCE 7-16 equation 11.4-2 2 Sd1_16≔―⋅Sm1_16=0.48 Response parameter at 1 second period 3 IE_16≔1.5 Seismic Importance Factor from ASCE Table 11.5-1 TL_16≔6 Approximate Fundamental Period (sec) DC16≔“D” Seismic design category from ASCE Tables 11.6-1 & 2 R16≔7 Response Modification factor ASCE Table 12.2-1 (Light framed wood walls with wood structural panels.) Equivalent Lateral Force Procedure: ASCE 12.8 Ct_16≔0.02 x16≔0.75 Parameters used to calculate fundamental period - Table 12.8-2 ⎛h ⎞x16 T ≔C ⋅⎜―w⎟ =0.11 Approximate Fundamental Period (sec) 16 t_16 ⎝ ft ⎠ C ≔‖if T ≤T | |=0.91 max_16 ‖ 16 L_16 | ‖ | ‖ ‖ Sd1_16â‹…IE_16 | | ‖ ――――| | Maximum Value of response coefficient ‖ ‖‖ T16â‹…R16 | | ‖if T16>TL_16 || ‖ || ‖ ‖ ‖ Sd1_16â‹…TL_16â‹…IE_16 || ‖ ――――――2 || ‖ ‖‖ T16 â‹…R16 || ‖ | ‖ S â‹…I || C ≔‖if ――――ds_16 E_16 ≤C |=0.18 Seismic Response Coefficient s_16 max_16| ‖ R16 || ‖ ‖ || ‖ ‖ Sds_16â‹…IE_16 || ―――― ‖ ‖ R || ‖ ‖ 16 | | ‖else || ‖ ‖C || ‖‖ ‖ max_16 ||| Cs≔max⎛⎝Cs_16,Cs_22⎞⎠=0.2 Rw≔Ld⋅⎛⎝wb+2â‹…OH⎞⎠⋅⎛⎝lb+2â‹…OH⎞⎠=9063 lbf Roof weight for DL and roof overhang Ww≔Ld_wallâ‹…hw=120 plf Wall weight per ASCE Table C3.1-1a (conservative) Ww Wwalls≔⎛⎝2â‹…wb+2â‹…lb⎞⎠⋅――=5760 lbf Weight of top half wood walls 2 Wt≔Rw+2â‹…Wwalls=20582.5 lbf Total considered building weight V≔Csâ‹…Wt=4013.59 lbf Seismic Base Shear hw=10 ft Wall height Calculated by: Derek Fink, E.I.T Reviewed by: Shannon Emerick, P.E. Page 10 04/11/2024 City of Arlington 640 BPS Building Calculations V≔Csâ‹…Wt=4013.59 lbf hw=10 ft Wall height ρ≔1.3 Redundancy factor for seismic category D (12.3.4.2) Ωseismic≔0.7 ASD load factor for seismic design Eh≔Ωseismic⋅ρ Vâ‹… =3652 lbf Total Horizontal seismic effect. 0.7 factor for working stress design Vd≔Cs⋅⎛⎝Rw+Wwalls⎞⎠⋅0.7⋅ρ=2630.25 lbf Load to Diaphragm Wh≔Ωwindâ‹…Wdesign=3848 lbf Total horizontal wind load for controlling check check≔‖if E >W ||=“WIND CONTROLS” ‖ h h | ‖ | ‖ ‖“SEISMIC CONTROLS”|| ‖ || else ‖ || ‖ ‖‖ ‖“WIND CONTROLS” ||| Roof Diaphragm Loads Wh Roofw≔―――=87.45 plf Factored load to of roof diaphragm (width) 2⋅⎛⎝wb⎞⎠ Wh Roofl≔――=74 plf Factored load to roof diaphragm (length) 2⋅⎛⎝lb⎞⎠ See IBC table 2306.2.1(1) for sheathing and top plate Calculated by: Derek Fink, E.I.T Reviewed by: Shannon Emerick, P.E. Page 11 04/11/2024 City of Arlington 640 BPS Building Calculations See IBC table 2306.2.1(1) for sheathing and top plate -For tsheathing_roof=0.63 in sheathing, unblocked diaphragm. Assumed 8d nailing @ 6" o.c. panel edges, 12" o.c. field (conservative per SDWPWS 2021 Table 4.2C). ok for unfactored 505 plf, ASD factored 253 plf any configuration -Transfer to top plate with Simpson A34 @ 16" O.C. at gable ends -Transfer to top plate with SDWC 15600 truss screws @ 16" o.c. at eaves Check Roof Chord Forces: Roof â‹…l 2 M ≔―――l b =6253 ft lbfâ‹… Moment in roof diaphragm, length l 8 Roof â‹…w 2 M ≔――――w b =5291 ft lbfâ‹… Moment in roof diaphragm, width w 8 ⎛Ml Mw⎞ TCtop_long≔max⎜―,――⎟=284 lbf Tension/Compression in roof chords/top plate ⎝wb lb ⎠ btop≔1.5 in htop≔5.5 in Dimensions of a single top plate TCtop_long ftc_top_long≔―――=34.45 psi Tensile/compressive stress demand in top plate along btopâ‹…htop length of the building Stud tension capacity: Ft_top≔Ft_stud=400 psi Tension stress parallel to grain, NDS 2018 Table 4A CD_top≔1.6 Load duration factor (NDS 2018, Table 2.3.2) CM_top≔Cm_lin=1 Wet service factor for lintel (NDS 2018, Table 4A) Ct_top≔Ct_lin=1 Temperature factor (NDS 2018, 4.3.4) CF_top≔CF_lin=1.2 Size factor for lintel (NDS 2018, Table 4A) Ci_top≔Ci_lin=1 Incising factor (NDS 2018, 4.3.8) F't_top≔Ft_topâ‹…CD_topâ‹…CM_topâ‹…Ct_topâ‹…CF_topâ‹…Ci_top=768 psi Factored allowable tensile stress check≔if⎛⎝ftc_top_long≤F't_top,“OK” “NG”, ⎞⎠=“OK” Stud compression capacity: Calculated by: Derek Fink, E.I.T Reviewed by: Shannon Emerick, P.E. Page 12 04/11/2024 City of Arlington 640 BPS Building Calculations Stud compression capacity: Fc_top≔Fc_stud=800 psi Compression stress (parallel to grain), NDS 2018 Table 4A CD_top=1.6 Load duration factor (NDS 2018, Table 2.3.2) CM_top=1 Wet service factor for lintel (NDS 2018, Table 4A) Ct_top=1 Temperature factor (NDS 2018, 4.3.4) CF_top=1.2 Size factor for lintel (NDS 2018, Table 4A) Ci_top=1 Incising factor (NDS 2018, 4.3.8) Cp_top≔1 Column stability factor (supported along length) (NDS 2018, 4.3.4) F'C_top≔Fc_studâ‹…CD_topâ‹…CM_topâ‹…Ct_topâ‹…CF_topâ‹…Ci_topâ‹…Cp_top=1536 psi Factored allowable compressive stress, psi check≔if⎛⎝F'C_top≥ftc_top_long,“OK” “NG”, ⎞⎠=“OK” Conclusion: The top plate is sufficient to resist the tensile and compressive demands from diaphragm loadings. Shear Walls Calculated by: Derek Fink, E.I.T Reviewed by: Shannon Emerick, P.E. Page 13 04/11/2024 City of Arlington 640 BPS Building Calculations Shear Walls Given information: hw=10 ft Height of wall wb=22 ft Width of building lb=26 ft Length of building hgarage=9 ft Height of garage wgarage≔spanlintel=12 ft Width of garage hdoor≔7 ft Height of door wdoor≔3 ft Width of door wshear_edge≔4 ft Length of shear edge on both sides of wall, shown Sheathing information: vsheathing≔730 plf Sheathing capacity (SDPWS 2021 Table 4.3A, Sheathing panels, 8d, Wind, 6" spacing at edges) Panels≔3 ft+1.5 in=3.13 ft Length of shear panel Sheathing demands: hw Saspect≔――=2.86 ft Maximum shear wall aspect ratio (SDPWS 3.5 2021 Table 4.3.4, Structural panels, blocked)) wshear_length≔wshear_edgeâ‹…2+3 ft=11 ft Length along wall able to be used as shear length A ≔l â‹…h =260 ft2 Area of wall wall b w A ≔w â‹…h =110 ft2 Area of full height sheathing fhs shear_length w A ≔h â‹…w +h â‹…w =129 ft2 Area of openings in wall 0 door door garage garage Afhs ――=0.42 Ratio of percent full height sheathing Awall A0 ――=0.5 Awall C0_wall≔0.53 Effective shear capacity adjustment factor (SDPWS 2021 Table 4.3.5.6, 10' wall) Ωsheathing≔2 ASD shear adjustment per SDPWS 2015 4.3.3 Calculated by: Derek Fink, E.I.T Reviewed by: Shannon Emerick, P.E. Page 14 04/11/2024 City of Arlington 640 BPS Building Calculations C0_wall≔0.53 Effective shear capacity adjustment factor (SDPWS 2021 Table 4.3.5.6, 10' wall) Ωsheathing≔2 ASD shear adjustment per SDPWS 2015 4.3.3 vsheathing vsheathing_cap≔―――⋅C0_wall=193.45 plf Factored shear capacity of sheathing Ωsheathing Sheathing demands: Wh Vwall_demand≔――=1924 lbf Shear load to one wall 2 Vwall_demand vs_wall≔――――=174.91 plf Load to shear wall panels wshear_length check≔if⎛⎝vsheathing_cap≥vs_wall,“OK” “NG”, ⎞⎠=“OK” Check dead load resistance on wall to see if hold-downs may be eliminated: ⎛s ⎞ L ≔Ω â‹…L ⋅⎜――truss +OH⎟+Ω â‹…W =151.25 plf Factored dead load from roof and wall wall dead d dead w ⎝ 2 ⎠ L â‹…l 2 R ≔―――wall b =51122.5 ft lbfâ‹… Factored resisting moment due to dead loads wall 2 OT≔Vwall_demandâ‹…hw=19240 ft lbfâ‹… Factored overturning moment on wall Gravity loads alone are adequate to hold check≔if⎛⎝Rwall≥OT,“OK” “NG”, ⎞⎠=“OK” the loads from wind. Hold downs are not required at the corners of building Check shear panel deflection: SDPWS 4.3.2 Calculated by: Derek Fink, E.I.T Reviewed by: Shannon Emerick, P.E. Page 15 04/11/2024 City of Arlington 640 BPS Building Calculations Check shear panel deflection: SDPWS 4.3.2 bpanel≔Panels=3.13 ft Panel Width da≔0 in Vertical elongation of anchorage at design load, v Estud=1200000 psi Elastic modulus of studs/boundary element en≔0.03â‹…in Nail deformation Table 2305.2.2(1) lbf G≔38500 ― Panel rigidity per in. of thickness Table 2305.2.2(2) in 1 t≔―in Panel thickness determined above 2 hw=10 ft Wall height vs_wall=174.91 plf Shear due to design loads A ≔5.5 inâ‹…1.5 in=8.25 in2 Area of end post cross-section stud 8â‹…v â‹…h 3 v â‹…h h â‹…d Δ≔―――――s_wall w +―――s_wall w +――w a =0.54 in Estimated deflection SDPWS (4.3-1) Estudâ‹…Astudâ‹…bpanel 1000 G bpanel Δal≔0.015â‹…hw=1.8 in Allowable deflection per ASCE 7 12.12-1 (essential facility) check≔if⎛⎝Δal≥Δ,“OK” “NG”, ⎞⎠=“OK” Transfer Shear to Foundation/Diaphragm: 1/2" Anchor Bolt Capacity: NDS Table 12E ts≔1.5 in Side member Thickness Lbolt_parallel≔590 lbf Bolt design value in Hem Fir for 6" embedment depth CD≔1.6 Load duration factor Zp≔Lbolt_parallelâ‹…CD=944 lbf Allowable load sbolt≔24 in Bolt spacing vs_wall vs_wall_transfer≔――=330.02 plf Factored wall shear demand C0_wall Zp C≔――=472 plf Capacity based on bolt spacing sbolt Check≔if⎛⎝C>vs_wall_transfer,“OK” “NG”, ⎞⎠=“OK” Max shear to south panels vs_wall_transfer=330.02 plf < C=472 plf- Existing anchorage at 48" o.c. inadequate. Add 1/2" epoxy anchor at 48" o.c. for 24" overall spacing of anchorage. Embed 6" into existing foundation with HILTI-RE 500-V3 epoxy Roof Ventilation Calculations (IBC 1203.2) Calculated by: Derek Fink, E.I.T Reviewed by: Shannon Emerick, P.E. Page 16 04/11/2024 City of Arlington Max shear to south panels vs_wall_transfer640 BPS Building Calculations=330.02 plf < C=472 plf- Existing anchorage at 48" o.c. inadequate. Add 1/2" epoxy anchor at 48" o.c. for 24" overall spacing of anchorage. Embed 6" into existing foundation with HILTI-RE 500-V3 epoxy Roof Ventilation Calculations (IBC 1203.2) Roof Dimensions: l =26 ft w =22 ft Area≔l â‹…w =572 ft2 b b b b Total ventilation area required per IBC V ≔――lbâ‹…wb =0.38 ft2 1202.4.1.2 req 1500 Vreq 2 ――=0.19 ft Ventilated area required in upper and lower 2 half of roof. V in2 ――req =1.06 ―― Required net free ventilated area per linear 2â‹…lb ft foot for ridge vents (sq in per ft) Existing (2) 12" x 12" vents provide enough ventilation for roof. Check wall for out-of-plane loads: Assume wall pinned at top and bottom W≔Ωwindâ‹…Ps =15.25 psf Max wind load in region A of end walls (see diagram) 0 0, P≔Lwâ‹…2 ft=213 lbf Max axial load to each stud from roof dstud≔5.5 in Depth of stud bstud≔1.5 in Width of stud P fc≔―――=26 psi Max compression to each stud dstudâ‹…bstud Check Bending (3.3.2) Fb_stud=675 psi Design allowable bending stress Table 4A, Hem Fir stud Grade CD_stud≔1.6 Load duration factor (NDS 2018, Table 2.3.2) CM_stud≔CM_top=1 Wet service factor for lintel (NDS 2018, Table 4A) Ct_stud≔Ct_top=1 Temperature factor (NDS 2018, 4.3.4) CF_stud≔1.0 Size factor (NDS 2018, Table 4A) Cfu_stud≔1 Flat use factor (NDS 2018, Table 4D) Ci_stud≔Ci_top=1 Incising factor (NDS 2018, 4.3.8) Cr_stud≔1.15 Repetitive member factor ((NDS 2018, 4.3.9) Estud=1200000 psi Modulus of Elasticity for stud (3.7.1) H≔hw=10 ft Unrestrained height ‖ H | | le≔‖if ――<7| |=17.68 ft ‖ dstud | | Effective length for use in calculating beam ‖ ‖ | | ‖ ‖2.06â‹…H | | stability factor. (NDS Table 3.3.3) ‖ H || ‖if ――≥7 || ‖ dstud || ‖ ‖1.63â‹…H+3â‹…d || ‖ ‖ stud|| ‾‾‾‾‾‾leâ‹…dstud RB≔ ―――=22.77 Slenderness Ratio (Eq 3.3-5) b 2 stud Calculated by: Derek Fink, E.I.T Reviewed by: Shannon Emerick, P.E. Page 17 04/11/2024 City of Arlington ‾‾‾‾‾‾ 640 BPS Building Calculations leâ‹…dstud RB≔ ―――=22.77 b 2 stud 1.2â‹…Estud FbE_stud≔―――=2777.42 psi Per NDS 3.3.3.6 for Beam stability calculation R 2 B ⎛ F ⎞ ‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾⎛ ⎛ F ⎞⎞2 F 1+⎜―――――――bE_stud ⎟ ⎜1+⎜―――――――bE_stud ⎟⎟ ―――――――bE_stud ⎝Fb_studâ‹…CD_studâ‹…CF_stud⎠ ⎜ ⎝Fb_studâ‹…CD_studâ‹…CF_stud⎠⎟ Fb_studâ‹…CD_studâ‹…CF_stud CL_stud≔―――――――――- ―――――――――-――――――― 1.9 ⎜⎝ 1.9 ⎟⎠ 0.95 CL_stud=0.97 Beam Stability Factor (Eq 3.3-6) F'b_stud≔Fb_studâ‹…CD_studâ‹…CM_studâ‹…Ct_studâ‹…CL_studâ‹…CF_studâ‹…Cfu_studâ‹…Ci_studâ‹…Cr_stud F'b_stud=1205.46 psi Factored allowable bending stress ww≔Wâ‹…2 ft=30.49 plf Wind load to each stud, studs @ 2' o.c. w â‹…h 2 M ≔―――w w =381.15 lbf ftâ‹… Bending moment to ea stud w_stud 8 b â‹…d 2 S ≔――――stud stud =7.56 in3 Section modulus stud 6 Mw_stud fb_stud≔―――=604.8 psi Actual bending stress in stud Sstud check≔if⎛⎝fb_stud≤F'b_stud,“OK” “NG”, ⎞⎠=“OK” Check combined bending and axial compression (NDS 3.9) d1≔dstud=5.5 in Wide face dimension of stud d2≔bstud=1.5 in Narrow face dimension of stud le1≔12 in Effective unbraced length in weak axis direction (sheathing provides support in weak axis) le2≔le=17.68 ft Effective unbraced length in strong axis direction fc=26 psi Actual compressive stress in stud calc'd above .822â‹…Estud FcE1≔――――=207212.5 psi Allowable weak axis bending stress ⎛l ⎞2 ⎜―e1⎟ ⎝d1⎠ .822â‹…Estud FcE2≔――――=663.28 psi ⎛l ⎞2 ⎜―e2⎟ ⎝d1⎠ check≔if⎛⎝fc≤FcE1,“OK” “NG”, ⎞⎠=“OK” check≔if⎛⎝fc<FcE2,“OK” “NG”, ⎞⎠=“OK” fb1≔fb_stud=604.8 psi Allowable strong axis bending stress (biaxial) Calculated by: Derek Fink, E.I.T Reviewed by: Shannon Emerick, P.E. Page 18 04/11/2024 City of Arlington 640 BPS Building Calculations check≔if⎛⎝fc<FcE2,“OK” “NG”, ⎞⎠=“OK” fb1≔fb_stud=604.8 psi Allowable strong axis bending stress (biaxial) fb1=605 psi Actual edgewise bending stress fb2≔0 psi Actual flatwise bending stress Fb1≔F'b_stud=1205.46 psi Allowable Edgewise bending stress Fb2≔F'b_stud=1205.46 psi Allowable Flatwise bending stress .822â‹…Estud FbE≔――――=1902.53 psi Allowable for biaxial bending R 2 B check≔if⎛⎝fb1<FbE,“OK” “NG”, ⎞⎠=“OK” ⎛ f ⎞2 f f F ≔⎜――c ⎟ +――――――b1 +――――――――b2 =0.51 BC ⎝FcT⎠ ⎛ ⎛ fc ⎞⎞ ⎛ f ⎛ f ⎞2⎞ F ⋅⎜1-⎜――⎟⎟ F ⋅⎜1-――c - ――b1 ⎟ b1 ⎝ ⎝F ⎠⎠ b2 F ⎜F ⎟ cE1 ⎜⎝ cE2 ⎝ bE⎠ ⎟⎠ check≔if⎛⎝FBC≤1.0 “OK” “NG”, , ⎞⎠=“OK” Check transmission of out-of-plane loads from bottom of wall to base plate: wline≔hwâ‹…W=152 plf Wind load transmitted from top of each stud (at 12" o.c.) to top/ bottom of walls Lbolt_perp≔340 lbf Bolt to concrete perpendicular capacity per NDS 2018 table 12E Lbolt_perp wcap≔―――=340 plf Capacity of 1/2" bolts in hem-fir base 1 ft plate at 12" o.c., perpendicular to grain check≔if⎛⎝wline≤wcap,“OK” “NG”, ⎞⎠=“OK” Calculated by: Derek Fink, E.I.T Reviewed by: Shannon Emerick, P.E. Page 19 04/11/2024 APPENDIX A: ASCE 7-16 HAZARDS REPORT ASCE Hazards Report Address: Standard: ASCE/SEI 7-16 Latitude: 48.15073 No Address at This Location Risk Category: IV Longitude: -122.106851 Soil Class: D - Default (see Elevation: 503.30516593516114 ft Section 11.4.3) (NAVD 88) Wind Results: Wind Speed 109 Vmph 10-year MRI 68 Vmph 25-year MRI 74 Vmph 50-year MRI 79 Vmph 100-year MRI 84 Vmph Data Source: ASCE/SEI 7-16, Fig. 26.5-1D and Figs. CC.2-1–CC.2-4, and Section 26.5.2 Date Accessed: Tue Jan 30 2024 Value provided is 3-second gust wind speeds at 33 ft above ground for Exposure C Category, based on linear interpolation between contours. Wind speeds are interpolated in accordance with the 7-16 Standard. Wind speeds correspond to approximately a 1.6% probability of exceedance in 50 years (annual exceedance probability = 0.00033, MRI = 3,000 years). Site is not in a hurricane-prone region as defined in ASCE/SEI 7-16 Section 26.2. https://ascehazardtool.org/ Page 1 of 4 Tue Jan 30 2024 APPENDIX A: ASCE 7-16 HAZARDS REPORT Seismic Site Soil Class: D - Default (see Section 11.4.3) Results: SS : 1.038 SD1 : N/A S1 : 0.37 TL : 6 Fa : 1.2 PGA : 0.441 Fv : N/A PGA M : 0.529 SMS : 1.245 FPGA : 1.2 SM1 : N/A Ie : 1.5 SDS : 0.83 Cv : 1.308 Ground motion hazard analysis may be required. See ASCE/SEI 7-16 Section 11.4.8. Data Accessed: Tue Jan 30 2024 Date Source: USGS Seismic Design Maps https://ascehazardtool.org/ Page 2 of 4 Tue Jan 30 2024 APPENDIX A: ASCE 7-16 HAZARDS REPORT Snow Results: Mapped Elevation: Data Source: Date Accessed: Tue Jan 30 2024 In "Case Study" areas, site-specific case studies are required to establish ground snow loads. Extreme local variations in ground snow loads in these areas preclude mapping at this scale. Ground snow load determination for such sites shall be based on an extreme value statistical analysis of data available in the vicinity of the site using a value with a 2 percent annual probability of being exceeded (50-year mean recurrence interval). Statutory requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction are not included. Site is outside ASCE/SEI 7-16, Table 7.2-5 boundaries. For ground snow loads in this area, see SEAW Snow Load Analysis for Washington, 2nd Ed. (1995). Snow load values are mapped to a 0.5 mile resolution. This resolution can Structural Engineers Association of Washington, Seattle, WA. create a mismatch between the mapped elevation and the site-specific elevation in topographically complex areas. Engineers should consult the local authority having jurisdiction in locations where the reported ‘elevation’ and ‘mapped elevation’ differ significantly from each other. https://ascehazardtool.org/ Page 3 of 4 Tue Jan 30 2024 APPENDIX A: ASCE 7-16 HAZARDS REPORT The ASCE Hazard Tool is provided for your convenience, for informational purposes only, and is provided “as is” and without warranties of any kind. The location data included herein has been obtained from information developed, produced, and maintained by third party providers; or has been extrapolated from maps incorporated in the ASCE standard. While ASCE has made every effort to use data obtained from reliable sources or methodologies, ASCE does not make any representations or warranties as to the accuracy, completeness, reliability, currency, or quality of any data provided herein. Any third-party links provided by this Tool should not be construed as an endorsement, affiliation, relationship, or sponsorship of such third-party content by or from ASCE. ASCE does not intend, nor should anyone interpret, the results provided by this Tool to replace the sound judgment of a competent professional, having knowledge and experience in the appropriate field(s) of practice, nor to substitute for the standard of care required of such professionals in interpreting and applying the contents of this Tool or the ASCE standard. In using this Tool, you expressly assume all risks associated with your use. Under no circumstances shall ASCE or its officers, directors, employees, members, affiliates, or agents be liable to you or any other person for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages arising from or related to your use of, or reliance on, the Tool or any information obtained therein. To the fullest extent permitted by law, you agree to release and hold harmless ASCE from any and all liability of any nature arising out of or resulting from any use of data provided by the ASCE Hazard Tool. https://ascehazardtool.org/ Page 4 of 4 Tue Jan 30 2024 APPENDIX B: ASCE 7-22 HAZARDS REPORT ASCE Hazards Report Address: Standard: ASCE/SEI 7-22 Latitude: 48.150523 17003 91st Ave NE Risk Category: IV Longitude: -122.106572 Arlington, Washington Soil Class: Default Elevation: 503.6226568902027 ft 98223 (NAVD 88) Wind Results: Wind Speed 109 Vmph 10-year MRI 68 Vmph 25-year MRI 74 Vmph 50-year MRI 79 Vmph 100-year MRI 84 Vmph 300-year MRI 92 Vmph 700-year MRI 98 Vmph 1,700-year MRI 105 Vmph 3,000-year MRI 109 Vmph 10,000-year MRI 118 Vmph 100,000-year MRI 136 Vmph 1,000,000-year MRI 154 Vmph Data Source: ASCE/SEI 7-22, Fig. 26.5-1D and Figs. CC.2-1–CC.2-4, and Section 26.5.2 Date Accessed: Mon Apr 08 2024 https://ascehazardtool.org/ Page 1 of 5 Thu Apr 11 2024 Value provided is 3-second gust wind speeds at 33 ft above ground for Exposure C Category, based on linear interpolation between contours. Wind speeds are interpolated in accordance with the 7-22 Standard. Wind speeds correspond to approximately a 1.6% probability of exceedance in 50 years (annual exceedance probability = 0.00033, MRI = 3,000 years). Values for 10-year MRI, 25-year MRI, 50-year MRI and 100-year MRI are Service Level wind speeds, all other wind speeds are Ultimate wind speeds. Site is not in a hurricane-prone region as defined in ASCE/SEI 7-22 Section 26.2. https://ascehazardtool.org/ Page 2 of 5 Thu Apr 11 2024 Seismic Site Soil Class: Default Results: PGA M : 0.55 TL : 6 SMS : 1.36 SS : 1.15 SM1 : 0.77 S1 : 0.34 SDS : 0.91 VS30 : 260 SD1 : 0.51 Seismic Design Category: D Multi-Period MCE SpectrumR Multi-Period Design Spectrum S (g) vs T(s)a S (g) vs T(s)a Two-Period MCE SpectrumR Two-Period Design Spectrum S (g) vs T(s)a S (g) vs T(s)a MCE Vertical Response SpectrumR Design Vertical Response Spectrum Vertical ground motion data has not yet been made Vertical ground motion data has not yet been made available by USGS. available by USGS. https://ascehazardtool.org/ Page 3 of 5 Thu Apr 11 2024 Data Accessed: Mon Apr 08 2024 Date Source: USGS Seismic Design Maps based on ASCE/SEI 7-22 and ASCE/SEI 7-22 Table 1.5-2. Additional data for site-specific ground motion procedures in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7-22 Ch. 21 are available from USGS. https://ascehazardtool.org/ Page 4 of 5 Thu Apr 11 2024 The ASCE Hazard Tool is provided for your convenience, for informational purposes only, and is provided “as is” and without warranties of any kind. The location data included herein has been obtained from information developed, produced, and maintained by third party providers; or has been extrapolated from maps incorporated in the ASCE standard. While ASCE has made every effort to use data obtained from reliable sources or methodologies, ASCE does not make any representations or warranties as to the accuracy, completeness, reliability, currency, or quality of any data provided herein. Any third-party links provided by this Tool should not be construed as an endorsement, affiliation, relationship, or sponsorship of such third-party content by or from ASCE. ASCE does not intend, nor should anyone interpret, the results provided by this Tool to replace the sound judgment of a competent professional, having knowledge and experience in the appropriate field(s) of practice, nor to substitute for the standard of care required of such professionals in interpreting and applying the contents of this Tool or the ASCE standard. In using this Tool, you expressly assume all risks associated with your use. Under no circumstances shall ASCE or its officers, directors, employees, members, affiliates, or agents be liable to you or any other person for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages arising from or related to your use of, or reliance on, the Tool or any information obtained therein. To the fullest extent permitted by law, you agree to release and hold harmless ASCE from any and all liability of any nature arising out of or resulting from any use of data provided by the ASCE Hazard Tool. https://ascehazardtool.org/ Page 5 of 5 Thu Apr 11 2024 THE CONTENT OF THIS DOCUMENT, AS A MEANS OF PROFESSIONAL SERVICE, IS PROTECTED BY 17 U.S.C. § 101, ET SEQ. AS SUCH, IT SHALL NOT BE USED, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, FOR ANY OTHER PROJECT OR PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM RH2 ENGINEERING. © 2024 RH2 ENGINEERING, INC. Table of Contents Table of Contents Table of Contents Table of Contents Table of Contents Table of Contents Table of Contents ‐ APPENDICES Division 1 General 1.10 GENERAL Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” shall apply to all following subsections whether directly referenced or not. Sections in these specifications titled “Related Sections” shall be read as integral to the specification as if they were fully detailed within. All work and materials described in such sections shall be provided and performed by the Contractor. 1.10.16 Definitions [CSI 01 42 16] Approximate: Generally as shown or described, but has not been verified, or may require adjustment. No level of accuracy is implied or should be assumed. Or Equal (Or Approved Equal): An alternate product, assembly, or method that the Owner’s Representative has reviewed based on information provided by the Contractor and determined to provide functional equivalence, or better, than that specified. Such determination does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility should the product, assembly, or method fail to perform as needed. Owner’s Representative: Person(s) authorized by the Owner to observe the work, administer the contract, approve tests, make decisions, and otherwise act as an agent of the Owner. The terms Engineer, Owner’s Observer, Owner’s Inspector, and Owner are generally interchangeable with the term Owner’s Representative. Proposed: The word refers to work that is part of the Contract, to be performed by the Contractor. The word “proposed” does not need to show up to indicate work by the Contractor. Unless work is specifically noted to be performed by others, all work is to be performed by the Contractor. 1.11.00 Summary of Work [CSI 01 11 00] The 640 Zone Booster Pump Station portion of the project consists of the construction of water main, pump and control skid offload and installation, wood framed building remodel, piping connections, power drop, controls startup, testing and integration. In particular, the project involves: PumpTech: Pump system manufacturer, delivery, start-up & training. Pumptech will work directly with and be paid directly by the City. Cummins: ATS will be provided by Cummins and installed by the general contractor or subcontractor with arrival of the ATS in October 2024. Cummins will supply and install the generator in January 2025 separately with testing and startup provided by Cummins or a subcontractor not part of this contract. Process Solutions: Programming PLC, ATS & Generator integration into PLC paid for directly by the City. 1-1 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\1 General.docx 8/19/24 2:09 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 1 Verkada: Cameras (2), man door access control contracted and paid for directly by the City. Contractor: All other items provided, installed and coordinated by the bidding contractor. The Pressure Reducing Station portion of the project entails installing a pressure reducing station assembly, precast vault, and connecting to the existing water main at the intertie to the SnoPUD water system. This project has no Federal Funding Requirements. 1.11.02 Reuse of Documents [CSI 01 11 30] Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier shall not: 1. Have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media editions; or 2. Reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer. 3. The prohibitions of this Paragraph will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes. 1.11.03 Electronic Data [CSI 01 31 26] 1. Unless otherwise stated in the Supplementary Conditions, the data furnished by Owner to Contractor, or by Contractor to Owner, that may be relied upon are limited to the printed copies (also known as hard copies). Files in electronic media format of text, data, graphics, or other types are furnished only for the convenience of the receiving party. Any conclusion or information obtained or derived from such electronic files will be at the user’s sole risk. If there is a discrepancy between the electronic files and the hard copies, the hard copies govern. 2. Because data stored in electronic media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently or otherwise without authorization of the data’s creator, the party receiving electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within 30 days, after which the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred. Any errors detected within the 30-day acceptance period will be corrected by the transferring party. 3. When transferring documents in electronic media format, the transferring party makes no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by the data’s creator. 1-2 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\1 General.docx 8/19/24 2:09 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 1 4. Computer Aided Design (CAD) files may be made available to the Contractor upon request, but only at the discretion of the Engineer. This includes AutoCADâ„¢, Civil3Dâ„¢, or other similar file types. If CAD files are provided, no level of accuracy is implied or should be assumed unless the Engineer expressly states a level of accuracy. CAD files by nature include extraneous information used to develop the drawings but are not part of the final design. Any use of CAD files is solely at the Contractor’s risk and neither the Engineer nor the Owner take responsibility for interpretations by the Contractor, missing information, or inaccurate information. 1.13 Permits and Licenses [CSI 01 41 26] The Owner will pay all costs for (unless stated otherwise) and secure the following permits: Building Permit Right-of Way Permit (not required as this is a City project) Stormwater Permit. The Contractor shall acquire and pay all costs for all other necessary permits which may include: Electrical Permit A copy of permits the Owner has acquired are available at the Owner’s office for examination by bidders. Conform to the requirements of these permits and all other permits issued for this project. Permits the Owner will acquire after the bid opening will be made available when received by the Owner. 1.14 Work Restrictions [CSI 01 14 00] 1.14.19 Use of Site [CSI 01 14 19] The Contractor shall not perform work activities, store materials or equipment, move equipment through, or disturb in any way the areas outside the “Building Construction Limits” and “Utility Construction Limits” shown unless approved by the Owner in writing. Building construction limits may be occupied throughout the duration of the contract. Utility construction limits may be occupied throughout the duration of the contract with one- way traffic allowed during active construction and two-way traffic during off work hours. The Contractor shall provide, maintain, and adjust erosion control fencing, surface covering, and sediment traps for storm-water runoff as shown on the plans prior to beginning any work activities within this area. 1-3 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\1 General.docx 8/19/24 2:09 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 1 1.20 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES [CSI 01 20 00] 1.21.29 Quantity Allowances [CSI 01 21 29] If more or fewer materials are needed when the construction quantity is within plus or minus 25 percent of the bid quantity, costs for restocking of unused materials, or handling and delivery costs on additional materials shall be incidental to the bid price and no additional payment will be made. The following bid items are not subject to a renegotiation of price. A change in quantity, including zero quantity, shall not be cause for unit price adjustment to these or other related bid items. Payment will be made only for actual quantity incurred. Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Material Commercial HMA (all items) 1.21.55 Cost Increases for Materials [CSI 01 21 55] There will be no allowance for additional payment should the cost of any materials go up during the original contract timeframe, or during any approved contract time extensions. The Contractor is responsible for securing prices at the time of bid. 1.25.00 Substitution Procedures [CSI 1 25 00] Any product or construction method that, in the opinion of the Owner, does not meet these specifications will be considered a substitution. Substitutions must be approved prior to incorporation into the project. The Owner has the right to reject any request for substitution. Incomplete requests will not be reviewed. Requests shall include an explanation of why the request is being made along with drawings, details, specifications, and samples sufficient to allow the Owner to evaluate the proposed substitute. Requests shall include any change necessary in construction methods with a detailed description and related drawings of the proposed methods. Provide an itemized comparison of each proposed substitution with the specified product or method. If the Contractor believes there are no variations from the bid documents, include a statement to that fact in the request for substitution. In making a request for a substitution, the Contractor represents that they have investigated the proposed product or method and has determined that it provides equal or superior form and function to the product specified. The Contractor shall coordinate incorporation of accepted substitutions into the work, making changes that may be required for the work to be completed. 1-4 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\1 General.docx 8/19/24 2:09 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 1 The Contractor waives all claims for additional costs and time related to substitutions. The Owner reserves the right to charge the Contractor for the Owner’s time required for incorporating the substitution into the work which may include but not be limited to observation, requests for information, and commissioning. No guarantee is made that product model numbers included in the specifications or on the plans are current at the time of bidding. The bidder shall provide pricing in their proposal for current versions of discontinued models. If the bidder is uncertain of the correct replacement model, or feels there is a price discrepancy, the bidder shall request a substitution following the requirements of section 1.25.13.10 Substitutions Prior to Bid Opening. Requests for price increases after award will not be accepted. 1.25.13.10 Substitutions Prior to Bid Opening [CSI 1 25 13 10] Before opening bids, the Owner may consider written requests from product suppliers or prime bidders for substitutions. All requests for substitution must be received by Owner a minimum of 7 working days prior to bid opening. Approval of substitutions will be only by addendum. The bidder shall include in their proposal all costs for any modifications required to adopt the substitute. 1.25.13.15 Substitutions After Contract Execution [CSI 1 25 13 15] After contract execution, the Owner will consider requests for a substitution of products or methods in place of those specified. Submit electronically, or two hard copies of each request for a substitution. Submit requests early enough for the Owner to review the request without affecting the schedule. The Owner will review with reasonable promptness and will provide a response within 15 working days after receipt of all information required for the review, unless the complexity of the proposed substitution requires, in the Owner’s sole opinion, additional review time. If the Owner approves a request for substitution, and the Contractor subsequently requests an alternate substitution for the same or similar work, the Owner reserves the right to charge the Contractor for the costs required to review the alternate substitution. 1.30 ADMINISTRATIVE [CSI 01 30 00] 1.31 Project Management and Coordination [CSI 01 31 00] 1.31.01 Contractor’s Responsibility [CSI 01 31 01] The work included in this contract is shown on the contract plans and described in these project specifications. All work incidental and necessary to the completion of the work 1-5 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\1 General.docx 8/19/24 2:09 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 1 described and shown shall be performed by the Contractor. In submitting a bid for this project, the Bidder warrants that they are an expert in this and related work, that they understand the process and functions shown, and that various work and processes not shown but necessary for the successful operation of this project will be provided by the Contractor. The General (or Prime) Contractor is fully responsible for providing the subcontractors and suppliers with all relevant portions of the plans and specifications necessary to bid and construct the improvements. Damage to existing utilities or property shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at the discretion of the Owner. The Contractor and each of the Subcontractors are responsible for coordinating the required inspections. There are specific requirements for inspection responsibilities and the advance notice that must be given to minimize construction delays. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to be familiar with these requirements, include the coordination necessary in this estimate of project costs and schedule, and to comply with the requirements during construction. Failure to follow proper inspection and notification procedures may result in on-site work stoppages and removal or demolition of unapproved structures or systems, all at the Contractor’s expense. See Starting and Adjusting section for details. Do not start work on this project or on any public or private right-of-way or easement until clearance is given by the Owner. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of any permit for the project. Do not hinder private property access without a 24-hour notice to the private property owner, and do not hinder access for more than an 8-hour period. Do not disrupt emergency aid access to private property. The Contractor is solely responsible for all elements of site safety. Inspections performed by the Owner are only to monitor and record that project plans and specifications are being complied with and construction is consistent with the design intent. The Contractor is responsible for managing, coordinating, and overseeing its subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers’ representatives, or any other persons performing Work. The Contractor shall designate and have a competent person, familiar with the project and work being performed, on site at all times when work is being performed. 1.31.19 Progress Meetings [CSI 01 31 19 23] The Contractor shall schedule and hold regular on-site progress meetings at least every two weeks and at other times as requested by the Owner or as required by progress of the work. The Contractor, Owner, and all Subcontractors active on the site must attend each meeting. Contractor to provide an agenda covering the following items at a minimum, as applicable. 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems that impede planned schedule. 1-6 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\1 General.docx 8/19/24 2:09 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 1 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Discussion of upcoming required inspections/approvals. 12. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 13. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 14. Safety issues relating to work. 15. Other business relating to work. 1.32.13 Scheduling of Work [CSI 01 32 13] Completion Times: Substantial Completion shall be 180 Calendar Days. Final Completion including all punchlist items complete shall occur 25 Calendar Days after Substantial Completion. Where the plans or specifications mention notification periods in hours or days, these time periods are assumed to be working days unless specifically stated otherwise. For example, a requirement of 48-hours notification for work desired to be performed at 1:00 pm Monday requires notification be provided no later than 1:00 pm the preceding Thursday. 1.32.16 Construction Progress Schedule [CSI 01 32 16] Contractor is responsible for providing an up to date construction schedule with each monthly pay estimate and at other times as requested by the Owner or as required by progress of the work. If the current schedule is still in-line with the previous schedule, the Contractor shall inform the Owner with each pay estimate. Non-working day requests shall also be submitted by the Contractor with each monthly pay estimate. Owner may delay monthly progress payments if Contractor fails to submit updated schedule and non-working day requests. 1.32.29 Periodic Work Observation [CSI 01 32 29] The Owner may elect to have an observer on site to monitor, observe and record construction progress. The Contractor maintains complete responsibility to verify construction is meeting the design intent and is being constructed in accordance with the plans and specifications. It is not the responsibility of the Owner’s observer to address neither means and methods issues 1-7 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\1 General.docx 8/19/24 2:09 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 1 nor direct safety issues. The Owner’s observer does not have the authority to stop work if unsafe conditions are observed. 1.33 Submittals [CSI 01 33 00] 1.33.23 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples [CSI 01 33 23] Submittals are required for all items installed on this contract. Address submittals to: RH2 Engineering, Inc. 4164 Meridian Street, Suite 301 Bellingham WA 98226 Attn: Kaylie Dennehy Email: kdennehy@rh2.com Submittals may be provided in electronic format (preferred) or hard copy. Owner reserves the right to require the Contractor to provide hard-copy submittals at no additional cost to the Owner. When hard-copy submittals are provided, submit three (3) copies; one set will be returned to the Contractor after review. Electronic submittal via email is acceptable, however the Contractor shall follow up with the Owner to verify that the submittal was received. The Owner assumes no responsibility for emails that do not make it to the recipient. In the case of electronic submittals, only one copy will be returned to the Contractor, either electronically or hard copy at the Owner’s discretion. Submittal data shall contain sufficient information on each item to determine if it complies with the contract requirements. Submittal cutsheets and datasheets shall be annotated by the Contractor to clearly indicate the equipment and materials that will be provided, including any options or additive items. No generic cutsheets or datasheets will be accepted. Items installed in the work that have not been approved through the submittal process shall be removed and an approved product shall be furnished, all at the Contractor’s expense. Shop drawing review will be limited to general design requirements only and shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions, or responsibility for consequences due to deviations from the contract documents. No changes may be made in any submittal after it has been reviewed except with written notice and approval from the Owner. Shop drawings shall be submitted on 8½-inch by 11-inch, 11-inch by 17-inch, or 22-inch by 34-inch sheets and shall contain the following information: Project Name as it appears on the Document Cover. Prime Contractor and Applicable Subcontractor. RH2 Engineering. Owner’s Name (City of Arlington). 1-8 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\1 General.docx 8/19/24 2:09 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 1 Applicable Specification and Drawings Reference. A stamp or statement that the Contractor has checked the equipment for conformance with the contract requirements, coordination with other work on the job, and dimensional suitability. A place for the Engineer to respond. (Engineer may elect to respond using the Engineer’s standard forms.) Submittals that do not comply with these requirements may be returned to the Contractor for re-submittal. The Contractor shall revise and resubmit as necessary. Acceptable submittals will be reviewed as promptly as possible and transmitted to the Contractor not later than 10 working days after receipt by the Engineer. Delays caused by the need for re-submittal shall not be a basis for an extension of contract time or delay damages. Shop drawings and submittals shall contain the following information: 1. Drawings, dimensions, and weights. 2. Catalog information. 3. Model number, including descriptions for option and accessory codes. 4. Manufacturer’s specifications. 5. Special handling instructions. 6. Maintenance requirements. 7. Wiring and control diagrams. 8. List of contract exceptions. For integrated or package systems (see also 1.61.31), the components, shop drawings, instructions, and other elements may be submitted and reviewed individually. But the initial submittal must include the complete proposed system, and the final submittal must also be for the complete system clearly indicating all changes made during the submittal process. The Contractor warrants that they have determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, and have checked and coordinated each submittal with the requirements of the work and of the contract documents. The Owner will pay the costs and provide review services for a first and second review of each submittal item. Additional reviews shall be paid by Contractor by deducting up to $250 for each hour of review time from the next scheduled payment. For follow-up submittals, the Engineer will review only those items noted for revision in the preceding review. If the Contractor has modified the submittal in any other way, such modifications must be clearly identified both on a cover transmittal and within the submittal itself. The Contractor is responsible for identifying the shop drawings and submittals required for this project. Specific submittal requirements may be listed in each section of these specifications. Contractor shall keep a complete and up to date copy of all submittals and review responses at the job site readily available to the Owner for inspection. 1-9 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\1 General.docx 8/19/24 2:09 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 1 1.40 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS [CSI 01 40 00] 1.42.19 Reference Standards [CSI 01 42 19] Work under this contract shall be performed in accordance with applicable sections of the current Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, American Public Works Association and Washington State Department of Transportation, hereafter referred to as the Standard Specifications. Certain other referenced standards used in this specification are from the latest editions of: City of Arlington Municipal Code City of Arlington Design and Construction Standards WSDOT Manual of Construction IBC International Building Code UPC Uniform Plumbing Code IMC International Mechanical Code NEC National Electrical Code AWWA American Water Works Association ANSI American National Standards Institute ASA American Standards Association ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials WSEC Washington State Energy Code 1.43.20 Warranty [CSI 01 43 20] The Contractor shall warrant all work and products for a period of one (1) year following the warranty start date except for those components and listed warrantees below. The warranty start date is the date the final payment (not retainage payment) is sent to the Contractor from the Owner. Warranty does not cover damage due to misuse by the Owner or conditions outside of the Owner or Contractor’s control or exceptional events (force majeure) including war, strikes, floods (water exceeding normal high water mark), rainfall in excess of 100 year storm event, fire, earthquakes, high winds (over 85 mph for 3 seconds peak gust), freezes below 10 degrees Fahrenheit, governmental restrictions, vandalism, utility power failures, or utility power surges 1-10 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\1 General.docx 8/19/24 2:09 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 1 (unless due to Contractor provided surge suppressor failure). The Contractor has control over workmanship, third party subcontractors and parts and materials used to complete the project. Warranties in addition to this warranty are listed in the following sections: Division 8.11.1 Access doors Division 17.05 and 17.90.1 Telemetry systems 1.45.16 Field Quality Control Procedures [CSI 01 45 16] Unless otherwise noted on the plans or within these specifications, provide 48-hour notice to the Owner and appropriate reviewing agency for all inspections required. 48-hour notice is defined as two complete working day notice. Time is not counted on weekends and holidays (inspections required on a Monday or the day after a holiday shall be scheduled a minimum of 48 hours in advance not including the holiday hours or weekend hours.) Contractor shall schedule and arrange for the following inspections and tests with the appropriate reviewing agency and testing company. Special Inspections as required per IBC Division 17 and as noted on the drawings Any additional inspections required by the Building Department, or other approval agency Soils and crushed rock compaction Asphalt materials and compaction Pressure testing Water quality testing 1.50 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS [CSI 01 50 00] 1.51 Temporary Utilities [CSI 01 51 00] Provide all necessary water for construction-related fire protection and utilities required by this contract, or by laws and regulations. Sanitary facilities adequate for all workers shall comply with all codes and regulations. At the close of this contract, the Contractor shall pay all utility bills that are outstanding, remove all temporary electrical, sanitary, gas, telephone and water facilities, and any other temporary service equipment that may remain. In addition, the Contractor shall arrange for the transfer of electrical and water accounts to the Owner’s name. The Contractor shall make all arrangements for the required construction power. Power is available at pump station site but may be offline for the new power drop. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing what is available and providing what is required. 1-11 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\1 General.docx 8/19/24 2:09 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 1 Temporary water is available at the site. The Contractor may use existing water from the hose bib and/or tap in the building. 1.52.00 Construction Facilities [CSI 01 52 00] Construct and locate all field offices, all necessary gates and barricades, fences, handrails, guard rails, and securities required by this contract, or by laws and regulations. Provide shelters and dry facilities for the workers as required. Provide all guards, marks, shields, protective clothing, rain gear, and other equipment required by law, ordinance, labor contracts, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) regulations, and other regulations for the maintenance of health and safety. Provide first aid kits and equipment as required by law. 1.52.13 Field Offices and Sheds [CSI 01 52 13] 1.52.20 Locks and Keys [CSI 01 52 20] Contractor may provide temporary locks at their discretion. Contractor shall provide Owner with two construction key(s) for all temporary locks. Owner may “double lock” any padlocks at their discretion. If the Owner provides a key to the Contractor for existing Owner locks, the Contractor will be responsible for the key until returning it to the Owner. If the Contractor loses the key, the Contractor will pay for re-coring of all Owner locks that use that key. 1.54 Construction Aids [CSI 01 54 00] The Contractor or product manufacturer may include work, materials, or components to aid in shipping, storage, installation, or other work for their convenience. Such items shall be removed prior to final project acceptance if they may interfere with the operation or maintenance of permanent work. Some examples include, but are not limited to: Lifting eyes: Remove only if a safety concern, obstruction, or directed by Owner. Picking holes: Plug holes of buried and exterior items, or if safety concern. Intermediate or shipping bracing: Remove and dispose. Protective shipping adhesives, coatings, or covers: Remove and clean residue. 1-12 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\1 General.docx 8/19/24 2:09 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 1 1.55.26 Traffic Control [CSI 01 55 26] Any traffic control activities required during construction shall be consistent with the Uniform Traffic Control Manual, latest edition and applicable local codes. The Contractor shall limit delay of traffic to 4 minutes. If flaggers are used, orientation meetings per WAC 296-155-305 of the Standard Specifications shall be held each time a new flagger is introduced to the site or if site conditions change significantly. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling such meetings. 1.70 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS [CSI 01 70 00] 1.71 Examination and Preparation [CSI 01 71 00] 1.71.23.16 Construction Surveying [CSI 01 71 23 16] The Contractor is responsible for surveying and staking and shall stake out the locations of the permanent easements, temporary easements, rights-of-way, and all major facilities shown on the Plans and establish benchmarks at locations designated by the Owner. The Contractor shall protect all stakes and marks in their original conditions. If stakes and markings are destroyed or defaced before their use is ended, the cost of replacing them will be at the Contractor’s expense. All stakes, points, and marks shall be administered and approved by a registered professional land surveyor licensed in the State of Washington. Provide approved and stamped survey notes, and control points to the Owner for as-built purposes. Contractor to survey the station line(s) and install pins or offset stakes every 100 feet within areas that will not be disturbed by construction. For utility work, 5-foot and 10-foot offset stakes must be provided for major components including, but not limited to: tees, valves, manholes, catch basins, changes in angle 45-degrees or more, and vaults larger than 4-foot square. Replace all damaged survey monuments in accordance with WAC 332-120. Do not remove monuments until obtaining a permit from the WA Dept. of Natural Resources per WAC 332- 120-050. Provide a copy of the application, permit, and re-monumentation report to the Owner. 1.74 Cleaning and Waste Management [CSI 01 74 00] 1-13 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\1 General.docx 8/19/24 2:09 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 1 1.74.13 Progress Cleaning [CSI 01 74 13] If an area of the project will be left idle, or minimal work performed for more than 10 working days, the Contractor shall clean up the area prior to moving. In this context, clean-up means: stockpiles and materials shall be removed so as not to be obstructions or hazards; surfaces graded smooth as to their purpose; traffic control systems removed, and traffic restored to the satisfaction of the local road agency. 1.74.23 Final Cleaning [CSI 01 74 23] All areas impacted by the work shall be restored to at least original condition, unless specifically identified otherwise in the plans or specifications. All costs are incidental. Clean up debris and unused material and remove from the site and any buildings. If vehicle traffic causes ruts, repair asphalt (new or existing) in paved areas. In non-traffic areas back track with dozer or excavator and repair to final surface condition including necessary hydroseed, mulch, and landscaping. Eliminate weeds within the construction area prior to project closeout. If the contract includes projects on multiple sites, and the Contractor intends to work sequentially to each site, the Contractor shall clean up the current site prior to moving onto the next. Cleanup means: stockpiles and materials shall be removed so as not to be obstructions or hazards; surfaces graded smooth as to their purpose; traffic control systems removed and traffic restored to the satisfaction of the local road agency. Buildings shall be broom clean and all foreign damage or markings removed or repaired. Equipment shall be washed clean using appropriate methods. Unpainted exposed concrete structures shall be cleaned to a consistent bare concrete surface finish. Remove extraneous substances such as efflorescence, leakage residue, and excess repair materials. Remove existing equipment or materials identified in the contract documents or that interfere with the work. Dispose of all such existing equipment or materials unless the Owner requests items to be salvaged for their use. Owner has first right of salvage. 1.75 Starting and Adjusting [CSI 01 75 00] 1.75.16 Startup Procedures [CSI 01 75 16] 1-14 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\1 General.docx 8/19/24 2:09 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 1 1.75.16.10 Startup [CSI 01 71 16 10] See the Automatic Control section for control system startup. Startup shall consist of a simulated operation of all equipment and controls. The purpose of startup shall be to check that all equipment will function under operating conditions, that all interlocking controls and sequences are properly set, and that the facility will function as an operating unit. Startup shall not occur on a Saturday, Sunday, Monday, Friday, on an Owner recognized holiday, or the day before or after an Owner recognized holiday unless approved in advance by the Owner. Technically qualified product representatives shall be present for the startup phase. All representatives shall be trained, qualified, and have experience in troubleshooting and fixing field issues. The startup shall continue until it is demonstrated that all functions, controls, and equipment are functioning correctly. Pumptech under contract with the City separately will provide representatives for the following items: Pumps and motors Variable frequency drives Motor control centers (electrician may qualify if approved by manufacturer) Field sensors (electrician may qualify if approved by manufacturer) Programmable controllers Cummins under contract with the City separately will provide representatives for the following items: ATS (installed by contractor) Generator – no Contractor involvement required. Process Solutions under contract with the City separately will provide representatives for the following items: Programming PLC, ATS & Generator integration into PLC. Verkada under contract with the City separately will provide representatives for the following items: Cameras (2), man door access control. 1-15 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\1 General.docx 8/19/24 2:09 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 1 1.75.16.12 Startup and Testing Coordination [CSI 01 75 16 12] The Contractor shall conduct all testing and startup. Testing and startup shall not be a cause for claims for delay by the Contractor and all expenses for testing and startup shall be incidental to this contract. The placing of all improvements in service shall consist of three parts: “testing”, “startup”, and “operation”. Not less than 21 calendar days before the anticipated time for beginning testing, the Contractor shall notify and submit to the Owner for approval, a complete plan for the following: 1. Schedules for tests: A. Pumps and motors B. Control system C. Meter calibration D. Emergency power system 2. Detailed schedule of procedures for startup. 3. Complete schedule of events to be accomplished during testing. 4. An outline of work remaining under the contract that will be carried out concurrently with the operation phases. Failure to provide proper notification to the Owner may lead to liquidated damages if schedule cannot be maintained. If rescheduling is required because components are not ready for testing, the notification requirements are reset as needed to provide 21 calendar days advance notice to reserve the Owner Representatives’ time. The Contractor shall arrange for all materials, supplies, and labor necessary to efficiently complete the testing, startup, and operation. Measuring devices must be functional, accurate, legible, and scaled appropriately for the test. The Owner has the right to reject or require verification for any measuring device the Owner suspects in its accuracy. At a minimum, the Contractor shall provide: Calibrated pressure gauge(s) (max scale of 120% to 200% of test pressure) Voltmeter Amp meter. Load Bank (generator testing) Sound Level (dB) measuring device (generator testing) Pump/motor vibration measuring device (inches per second and inch peak to peak) Work under other contracts will occur concurrently with this project. The Contractor shall incorporate the schedules of the other work. Work by others includes: 1-16 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\1 General.docx 8/19/24 2:09 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 1 Delivery and setting of pump station skid: 3 calendar weeks. ATS programming and testing: 3 calendar weeks. SCADA programming and testing: 3 calendar weeks. 1.75.16.20 Testing [CSI 01 75 16 20] The Contractor may periodically request preliminary testing for items that must be covered or tested before other work can proceed. In these cases, do not cover up or test the work without timely notice to the Owner of its readiness for testing. Should any work be covered up without notice, approval, or consent, it must, if required by the Owner, be uncovered for examination at the Contractor’s expense. All necessary equipment shall be set up and the work given a preliminary test so that defects may be discovered and repaired prior to calling out the Owner to witness the test. Final testing consists of individual tests and checks made on equipment intended to provide proof of performance, operation, and control in the presence of the Owner. Assure proper alignment, size, condition, capability, strength, adjustment, lubrication, pressure, hydraulic test, leakage test, and all other tests deemed necessary by the Owner to determine that all materials and equipment are of specified quality, properly situated, anchored, and in all respects ready for use. Any certificates required in these specifications by the manufacturer’s representatives shall be supplied to the Owner prior to startup. All piping shall be tested as required by specifications and applicable codes. Tests on individual items of equipment shall be as necessary to show proper system operation. During testing, the Contractor shall correct any defective work discovered. Startup shall not begin until all tests required by these specifications have been completed and approved by the Owner. Not less than five working days before the anticipated time for beginning the testing, the Contractor shall provide a list of representatives that will be attending the testing. The Owner may request additional representatives at no additional cost if said representatives are identified in these specifications. Qualified product representatives paid for separately by the City shall be on site for the following equipment, at a minimum: Pumps and motors ATS Motor Control Centers Additional representatives required may be identified elsewhere in these specifications. 1.75.16.22 Scheduling of Owner Review for Testing [CSI 01 75 16 22] See Division 1.75.16.12 for scheduling and notification requirements. 1-17 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\1 General.docx 8/19/24 2:09 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 1 The Contractor shall provide notification two working days and two working hours (to confirm readiness) of the scheduled test(s) to the Owner confirming that the Contractor has successfully completed all preliminary testing and that all equipment, tools, materials, labor, subcontractors, manufacturer’s representatives, and all other items required for witnessed testing are available and fully functional. Failure to provide advance notification and confirmation or meet any of the testing requirements will constitute a failed test in accordance with the section Inspection and Tests of the General Conditions. A detailed testing schedule shall be provided by the Contractor and updated as needed to be at least 48 hours ahead of actual testing. If testing requires downtime in order to perform repairs due to failed test, the Contractor shall pay the Owner in the amount of $250 per hour per Owner Representative on site (minimum of $500 per scheduled visit) for downtime lasting longer than 2-hours required to complete repairs to verify the complete construction is ready for startup and operation. This amount will be deducted from the appropriate bid item that relates to the finished construction and documented by the Owner at their discretion. The Contractor must have all systems pre-tested prior to calling the Owner for formal testing. Schedule shall include control system testing starting on Mondays or Tuesdays so that the remainder of the week can be used to identify the stability of the control system for the SCADA system and pump station. Control system testing shall not start on a Thursday, Friday, or the day before an Owner recognized holiday. 1.75.16.32 Pump Testing [CSI 01 75 16 32 or 33 08 00] See the applicable pump sections of these specifications for pump testing requirements. 1.75.16.40 Electrical and Control Systems Testing [CSI 01 75 16 40 or 25 08 00 or 26 08 00] See also the applicable electrical sections for electrical system testing. See also the applicable automation sections for automatic control system testing. The following is a list of components that shall be tested prior to project completion. This list is intended as a general guide and is not necessarily complete: Pressure sensors and alarms Flow sensors and alarms Temperature sensors and alarms Smoke alarms Intrusion sensors and alarms Motion sensors Photovoltaic sensors HVAC controls Local control 1-18 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\1 General.docx 8/19/24 2:09 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 1 Automatic control Variable speed drives 1.78 Closeout Submittals [CSI 01 78 00] 1.78.23 Operation and Maintenance Data [CSI 01 78 23] O&Ms will be provided by others separately and not part of this contract. Pumptech, Cummins, Process Solutions and Verkada will be providing this separately and paid by the City directly. 1.78.39 Project Record Documents [CSI 01 78 39] Prior to receiving final payment for the work, deliver a complete set of “As-Constructed” records (also called as-built, or record plans) to the Owner. The Owner has sole discretion to determine if the records provided are legibly and accurately presented and may request revisions, which shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost. Records shall be made as follows or as approved by the Owner: Yellow markings or highlights = deleted items Red markings = new or modified items Records shall be made on clean unmarked ANSI D-size hard-copy prints or provided in PDF format at the Contractor’s discretion. Provide “as-constructed” information on all items and work shown on the plans showing details of the finished product including dimensions, locations, outlines, changes, manufacturers, etc. The information must be in sufficient detail to allow the Owner’s personnel to locate, maintain, and operate the finished product and its various components. See also electrical plan requirements in Division 16.05. 1.79 Demonstration and Training [CSI 01 79 00] 1.79.10 Training [CSI 01 79 10] See the Automatic Control section for automatic control systems training. At the time that the facility is ready to be put into operation, the Contractor is to conduct an operation and maintenance training meeting with the Owner to explain in detail the operation and maintenance requirements of each of the facility’s components. The training meeting shall not occur on the same days as a startup. 1-19 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\1 General.docx 8/19/24 2:09 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 1 Operation of the facility shall commence immediately after completion of testing, startup, and training and after satisfactory repairs and adjustments have been made. 1.80 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS [CSI 01 80 00] 1.81 Facility Performance Requirements [CSI 01 81 00] 1.81.30 Seismic Restraint and Anchorage [CSI 01 81 30] Contractor shall furnish seismic restraint for all equipment, piping, valves, conduit, and other mechanical and electrical components. Seismic restraint shall be designed to meet IBC (ASCE 7 Chapter 13 – “Seismic Design Requirements for Nonstructural Components”) code requirements. The following design values shall be used in calculating seismic forces: Ip = 1.5 Sds = 0.91 Seismic Design Category = D A complete seismic restraint system shall be provided including struts, straps, bolts, nuts, washers, etc. as required for secure attachment to foundations, pads, ceilings, floors, and/or walls. Contractor shall submit either of the following in accordance with ASCE 7, 13.2.1 for all components: 1. Project-specific design and documentation prepared and submitted by a registered design professional. 2. Submittal of the manufacturer’s certification that the component is seismically qualified by a. Analysis b. Testing in accordance with the alternative set forth in ASCE 7, Section 13.2.5. c. Experience data in accordance with the alternative set forth in ASCE 7, Section 13.2.6. Special Certifications are required for the following systems for Seismic Design Categories C, D, E, and F. Systems shall be certified in accordance with ASCE 7, 13.2.2. 1. Mechanical and electrical equipment that must remain operable following the design earthquake. All mechanical and electrical equipment installed under this project falls under this category. 2. Components with hazardous contents. All materials and fabrication shall be as required in these specifications. Contractor shall submit this information to the Owner for review prior to fabrication and installation. Install seismic restraints when called for in the contract or recommended by the product manufacturer. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements as applicable. 1-20 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\1 General.docx 8/19/24 2:09 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 1 Seismic restraint systems shall be installed so as not to interfere with normal operations and maintenance of the equipment and other components as shown on the plans. Interference with normal operations and maintenance shall be as determined by the Owner. Drilled-in anchors for non-rotating equipment shall be Concrete Anchors unless otherwise specified. 1.81.40 Pressure Ratings [CSI 01 81 40] Fittings, valves, pipe, and other fluid systems shall have pressure ratings equal to or greater than the pressures identified herein, unless specifically called out otherwise in the plans or specifications. Pressures listed are gauge pressure, unless specified otherwise. The pressure class of pipelines and appurtenances shall comply with the Owner’s standards for minimum pressure class or the pressure class that meets the requirements of this section, whichever is greater. Equipment Type or Function Working Test Pressure Pressure 520 Zone Suction Piping 13 psi 250 psi 640 Zone Discharge Piping 76 psi 250 psi Working Pressure: Manufacturer’s rating of maximum pressure during extended operation. Test Pressure: Maximum pressure during project specific testing. 1.81.45 Location Designations [CSI 01 81 45] The following location designations shall be used except where otherwise noted on the plans: Dry Locations: Indoor continually dry areas including office, laboratory, blower, and electrical rooms. Wet Locations: All locations exposed to the weather, whether under a roof or not, or within channels, basins or tanks. Damp Locations: Process areas; areas containing pumps, valves, and major piping; all spaces wholly or partially underground, or having a wall or ceiling forming part of a channel or tank, unless otherwise designated on the Plans. Any areas which do not fall within the definitions for dry, wet, or corrosive shall be considered damp. Corrosive Locations: Areas where chlorine gas under pressure, sulfuric acid, or liquid polymer are stored or processed, sewer wetwells and sewer manholes. Immersed or Submerged Locations: Areas which are periodically, or continuously submerged in, or contain a liquid. 1-21 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\1 General.docx 8/19/24 2:09 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 1 1.81.50 Materials in Contact with Domestic Water [CSI 01 81 50] All devices, components, and materials substantially in contact with potable water shall be certified by NSF International to comply with NSF/ANSI 61 (leachable materials) and NSF/ANSI 372 (lead content). Certification of compliance shall be supplied in writing at the time of the submittal process. See exceptions in WAC 246-290-220(1). 1-22 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\1 General.docx 8/19/24 2:09 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 2 Sitework and Restoration 2.00 GENERAL [CSI 32 00 00] Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” shall apply to all following subsections whether directly referenced or not. 2.05 Common Work for Exterior Improvements [CSI 32 05 00] This division covers the work for providing materials and performing all sitework as described in these specifications and as shown on the Plans. Part 1 - General Submittals Submittal information shall be provided to the Owner for the following items: Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan Erosion Control Fence Fabric Dewatering Plan Shoring Plan and Calculations General Fill Structural Fill Pipe Bedding Trench Backfill Crushed Surfacing Paving Hydroseed Fencing Samples of compost Fertilizers Topsoil Other items listed in this section or required by the Owner. 2-1 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\2 Sitework and Restoration.docx 8/14/24 10:57 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 2 2.08 Special Inspections for Earth Work [CSI 31 08 20] Part 3 – Execution Field Quality Control Special inspections including visual, probing of subgrade, and compaction effort (nuclear densometer or probe) are required for the following locations: Trench backfill crossing roads and parking areas (visual, probe and nuclear densometer testing) Road and parking area fill and native subgrade (visual, probe, and nuclear densometer testing if found necessary by the Owner) Crushed surfacing under roads, parking areas, and structures (visual, probe, and nuclear densometer testing) Native (and fill if any) subgrade of vaults, footings, foundations, and floors (visual and probe) Finished excavation of detention pond prior to seeding (visual and probe) Pond berm native subgrade, fill placement, and compaction (visual, probe and nuclear densometer testing) Roadway embankment cut native subgrade (visual and probe) Roadway fill embankment subgrade (visual, probe and nuclear densometer testing at various lifts) Areas where fill (either native or non-native) is being placed shall be tested for compaction compliance by a special inspector. The Owner will pay for the initial testing. If tests indicate failure of compaction requirements, the Contractor shall pay for subsequent tests until tests indicate compliance with the specifications. Areas of native undisturbed subgrade shall be visually inspected by the Owner prior to placement of any material overtop. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner a minimum of two (2) full working days prior to inspection being needed. The Contractor shall fully cooperate with the special inspector, including providing safe access to the testing areas. No extra compensation will be provided for cooperation with and facilitation of inspections. Utility Trench Testing Testing will occur at the following locations at a minimum: One test within 30 feet of start. One test every 300 feet or at road intersections, whichever comes first. One test whenever soil conditions change, per the direction of the Owner. 2-2 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\2 Sitework and Restoration.docx 8/14/24 10:57 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 2 The Contractor shall schedule with Owner for visual and probe review of earthwork activity. Contractor shall schedule with Owner and special inspection agency for nuclear densometer testing. Deliver test results to the Owner and to the roadway jurisdiction if different than the Owner. 2.10 SITE PREPARATION 2.10.2 Clearing and Grubbing [CSI 31 11 00] Part 3 - Execution Construction Clearing and grubbing shall be performed by the Contractor to remove and dispose of unwanted debris, vegetative matter, and other items noted on the Plans within the construction limits and shall conform to Section 2-01 of the Standard Specifications. Protect trees and tree roots, structures and foundations, utilities, fences, and all other existing improvements not being removed regardless if shown to be protected on the Plans. Remove and relocate permanent improvements that are within the construction limits, such as mailboxes and traffic signs. Locate mailboxes to preserve mail service during construction. Return facilities to original location, or plan location, at completion of local work. Do not remove organic material including plants, grasses, trees, and native topsoil unless directed on the Plans. Where the Contractor is allowed to clear areas to facilitate construction but is not required to, restore any areas disturbed by construction to existing or better condition including matching surface restoration with seed, sod, or plantings as shown in adjacent areas required to be modified by the Plans. Restoration shall be completed at no additional cost to the Owner. 2.10.4 Dewatering [CSI 31 23 19] Part 1 - General Submittals The Contractor is to determine the scope, type, size, quantity, method of installation, operation, and removal of the dewatering system necessary to keep excavations de-watered to an elevation below the base of the excavation sufficient to stabilize the soils in the excavation and the surrounding areas, and to prevent flotation of partially completed structures. Prepare a detailed dewatering system plan and submit to the Owner for review prior to the installation of any dewatering system. This plan shall include, as a minimum, the scope, type, size, quantity, method of installation, operation, and removal of all dewatering systems. 2-3 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\2 Sitework and Restoration.docx 8/14/24 10:57 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 2 Part 3 - Execution Installation/Construction Dewatering systems must be positioned away from all building and utility construction so as to not become a part of the permanent facility. Furnish, install, and operate all necessary machinery, appliances, and equipment to meet these water control requirements. De-water and dispose of the water so as not to cause injury to property or a nuisance to the public. Maintain sufficient pumping equipment and machinery in good working condition for all ordinary emergencies, including power outages, and have competent personnel available at all times to operate the equipment. The dewatering system shall not be shut down between shifts, on holidays, weekends, or during work stoppages. Field Quality Control The quality of all water discharged from the site shall meet all State and local requirements. Employ all means necessary to remove suspended solids, oils, trash, and other deleterious materials from water prior to discharging. Control groundwater and surface water to prevent the softening of the bottom of excavations, or formation of quick conditions or boils during excavation. Lower ground water to 1 feet below the base of the excavation. The Owner will determine if soil conditions are unsuitable for supporting the improvements. The Contractor will determine soil conditions are unsuitable for performing work, placing materials, and proceeding with construction activities. When the dewatering system does not meet the specified requirements, and as a consequence there is a loosening or disturbance of the foundation soils, instability for the slopes, or damage to the foundation or structures occur, the Contractor shall at its own expense, supply all materials, labor, and equipment, and perform all work required for the restoration of foundation soil, slopes, or structure to the satisfaction of the Owner. Restoration Remove and backfill dewatering wells in accordance with applicable Federal and State regulations. 2.11 Earthwork Materials 2.11.1 Common Work for Earthwork Materials [CSI 31 05 00] Part 1 - General Acceptance at Site Owner will review the site near the end of each pay period to determine the equivalent percentage of earthwork completed compared to the total earthwork lump sum price. Contractor will be paid based on the Owners judgement of percentage completed. 2-4 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\2 Sitework and Restoration.docx 8/14/24 10:57 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 2 Part 2 - Products Source Quality Control All imported fill material shall be free of hydrocarbons (e.g. gasoline, diesel, oil, etc.), pesticides, herbicides, hazardous volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and synthetic organic chemicals (SOCs). Provide certification to the Owner that the fill is free of these chemicals. 2.11.2 General Fill [CSI 31 23 23.51] Part 1 – General Summary All fill not specifically defined as another type shall be “General Fill”. References Section 9-03.14(3) Common Borrow of the Standard Specifications. Part 2 – Products Components General fill shall be soil free of organics, debris, and other deleterious materials, with no individual particles having a maximum dimension larger than 5 inches. The moisture content of the material and weather conditions at the time of placement will be used to determine the suitability of native materials for backfill as general fill. Part 3 – Execution Installation/Construction Compact general fill in uniform layers not exceeding 12 inches in loose thickness and to at least 90 percent maximum dry density based on the ASTM D-1557 (modified) test procedure. 2.11.3 Structural Fill [CSI 31 23 23.52] Part 1 – General Summary All fill placed below and against building components, building structures, vaults, manholes, handholes, slabs, sidewalks, and drives shall be “Structural Fill” unless other fill materials are specifically shown on the Plans. The structural fill material has been selected to support the weight of the structure in combination with the existing native material and to prevent adverse movement during an earthquake. Take particular care to maintain the integrity of the design by using structural fill where shown. 2-5 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\2 Sitework and Restoration.docx 8/14/24 10:57 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 2 References Where free draining material for structural fill is required as indicated on the Plans or needed to maintain compaction in adverse weather conditions, it shall conform with Section 9- 03.14(1), “Gravel Borrow” of the Standard Specifications. Structural fill for foundation subgrades, or where free drainage is not required through the structural fill shall conform with 9-03.14(2) “Select Borrow” of the Standard Specifications. Part 2 – Products Components When structural fill will be used around pipes, 100-percent of the material shall pass a 1-inch sieve. Structural fill shall be soil free of organics, debris, and other deleterious materials. The Owner will determine if native on-site materials are suitable for use as structural fill. Part 3 – Execution Installation/Construction The moisture content of the material and weather conditions at the time of placement will be used to determine the suitability of native materials for backfill as structural fill. Structural fill shall bear on firm base and be placed in uniform layers not exceeding 12 inches in loose thickness. The backfill area must be free of standing water and the subgrade soils must be stable. Each layer of structural fill shall be compacted to at least 95 percent of its maximum dry density based on the ASTM D-1557 (modified) test procedure. 2.11.4 Pipe Bedding [CSI 31 23 23.53] Part 1 – General Summary Fill placed below and around buried utilities. The bedding material has been selected to support the weight of the utility by distributing the load so that the completed utility and backfill system does not weigh more than the native material. The grain size has been selected so that the bedding will not migrate into the bottom of the trench. Take care to maintain the integrity of the utility design by using the appropriate pipe bedding material where shown. References Pipe bedding used around restrained joint pipe must be crushed surfacing or sand. Rounded gravels and pea gravel are not acceptable. Silty sands may be used with the Owner’s approval but may require additional length of restrained joint pipe. For ductile iron, steel, or concrete pipe larger than 4-inch diameter: Bedding material shall conform with Section 9-03.12(3) “Gravel Backfill for Pipe Zone Bedding” of the Standard Specifications except all shall pass a 1-inch sieve. 2-6 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\2 Sitework and Restoration.docx 8/14/24 10:57 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 2 For PVC and HDPE water piping regardless of diameter: Bedding shall conform with Section 9-03.13 “Backfill for Sand Drains” of the Standard Specifications or as approved by the Owner. For PVC sewer and storm piping, CPEP regardless of diameter, conduit, service lines, and all other piping 4-inch in diameter or less: Bedding shall conform with Section 9-03.13 “Backfill for Sand Drains” of the Standard Specifications or as approved by the Owner. Part 3 – Execution Installation/Construction Bedding material shall surround the pipe and conduits to the limits shown on the Plans and provide uniform support along the entire length. Excavate bell holes to prevent concentrated loading at joints or bridging of the pipe. All bedding material shall bear on firm subgrade and be compacted to firm and unyielding condition. 2.11.5 Trench Backfill [CSI 31 23 23.54 or 31 23 33] Part 1 – General Summary All fill placed above the pipe bedding in a trench shall be “Trench Backfill”. The trench backfill material has been selected to distribute surface loads over the utility. The grain size has been selected so that the trench backfill will not migrate into the pipe bedding or trench walls. Take particular care to maintain the integrity of the utility design by using the appropriate trench backfill material where shown. References Trench backfill shall consist of materials conforming to Section 9-03.19 “Bank Run Gravel for Trench Backfill” of the Standard Specifications or as approved by the Owner. Part 3 – Execution Installation/Construction Place and compact trench backfill above the pipe bedding to finished grade elevations in unrestored areas or to subgrade elevations in restored areas. In unimproved or landscaped areas place trench backfill in uniform layers not to exceed 12 inches in loose thickness. Each lift is to be compacted to at least 90 percent of its maximum dry density based on the ASTM D-1557 (modified) test procedure. In areas where the trench will support roadways or vehicle access areas, trench backfill shall be placed in uniform layers not to exceed 8 inches in loose thickness. Each lift is to be compacted to at least 95 percent of its maximum dry density based on the ASTM D-1557 test procedure (modified proctor) from 0 to 4 feet below finished surface and 90 percent below 4 feet. 2-7 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\2 Sitework and Restoration.docx 8/14/24 10:57 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 2 2.11.6 Gravel Backfill for Drains [CSI 31 23 23.55] Part 1 – General Summary All fill placed around drain pipes in a trench shall be “Gravel Backfill for Drains” to provide drainage for stormwater runoff. References Gravel backfill for drains shall conform with Section 9-03.12(4) of the Standard Specifications. 2.11.7 Gravel Base Course [CSI 32 11 23.10] Part 1 – General Summary All fill placed directly under and against paving, foundations, and structures shall be “Gravel Base Course” unless otherwise called out on the Plans. References Aggregate for gravel base course under structures, and foundations shall conform to Section 9-03.10 Aggregate for Gravel Base or 9-03.9(3) Crushed Surfacing Base Course of the Standard Specifications. Aggregate for gravel base course under roadways, paved areas, sidewalks, and for gravel areas shall conform to Section 9-03.9(3) Crushed Surfacing Base Course of the Standard Specifications. 2.11.8 Gravel Top Course [CSI 32 11 23.11] Part 1 – General Summary Gravel travelled surfaces shown on the Plans shall be “Gravel Top Course”. Gravel top course may also be required directly under paving by the road jurisdiction or if shown on the plans. References Aggregate for gravel top course shall conform to Section 9-03.9(3) Crushed Surfacing Top Course and Keystone of the Standard Specifications. 2-8 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\2 Sitework and Restoration.docx 8/14/24 10:57 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 2 2.11.20 Geotextile Fabric [CSI 31 32 19.16 or 31 34 19.16] Part 1 – General Delivery, Storage, and Handling Ship, store, place, overlap, and secure fabric based on manufacturer requirements. Part 2 – Products Materials Chose geotextile fabric to meet the requirements based on place and purpose of use. Geotextile fabric called out on the Plans to separate drain rock or French drains from surrounding soils shall be equal to Tencate Mirafi 140N. Geotextile fabric called out for separation of soils shall be equal to Tencate Mirafi 140N. Geotextile fabric placed between quarry spalls and fill to separate soil fines shall be equal to Tencate Mirafi 160N. Geotextile fabric called out to drain behind a wall without the use of drain rock shall be equal to Tencate Mirafi G100W. Geotextile fabric for embankment stabilization shall be equal to Mirafi Miramat TM8. Geotextile fabric placed below crushed rock in road subgrade shall be equal to Tencate Mirafi 500X. Other locations may require a specialized geotextile fabric and if so shall either be identified in the Plans or geotechnical report. 2.12 Road Surfacing [CSI 32 10 00] 2.12.3 Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) / Asphalt Concrete Pavement (ACP) [CSI 32 12 16] Part 1 – General Definitions The Plans and specifications may call out Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) or Asphalt Concrete Pavement (ACP). The terms are synonymous. References Hot Mix Asphalt for road paving and patching shall comply with the local transportation agency’s standard plans. 2-9 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\2 Sitework and Restoration.docx 8/14/24 10:57 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 2 HMA used for road paving and patching shall comply with Section 5-04 of the Standard Specifications for HMA Class ½-inch. HMA used for driveways and parking lots shall be HMA Class â…œ-inch. Furnish, place, spread, and compact to the thickness shown on the Plans. 2.12.10 Pavement Marking/Striping [CSI 32.17.23] Part 1 – General References Install pavement marking in accordance with 8-22 of the Standard Specifications and any Owner standards more stringent than the Standard Specifications. Part 3 – Execution Repair/Restoration Replace pavement marking damaged or removed during construction. Cost is incidental to the contract unless a pay item is provided. Installation/Construction Provide markings on all new pavement per the local traffic agency’s requirements. Pavement marking shall match existing marking at the site unless noted otherwise on the Plans or within these specifications. 2.13.3 Selective Tree and Shrub Removal [CSI 31 13 13] Part 3 – Execution Installation/Construction Trees and shrubs which are to be removed as indicated on Plans shall be removed completely including roots, stumps, branches, and stems, or as directed by Owner unless shown otherwise on the Plans. 2.20 EARTH MOVING [CSI 31 20 00] 2.23 Excavation [CSI 31 23 16] Part 1 – General Summary Excavate as necessary to construct the improvements shown. 2-10 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\2 Sitework and Restoration.docx 8/14/24 10:57 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 2 Part 2 – Products Materials All excavated material below the organic layer can be re-used as backfill if it is properly protected from water saturation, meets the specification for the backfill purpose, and is approved by the Owner. Approval of material as backfill will be made the moment before placement of the material as backfill. Weather conditions may make previously approved material unsuitable for backfill requiring the material to be removed from the project site. Excavated material that is not used as backfill shall be disposed off-site. All permits for the disposal of excavated material shall be obtained by the Contractor. A copy of all permits and the locations of each disposal site shall be submitted to the Owner. Part 3 – Execution Installation/Construction Excavation includes the digging, scraping, and removing existing native material, abandoned or interfering utilities, abandoned or interfering structures, and any other obstacles necessary for the construction of the improvements. Excavation includes utility excavation, structural excavation, and grading excavation. Perform utility excavation to the depths necessary to complete the utility work shown. Perform structural excavation to the limits shown and established by the Owner. Extend the base of the excavation laterally a minimum of 2 feet beyond the structure unless specified otherwise on Plans. Excavated material may be stockpiled onsite. Temporary stockpiling of excavated material will not be permitted outside the construction limits at any time. Examination The Owner will evaluate the base of the excavation to determine if it is suitable for backfilling. The Owner will evaluate the stability of the base of excavation by determining if all significant organic soils or other unsuitable materials have been removed. Construction Perform excavation required by the Owner that is beyond the depth shown, per the direction of the Owner. The Contractor will be reimbursed for additional excavation as specified in Division 18, “Measurement and Payment” or by force account if not specified. 2.23.26 Rock Removal in Utility Trenches [CSI 31 23 16.27] Part 1 – General References Rock removal within utility trenching shall comply with Section 7-09.3(7)B of the Standard Specifications, except as supplemented herein and in Division 18 Measurement and Payment. 2-11 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\2 Sitework and Restoration.docx 8/14/24 10:57 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 2 Site Conditions This item also includes trenching for utilities located under structures. Part 3 – Execution Site Tests If the Inspector determines that laboratory strength testing is necessary for rock classification, testing lab costs will be paid by the Owner. The Contractor shall provide safe access and work to extract samples. 2.25 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control [CSI 01 57 13] 2.25.2 Contractor Provided Certified Erosion and Sedimentation Control Lead [CSI 01 57 13.10] Part 1 – General Summary Provide a Certified Erosion and Sedimentation Control Lead (CESCL) as part of the regular work force for the project. This person shall be a site superintendent, project manager, or site laborer regularly on the project site during earthwork operations. Submittals Provide documentation of the Certification to the Owner and reviewing authority if applicable with a copy of such certification always available in the job shack. State Department of Ecology Certification shall be valid and up to date for this person throughout the duration of the earthwork operations of the project. 2.25.3 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control (No SWPPP) [CSI 01 57 13.13] Part 1 – General Quality Assurance The Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control (TESC) plans shown on the construction Plans are the minimum requirements for the anticipated site conditions. The Contractor shall add additional TESC facilities or processes as necessary to ensure that erosion and sedimentation problems do not occur. The Contractor shall inspect the TESC facilities daily and maintain the systems as necessary to prevent off-site damage. 2-12 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\2 Sitework and Restoration.docx 8/14/24 10:57 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 2 Part 2 – Products Materials Straw or mulch shall be applied to exposed surfaces to minimize erosion and filter surface water runoff. Where straw or mulch is required for erosion control, apply to a minimum thickness of 2-inches. Straw shall not include Reed Canary grass. Part 3 – Execution Installation/Construction All TESC systems including; fencing, earth berms, grasses, straw, mulch, culverts, drain pipe, outfalls, and other items required by for this project, must be installed prior to any clearing, grubbing, excavation, grading work, or other work that could result in off-site stormwater or material flows. TESC systems must remain in place throughout the duration of the construction activities. The systems may be relocated to complete construction activities if their location impedes the associated work. If the systems are relocated to complete any work, they must be reinstalled to protect the construction and surrounding areas prior to commencing work on other portions of the project. Install systems such as mulch, plastic sheeting and hydroseed as soon as clearing, grading and excavation are complete if sites are 1-acre or less. Take care and diligence to minimize erosion exposure and provide TESC measures as shown on the Plans and required by construction practice. Install stabilized construction entrances and wash pads at the beginning of construction activities and maintain for the duration of the project. Keep wash pads clean to prevent the transport of sediment onto adjoining roads. Install earth berms as necessary to prevent surface water migration into excavations or off the project site. Route surface water intercepted by earth berms to an approved stormwater conveyance system. Ensure that the concentration of surface water at the earth berm does not erode the adjoining or downstream properties. Remove sediment deposited against the earth berm so surface water can flow freely. Do not remove the earth berm before the stabilization of the surface downhill from the berm. 2.25.5 Filter Fabric Fence [CSI 01 57 13 or 01 57 23] Part 2 – Products Materials Filter fabric per section 8-01.3(9)A2 and section 9-33.2(1), Table 6, of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. Part 3 – Execution Installation/Construction Install a filter fabric fence to allow the collection and passage of surface water through the fabric before discharge off site. When joints are necessary, splice filter fabric together at a 2-13 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\2 Sitework and Restoration.docx 8/14/24 10:57 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 2 support post with a minimum overlap of six inches. Secure both ends of the fabric to the post. Install the filter fabric fence following the contours of the existing grade where feasible. Drive the fence posts securely into the ground a minimum of 30-inches and spaced apart at a maximum of six feet. Fasten a wire mesh support fence securely to the uphill side of the posts using heavy-duty wire staples at least one inch long, tie wires, or wire rings. Extend the wire into the trench a minimum of four inches and not more than 36 inches above the existing surface. Excavate an 8-inch by 12-inch trench on the uphill side of the fence for securely burying the lower edge of the fabric fence. Extend at least 20 inches of the filter fabric fence continuously into the trench. Extend the filter fabric fence 36-inches above the existing grade. Secure the filter fabric placed in the trench with backfill material of three-quarter inch washed rock. Place the backfill material in the trench and on either side of the fence as shown on the construction Plans. Field Quality Control Inspect the filter fabric fence immediately after each rainfall and at least once daily during periods of prolonged rainfall. Repair or replace sections of the filter fabric fence that are not filtering surface water. The filter fabric fence may be removed after the threat of off-site contamination has passed. 2.30 SITE IMPROVEMENTS [CSI 32 30 00] 2.31 Fencing and Gates [CSI 32 31 00] 2.31.1 Common Work for Fencing [CSI 32 31 05] Part 1 – General Related Sections Division 1.52.20 Locks and Keys Division 3 Concrete Division 10.14.23 Signage Division 11.40 Gates Part 3 – Execution Preparation Clear the area along the fence path, remove surface irregularities and grade earth smooth and continuous prior to fence installation. 2.50 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION [CSI 31 50 00] 2-14 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\2 Sitework and Restoration.docx 8/14/24 10:57 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 2 2.51 Contractor Designed Shoring [CSI 31 50 10] Part 1 - General Summary Where shoring, sheet piling, sheeting, bracing, lagging, or other supports are necessary to prevent cave-ins or damage to existing structures, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to design, furnish, place, maintain, and remove supports in accordance with applicable laws, codes, and safety requirements. References Chapter 296-155 of WAC, “Safety Standards for Construction Work, Part N, Excavation, Trenching, and Shoring”. OSHA Quality Assurance Where the Contractor is required to provide the shoring design, it shall be prepared by a competent person as defined by WAC 296-155-650. Before beginning any excavation that is governed by the shoring requirements, the Contractor shall submit their stamped shoring plan and calculations to the Owner for approval. The stamp must be present on all Plans and calculations, and all submittals must be approved by the Owner prior to starting work. Part 3 - Execution Installation/Construction Design, planning, installation, and removal of sheeting, shoring, sheet piling, lagging, and bracing shall maintain the undisturbed state of soil below and adjacent to excavation. 2.90 LANDSCAPING [CSI 32 90 00] 2.90.1 Common Work for Landscaping [CSI 32 90 05] Part 1 – General Submittals In addition to Division 2.05, provide the following information. Composition of compost. Written maintenance instructions recommending proper procedures for maintenance of plant materials. Top Soil - Submit the data for topsoil to be used as determined by an approved testing lab. Data shall include percentage of organic content as determined by incineration 2-15 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\2 Sitework and Restoration.docx 8/14/24 10:57 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 2 process and recommendations on type and quality of additives required to establish satisfactory pH factor, organic content, and supply of nutrients to bring the soil to a satisfactory level for planting. Nursery Material Plant Lists with quantities and sizes (pot volume and/or tree height) Planting schedule, indicating approximate planting date. Delivery, Storage, and Handling Deliver fertilizers in original, unopened and undamaged containers that list weight, analysis. and name of manufacturer. Store in such a manner as to prevent wetting and deterioration. Take all precautions customary in good trade practice in preparing plants for transplanting. Spray deciduous plants in foliage with an approved “Anti-Desiccant” immediately after digging to prevent dehydration. Dig, pack, transport, and handle plants with care to ensure protection against injury. If plants cannot be planted immediately upon delivery, properly protect them with soil, wet peat moss, or in a manner acceptable to the Owner. Water plantings as necessary to keep them alive and in healthy condition. Provide dry, loose topsoil for planting bed mixes. Project/Site Conditions Prevent damage to existing features, pavement, utility lines, areas to receive planting and other features remaining as part of final landscaping and/or site improvements. Quality Assurance The Contractor, with the approval of the Owner will select a qualified testing laboratory to test and inspect operations under this Section at the Contractor’s expense. Notify testing laboratory of times for inspections. Notify Owner if any undesirable conditions are met during construction so that supplemental recommendations can be made. Comply with sizing and grading standards of the latest edition of “American Standard for Nursery Stock.” A plant shall be dimensioned as it stands in its natural position. Warranty Warrant trees, shrubs and ground cover for the period as stated in the Warranty section of Division 1 against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from negligence by Owner, abuse or damage by others or unusual phenomena or incidents beyond the Contractor’s control. Replace, in size and kind and in accordance with the Plans and Specifications, all plants that are dead or, as determined by the Owner, in an unhealthy or unsightly condition, or have lost their natural shape due to dead branches or other causes due to the Contractor's negligence. Such replacement(s) will be at Contractor’s expense. Warranty shall not include damage or loss of trees, plants, or ground covers caused by fires, unusual floods, freezing rains, lightning storms, sustained winds over 75 miles per hour, or other catastrophic “Acts of God”. Winter kill caused by extreme cold and severe winter conditions not typical of planting area, unanticipated acts of vandalism or negligence on the part of the Owner and damage caused by wildlife, shall not be covered under this warranty. 2-16 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\2 Sitework and Restoration.docx 8/14/24 10:57 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 2 Part 2 – Products Materials A complete list of plants, including a schedule of sizes, quantities and other requirements is shown on the Plans. If quantity discrepancies or material omissions occur in the plant materials list, the planting Plans shall govern. All plants shall be nursery grown under climatic conditions similar to those in the project locale for a minimum of 2 years or transplanted from on-site. All potted plants shall be grown in the containers in which they are sold for a minimum of one year. Stock furnished shall be at least the minimum size indicated. Larger stock is acceptable, at no additional cost, providing that the larger plants will not be cut back to size indicated. Provide plants indicated by two measurements so that only a maximum of 25 percent are of the minimum size indicated and 75 percent are of the maximum size indicated. Part 3 – Execution Examination Examine proposed planting areas and conditions of installation. Do not start planting work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected and approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Notify Owner’s Authorized Representative at least 7 working days prior to installation of plant material. The Owner will make final inspection to determine acceptance of planted areas, upon Contractor’s request. Provide notification at least 10 working days before requested inspection date. Planted areas will be accepted, provided all requirements, including maintenance, have been complied with and plant materials are alive and in a healthy, vigorous condition after final acceptance of the project. Upon one year after Substantial Completion, the Owner will assume plant maintenance. Repair/Restoration Correct defective work as soon as possible after deficiencies become apparent and weather and season permit. Field Quality Control Provide plant material record Plans legibly recording actual construction indicating horizontal and vertical locations, referenced to permanent surface improvements. Identify field changes of dimension and detail any changes. Cleaning During landscape work, keep adjacent areas clean and work area in an orderly condition. Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the work. Remove from site all excess materials, soil, debris, and equipment as instructed by Owner. Repair damage resulting from planting operations. Remove temporary irrigation systems when no longer needed and approval by the Owner. 2-17 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\2 Sitework and Restoration.docx 8/14/24 10:57 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 2 2.90.2 Landscape Grading [CSI 32 91 19] Part 3 – Execution Installation/Construction Perform fine grading within Contract limits, including adjacent transition areas, to new elevations, levels, profiles and contours indicated. Provide subgrade surfaces parallel to finished surface grades, unless specified otherwise. Provide uniform levels and slopes between new elevations and existing grades. All fills required to achieve subgrades shall be compacted per requirements of the fill type as noted above. For landscaping areas, all fill shall be compacted between 80 to 85 percent of modified proctor (ASTM D-1557) unless noted otherwise on the Plans. Perform grading, within branch spread of existing trees scheduled to remain, by hand methods to elevations indicated. Cut roots cleanly to depth 3 inches below proposed finish grade. Treat cut roots over 1-inch in diameter with asphaltic pruning paint. 2.90.10 Topsoil [32 91 19.20] Part 2 – Products Materials Protect existing topsoil in seeding/planting areas or remove and stockpile for later use. Existing topsoils that are contaminated or degraded due to the Contractor’s activities shall be replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. Import topsoil shall be naturally occurring surface soil with a maximum sand content of 60 percent. Topsoil shall have no evident rocks or debris over ½-inch Acidity pH range shall be between 5.0 and 6.5. Organic matter content shall be 10 to 20 percent by dry weight. Add dolomite limestone, if required, to obtain pH. Limestone, if used, shall be finely ground, passing a minimum of 90 percent through the U.S. Standard No. 8 sieve and 20 percent through the U.S. Standard No. 100 sieve. Add approved nutrients, if required, to bring nutrients to a satisfactory level for planting as recommended by a qualified testing laboratory (exclude nitrogen, potassium, and phosphorus). Part 3 – Execution Installation In planter areas, soil excavated shall be mixed with organic compost in a ratio of 1/ 3 organic 2/ compost to 3 sandy loam. In seeding areas, place topsoil and rake or blade to a smooth, consistent surface. Do not compact. Install 2-inch depth topsoil unless specified otherwise on the plans or within the specific seeding/planting specification section. Dispose of excess soil per the Owner’s instructions. 2-18 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\2 Sitework and Restoration.docx 8/14/24 10:57 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 2 2.90.11 Hydroseed [CSI 32 92 19.16] Part 1 – General Related Sections Division 2.90.21 Erosion Control Matting Scheduling Apply hydroseed within the optimum seeding windows whenever possible. Hydroseed may be used for temporary erosion control only with the approval of the Owner. Time construction practices to minimize bare, cleared, and excavated areas so that surfaces are hydroseeded and seed germinates and grows stabilizing surfacing as soon as possible. The optimum seeding windows are April 1 through June 30 and September 1 through October 1. Seeding that occurs between July 1 and August 30 will require irrigation until 75 percent grass cover is established. Seeding that occurs between October 1 and March 30 will require a mulch layer 2-inches thick until 75 percent grass cover is established. Maintenance Provide temporary irrigation, mulch or plastic sheeting (plastic sheeting for short term protection only, 7 days maximum) to hydroseeded areas as required for establishment and to protect the seed from construction activities at no additional cost to the Owner. Part 2 – Products Materials Hydroseed applications shall include a minimum of 1,500 pounds per acre of mulch with 3 percent tackifier. Mulch may be made up of 100-percent: cottonseed meal; fibers made of wood, recycled cellulose, hemp, and kenaf; compost; or blends thereof. Tackifier shall be plant-based, such as guar or alpha plantago, or chemical-based such as polyacrylamide or polymers. Mulch or tackifier product used shall be installed per manufacturer’s instructions. Areas that have seed applied by hand shall have a minimum 2-inch thick layer of compost- based mulch or 1-inch layer of topsoil. Slow-release fertilizers shall be used. Fertilizer shall not be agitated more than 20 minutes in the hydromulch machine before it is to be used. On 2:1 slopes and less, Bonded Fiber Matrix (BFM) or Mechanically Bonded Fiber Matrix (MBFM) products may be used in lieu of erosion control mat. BFM/MBFM products are applied with approximately 10 percent tackifier. BFM/MBFM shall be allowed to cure 24-36 hours before rainfall and shall not be installed on wet or saturated soils. Western Washington Hydroseed Mix Install seed, fertilizer, and mulch for hydroseed mix at the following application rates: Seed 180 pounds per acre Fertilizer 90 pounds per acre, 10-4-6 Nitrogen-Phosphorus-Potassium (N-P-K) Mulch 1,500 pounds per acre 2-19 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\2 Sitework and Restoration.docx 8/14/24 10:57 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 2 Ditch/Pond Seed Mix Name Proportion by Weight % Purity % Germination Tall or Meadow Fescue 75-80% 98% 90% Seaside/Creeping Bentgrass 10-15% 92% 85% Redtop Bentgrass 5-10% 90% 80% All Other Areas Seed Mix Name Proportion by Weight % Purity % Germination Redtop or Oregon Bentgrass 20% 92% 85% Red fescue 70% 98% 90% White Dutch Clover 10% 98% 90% BFM/MBFM 3,000 pounds per acre (for 2:1 slopes and steeper) Fertilizer: None Mulch: Wood Cellulose Fiber or HECP Long-Term Mulch per WSDOT 9-14.5(2)A at 2,500 lbs./acre. Part 3 – Execution Preparation Install 2-inches of import topsoil over areas that will be seeded. The seedbed should be firm and rough. All soil should be roughened regardless of slope. If compaction is required, slopes must be track walked before seeding. Backblading or smoothing of slopes greater than 4:1 is not permitted if they are to be seeded. Installation All disturbed surfaces within the project not otherwise covered by asphalt, gravel, quarry spalls, concrete, or other plant material/landscape items shall be hydroseeded, except ditches and swales may have seed applied by hand. Apply seed prior to installing erosion control blankets. Field Quality Control These specifications are the minimum requirements for the anticipated conditions. The Contractor is responsible to ensure seeded areas establish ground cover and to provide any additional measures necessary to establish ground cover in seeded areas. Any seeded areas that fail to establish at least 75-percent cover (100-percent cover for areas that receive sheet or concentrated flows) shall be reseeded at no additional cost to the Owner. Provide a temporary irrigation system until growth is established if hydroseeding is applied between April 1st and October 1st in Western Washington or Oregon, or for any work at any time in Eastern Washington. Remove temporary irrigation systems when no longer required. 2-20 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\2 Sitework and Restoration.docx 8/14/24 10:57 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 2 2.92.30 Weed Control [CSI 32 01 90.41] Part 1 – General Definitions Weeds are defined as the common definition. An undesired plant. Grasses (other than ornamental grasses) growing within planter areas shall also be considered a weed. Weed Control means eradication of weeds by mechanical, chemical, or biological means that prevents regrowth for no less than 6 months. Performance Requirements Control weeds within the construction limits and any areas disturbed by construction activities. Submittals Submit on chemicals or biological processes proposed for weed control. Scheduling Intermittent weed control activities should be expected during construction. Final weed control shall occur after final site cleanup and prior to project acceptance. Part 3 – Execution Installers Products used that are not consumer-purchasable at public retail stores may only be applied by an applicator with a Commercial Applicator or Commercial Operator license. Field Quality Control The Contractor is responsible for confining weed control products to the site. 2-21 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\2 Sitework and Restoration.docx 8/14/24 10:57 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 3 Concrete 3.00 GENERAL Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” apply to all following subsections whether directly referenced or not. 3.05 Common Work for Concrete [CSI 03 05 00] Part 1 - General This division covers that work necessary for furnishing and installing all concrete as described in these specifications and as shown on the Plans. References Materials shall conform to the following standards: Cement - ASTM C150 Coarse aggregate - ASTM C33 Fine aggregate - ASTM C33 Admixtures - ASTM C494 Submittals Submittal information shall be provided to the Owner for the following items: Concrete mix design including aggregate gradation and substantiating strength data. Admixture Data Special placement procedures for hot or cold weather Concrete anchors Schedule of surface finishes Rebar mill certifications Precast concrete items Grouts Embedded items Form Release agent Method of plugging through-bolt holes Concrete mix designs shall be submitted to the engineer for approval a minimum of two weeks prior to placing any concrete. The mix design shall include the amounts of cement, fine and coarse aggregate, water and admixtures, as well as the water cement ratio, slump, concrete yield, aggregate gradation, and substantiating strength data in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 5. A batch plant inspection may be required, the cost of which shall be paid by the Contractor. Review of mix submittals by the engineer of record indicates only that 3-1 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\3 Concrete.docx 8/14/24 10:59 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 3 information presented conforms generally with contract documents. Contractor or supplier maintains full responsibility for specified performance. Part 2 - Products Components Nominal maximum size for aggregates is the smallest standard sieve opening through which the entire amount of aggregate is permitted to pass. Provide intermediate aggregate grades as required to achieve a well-graded mix. All concrete surfaces exposed to weather or standing water shall be air entrained. Total air content shall be in accordance with IBC requirements unless specified otherwise herein. Air shall be measured at the truck, unless otherwise agreed to. Water used in concrete shall be potable. Fly ash may be substituted for up to 15 percent of the required cement, except where noted. Mixes Concrete shall be mixed, conveyed, and proportioned in accordance with IBC section 1905. The concrete mix shall include the amount of cement, fine and coarse aggregate, including aggregate gradations, water, and admixtures as well as water cement ratio, slump, concrete yield, and sustaining strength data in accordance with these specifications, the requirements of the International Building Code Section 1905, and the requirements of ACI 318. Finishes Coat all aluminum in contact with concrete as specified in Division 9. Part 3 - Execution Inspection See Statement of Special Inspections on the Drawings for special inspection requirements. Provide two (2) full working day notice to Owner prior to needing the required inspections. Also comply with local building department and permit requirements for inspection and notification. The Contractor shall repair, replace or modify, as appropriate, any items noted in the Special Inspector’s inspection or the building department inspection. Testing Concrete strength tests shall be performed per section 1905.6 of the IBC and per the requirements noted herein. The Owner will provide and pay all costs of concrete testing. The Engineer shall be furnished with copies of all inspection reports and test results. Cylinders used for concrete strength tests shall be 6 by 12. Four by 8 cylinders may be used for mixes with maximum aggregates less than 1-inch, however the testing lab must apply a 0.94 multiplier to the compressive strength test results unless data acceptable to the Engineer is presented that would justify a higher multiplier. All mixes utilizing aggregates over 1 inch shall be tested using 6 by 12 cylinders. 3-2 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\3 Concrete.docx 8/14/24 10:59 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 3 When 4 by 8 cylinders are utilized AASHTO T23 requirements shall be followed, and the retainer used with neoprene pads when testing for compressive strength shall be constructed according to ASTM C1231. The Contractor will coordinate all concrete testing with the testing agency. Costs will be paid by the Owner. Give the Owner and testing agency 48-hour notice prior to concrete placement. If Contractor fails to provide the required notice, the Owner may elect to cancel the affected concrete placement. Contractor shall be responsible for costs and delays due to improper notification. If the Contractor schedules a concrete placement and does not notify the Owner and testing agency of a cancellation within 24 hours of the scheduled placement, the Contractor shall pay the testing agency costs for an unnecessary trip. If the Contractor fails to provide the testing agency with adequate notification and testing agency cannot attend concrete placement, Contractor shall reschedule placement. Contractor shall be responsible for all associated delays. The Contractor shall provide all assistance and cooperation necessary to testing personnel to obtain the required concrete tests. Contractor and Owner will have access to testing results as soon as they are available. The testing agency shall take a minimum of four samples for every 50 yards of concrete placed (and a minimum of four per pour); one for a 7-day test, two for 28-day tests, and one for backup testing in case the other two samples do not meet design strength. Additional samples may be taken to verify strength prior to form removal at the Contractor’s expense. 3.06 Maintenance of Concrete [CSI 03 01 00] 3.06.30.71 Resurfacing of Cast-in-Place Concrete [CSI 03 01 30.61] Part 1 - General This division covers that work necessary for repairing spalled and damaged concrete. Repair any areas with deterioration exceeding ½-inch, where rebar is exposed or where directed by the Owner. Part 2 - Products Materials CONCRETE REPAIR MATERIAL: SikaTop 111 PLUS or equal cement-based repair mortar. Mortar shall be ANSI/NSF Standard 61 approved if in contact with potable water and contain a corrosion inhibitor. See Manufacturer’s Literature for primer and auxiliary products appropriate for use with the repair material. Siloxane / Silane sealer shall be Tnemec / Chemprobe Prime-A-Pell 633 or Prime-A-Pell H20. 3-3 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\3 Concrete.docx 8/14/24 10:59 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 3 Part 3 - Execution Preparation The Contractor shall be familiar with the product and methods and be prepared to discuss the repair procedure at the Preconstruction Meeting. High pressure power-wash the exposed structure to remove all loose, delaminated concrete to sound concrete. Surface Preparation: Remove loose, delaminated concrete to sound concrete. Where corrosion of the reinforcement exists, continue bulk removal along the reinforcing steel and adjacent areas with evidence of corrosion-induced damage Under-cut all exposed reinforcing steel by a minimum of ¾-inch. The shape of the prepared cavity should be square or rectangular in shape. The edges of the patches shall be saw-cut perpendicular to the surface to a minimum depth of ½-inch. Repair area shall be a minimum of ½-inch deep throughout. Use abrasive blasting to remove residual dust, debris, fractured concrete, and contaminants that prevent proper bonding. Following abrasive blasting, blow out repair areas with oil-free compressed air. The final surface texture should be rough with minimum â…›-inch amplitude. Treatment of exposed reinforcement: All signs of corrosion should be removed from exposed reinforcing steel by an abrasive blasting, wire wheel or needle scaler. If the cross- sectional area of the reinforcing steel has been significantly reduced, the engineer should be consulted. Prime reinforcing as recommended by the repair material manufacturer. Installation Surface Saturation: Saturate surface with potable water. The base concrete shall be in a saturated surface dry (SSD) condition prior to application of repair material to prevent a rapid loss of moisture from the repair material and into the substrate. Mixing and Application of Repair Material: Mixing and application shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Apply the material with adequate pressure before the bond coat dries. Thoroughly consolidate the repair material into the corners of the patch and around any exposed reinforcement in the repair zone. If a second lift is required, thoroughly roughen the surface of the first lift by scoring the soft mortar to achieve an aggressive finish, similar in profile to the prepared concrete substrate. If the second lift will not be immediately applied, keep the first lift moist until application of the second lift. Finish to match existing surface. Cure using curing compound. Apply silane sealer as specified to exposed surfaces and edges of roof slab. 3.10 FORMING AND ACCESSORIES [CSI 03 10 00] 3.11 Formwork [CSI 03 11 00] 3-4 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\3 Concrete.docx 8/14/24 10:59 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 3 3.11.13 Structural Cast in Place Forming [CSI 03 11 13] Part 1 – General The Contractor shall submit a construction joint plan to the Engineer for review prior to formwork and rebar installation if altered from that shown on the Plans. Modifications to the construction joints shall be submitted to the Engineer no less than 7 working days prior to placing the forms and rebar. Part 2 – Products Materials Unless otherwise directed, coat contact surface of forms with colorless, non-staining, mineral oil that is free from kerosene, or other approved suitable material, to permit satisfactory removal of forms without concrete damage. Form-release agent for interior of potable water storage structures shall be National Sanitation Foundation Standard (NSF) No. 61 approved for use in direct contact with potable water. Form construction for surfaces covered with backfill shall be made of steel, plywood, or dressed, matched lumber. Form construction for exposed surfaces shall be made of new plywood or steel without surface markings. Form ties for use in liquid containment structures shall be standard plastic cone snap-ties with ¾-inch diameter neoprene waterstop washer or removable taper ties. Use Greenstreak X-plugs with removable taper ties or equal. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer form ties to be used for review prior to installation. Part 3 - Execution Installation/Construction Concrete forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of concrete or mortar and shall be properly braced or tied together to maintain desired position and shape until removed. Conduits, pipes and sleeves of any material not harmful to concrete and within the limitations of ACI 318, Section 6.3 are permitted to be embedded in concrete with approval of the Engineer. Provide a ¾-inch chamfer or radius at all exposed corners and edges, unless specifically stated otherwise on the Plans. Forms shall remain in place until the concrete has developed sufficient strength to withstand imposed loads without damage or deflection. Wall and slab forms shall remain in place for a minimum of 24 hours after completion of the pour. Forms for beams and suspended slabs shall remain in place for a minimum of 14 days AND until concrete has developed 28-day design strength, unless approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall coordinate with the testing lab to verify concrete strength prior to form removal. Do not allow water to flow through areas where forms are to be placed. During form construction and prior to placement of concrete, keep footings and floor slab areas free of standing water. 3-5 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\3 Concrete.docx 8/14/24 10:59 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 3 Field Quality Control Variations from plumb, specified grade, conspicuous lines, and walls shall not exceed plus or minus ¼-inch in any 10-foot length, and shall not exceed one inch over the entire length. Variations from dimensions shall not exceed plus or minus ½-inch. Closer tolerances shall be achieved by the Contractor as necessary to accommodate equipment and other permanent materials. 3.15 Concrete Accessories [CSI 03 15 00] 3.15.03 Expansion Joints [CSI 03 15 32] Part 2 - Products Materials Expansion Joint Dowels shall be epoxy-coated plain steel bars of the dimensions as shown on the Plans and shall meet the requirements of Section 9-07.5 of the Standard Specifications. Joint Sealant shall be MasterSeal CR 195 by as manufactured by Master Builders Technology and as provided by Degussa Construction Chemicals, or equal. Color to match concrete. Surface preparation and prime for water immersion shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide backer rod as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. The ends of the dowel bars embedded in the expansion side of the joint shall be coated with a parting compound such as grease, or other approved parting compound prior to concrete placement. 3.15.05 Pipe Penetrations through Concrete [CSI 03 15 35] Part 1 - General Summary Water holding structures and structures buried and subject to groundwater contact: As shown on the Plans. Structures not holding water or unburied structures: Unless identified on the Plans, all pipes larger than two inches passing through poured-in-place concrete floors and walls shall be isolated from the concrete. Part 2 - Products Materials For walls, provide a Link-Seal system (or approved equal). 3-6 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\3 Concrete.docx 8/14/24 10:59 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 3 For floors, wrap the pipe in a flexible, non-biodegradable material such as high-density foam or asphalt board. Part 3 - Execution Examination Wrapping must be inspected and approved by Engineer prior to concrete pour. Gaps, tears, or looseness in wrapping will be cause for rejection. Installation Install Link-Seal per manufacturers instruction either within a cast-in-place sleeve or core drill a clean hole. Wrapping shall be watertight and provide a minimum of ½-inch separation between the pipe and concrete. Extend wrapping a minimum of one inch above and below concrete pour and cut flush on accessible side(s) after curing. 3.15.19 Concrete Anchors [CSI 03 15 19 (cast-in) or 05 05 19 (drilled)] Part 1 - General Quality Assurance Installation of adhesive anchors shall be performed by personnel certified in accordance with the ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification Program. In lieu of certification the installer shall attend on-site training held by the adhesive manufacturer prior to the installation of adhesive anchors. Part 2 - Products Materials Concrete Anchors shall be Hilti HIT 500-V3, Simpson SET-XP, or Powers PE1000+ Adhesive Anchors. CMU Anchors shall be Simpson SET-XP Adhesive Anchors. Threaded rod shall be stainless steel except in dry locations. Part 3 - Execution Installation Install in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations. Special Inspection in accordance with IBC, Section 17, must be provided. Provide a minimum of 48 hours’ notice to Engineer prior to starting installation. Concrete anchors shall not be used to resist tension or fatigue loading without Owner’s evaluation and approval. Use threaded rod or reinforcing bar as shown on the drawing, and meeting Manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide minimum embedment as shown. Holes shall be drilled with carbide-tipped drill bit. Holes shall be cleaned of dust and debris. Adhesive shall be inserted with a mixing nozzle. 3-7 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\3 Concrete.docx 8/14/24 10:59 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 3 3.20 REINFORCING [CSI 03 20 00] 3.21 Reinforcement Bars [CSI 03 21 00] 3.21.11 Plain Steel Reinforcement Bars [CSI 03 21 11] Part 1 - General References ACI – American Concrete Institute- latest edition CRSI Manual of Standard Practice – latest edition Part 2 - Products Materials Grade – ASTM A706, Grade 60 ASTM A615, Grade 60 shall be permitted if: (a) The actual yield strength based on mill tests does not exceed fy by more than 18,000 psi; and, (b) The ratio of actual tensile strength to the actual yield strength is not less than 1.25. Detailing - ACI 318 and ACI 315 Lap requirements - See schedule on Plans or as required by ACI 318 Tie wire - 16 gauge minimum Bar supports shall conform to “Bar Support Specification” CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, MSP-1-80. Provide Class 1, plastic protected bar supports. Use pre-cast concrete blocks to support bars off ground. Bar supports in water holding and buried structures shall be non-metallic. Bar supports for the bottom rebar mat of suspended slabs or beams in water holding structures must be point supports (chairs or dobbies), not continuous. Part 3 - Execution Installation Reinforcing steel shall be detailed in accordance with ACI 315 and 318 and as shown on the Plans. Lap all reinforcements in accordance with the reinforcing splice and development length schedule shown on the structural notes. Provide corner bars at all wall and footing intersections. Bend wire bar ties away from formwork to provide the same concrete clearance as shown on the Plans to the bars. 3-8 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\3 Concrete.docx 8/14/24 10:59 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 3 Welding of reinforcing steel shall not be performed unless specifically approved by the Engineer. If approved, Contractor will arrange and pay for all required Special Inspections associated with welding of reinforcing steel. Field Quality Control Reinforcing steel shall be free of rust and loose scale at time of concrete placement. Bars with kinks, improper bends, or reduced cross-section due to any cause will not be used. Bars shall not be field bent. Bars may not be tack-welded or otherwise heated. If, within the project warranty period, rust spots appear on the concrete due to failure to achieve proper clearance on the rebar or wire ties, the Contractor shall grind out and patch the areas using a method satisfactory to the engineer. 3.30 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE [CSI 03 30 00] 3.30.05 Common Work for Cast in Place Concrete [CSI 03 30 05] Part 1 - General Scheduling Contractor shall schedule and attend a Concrete Placement meeting at least one week prior to placing concrete. The following shall attend: Owner Engineer Contractor Testing Laboratory Representative Concrete Supplier The following shall be discussed at the meeting: Safety (Contractor’s sole responsibility) Batching and Delivery, Adjustments to Mix; Site Dosing Placement Rates and Anticipated Schedule of Placing and Finishing Site Layout –Holding Area; Pump Truck Location; Truck Wash-out Area; Parking area Equipment – Pumps and Appurtenances; Vibrators; Spare Equipment Concrete Testing Procedures Curing Delivery Concrete shall be transported in a truck mixer to the jobsite and discharged within 1.5 hours after cement has been added to water or aggregates. Rejected concrete will be at Contractor’s expense. 3-9 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\3 Concrete.docx 8/14/24 10:59 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 3 Part 2 - Products Components If allowed, curing materials shall conform to ASTM C171 and liquid membrane-forming compounds shall conform to ASTM C309. When concrete is to be coated or stained, use UV-dissipating form release and curing compounds. Part 3 - Execution Preparation Do not place concrete during rain, sleet, or snow until water and freezing protection is provided. Position embedded items accurately, and support against displacement or movement during placement. Fill voids in sleeves, insets, anchor slots, etc., temporarily with readily removable materials to prevent entry of concrete into voids. Before beginning placement of concrete, remove hardened concrete and foreign materials from inner surface of mixing and conveying equipment. Before depositing concrete, remove debris from space to be occupied by the concrete. Secure reinforcement in position to prevent movement during concrete placement. At the beginning of the concrete pour for walls taller than 8 feet, place a 1½ to 2½-inch thick grout pad prior to placing the concrete for the wall. Grout mix shall consist of fine aggregates, concrete and water in the same ratios as used in the wall concrete. The placement of the concrete shall proceed immediately after the grout placement so as to prevent any cold joints. At construction joints, thoroughly clean surface of existing concrete to remove laitance. Roughen existing concrete surface to expose aggregate uniformly and apply approved bonding agent to existing concrete in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Prior to placing fresh concrete, dampen joint and coat with grout mixture in accordance with ACI 301, Section 8.5. Installation Placement shall be in accordance with IBC, Section 1905. Place no concrete when air temperature is below or expected to be below 40 degrees during the 28-day curing period unless a low temperature concrete mix has been approved by the Owner. Provide adequate equipment for heating materials and protecting concrete during freezing or near freezing weather. Keep materials, reinforcement, forms, and ground in contact with concrete free from frost at time of placement. Heat mixing water as required. Use no materials containing ice. Place no concrete when air temperature exceeds or is expected to exceed 85 degrees during the 28-day curing period unless a high temperature placement plan has been approved, and unless adequate precautions are taken to protect work. Cool ingredients prior to mixing. Flake ice or crushed ice of a size that will melt completely during mixing may be substituted for all or part of water. Cool forms and reinforcing prior to placing concrete. 3-10 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\3 Concrete.docx 8/14/24 10:59 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 3 Handle concrete from mixer, ready-mixed truck, or from transporting vehicle to place of final deposit by methods which prevent separation or loss of ingredients. Under no circumstances shall concrete that has partially hardened be deposited. Place concrete in maximum lifts of 3 feet. Deposit concrete continuously so that no concrete will be deposited on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams and planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, locate and reinforce construction joints at points as provided for in the Plans or as approved by the Owner. Maximum concrete drop shall be 5 feet. Consolidate concrete by vibration, supplemented by hand spading, rodding, forking, or tamping. Thoroughly work concrete around reinforcement, around embedded items, and into corners of forms to eliminate air or rock pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes of weakness. Insert and withdraw internal vibrators at points approximately 18 inches in each direction and extend into the lower concrete lifts. At each insertion, the duration shall be sufficient to consolidate the concrete; but not sufficient to cause segregation. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete within forms. Consolidate slabs by utilizing vibrating screeds, roller pipe screeds, internal vibrators, or other approved methods. Have a spare vibrator available at jobsite during concrete placing operations. After removal of forms, cut out and patch defects in concrete surfaces. Remove form tie cones. Cut or snap off form ties to a depth of ¾-inch. Chip out rock pockets, holes from form tie removal, and other defects to solid concrete. Repair defects in accordance with 3.01.30.71. 3.31 Structural Concrete [CSI 03 31 13] Part 1 - General Summary All concrete shown in the contract documents including below-grade structures, ringwalls, and all other concrete items not specifically called out otherwise. Performance Requirements 28-day compressive strength – 4,500 psi minimum Slump - Without plasticizers; 4 inches for floor and roof slabs, 7 inches for walls. With plasticizers, maximum 9 inches or as desired for placement. Use water reducers as required to achieve slump. Part 2 - Products Mixes Water/cement ratio - 0.40 maximum Nominal maximum aggregate size – ¾-inch (AASHTO Grading No. 67) Entrained air ratio – 3.5 percent minimum to 6.5 percent maximum 3-11 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\3 Concrete.docx 8/14/24 10:59 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 3 3.31.30 Thrust Blocks, Driveways, Curb, Gutter, Sidewalks, Equipment Pads, and Fence Posts [CSI 03 31 13.10] Part 1 - General Summary All concrete for non-structural applications including thrust blocks, driveways, sidewalks, equipment pads, and fence post foundations. Hydraulic or Structural Concrete may be substituted. Performance Requirements 28-day compressive strength – 4,500 psi minimum Part 2 - Products Mixes Water/cement ratio - 0.45 maximum Nominal maximum aggregate size – ¾-inch (AASHTO Grading No. 67) Entrained air ratio – 3.5 percent minimum to 6.5 percent maximum 3.35 Concrete Finishing [CSI 03 35 00] 3.35.05 Common Work for Surface Finishing [CSI 03 35 05] Part 2 - Products Finishes Each concrete area that requires finishing shall conform to one of the following requirements: Foundation (exterior) - Ordinary Wall Foundation (interior) - Ordinary Wall Interior Floors – Light Brush Finish Walls - Ordinary Wall Part 3 - Execution Preparation Do not place concrete which requires finishing until the materials, tools, and labor necessary for finishing the wet concrete are on the job and acceptable to the Owner. If rainfall is possible, tent the work area prior to the pour and maintain protection until the concrete is cured sufficiently to resist damage. 3-12 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\3 Concrete.docx 8/14/24 10:59 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 3 3.35.50 Ordinary Wall Finish [CSI 03 35 50] Part 2 Products Materials Ordinary Wall Finish requires the use of like-new forms and linings that will produce a uniform surface. Part 3 - Execution Construction After points have set sufficiently, grind or fill form marks and pointings to give a smooth surface even with flat wall surface. Fill all holes greater than ¼-inch with 1:2 mortar floated to an even, uniform finish. 3.35.56 Light Brush Finish [CSI 03 35 56] Part 2 – Products Finish When concrete has appropriately set, finish with light soft broom finish. Brush perpendicular to slab slope. Part 3 - Execution Construction Consolidate, strike off, and level concrete; but do not work further until ready for floating. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared and surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit floating operations. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats. Hand floating may be used if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Field Quality Control Check surface planeness during or after first floating. Cut down high spots and fill low spots to produce surface with tolerance of ¼-inch in 10 feet in any direction. Re-float to a uniform, smooth, sweat finish concrete. 3.39 Concrete Curing [CSI 03 39 00] Part 2 - Products Materials Curing compounds are not permitted on surfaces that will receive coatings. 3-13 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\3 Concrete.docx 8/14/24 10:59 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 3 Part 3 - Execution Installation All concrete for structures, sidewalks, drives, curbs, shotcrete (see section 3.37), and where directed by the Owner, shall be water-cured in accordance with ACI 308.1 unless approved in advance by the Owner. If allowed, curing compound shall be applied immediately after finishing or form removal. When plastic or burlap covers are used to augment or protect curing, extend sheeting beyond the edges of the concrete and secure against wind lift. Inspect and adjust curing systems daily, including over weekends and holidays. 3.40 PRE-CAST CONCRETE [CSI 03 40 00] 3.48 Pre-Cast Concrete Specialties [CSI 03 48 00] 3.48.50 Utility Structures [CSI 03 48 50, 33 05 61, 33 05 63] Part 1 - General Related Divisions 13.39.13 Sanitary Sewer Manholes, Frames, and Covers Design Requirements All concrete structures identified on the Plans as being pre-cast, prefabricated, or not specifically detailed with reinforcing steel shall be pre-cast concrete. Pre-cast vaults shall conform to ACI 318 and be constructed to the equivalent dimensions and functional characteristics of the specific product identified on the Plans. Unless shown otherwise on the plans, round structures larger than 30-inch inside diameter, or rectangular structures with longest interior side 30-inches or longer, that utilize riser sections, shall be cast with an integral keyway for interlocking the riser sections. Performance Requirements Pre-cast structures shall be constructed to withstand anticipated construction loads that occur during transport, handling, and placement as well as the anticipated design loads. Design loads shall include the anticipated soil pressures, hydrostatic loads, and traffic loading. Part 2 - Products Materials Additional reinforcement shall be provided within the pre-cast concrete structure at all penetrations, openings, joints, and connections. The additional reinforcement shall be 3-14 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\3 Concrete.docx 8/14/24 10:59 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 3 provided to prevent damage during shipping, handling and installation. All damaged units shall be rejected. All precast structures that consist of sections (base, riser, lid, etc.) shall have the joints sealed with rubber gaskets or mastic, of a material appropriate for the installation. Part 3 - Execution Cleaning Fill picking holes with grout flush to the structure surface, including those in vault lids. Cut, remove, and grind smooth shipping lifting hooks on the vault interior, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. 3.60 GROUTING [CSI 03 60 00] 3.62 Non-Shrink Grouting [CSI 03 62 00] 3.62.13 Non-Metallic Non-Shrink Grout [CSI 03 62 13] Part 1 - General Summary Use Precision Non-Shrink Grout for grouting all equipment base plates, pipe supports, and base plates for metalwork. Precision Non-Shrink grout may also be used for all other non- shrink grouting operations. General Purpose Non-Shrink grout may be used for any applications other than those noted for Precision Non-shrink Grout. Non-shrink grout shall be used to seal all new pipe and conduit penetrations (watertight) into and out of all concrete and CMU block walled structures. Storage and Handling Stockpile grout to prevent contamination from foreign materials and store admixtures to prevent contamination or damage from excess temperature change Part 2 - Products Materials Precision Non-Shrink Grout: Provide a high-precision, fluid, non-shrink, quartz or non-catalyzed metallic aggregate grouting material. Provide a ready-to-use grout that hardens free from bleeding, settlement, or drying shrinkage when mixed, placed and cured at any consistency – fluid, flowable, plastic or damp-pack. Provide precision, non-shrink natural aggregate grout that when cured produces the following properties: 3-15 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\3 Concrete.docx 8/14/24 10:59 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 3 A. Compressive Strength at fluid consistency (ASTM C109-Modified): 3500 psi (24 MPa) at 1 day, 7500 psi (52 MPa) at 28 days. B. Passes ASTM C1107 as a grade B grout when tested as temperature minimum and maximums of 45 degrees Fahrenheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit (8 degrees Celsius to 32 degrees Celsius) at a working time of 30 minutes. Grout must be tested at a fluid consistency per ASTM C939 and remain fluid at temperature range minimum and maximums for the 30-minute working time. All materials including water must be mixed and tested at temperature minimum/maximums. C. Modulus of Elasticity at 28 days at fluid consistency (ASTM C469): 3.0 x 106 psi (20.7 GPa) minimum, 3.9 x 106 (27.0 GPa) maximum. D. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion for fluid consistency (ASTM C531): 7.5 x 10-6/ degrees Fahrenheit maximum (13.5 x 10-6/ degrees Celsius). E. Flexural strength at 28 days for fluid consistency (ASTM C78): 1300 psi (7.9 MPa). F. Resistance to rapid freezing – thawing (ASTM C666, Procedure A): 300 cycles- min RDF 90 percent. G. Split tensile strength at 28 days at fluid consistency (ASTM C496): 450 psi (3.1 MPa). H. Pass 24-hour grout test under stated temperature, time and fluidity constraints. See MBT Protection and Repair 24-hour Grout Form. Precision non-shrink grout shall be MasterFlow 928 or 885 Grout or approved equal. General Purpose Non-Shrink Grout: General Purpose Non-shrink grout shall meet the compressive strength and nonshrink requirements of CRD-C 621, Grades B and C; Corp of Engineers Specification for Non-shrink grout; and ASTM C1107, Grades B and C. General Purpose Non-shrink grout shall be MasterFlow 713, Dayton Superior 1107 Advantage, or approved equal. Provide curing compounds as recommended by the grout manufacturer. Water to be used in mixing the grout shall be potable. Mixes Comply with grout manufacturer’s recommendations for mixing procedures. Adjust water temperature to keep mixed grout temperature in the range of 45 degrees Fahrenheit (7 degrees Celsius) and 90 degrees Fahrenheit (32 degrees Celsius) minimum/maximum. Use cold or iced water to extend working time in hot weather or in large placements. Use warm water in cold conditions to achieve minimum as mixed temperatures. Part 3 - Installation Preparation Mechanically remove unsound concrete within the limits of the grout placement. 3-16 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\3 Concrete.docx 8/14/24 10:59 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 3 Remove at least ¼-inch (6mm) of existing concrete facing and continue removal as required to expose sound aggregate. Thoroughly clean the roughened surface of dirt, loose chips, and dust. Maintain substrate in a saturated condition for 24 hours prior to grouting. Surface should be saturated surface dry at time of grouting. Clean baseplates and other metal surfaces to be grouted to obtain maximum adhesion. Remove loose rust and scale by grinding or sanding. Comply with grout manufacturer’s recommendations for form construction. Construct forms to be liquid tight. Installation Place grout mixture into prepared areas from one side to the other. Avoid placing grout from opposite sides in order to prevent voids. Work material firmly into the bottom and sides to assure good bond and to eliminate voids. Ensure that foundation and baseplate are within maximum/minimum placement temperatures. Shade foundation from summer sunlight under hot conditions. Warm foundation when foundation temperature is below 45 degrees Fahrenheit (7 degrees Celsius). Wet cure exposed shoulders for 48 hours followed by two coats of curing compound for best results. The minimal requirement is to wet cure until grout has reached final set, followed by two coats of curing compounds. 3.64 Injection Grouting [CSI 03 64 00] 3.64.23 Epoxy Injection Grouting [CSI 03 64 24] Part 1 - General Summary This section is for the repair of cracks at least 0.005 inches wide in water holding structures that result in excessive leakage. All requirements shall be in accordance with ACI 503-7 and as specified herein. References Excessive leakage shall be as determined in Section 1.75.16.52. All products in contact with potable water shall have NSF61 certification. Quality Assurance A meeting with the Contractor, Owner and Engineer is required to review the procedures at least five working days in advance of the work. Core holes as required per ACI 503.7 shall be repaired watertight and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3-17 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\3 Concrete.docx 8/14/24 10:59 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 3 Acceptance criteria given in 1.5.7.1 of ACI 503.7 may be waived if, upon additional leak testing, excessive leakage is eliminated as determined by the Engineer. Submittals Submittals shall be in accordance with ACI 503.7-07, Specification for Crack Repair by Epoxy Injection. Provide documentation showing the proposed repair products used successfully on at least five similar projects. Part 2 - Products Materials Materials shall be in accordance with ACI 503.7-07, Specification for Crack Repair by Epoxy Injection. Part 3 - Execution Execution shall be in accordance with ACI 503.7, Specification for Crack Repair by Epoxy Injection. 3-18 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\3 Concrete.docx 8/14/24 10:59 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 4 Masonry (Not Used This Contract) 4-1 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\4 Masonry.docx 8/14/24 11:00 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 5 Metals (Not Used This Contract) 5-1 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\5 Metals.docx 8/14/24 11:00 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 6 Wood, Plastics, and Composites 6.00 GENERAL Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” shall apply to all following subsections whether directly referenced or not. 6.05 Common Work for Wood, Plastics, and Composites [CSI 06 05 00] Part 1 - General Submittals Submittal information shall be provided to the Owner for the following items: Structural Lumber Wood Trim Part 3 - Execution Construction Provide temporary bracing, such as temporary guys, braces, false-work, cribbing, or other elements, in accordance with the requirements of the “Code of Standard Practice”, wherever necessary to accommodate all loads to which the structure may be subjected, including construction loads. Leave bracing in place for as long as required for safety. Securely fasten the work as erection progresses to compensate for all loads during construction. Perform no permanent fastening until the structure has been properly aligned. 6.10 ROUGH CARPENTRY [CSI 06 10 00] 6.11 Wood Framing [CSI 06 11 00] Part 1 - General References U.S. Department of Commerce/National Institute of Standards and Technology - American Softwood Lumber Standard PS 20. American National Standards Institute / American Forest and Paper Association National Design Specifications (ANSI/AF&PA NDS). 6-1 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\6 Wood Plastics and Composites.docx 8/14/24 11:02 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 6 Part 2 - Products Components Structural lumber shall be of the nominal dimensions shown on the Plans and shall not exceed 19 percent moisture content when installed. All pieces shall be Kiln Dried Hem Fir or Spruce-Pine-Fir No. 2 grade or better unless otherwise specified on the Plans. Lumber and other wood members shall meet requirements of ANSI/AFPA NDS: National Design Specification for Wood Construction, American Forest & Paper Association/American Wood Council, current edition. If a different edition is called out on the plans, that edition will govern. Accessories including bolts with necessary nuts and washers, timber connectors, drift pins, dowels, nails, screws, spikes, and other metal fastenings shall conform to ASTM A-307. Provide bolts with malleable iron washers under nuts. Nails shall be round wire of standard form. Spikes shall be button-head boat spikes. Galvanize bolts, dowels, washers, spikes, and other hardware, including nails, in accordance with ASTM A-153. Preservative Treated Wood All wood members which contact concrete or masonry shall be naturally durable wood or preservative-treated wood using water-borne preservatives, in accordance with AWPA U1 (Commodity Specifications A or F) for above-ground use. Coat cut ends of pressure treated wood with copper naphthenate based wood preservative. All fasteners in contact with preservative treated wood shall be hot-dip galvanized All connectors in contact with preservative treated wood shall be hot-dip galvanized Interior connectors in contact with preservative treated wood that are not exposed to the elements may be G185 galvanized. Part 3 - Execution Construction Accurately cut and frame all lumber so that joints will have a close fit over entire contact surface. Secure lumber and piles in their proper alignment. No shimming will be permitted in making joints, nor will open joints be accepted. Bore holes in small timbers for boat or wire spikes with a bit of the same diameter or smallest dimension of the spikes, when necessary, to prevent splitting. Counterbore for countersinking wherever smooth faces are required. Connectors and fasteners shall comply with the applicable provisions of IBC Sections 2304.9.1 through 2304.9.7. The number and size of fasteners connecting wood members shall not be less than that set forth in IBC Table 2304.9.1. 6.20 FINISH CARPENTRY [CSI 06 20 00] 6-2 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\6 Wood Plastics and Composites.docx 8/14/24 11:02 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 6 6.20.05 Common Work for Finish Carpentry [CSI 06 20 05] Part 1 - General Summary Furnish all architectural woodwork shown on the Plans and specified herein. Architectural woodwork includes all exterior and interior non-structural woodwork exposed to view in finished project including shelving, millwork, trim, and plastic laminates. Related Sections Division 9.90.05 Common Work for Paint and Coating Division 9.90.06 Color Schedule Division 9.91.13.10 Exterior Wood References The “Quality Standards” of the Architectural woodwork institute (AWI) shall apply and, by reference, are hereby made a part of this specification. Any reference to premium, custom, or economy in this specification shall be defined as the latest edition of the AWI “Quality Standards”. Part 2 - Products Quality Control Discard material with defects which might impair the quality of work, and units which are too small to fabricate the work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. Finish trim boards are to be selected for straight and un-warped / un-curled shape. Part 3 - Execution Installation Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with member plumb, true, and accurately cut and fitted. All exposed trim work is to be mitered at corners. Where long runs require more than one board, cut ends at 45 degrees. Securely attach carpentry work to substrates by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. Use common wire nails or finishing screws, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre-drill as required. Fill nail holes with putty prior to painting. Provide adequate end and edge distances. Install hardware specified or required to complete the project. Adjust movable parts to operate perfectly at time of final acceptance. Make further adjustments required during the guarantee period. 6-3 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\6 Wood Plastics and Composites.docx 8/14/24 11:02 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 6 6.22 Millwork [CSI 06 22 00] 6.22.13 Standard Pattern Wood Trim [CSI 06 22 13] Part 2 - Products Materials Trim board material as shown on the Plans. If not shown on the Plans, trim board shall have a smooth, untextured finish and be high density fiberboard (HDF), oak, or fir. Part 3 - Execution Installation Install trim board straight and true. Miter all corners. Caulk where gaps between the trim and the mating surface are unavoidable. 6.70 STRUCTURAL COMPOSITES [CSI 06 70 00] 6.70.05 Common Work for Structural Composites [CSI 06 70 05] Part 1 – General Related Sections 5.05.23 Bolts and Other Connectors Design Requirements Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) structural shapes shall be produced using the pultrusion process. Submit mechanical and physical properties (from ASTM coupon specimens) the Owner for approval. 6-4 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\6 Wood Plastics and Composites.docx 8/14/24 11:02 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 6 Minimum longitudinal mechanical properties for pultruded structural shapes: Property ASTM Method Value Units Tensile Strength D-638 30,000 (206) psi (MPa) Tensile Modulus D-638 2.5 x 106 (17.2) psi (GPa) Flexural Strength D-790 30,000 (206) psi (MPa) Flexural Modulus D-790 1.8 x 106 (12.4) psi (GPa) Flexural Modulus (Full Section) N/A 2.8 x 106 (19.3) psi (GPa) Short Beam Shear (Transverse) D-2344 4,500 (31) psi (MPa) Shear Modulus (Transverse) N/A 4.5 x 105 (3.1) psi (GPa) Coefficient of Thermal 8.0 x 10-6 in/in/°F D-696 Expansion (1.4 x 10 -6) (cm/cm/°C) Flame Spread E-84 25 or less N/A Seal cut edges and holes according to manufacturer’s instructions with a polyester resin compatible with resin matrix of structural shape and corrosion resistance equal or superior to the grating. All finished surfaces of FRP items and fabrications shall be resin-rich, free of voids, and without dry spots, cracks, crazes, or unreinforced areas. All glass fibers shall be well covered with resin to protect against their exposure due to wear or weathering. All fiberglass products in contact with potable water shall be NSF approved for potable water contact. Part 2 - Products Manufacturers All FRP components equal to that manufactured by Strongwell. 6.72.33 Composite Ladders [CSI 06 72 33] Related Sections 5.51.05 Common Work for Stairs and Ladders Part 2 - Products Materials FRP ladders shall be made from FRP structural shapes as specified. Produce ladder side rails by the pultrusion process. The side rails shall be 2-inch square tube with a wall thickness of 0.25-inch. The rungs shall be 1-inch minimum diameter thermal cure clear solid rod with a nonslip footing surface. Epoxy and rivet all joints and rungs. 6-5 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\6 Wood Plastics and Composites.docx 8/14/24 11:02 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 6 Fabrication Ladders shall be shop assembled, pre-drilled, and prepared for field attachment of standoff clips. Seal all cut or machined edges with a resin compatible with the resin matrix used in the structural shape. 6-6 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\6 Wood Plastics and Composites.docx 8/14/24 11:02 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection 7.00 GENERAL This division covers furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment for providing a structure that is completely weather-tight. Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” shall apply to all following subsections whether directly referenced or not. 7.05 Common Work for Thermal and Moisture Protection [CSI 07 05 00] Part 1 - General Submittals Submittal information shall be provided to the Owner for the following items: Thermal insulation Ceiling insulation Rigid insulation Joint sealants Caulk 7.20 THERMAL PROTECTION [CSI 07 20 00] 7.21 Thermal Insulation [CSI 07 21 00] 7.21.16 Blanket Insulation [CSI 07 21 16] Part 1 – General Performance Requirements Insulation shall be Kraft-paper-faced batt with a minimum R value of 38. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Ceiling insulation shall be equal to Owens Corning. 7-1 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\7 Thermal and Moisture Protection.docx 8/14/24 11:02 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 7 Part 3 – Execution Installation Provide and install ceiling insulation as shown on the project Plans. Place insulation with craft paper face down and as recommended by the manufacturer. Insulation shall be placed to the extents possible to cover the attic. Place baffles above the insulation as the slope of the roof meets the building edge. Part 3 – Execution Installation The abutting joints shall be staggered so that no joint from the bottom layer of insulation lies directly below a joint from the top layer of insulation. The insulation shall be fastened using mechanical fasteners to the metal roof support deck as recommended by the manufacturer. Fasteners shall penetrate only the top ridges of the steel roof support deck. 7.21.13.13 Foam Board Insulation [CSI 07 21 13.13] Part 1 – General Performance Requirements Provide a minimum R value of 15. Insulation for foundations shall be suitable for direct bury application. Storage and Handling Protect insulation stored on the jobsite from physical damage and direct sunlight. Store off the ground and cover with a light color polyethylene film. Make sure the covered insulation is well ventilated to prevent excessive temperature build-up. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Insulation shall be Foamular 150 as manufactured by Owens Corning or equal. Part 3 – Execution Installation Extruded polystyrene insulation shall be placed as shown on the Plans. Do not damage insulation during installation and take adequate care to backfill soils to meet compaction standards while not damaging insulation. For foundations, finish top edge of insulation 1-inch to 2-inches below finished ground elevation. Install only as much insulation as can be covered, at least temporarily, during the same day. 7-2 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\7 Thermal and Moisture Protection.docx 8/14/24 11:02 AM11:02 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 7 7.21.13.30 Structural Foam Board Insulation [CSI 07 21 13.30] Part 1 – General Submittals Rigid insulation type and fastening devices shall be submitted for approval by the engineer. Performance Requirements The rigid insulation shall have a minimum compressive strength of 25 psi. The insulation shall have a thickness of 1.5-inch constructed in two layers for a total thickness of 3-inch with each layer having a 4.75 R value at 50 degrees Fahrenheit. Warranty Prior to final acceptance of the roofing, furnish the Owner with a written guarantee from the manufacturer for a 20-year period after date of final acceptance that guarantees insulation efficiency, compressive strength, no absorption of moisture, and that the product will remain totally noncombustible. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Insulation shall be equal to Foamglas One as manufactured by Pittsburgh Corning. 7.90 JOINT PROTECTION [CSI 07 90 00] 7.92.13 Elastomeric Joint Sealants [CSI 07 92 13] Part 1 – General Submittals Submit schedule for caulk used on the project for approval prior to application. Part 2 – Products Materials Kitchen, Bath, Laboratory, and Other Wet Areas DAP® KWIK SEAL PLUS® Premium Kitchen & Bath Adhesive Caulk w/MICROBAN® or equal. Concrete and Masonry DAP® Premium Polyurethane Concrete & Masonry Sealant or equal.\ 7-3 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\7 Thermal and Moisture Protection.docx 8/14/24 11:02 AM11:02 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 7 Wood or Concrete Board Siding DAP® ALEX PLUS® Acrylic Latex Caulk Plus Silicone or equal. Doors and Windows DAP® DYNAFLEX 230® Premium Elastomeric Sealant or equal. Where necessary to provide a suitable backstop and bond breaker, tightly pack with polyethylene foam. Rope the back of grooves, leaving a minimum depth of ¼-inch for sealant. Prime surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. Other Surfaces Contractor shall provide caulk appropriate to surface and reason for caulk application. Caulk shall be the most durable available (longest warranty) by DAP®, or equal. Part 3 – Execution Installation Caulk all joints and spaces necessary to provide a completely weather-tight product. Apply caulking in strict accordance with manufacturer’s directions with regard to temperature at application and curing times, surface condition, moisture, and cleanliness. Apply after surfacing prime and prior to final coatings if surface is to be coated. If surface will not be coated, provide color choices to the Owner for approval prior to application. Clean all adjoining surfaces of excess sealant, smears, or marking due to application and leave joints with neat, uniformly-filled surfaces. 7-4 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\7 Thermal and Moisture Protection.docx 8/14/24 11:02 AM11:02 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 8 Openings 8.00 GENERAL Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” apply to all following subsections whether directly referenced or not. 8.05 Common Work for Openings [CSI 08 05 00] Part 1 - General Summary This division covers furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for providing all interior and exterior doors, frames, and windows. Related Sections Division 5.05.23 Bolts and Other Connectors Submittals Submittal information shall be provided to the Owner for the following items: Doors Hatches Hardware Locks Keys 8.06 Schedules for Openings [CSI 08 06 00] See the contract Plans for schedule of doors. 8.10 DOORS AND FRAMES [CSI 08 10 00] 8.10.05 Common Work for Doors and Frames [CSI 08 10 05] Part 1 - General Summary This specification covers the doors, frames, accessories, and hardware for both interior and exterior man doors. 8-1 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\8 Openings.docx 8/14/24 11:06 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 8 Related Sections 1.52.20 Locks and Keys Submittals Submittal information shall include the following: Manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions for each type of door, frame, accessory, or hardware. Include both published data and any specific data prepared for this project. Door and frame shop drawing for approval prior to fabrication. Include detailed plans, elevations, details of framing members, required clearances, anchors, and accessories. Include relationship with adjacent materials. As requested by the Engineer, provide sample color chips representing specified colors and finishes. Performance Requirements Doors between rooms requiring a fire separation shall have a listed fire rating equal to or greater than the required room fire rating. See Plans for which rooms are required to be separated with a fire door. Doors and frames shall be listed and labeled for a minimum of 45 minutes. Doors between rooms requiring an acoustical separation (soundproof or sound rated door) shall have a minimum STC rating of 45. All exterior doors and frames shall be insulated for a maximum U-value of 0.60. Quality Assurance The manufacturer(s) shall be a minimum of ten (10) continuous years documented experience specializing in the manufacturing of doors, frames, accessories, and/or hardware of the type required for this project. At the request of the Engineer, the manufacturer shall provide testing and/or certification information demonstrating that the manufacturer shall design and construct all equipment to the latest applicable codes and standards. The manufacturer or their representative shall be available for consultation to all parties engaged in the project, including instruction to installation personnel. Scheduling The Contractor shall ensure that all approvals and/or shop drawings are supplied or returned to the manufacturer in time for fabrication without affecting construction progress schedule. In addition, they shall ensure that templates and/or actual hardware requested by manufacturer are available in time for fabrication without affecting construction progress schedule. Warranty The Manufacturer shall provide a one (1) year warranty against defects in workmanship and materials, including warping, rotting, decaying or bowing. The Installer shall warrant installation procedures and performance for a minimum of two (2) years from the point of substantial completion against defects due to workmanship and materials handling. 8-2 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\8 Openings.docx 8/14/24 11:06 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 8 Part 2 - Products Components Provide doors, frames, and accessories as noted on the Door Schedule. Provide door hardware as specified, as noted on the Door Schedule, and as required by the local building code. Contractor shall provide weather tight trim around all doors whether shown on the Plans or not. The frames shall be furnished with sufficient wall and head anchors to secure the jamb and door against all operating, wind, and seismic loads. Exterior door frames shall have an integral weather-strip at head and jambs. Frames shall be trimmed in the field to form a weather tight seal if shown on the Plans or not. Accessories Provide door accessories as noted on the Door Schedule. Hinges shall provide 180-degree rotation of the door. Hinges which are exposed at building exterior shall be equipped with tamper-proof pins that cannot be removed. Hinges exposed at the interior of the building shall be removable. The manufacturer shall provide door stops; no screw-on stops will be accepted. Equip exterior louvered doors with factory-installed, insert-type, sight-proof louvers with inverted “Y” blade baffles. Louvers and frames shall be of sufficient strength to withstand a 300-pound lateral load without permanent deflection. Equip louver with a bird and insect screen. Louvers shall a minimum of 40 percent free area airflow. Louver blades and frames shall be 6063-T5 extruded aluminum alloy, 0.062-inch (1.57 mm) minimum thickness. Insect screens shall be 14-18 mesh, 0.011-inch (0.28 mm) diameter alclad aluminum, set in 6063-T5 extruded aluminum alloy frame, 0.050-inch (1.25 mm) minimum thickness. Finishes Prime doors and frames at the factory according to requirements for metals in Division 9. Finishes shall be per the appropriate metal finishes in Division 9. Part 3 - Execution Installation Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved shop drawings; set frames plumb, square, level, and aligned to receive doors. Anchor frames to adjacent construction in strict accordance with recommendations and approved shop drawings and within tolerances specified in manufacturer’s instructions. Seal metal-to-metal joints between framing members using good quality elastomeric sealant, and all doorjambs with caulking as specified. Reinforce hinge and lock areas. Mount door using minimum of three (3) hinges. Hang door in the frames and apply hardware in a neat, secure manner so that the doors will operate without dragging or binding. 8-3 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\8 Openings.docx 8/14/24 11:06 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 8 Cleaning/Repair Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean door and frame surfaces in accordance with AAMA 609. Do not use abrasive, caustic, or acid cleaning agents. Protect products of this section from damage caused by subsequent construction until substantial completion. If damage does occur, Contractor shall repair damaged or defective products to original specified condition in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Replace damaged or defective products that cannot be repaired to Owner’s acceptance. 8.11 Metal Doors and Frames [CSI 08 11 00] 8.11.13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames [CSI 08 11 13] Part 2 - Products Components Doors and frames shall comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and A250.4 for physical performance level. All doors shall be 1¾-inch thick and insulated with a solid polyurethane or urethane foam core. Exterior doors shall be Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless) and fabricated from 16 gauge steel minimum. Interior doors shall be Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush) and fabricated from 18 gauge steel minimum. Door frames shall be 14-gauge galvanized steel, as manufactured or recommended by the door supplier specifically for the door installed. Frames shall be furnished with sufficient wall and head anchors to secure the jamb and door against all operating, wind, and seismic loads. Alternatively, door frames installed within CMU walls can be 16-gauge galvanized steel, tied to the CMU with masonry wire clips. Fully grout CMU block within one length of a full-sized block measured from door frame. 8.30 SPECIALTY DOORS [CSI 08 30 00] 8.31 Access Doors and Panels [CSI 08 31 00] 8.31.20 Vault Hatches [CSI 08 31 20] Part 1 - General Summary Access hatches shall be of the dimensions and type shown on the project Plans. 8-4 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\8 Openings.docx 8/14/24 11:06 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 8 Related Sections 1.52.20 Locks and Keys Performance Requirements Access doors located in sidewalks or off regularly traveled path areas shall be rated for H-20 (AASHTO) loading. Access openings shall not have any obstructions such as intermediate hatch support beams. Submittals Provide manufacturer’s statement of load rating. For aluminum frames to be cast in concrete, provide submittal for frame coating. Locate gutter drain outlet location and routing of drain line to its intended location. Finishes Aluminum hatch frames shall be protectively coated prior to casting in concrete to prevent the accelerated corrosion that occurs when aluminum is in contact with concrete. Warranty Manufacturer shall guarantee against defects in material or workmanship for a period of five years. Part 2 - Products Manufacturers Hatches shall be equal to USF Fabrications, Bilco, Halliday or LW Products. Components Access hatches shall have aluminum diamond plate door leaf (or leaves), stainless steel spring lift, neoprene weather seal, stainless steel hardware, self-latching stainless-steel slam lock, and recessed padlock hasp with cover. An unkeyed internal lever shall open the latch to prevent accidental entrapment. Any drainage provision provided by the hatch or frame shall be routed to the vault or building sump or drain system using Sch 40 PVC anchored to the walls and ceiling unless shown otherwise on the plans. Frame shall be channel style with a full anchor flange around the perimeter and shall allow for controlled water drainage away from the opening. Compression spring operator lift system enclosed in telescopic tubes, expansion spring, or torsion springs shall be provided for smooth, easy and controlled door operation throughout the entire arc of opening and closing. Operation shall not be affected by temperature. The door shall automatically lock in the vertical position by means of a heavy steel hold-open arm with release handle. Part 3 - Execution Installation Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 8-5 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\8 Openings.docx 8/14/24 11:06 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 8 Hatch gutter drain shall be connected to 2.5-inch or larger Schedule 40 PVC pipe and routed to daylight or storm drain unless shown otherwise on the plans. Field Quality Control Frame shall be installed square and true without binding of door throughout the full arc of travel. Mis-operation of door shall be corrected by the Contractor. 8.33 Coiling Doors and Grilles [CSI 08 33 00] 8.36.13 Sectional Garage Doors [CSI 08 36 13] Part 1 - General Performance Requirements Doors shall be insulated to minimum R-7.35 polyurethane insulated core. Curtains shall be interlocking panels able to withstand a uniform wind load of 20 lbs. per square foot, without permanent distortion. Part 2 - Products Components Sectional doors shall be aluminum or hot dipped galvanized steel panels. Door track shall be low headroom track style and extend up wall and turn near ceiling. All hardware shall be hot dipped galvanized or bare steel coated per Division 9. Track shall not be suspended more than 24 inches below ceiling. Track shall be secured as necessary to support wind loads. Counterbalance shall be torsion spring type, rated for minimum 10,000 cycles. Weather stripping shall be provided at all edges for weathertight installation and protect against wind-driven rain. Provide interior slide lock with padlock hole. Provide manual chain operator for door. Operator shall operate door with less than 35 lbs. of pull. 8.70 HARDWARE [CSI 08 70 00] 8.71 Door Hardware [CSI 08 71 00] 8-6 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\8 Openings.docx 8/14/24 11:06 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 8 8.71.05 Common Work for Door Hardware [CSI 08 71 05] Part 1 - General Summary This specification covers door hardware for interior and exterior doors. The Contractor shall provide all hardware necessary to install doors in a secure, weather-tight manner. Unless otherwise specified, all door hardware shall be according to this section. Related Sections 1.52.20 Locks and Keys Submittals Door hardware submittal information shall indicate that hardware is suitable for fire- and sound-rated applications, where applicable. Verkada will provide, install and test the locking system on the pump station access door. Verkada will be paid directly by the City for this work. Performance Requirements All door hardware shall be selected to meet local building and fire codes. Part 2 – Products Components Key cylinders shall utilize the Owner’s standard core and key. The key cylinder shall fit all exterior locking hardware and shall not automatically lock when the door is closed. A vandal-resistant cover plate shall be provided at exterior surface of doors to prevent exterior access to deadbolts or slam latches at gap between door and frame. All exterior, and fire- and sound- rated doors and frames shall have perimeter gasketing. Weather stripping shall consist of a vinyl, neoprene, or sponge neoprene strip mounted on an aluminum or stainless steel bracket which is fastened to the door or frame. Gasketing shall be Pemko or equal. 8.71.20 Hardware for Man-Doors [CSI 08 71 20] Part 2 - Products Exterior Door Lockset Exit Device (Emergency Exit): Exit devices shall be provided for exterior doors at fire-rated doors, emergency exits, chemical/hazard rooms, and elsewhere as shown in the Door Schedule on the Plans. Unless otherwise noted, exit devices shall only be provided on the active door of a double door. 8-7 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\8 Openings.docx 8/14/24 11:06 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 8 Exit devices shall be Dorma 9500 series mortise lock style with 3-inch wide by 16-inch high raised plate and rectangular pull with thumbpiece and cylinder hole, or equal. Panic exit hardware shall have a stainless steel satin finish and shall be equal to Von Duprin Series 98/99 panic bar. Key cylinders shall be interchangeable and compatible with the Owner’s preferred cylinder. Exterior doorknobs shall have brushed stainless steel finish, or equal. Exterior doorknobs shall be ANSI A156.13 Series 1000 Grade 1, Schlage or equal. Closers: Door closers shall be provided for exterior doors, fire-rated doors, restroom, and locker room doors, and elsewhere as shown in the Door Schedule on the Plans. Door closers shall be surface mounted, parallel-arm type with an aluminum or stainless steel finish. Door closers shall be Dorma 8600 or equal. Closer shall be UL-listed for fire door rating. Push/Pull Plates: The inactive door on a double door shall be equipped with push/pull hardware. The pull hardware shall be the rectangular pull style mounted on a 3-inch-wide by 16-inch-high plate. The push plate shall be 3-inches wide by 16-inches high. Push/pull hardware shall be fabricated from stainless steel. Doors with push/pull hardware shall be equipped with closer. Door Hinges: Door hinges shall be fabricated using polished and stainless steel and shall be equipped with permanently lubricated ball bearings. Hinges shall provide 180-degree rotation of the door. Hinges which are exposed at building exterior shall be equipped with tamper-proof pins that cannot be removed. Hinges exposed at the interior of the building shall be removable. Thresholds: All interior and exterior doors shall have an extruded aluminum threshold. Thresholds shall be Pemko or equal. Door Bottoms: All sound rated doors shall have a non-handed full-mortise automatic door bottom with neoprene seal that is fire and sound rated. Automatic door bottom shall be Pemko 434ANBL or equal. All exterior and fire rated doors shall have vinyl or neoprene door-shoe or door-bottom sweep, Pemko or equal. Astragals: Provide flush extension bolts at the top and bottom of inactive double doors. Equip inactive doors with an overlapping astragal constructed of similar material to door. Astragals shall be Pemko or equal. Door Stops: All doors shall have a doorstop and holder fabricated from aluminum or stainless steel. Strike shall be wall- or floor-mounted and provide automatic doorstop and hold with quick release. Doorstop for interior doors shall be a wall-mounted concave rubber bumper with a stainless steel or aluminum mounting plate. Coordinator: All double doors shall have a coordinator to restrict the closing of one door before the other so that they close and lock properly. If not shown on the plans, Owner shall select which double door will be the primary and secondary door during the submittal stage of the project. 8-8 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\8 Openings.docx 8/14/24 11:06 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 8 Rain Drip: All exterior doors shall be equipped with an aluminum door-top rain-drip weather strip, mounted to the top edge of the door frame to prevent water intrusion. Rain drips shall be Pemko or equal. Finishes All hardware shall have the same finish and shall be satin stainless. 8-9 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\8 Openings.docx 8/14/24 11:06 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 9 Finishes 9.00 GENERAL This division covers work necessary for providing all materials, equipment, and labor to coat all items in accordance with these specifications. Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” apply to all following subsections whether directly referenced or not. 9.20 PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD [CSI 09 20 00] 9.21.23 Gypsum Board for Low Occupancy Areas [CSI 09 21 23] Part 1 - General Summary This section covers work within infrequently occupied facilities, process, or industrial buildings. This section includes the following areas: 1. Pump Station Related Sections Division 9.21.21 Gypsum Board for High Occupancy Areas Division 9.91.23.10 Interior Painting – Gypsum Wallboard Part 2 - Products Components Gypsum board shall be selected based on the installed application (see below) and as recommended by the Gypsum Association GA-223-96. Gypsum board shall be ⅝-inch thick, unless otherwise noted. Type Application ASTM Regular Interior Walls and Ceilings C1396 Type X or C Fire-Rated Construction C1396 Soffit Board Exterior Soffits and Ceilings C931 Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board Tile Base C630 Joint treatment: U.S. Gypsum Company Perm-a-Tape or equivalent. Protect exposed corners with U.S. Gypsum Company Perm-a-Tape or equivalent moldings embedded in joint compound per manufacturer’s recommendations. 9-1 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\9 Finishes.docx 8/14/24 11:08 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 9 Finishes Finish-sand all areas to smooth, even surfaces suitable for paintings. Part 3 - Execution Installation Provide and install all necessary components, including furring, as necessary to install gypsum board in accordance with local building code and Gypsum Associations standards (GA-216 and GA-600). Install gypsum board as needed to maintain fire and sound transmission rating. Apply square edge with the long dimension parallel with supports. Abut sides and edges to vertical framing members, top and bottom plates, or headers. Attach using nails spaced at 8 inches O.C. at all edges, and 8 inches O.C. on intermediate support. 9.90 PAINTING AND COATING [CSI 09 90 00] 9.90.05 Common Work for Painting and Coating [CSI 09 90 05] Part 1 – General Scope The work specified in this Section covers the furnishing and installation of protective coating, complete in place. Shop coating and/or factory applied finishes on manufactured or fabricated items may be specified elsewhere. Regardless of the number of coats previously applied, at least two coats of paint shall be applied in the field to all coated surfaces unless otherwise specified herein. Submittals Before beginning any painting or coating, submit a list of coatings and manufacturers for review by the Owner. Include the application each coating is intended for, any surface preparation, number of coats, method of application, and coating thickness. Provide color choices with physical cards prepared by the coating manufacturer. Electronic (PDF, jpg, etc.) charts, and charts made from office printers or copiers are not acceptable. If the Owner elects to make preliminary selection from an electronic or printed chart, the Contractor must provide physical samples of the colors selected for the Owner’s approval. Provide Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for all materials including solvents. Provide NSF certification for finishes in potential contact with potable water. Submit this information according to the requirements regarding shop drawings included herein. Provide a schedule of coating operations and inspection timing. Coating inspections will be scheduled based upon Contractor-provided schedule, update schedule weekly or as necessary. Provide manufacturer’s approval of coating system applicator. 9-2 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\9 Finishes.docx 8/14/24 11:08 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 9 If submitted products are manufactured by a company other than the specified reference standard, provide complete comparison to specified projects including application procedures, coverage rates, and verification that product is appropriate for intended use. Provide information that demonstrates the submitted products are equal to the performance standards of products manufactured by Tnemec Corporation, which is the reference standard. Provide shop QP-3 accreditation and shop- or contractor- inspector CIP-3 accreditation for facilities performing any pipe coating application. Provide manufacturer’s approval of coating system applicator. Provide a schedule of coating operations and inspection timing. Coating inspections will be scheduled based upon Contractor-provided schedule, update schedule weekly or as necessary. Performance Requirements All finishes potentially in contact with potable water shall be National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) 61 or 600 certified for contact with potable water. Certification from the NSF or UL shall be supplied in writing at the time of the submittal process for Finishes. Verify the submitted coatings’ current NSF requirements, restrictions, and applicability to the coated items. Verify finishes used on the project are compliant with primary and secondary standards of the Safe Drinking Water Act. Any violation shall be remedied at the Contractor’s expense. The completed coating shall produce a minimum dry film thickness in accordance with the specifications as determined by the microtest thickness gauge or comparable instrument. In areas where this thickness is not developed, sufficient additional coats shall be applied to produce it. Quality Assurance The Contractor is responsible for compatibility of all shop and field applied paint products including the use of primer, intermediate, and top coats by different manufacturers if applicable. For any Contractor initiated substitutions, the Contractor shall verify complete compatibility between coatings provided for the project. If coatings are not compatible per manufacturer’s review it is the Contractor’s responsibility to remove incompatible coatings fully and replace with compatible coating systems. Paint used in the first field coat over shop painted or previously painted surfaces shall cause no wrinkling, lifting, or other damage to the underlying paint. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining written documentation from equipment/material manufacturers regarding the date at which shop prime coatings are applied and shall strictly adhere to the coating manufacturer’s recommendations for recoat time intervals. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner such documentation upon request. Storage and Handling Bring all materials to the job site in the original sealed and labeled containers of the paint manufacturer. Materials are subject to inspection by the Owner. Store paint supplies as recommended by the manufacturer and as approved by the Owner. 9-3 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\9 Finishes.docx 8/14/24 11:08 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 9 Waste Products Collect, contain, transport, and dispose all waste products generated for this project. Cleaning and disposal shall comply with all federal, state, and local pollution control laws. Provide acceptable containers for collection and disposal of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Cleaning and disposal shall comply with all federal, state, and local pollution control laws. Provide appropriate containers for collection and disposal of waste, debris, and rubbish. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers The following coating system manufacturers are approved subject to compliance with the Specifications contained herein: 1. Tnemec Company 2. Sherwin Williams 3. International Paint (AkzoNobel) 4. Or Equal The specified coating establishes the type and quality of the coating desired. Other manufacturers’ products will be accepted provided sufficient information is submitted to allow the Owner to determine that the coatings proposed are equivalent to those named. Proposed coating shall be submitted for review in accordance with Division 1. Requests for review of equivalency will not be accepted from anyone except the Contractor. Substitutions of the coatings of other manufacturers will be considered only if equivalent systems of coatings can be provided and only if a record of satisfactory experience with the system in equivalent applications is available. Offers for substitutions will not be considered which decrease film thickness, solids by volume or the number of coats to be applied, or which propose a change from the generic type of coating specified herein. All substitutions shall include complete test reports to prove compliance with specified performance criteria. Part 3 – Execution Preparation Take any measures necessary to prevent over-spray of structures and/or components in the field from both preparation and coating work. Should over-spray occur, the Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with any damage resulting from over-spray. Installers Contractor is responsible for quality assurance including the retention of a coating applicator with experience necessary to complete the work as specified. Applicator’s personnel shall be adequately trained for application of specified coatings. Applicator must prove adequate experience with the coatings specified for this project. Shop-applied coatings shall be performed at a QP-3 accredited facility. Provide documentation verifying accreditation. 9-4 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\9 Finishes.docx 8/14/24 11:08 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 9 Examination The Owner shall inspect and approve all surface preparations prior to application of any coating. Provide 24-hour notice prior to surface inspection needs. Preparation Prepare surfaces in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the coating to be applied to the surface, or the surface preparation requirements of these specifications, whichever are stricter. In general, all surface preparation shall meet Structural Steel Painting Council (SSPC) Surfacing Preparation (SP) guidelines, the National Association of Pipe Fitters (NAPF), American Water Works Association (AWWA) and/or the National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) as noted herein unless more strictly described by coating manufacturer. Apply coatings only during weather meeting the coating manufacturer’s recommendations. Air and surface temperatures, humidity, and all other environmental conditions shall be within limits prescribed by the manufacturer for the coating being applied, and work areas shall be reasonably free of airborne dust at the time of application and while coating is drying. Materials shall be mixed, thinned, and applied according to the manufacturer’s printed instructions. Dry Film Thickness (DFT) shall be as stated herein or applied based on coverage rates of square feet per gallon (sq. ft./gal). Installation/Construction Apply paint in strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions except that coating thickness specified herein shall govern. Finished coating on all items shall be clean, undamaged, and of uniform thickness and color. Coat in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. The DFT listed in these specifications must be met, regardless of the applied film thickness or number of coats. Observe all safety precautions stated in the manufacturer’s printed instructions. Provide adequate ventilation and lighting at all times. The manufacturer’s recommended drying time shall be construed to mean “under normal conditions”. Where conditions are other than normal because of weather, confined spaces, or other reason, longer drying times may be necessary. The manufacturer’s recommendation for recoating time intervals shall be strictly adhered to. Pipe being coated shall be emptied of water for a minimum of 24 hours prior to surface preparation and painting. Pipe shall not be filled with water until coating is dry. If, in the Owner’s opinion it is not practical to drain the pipe, the water must stand for at least 48 hours to reach ambient temperature prior to coating the pipe. Do not allow water to flow for at least 24 hours after each coat. Field Quality Control The prime Contractor shall be completely responsible for coating quality. The Contractor shall provide both wet and dry film gauges and make such available to the Owner when requested. If coating inspector finds anomalies and/or defects, the Contractor shall re-prep and recoat those areas per the coating manufacturer’s instructions. 9-5 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\9 Finishes.docx 8/14/24 11:08 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 9 Acceptance of the completed coatings shall be based on the proper application and proper preparation of the coated surfaces, and a finished product that meets minimum thickness and does not contain runs, drips, surface irregularities, overspray, color variations, scratches, pinholes, holidays, and other surface signs that detract from the overall performance and/or appearance of the finished project. If, in the Owner’s sole opinion, the finished color of exterior coatings does not match that of the submitted and approved colors, the Contractor will recoat as necessary to achieve the approved color at no additional cost to the Owner. Inspection For metals exposed to exterior atmospheric conditions, first coat of paint or primer must be placed within four hours of passing inspection. Bare steel must be reblasted and reinspected if not successfully coated within this four-hour time frame, at the Contractor’s expense. Use the Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces (VIS-1) by the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as a visual standard for inspection of surface preparation of metal surfaces. Test-Tex Tape may also be used to verify surface profile. Inspect each coat prior to application of the next coat. Areas found to contain runs, overspray, roughness, streaks, laps, sags, or other signs of improper application shall be repaired or recoated in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Finish coats shall be uniform in color and sheen. Surface preparations and coatings not inspected and approved by the Owner will be uncovered for inspection and approval at no additional cost to the Owner. Repair/Restoration The Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with any damage that occurs as a result of over-spray. Scratched, chipped, or otherwise damaged coatings, including factory coatings, shall be repaired before final acceptance will be given. Cleaning If any cleaning of equipment at the site is performed with solvents, such work shall be done over leak-proof linings. Preparation or coating materials may not be disposed of onsite. 9.90.06 Product and Color Schedule [CSI 09 06 90 or 09 90 06] Colors of finish coatings on process equipment, piping, and building surfaces shall conform to the following schedule. All finishes shall be satin unless otherwise specified. Finish coatings, which are applied in the shop by the manufacturer, shall conform to this section. Factory coatings which are damaged shall be recoated in the field in accordance with these specifications. Items of similar purpose shall be painted the same color. If items come from the factory with a shop applied coating that does not match said color, they shall be field coated to match. Exceptions may be listed in individual sections of these specifications. 9-6 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\9 Finishes.docx 8/14/24 11:08 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 9 The contractor shall allow no less than 15 working days from the time the Owner is provided with color selections for the Owner to make color choices. The Owner will develop a color schedule for painted items after award of the contract. Provide a pallet of colors from the manufacturer of not less than 30 color choices. 9.90.13 Unpainted Items [CSI 09 90 13] Part 1 – General Summary Do not coat the following items unless specifically directed otherwise in these specifications or on the Plans. Aluminum, plastic, or stainless-steel items. Brass and copper pipe, valves, and fittings for plumbing fixtures. Nameplates, labels, or identification tags. Sensors, switches, transmitters. Field painting is not required for equipment listed below if they come with a factory finish epoxy, polyurethane, or powder coat. Items supplied with only a factory prime coat must be field coated. Motors Control valve pilot systems Sensor piping systems Valves Flow meters Machinery and blowers Electrical panels 9.91.13 Exterior or Damp Environment Painting [CSI 09 91 13] 9.91.13.01 - System 1: Metals – Exterior and Wet Conditions including Doors, Windows, and Frames [CSI 09 91 13 13] Part 2 - Products 1. Tnemec a. Prime Coat: Series 27 Fast Cure Epoxy (3 to 5 Mil DFT) 9-7 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\9 Finishes.docx 8/14/24 11:08 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 9 b. Finish Coat: Series 1095 EnduraShield (3 to 5 Mil DFT) 2. Sherwin Williams For products that are supplied in bare (unprimed) metal: a. Primer: Corothane 1 Galvapac Zinc Primer B65G11 (2.5 to 3.5 Mil DFT) b. Intermediate: Acrolon 218HS B65-650 Series (3 to 5 Mil DFT) c. Finish Coat: Acrolon 218HS B65-650 Series (3 to 5 Mil DFT) For products that are supplied with a shop prime coat: a. Primer: Shop b. Intermediate: Macropoxy 646FC B58-600 Series (5 to 8 Mil DFT) c. Finish Coat: Acrolon 218HS B65-650 Series (3 to 5 Mil DFT) 2. International Devoe a. Primer: Fast Set Option: Devran 261QC Epoxy i. Cold Cure Option: BarRust 235 Epoxy ii. Summer Option: BarRust 231 Epoxy Mastic (4 to 6 Mil DFT) b. Finish Coat: Fast Set Option: DevThane 349QC Aliphatic Polyurethane i. Commercial Option: DevThane 389 Aliphatic Polyurethane ii. Premium Gloss Option: DevThane 379 UVA Aliphatic Polyurethane iii. Premium SemiGloss Gloss Option: DevThane 378 UVA Aliphatic Polyurethane. (2 to 3 Mil DFT) Part 3 - Execution Surface Preparation 1. Clean, dry, and free of all dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants. 2. For new work: SSPC-SP1 solvent cleaned. 3. For coating over existing painted surfaces: Remove all loose and damaged coatings. Prepare with SSPC-SP2 hand tool or SP3 power tool cleaning. 4. All hollow metal doors, windows, and frames shall be bonderized, pickled, or phosphatized, which will serve as a primer for and shall be compatible with the finish coat to be applied in the field 9.91.13.10 - System 2: Wood – Exterior, Painted [CSI 09 91 13 17] Part 1 - General Exterior wood surfaces, including, but not limited to trim, soffit, siding, and other similar surfaces. 9-8 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\9 Finishes.docx 8/14/24 11:08 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 9 Part 2 - Products 1. Tnemec a. Prime Coat: i. Rough or open grain wood: Series 115 Uni-Bond or 151-1051 Elasto-Grip (250 to 300 square feet per gallon) ii. Smooth wood: Series 115 Uni-Bond (250 to 300 square feet per gallon) b. Intermediate Coat: Series 1029 Enduratone (4 to 6 Mil DFT) c. Finish Coat: Series 156 EnviroCrete (4 to 6 Mil DFT) 2. Sherwin Williams a. Primer: Exterior Latex Wood Primer (250 to 300 square feet per gallon) b. Intermediate Coat: Loxon XP (4.0 to 6.0 Mil DFT) c. Finish Coat: Loxon XP (4.0 to 6.0 Mil DFT) Part 3 - Execution Surface Preparation 1. Surface clean, dry, and free of contaminates. 9.91.13.13 - System 3: Exterior Metal in Contact with Concrete, Exterior Face of Ferrous Metal Pipe and Supports including Steel, Cast Iron, and Ductile Iron (Exposed Indoors and Outdoors). [CSI 09 91 13 20] Part 1 - General This Section applies to all ductile/cast iron and ferrous metals, including bituminous coated pipe and materials unless specified otherwise. Do not coat stainless steel materials unless specified otherwise. This Section applies to all pipe materials and equipment, including manufacturer applied coating systems. For the purposes of this coating system, metals which are located below the top of the exterior wall within a water bearing structure or are located within a vault or manhole shall be considered as under immersion service conditions. Part 2 - Products 1. Tnemec a. Primer: Series 1 Omnithane (2.5 to 3.5 Mil DFT). b. Intermediate Coat: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II (6 to 8 Mil DFT) c. Finish Coat: Series 73 or 1095 Endura-Shield (3 to 5 Mil DFT) 2. Sherwin Williams a. Primer: Corothane 1 Mio-Zinc Primer (2.5 to 3.5 Mil DFT) 9-9 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\9 Finishes.docx 8/14/24 11:08 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 9 b. Intermediate: Macropoxy 646FC B58-600 Series (6 to 8 Mil DFT) c. Finish: i. Indoors: Acrolon Ultra B65-830 Series (2 to 3 Mil DFT) ii. Outdoors: Acrolon Ultra B65-830 Series (2 to 3 Mil DFT) 3. International Devoe a. Primer: i. Fast Set Option: Devran 261QC Epoxy ii. Cold Cure Option: BarRust 235 Epoxy iii. Summer Option: BarRust 231 Epoxy Mastic (4 to 6 Mil DFT) b. Intermediate Coat: i. Fast Set Option: Devran 261QC EpoxY ii. Cold Cure Option: BarRust 235 Epoxy iii. Summer Option: BarRust 231 Epoxy Mastic (4 to 6 Mil DFT) c. Finish Coat: i. Fast Set Option: DevThane 349QC Aliphatic Polyurethane ii. Commercial Option: DevThane 389 Aliphatic Polyurethane iii. Premium Gloss Option: DevThane 379 UVA Aliphatic Polyurethane iv. Premium SemiGloss Gloss Option: DevThane 378 UVA Aliphatic Polyurethane. (2 to 3 Mil DFT) Part 3 - Execution Preparation 1. To prevent surface condensation, whenever possible the pipe should be empty and allowed to reach ambient temperature before coating. If condensation is present, dry thoroughly prior to coating. 2. Ferrous Metals a. SSPC-SP10 Near white blast cleaning 3. Ductile and Cast-Iron Materials a. It is strongly recommended that ductile iron and cast-iron pipe or materials to be field coated should be purchased factory primed without the standard asphalt coating. Field removal of asphalt coatings is extremely difficult and overly aggressive preparation can create a damaged surface unsuitable for coating. b. Remove all oils, grease, and other contaminants using solvent cleaning prior to abrasive blasting or power tool cleaning. Blemishes or staining on the prepared surface are acceptable if such items cannot be removed by light scraping with a knife. SSPC-SP10 blue-gray with surface profile of 2.0 Mil, minimum. Do not 9-10 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\9 Finishes.docx 8/14/24 11:08 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 9 burnish the surface. Clean all surfaces of dust and loose residue immediately prior to coating. See NAPF 500-03-04/05. 4. Prepare and coat all exposed bolt heads, threads, washers, nuts, and tie rods with the same system as the pipe. 9.91.23 Interior Painting [CSI 09 91 23] 9.91.23.10 - System 4: Gypsum Wallboard – Interior, Painted [CSI 09 91 23 17] Part 1 - General 1. Gypsum wallboard ceilings, walls, and other similar surfaces located in a conditioned environment (i.e. building). Part 2 - Products 1. Tnemec a. Prime Coat: Series 151-1051 Elasto-Grip (180 to 400 square feet per gallon) b. Finish Coat: Series 113 Hi-Build Tneme-Tufcoat (4 to 6 Mil DFT) 2. Sherwin Williams a. Primer: PrepRite ProBlock Int/Ext Latex Primer Sealer B51 Series (180 – 200 square feet per gallon) b. Finish Coat: Pro-Industrial Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy B73 Series (4 to 6 Mil DFT) Part 3 - Execution Surface Preparation Surface clean, dry and free of contaminates. 9.91.23.11 - System 5: Wood – Interior, Stained [CSI 09 91 23 18] Part 1 - General This section applies to interior stained wood surfaces, including, but not limited to trim, wood doors and frames, cabinetry, other similar surfaces. Part 2 - Products 1. Minwax a. Base Coat: Minwax Wood Finish (1 to 2 coats as necessary to achieve color as approved by the Owner) b. Finish Coat: Minwax High-Build Polyurethane, semigloss (2 coats) 9-11 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\9 Finishes.docx 8/14/24 11:08 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 9 Part 3 - Execution Surface Preparation 1. Follow manufacturer’s instructions. Surface clean, dry, and free of contaminates. 2. Sand lightly between finish coats to remove ridges and provide adhesion. 9.91.33 Submerged and Buried Metals Painting [CSI 09 91 33 or 09 97 00] 9.91.33.01 - System 7: Metals in Contact with Drinking Water (Steel DI Pipe Interior) [CSI 09 91 33 13] Part 1 – General Summary This section applies to metals in contact with potable drinking water. References Coatings shall be NSF 61 approved for use in direct contact with potable drinking water. The NSF 61 approval shall be appropriate for the application at the time of submittal. Contractor is responsible for verifying the current NSF 61 requirements and restrictions of submitted coating. Part 2 – Products Materials 1. Tnemec a. Valves ≥ 1½-inch diameter; Pipe ≥ 6-inch diameter; Tanks ≥ 25 gallons. i. Primer: None ii. Finish Coat: Series FC22 Epoxoline (16 to 20 Mil DFT) b. Fittings, Valves, & Pumps ≥ ½-inch diameter; Pipe ≥ 10-inch diameter; Tanks ≥ 50 gallons. i. Primer: None ii. Finish Coat: Series 22 or FC22 Epoxoline (either one coat at 16 to 20 Mil DFT or two coats at 12 to 16 Mil DFT each coat) c. Fittings, Valves, & Pumps ≥4-inch diameter; Pipe ≥18-inch diameter; Tanks ≥ 1,000 gallons. i. Primer: Series N140 Pota-Pox Plus or Series 141 Potapox 80 (6 to 8 Mil DFT) ii. Finish Coat: Series N140 Pota-Pox Plus or Series 141 Potapox 80 (6 to 8 Mil DFT) 9-12 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\9 Finishes.docx 8/14/24 11:08 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 9 2. Sherwin Williams (Pipes ≥6-inch diameter; Tanks ≥100 gallons) a. Primer: None b. Finish Coat: Sherplate PW (16 to 20 Mil DFT) 3. International Devoe (Pipes ≥18-inch diameter; Valves ≥3/4-inch diameter; Tanks ≥ 300 gallons) a. Primer: BarRust 233H (6 to 8 Mil DFT) b. Finish Coat: BarRust 233H (6 to 8 Mil DFT) Part 3 – Execution Surface Preparation Ferrous Metal – SSPC SP1 followed by SP10 Near White Blast. Surface profile shall be 2.0 Mil, minimum. Ductile Iron – SSPC SP1 followed by NAPF 500-03-04/05 Grey White Blast or SP10 Grey White Blast. Surface profile shall be 2.0 Mil, minimum. Surface preparation shall be per manufacturer’s requirements for immersion service. 9.97.23 Concrete and Masonry Coatings [CSI 09 97 23] Part 1 - General Scheduling Most coatings on concrete will require a 28-day concrete curing period prior to coating. Schedule the work accordingly. No additional monetary or time compensation will be given for failure to plan for the required curing duration. 9.97.23.08 – System 8: Concrete Vault Exterior – Bottom and Walls [CSI 09 97 23 20 or 07 14 16] Part 2 – Products Materials 1. Tnemec a. One coat: Series 46H-413 Hi-Build Tneme-Tar. (16 to 20 Mil DFT) 2. Sherwin Williams a. One coat: Hi-Mil Sher-Tar Epoxy. (16 to 20 Mil DFT) 3. International Paint a. DevTar 5A High Solids Coal Tar Replacement Epoxy Coating. (16 to 20 Mil DFT) 9-13 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\9 Finishes.docx 8/14/24 11:08 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 9 Part 3 – Execution Preparation Allow 28-days cure time for concrete, or until passing the ASTM D 4263 Plastic Mat Test. Surface shall be clean, dry, and free of contaminants. 9-14 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\9 Finishes.docx 8/14/24 11:08 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 10 Specialties 10.00 GENERAL This division covers that work necessary for fabricating and installing all furnishings and accessories as described in these specifications and as shown on the Plans. Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” apply to all following subsections whether directly referenced or not. 10.05 Common Work for Specialties [CSI 10 05 00] Part 1 - General Submittals Submittal information shall be provided to the Owner for the following items: Equipment Signs Pipe Markings Danger Signs 10.06.10 Schedules for Signage [CSI 10 06 10.13,.16] Part 2 - Products Materials Unless otherwise specified, text shall be white on a background color shown below. Purpose Plate Color General Black Warning Red Electrical Black Domestic Water Blue Part 3 - Execution Installation Install signs/markers directly on the devices in a location that does not interfere with the device operation or maintenance. If the device is too small or otherwise impractical to mount marker, locate marker as close as possible to the device on an adjacent surface. Provide and mount, as directed, equipment signs for the following: 10-1 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\10 Specialties.docx 8/14/24 11:08 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 10 Purpose Location Text Pressure switches and transmitters Discharge pressure Discharge pressure transmitter transmitter Flow meters Flow Meter Flow Meter Light switches Interior/Exterior Interior/Exterior Lights Lights Electrical panels and disconnects See Division 16 and 17 Pumps Pump No 1-5 Suction Piping Suction Header 530 Zone Discharge Piping Discharge Header 640 Zone 10.10 INFORMATION SPECIALTIES [CSI 10 10 00] 10.14.23 Panel Signage [CSI 10 14 23] Part 2 - Products Materials Equipment Signage 1. Equipment signs shall be plastic-laminated 1-inch high, by required length, by â…›-inch thick, with ½-inch high letters in N-2 Standard Gothic characters. Pipe Signage 1. Pipe markers shall be fabricated from outdoor grade acrylic plastic, and equal to Seton Setmark Type SNA pipe markers. Markers shall conform to standards for pipe and conduit identification (ANSI A13.1-1981). Pump Signage 1. Provide a 2-inch high, temperature resistant metal or vinyl number or name on each pump or pump motor. Number shall face the pump control panels and be placed so as not to be obscured from other equipment. Confirm with Engineer the proper numbering or naming of each pump. Electrical and Control Equipment 1. All components provided under this specification, both field- and panel-mounted, shall be provided with permanently-mounted nametags. The Engineer shall have complete control over the hardware to be labeled and the labeling provided. Provide labels as directed. 10-2 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\10 Specialties.docx 8/14/24 11:08 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 10 2. Provide a name tag for each piece of equipment and for each circuit and/or control device associated with the equipment. 3. Provide a nameplate for each control center unit door. 4. Electrical equipment name plates and service legends shall be phenolic-engraved, rigid, laminated plastic type with adhesive back. Letter height shall be 5/ 16-inch unless specified otherwise on the Plans. Labeling shall clearly identify the associate component. Color shall be black background with white letters. 5. Warning nameplates shall be provided on all panels and equipment which contain multiple power sources which may have energized circuits with the main disconnecting means in the off position. Lettering shall be white on red background. 6. Tags shall be securely attached. Adhesive backed tags shall also have at least two brass screws for positive fastening. 7. Provide engraved nameplates indicating load served, voltage, and phase for every circuit breaker, panel board, switchboard, motor control center, motor starter, disconnect switch, and fused switch. 10-3 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\10 Specialties.docx 8/14/24 11:08 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 11 Equipment 11.00 GENERAL Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” apply to all following subsections whether directly referenced or not. 11.05 Common Work for Equipment [CSI 11 05 00] Part 1 - General Related Sections Division 1.81.30 Seismic Restraint Requirements Submittals Provide submittal information to the Owner for the following items: Heaters Ventilators Louvers and Dampers Ventilation frames Actuators 11.90 OTHER EQUIPMENT 11.95 Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning [CSI 23 00 00] 11.95.05 Common Work for HVAC [CSI 23 05 00] See mechanical plans for details. Part 3 – Execution Install HVAC units per strict conformance with manufacturer recommendations. Provide brackets and support frames to properly support the HVAC equipment meeting manufacturer requirements. HVAC representative shall visit the project site once manufactured units are shipped and on site to review installation procedures with Contractor. HVAC representative shall certify with written letter to Engineer that installation of HVAC equipment meets manufacturer’s requirements. 11-1 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\11 Equipment.docx 8/14/24 11:09 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 11 11.95.83.33 Radiant Space Heaters [CSI 23 83 33] Part 1 – General Related Sections Division 17.53.3 - Heating Thermostat Design Requirements Heater(s) shall be suitable for installation in the environment where installed. Furnish and install wall-mounted space heater(s) as shown on the Plans. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Heaters shall be as specified on the Plans. Equals will be accepted. Components Space heaters shall be electric air element type of the size and location shown on the Plans. Provide with a universal mounting bracket, a disconnect switch and mounting hardware. Provide contactors in heater to interface with control relays and 240V power supply. Provide with a built-in thermostat having an adjustable range from 40 to 90 degrees Fahrenheit. Set thermostat at 60 degrees Fahrenheit unless specified otherwise on the Plans. Part 3 – Execution Installation Mount bottom of heater(s) 6-feet, 6-inches from finished floor unless specified otherwise on the Plans. Provide clearance from walls, ceiling, and obstacles as recommended by the manufacturer. 11-2 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\11 Equipment.docx 8/14/24 11:09 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 12 Furnishings (Not Used This Contract) 12-1 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\12 Furnishings.docx 8/14/24 11:10 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 13 Special Construction (Not Used This Contract) 13-1 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\13 Special Construction.docx 8/14/24 11:10 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 14 Conveying Systems (Not Used This Contract) 14-1 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\14 Conveying Systems.docx 8/14/24 11:10 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 15 Mechanical 15.00 GENERAL This division covers the work necessary for furnishing and installing mechanical appurtenances and accessories as described in these Specifications and shown on the Plans. Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” shall apply to all following subsections whether directly referenced or not. 15.05 Common Work for Mechanical [CSI 33 05 00] Part 1 - General Summary Provide the necessary piping, plumbing, fittings, and appurtenances to make all piping systems complete, tested, and ready for operation as specified herein and as shown on the Plans. Some fittings that are necessary for the complete piping system installation and operation may not have been shown. Provide fittings, pipe, and appurtenances necessary, whether shown on the Plans or not, to make all piping systems complete, tested, and ready for operation. Some pipe supports, thrust blocking, and tie rods are not shown on the Plans. Provide pipe supports, thrust blocking, and tie rods for pipes as required by accepted design criteria to support and restrain the loads encountered. Related Sections Division 1.81.30 Seismic Restraint and Anchorage Division 1.81.40 Pressure Ratings Division 1.81.50 Materials in Contact with Drinking Water Division 10.14.23 Panel Signage References All products in contact with drinking water to be low-lead (less than 0.25 percent) content in compliance with NSF/ANSI 372. Submittals Submittal information shall be provided to the Owner for the following items: Ductile iron pipe Ductile iron fittings Steel pipe and fittings Isolation valves 15-1 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 Pressure gauges Other mechanical components listed in this division or required by the Engineer Part 2 – Products Existing Products Existing pipe and fittings in contact with drinking water that are not compliant with low lead standard NSF/ANSI 372 (generally those installed before 2014) and will be modified under this contract must be upgraded to meet this standard. Existing pipe and fittings that will be reused, but not modified, do not require upgrading. Materials All valves, meters, hydrants, specialties, appurtenances, and other such mechanical and plumbing components that are of similar purpose shall be of a single manufacturer and model line. Do not “mix and match” unless specifically stated otherwise or allowed by the Engineer. The intention of this requirement is to maintain consistency across all components installed on the project for function, maintenance, aesthetics, and details of installation. Part 3 - Execution Field Quality Control Pressure gauges used for testing and commissioning shall be in good working order and scaled appropriately for the test. Scale range shall not exceed 200% of the test pressure. For example, for a 250 psi test, the gauge scale shall not exceed 500 psi. The Owner has the right to reject any gauges that are suspect in their accuracy. If any components that have been approved by the Owner are not rated for the specified system test pressure, remove or isolate those components during pressure testing in a method acceptable to the Owner. Said components must still be pressure tested in their permanent configuration at their individual test pressure rating. Cleaning Potable Water Systems After preliminary purging of the system, chlorinate entire potable water system in accordance with AWWA C651 for flushing and disinfecting water mains, and in accordance with all other pertinent rules and regulations. Operate each valve during chlorination period to provide contact. Retention time shall be 24 hours minimum, or 48 hours if the water temperature is less than 41° F. Total retention time shall not exceed 3 days after which the chlorinated water shall be immediately flushed out. Upon completion of disinfection, thoroughly flush the entire potable water system at a velocity of 3 feet per second, allowing four complete exchanges of contents. Do not discharge chlorinated material to storm or surface water systems without thoroughly neutralizing the chlorine residual remaining in the water in accordance with AWWA C655 for field dechlorination. 15-2 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 For pipe and fittings that cannot be disinfected as described above, such as those used for final connections to live systems, swab with 200 ppm chlorine solution or immerse in a 50 ppm chlorine solution. After final flushing and before the water pipe is connected to or placed in service, the Contractor shall request that the Owner arrange to have samples collected for bacteriological testing. At least one sample will be collected from each branch of the pipe. A copy of the test results shall be delivered to the Contractor for review. The Contractor shall not connect the water pipe to the existing distribution system prior to acceptance of the bacteriological test by the Engineer. The Owner will pay the laboratory fee for the initial bacteriological test. The Contractor will pay for future testing if the initial test results are unsatisfactory. 15.10 BURIED PIPE INSTALLATION [CSI 33 05 05] Part 1 – General Site Conditions Existing soils are unclassified except where specifically identified on the Plans or specification. Part 3 - Execution Preparation Stringing of pipes in advance of pipelaying may occur but may not create a traffic hazard or block access to roads, driveways, or private property without approval from the local traffic authority and affected property owners. Pipe shall not be strung out more than one week in advance of installation. Any pipe or materials that will not be installed for one week must be stockpiled at a site procured by the Contractor or as provided in this contract. Pothole ahead of pipe-laying a sufficient distance at located utility crossings and where noted on the plans to allow room to make vertical adjustments as necessary to avoid existing utilities. Should the Contractor fail to pothole identified utility crossings, any subsequent adjustments necessary shall not be cause for cost or time claim. If the area potholed is in a travelled area and will be reopened to traffic more than one day in advance of pipelaying through the zone, the hole shall be patched with hot or cold mix, the cost of which shall be incidental. Provide the results of potholing to the Owner no less than two working days in advance of utility installation. Provide a written record of size, materials, and locations for found utilities to an accuracy of 0.5 foot horizontal and 0.1 foot vertical. Failure to record locations clearly and legibly will result in non-payment. Installation Install pipes to the depth shown on the trench detail, unless superseded by depth shown on the profile. Unless specified otherwise, install pipe to the following tolerances: Pressure pipes: 0.5 feet horizontal, 0.2 feet vertical. Regardless of vertical tolerance, do not create new high points not otherwise shown on the plans. 15-3 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 Gravity pipes: 0.5 feet horizontal, 0.03 feet vertical. Regardless of vertical tolerance, do not lay pipe with reverse slope. All non-metallic pipe, including service and air valve lines, shall include a tracer wire taped every 5 feet to the top of the pipe. Loop tracer wire to the surface in accessible locations such as valve boxes, meter vaults, or other surface access. If no access is available for more than 1,500 feet, provide a valve box specifically for the tracer wire. Wire shall be solid UF, 12AWG minimum for 2,000 foot runs and less, or 10AWG for runs longer than 2,000 feet. Keep openings in pipe closed during the progress of work. Install plugs to prevent water and debris from entering pipe. No payment will be made to clean pipes. 15.11 Open Trench Pipe Installation [CSI 33 05 05] 15.11.11 Pressure Pipe Installation [CSI 33 05 05] Part 1 - General References Use materials and installation methods in accordance with the latest edition of the Uniform Plumbing Code and local codes and regulations that are applicable. Scheduling Connections to live mains shall be made only after contacting the Owner 48 hours prior (not including weekends or holidays). Connections to live mains may only be performed on Tuesdays, Wednesdays, or Thursdays unless permission is obtained otherwise from the Owner. Connections shall not be performed on Owner recognized holidays. Service to customers shall not be interrupted for more than 8 hours and must occur between the hours of 8:30 AM and 4:30 PM. The Owner will notify customers no less than 24-hours in advance of service interruption. If, in the opinion of the Owner, the Contractor has not adequately scheduled the work to occur within these timeframes, the Owner may cancel the service interruption. No time or monetary compensation will be provided for such cancellation. Part 3 - Execution Installation Install pipes in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Use types and sizes of pipes as specified herein and/or as shown on the Plans. Where small pipe sizes are omitted from the Plans and not mentioned in the specifications, use sizes corresponding to code requirements and as required by equipment and plumbing fixtures and appurtenances. Properly size any undesignated pipe sizes for the functions to be performed. Lay pipe and supports at proper lines and grades. Follow the piping runs shown on the Plans as closely as possible, except for minor adjustments to avoid architectural and structural features. Make major relocations, if required, in a manner acceptable to the Owner. 15-4 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 Keep openings in pipes closed during progress of work. Form thrust blocking so that bolts, joints, gaskets, and flanges of adjacent joints are clear of concrete allowing bolts and joints to be dismantled without removing concrete. All concrete blocking shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi unless identified otherwise in Division 3 or on the Plans. Pipe passing through concrete walls or slabs shall be made watertight. Trenches shall be excavated to a sufficient width to allow for pipe installation, compaction equipment, and shoring when necessary. Maximum trench width shall not exceed 36-inch plus OD for 4-inch and larger pipe, or 24-inch plus OD for 3-inch and smaller pipe for pay items or related materials including but limited to crushed surfacing, patching, import bedding, import backfill, and rock excavation. Bedding shall be mechanically compacted in lifts no greater than 8-inches from base to springline and from springline to top of pipe using a jumping jack or sheepsfoot. Hoe-packs, sheepsfoots, and vibratory rollers shall not be used within 12-inches directly above the pipe. Compact trench backfill in lifts not exceeding 18-inches loose-thickness. Flanged Joint Assembly 1. Bolt holes of flanges shall straddle the horizontal and vertical centerlines of the pipe. Clean flanges by wire brushing before assembling. Clean flange bolts and nuts by wire brushing; lubricate bolts with graphite or oil. 2. Insert the nuts and bolts (or studs), finger tighten, and progressively tighten diametrically opposite bolts uniformly around the flange to the proper tension. Bolts shall have minimum of two threads showing beyond the nut. 3. Tighten joints carefully to prevent strain upon valves, pumps, and other equipment. 4. If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reset or replace the gasket, reinstall or re-tighten the bolts and nuts, and retest the joints. Replace the gasket if damaged. Field Quality Control Make no permanent connections to the existing water system until the new water main has been tested and approved by the Owner. No temporary connections of the untested, unapproved new water main to the existing water system shall be made without the installation of a double check valve assembly between the new water main and the existing water system. The Contractor shall verify the size, material, and location of the existing main at the connection point prior to installing the new water main. The Contractor shall provide all labor and equipment for earthwork, traffic control, trench safety, and materials for connections. The Contractor shall provide the labor to make the final connection to the existing water system. 15-5 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 15.11.50 Trench Patching [CSI 32 01 17] Part 1 - General Scheduling and Sequencing The Contractor shall be required to patch all trenches installed within the existing pavement with Commercial Hot Mix Asphalt to the depth as shown in the Plans. Trench patches shall be installed no later than the second Friday following excavation for trenches parallel to the road, and no later than two days following excavation for trenches crossing the road and across intersections. On trenches parallel to the roadway, provide and maintain crushed surfacing base course to a smooth and level grade with the existing pavement until final patching is complete. On trenches crossing the roadway or intersections, provide and maintain asphalt hot or cold mix until final patching is complete. Maintenance Crushed surfacing used for temporary patching shall be inspected and repaired continuously, including over weekends and other non-working periods. Temporary patching, regardless of material used, shall be incidental to the project cost. No additional payment will be made. Part 3 - Execution Field Quality Control Pavement patching that must be removed and replaced due to any failed testing will not warrant additional payment. 15.13 Above Grade Mechanical Installation 15.13.02 Exposed Piping Installation [CSI 40 05 05] Part 1 – General Summary This section is for exposed major pressure pipe systems such as booster stations, lift stations, treatment facilities, control valve vaults, etc. Testing of minor service plumbing systems shall follow the IPC/UPC. Part 3 - Execution Installation When systems include drain ports that operate automatically, provide ancillary drainage plumbing. Route pilot, air valve, pump seal, and other drains to the structure drain using schedule 40 PVC with diameter equal to the device drain outlet diameter, but no smaller than ½-inch. Copper pipe may be used only with Owner approval. Multiple drain lines may be 15-6 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 connected together if approved by the Owner. Secure to fixed structures or large pipe using pipe clamps. Do not install drain pipe where it will be a tripping hazard or interfere with normal maintenance. Slope downwards to termination. Terminate the outlet two times the drain pipe diameter above the drain grate or funnel and cover end with #24 stainless or aluminum screen. Install a union near the start of each drain pipe to allow disassembly without cutting. Preparation Provide all personnel and equipment required and complete all tests required to demonstrate the integrity of the finished installation for the approval of the Owner and all agencies having jurisdiction. Secure the pipe and fittings to prevent movement under pressure. Furnish and install temporary blocking where permanent blocking is not required and remove it after testing. All pumps, gauges, plugs, saddles, corporation stops, miscellaneous hose and piping, and other equipment necessary for performing the test shall be furnished and operated by the Contractor. Gauges used in the test may be required by the Owner to be certified for accuracy at a laboratory. Tests/Inspection Hydrostatic Pressure Testing Pressure testing shall be performed in accordance with the City of Arlington Standards and Specifications. 15.18 Buried Piping Inspection and Testing [CSI 33 05 05] 15.18.02 Buried Pressure Pipe Inspection and Testing [CSI 33 05 05, 33 05 05.31] Part 3 - Execution Preparation Provide all required personnel and equipment and complete all tests required to demonstrate the integrity of the finished installation for the approval of the Owner and all agencies having jurisdiction. Backfill the pipeline trench sufficiently to prevent movement of the pipe under pressure. All thrust blocks shall be in place and sufficiently cured to reach design strength before testing. Furnish, install, and remove temporary blocking where permanent blocking is not required and remove it after testing. All pumps, gauges, plugs, saddles, corporation stops, miscellaneous hose and piping, and other equipment necessary for performing the test shall be furnished and operated by the Contractor. Gauges used in the test may be required to be certified for accuracy at a laboratory by the Owner. Gauge range shall not exceed 200-percent of the test pressure. 15-7 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 Tests/Inspection Water Main Flushing The pipeline, valves and other components not already flushed by polypig shall be flushed or swept clean. Flushing shall allow four complete exchanges of water and remove any obvious debris. The following blow off or hydrant sizes are the minimum required for flushing with a supply pressure of 40 psi minimum and no more than 20 feet of hose is used, unless stated otherwise. Main Flow at Blowoff and Backflow Hydrant Ports Hydrant Ports Diameter 2.5 fps Device Diameter <= 20′ Hose 21′ – 100’ Hose 12″ 900 gpm (2) 2″ or (1) 3″ (2) 2.5″ or (1) 4″ (1) 4″ Hydrostatic Pressure Testing Cover any exposed pressurized PVC or HDPE pipe to protect from direct sunlight if the air temperature is above 70°F. Test all pipelines and appurtenances under a hydrostatic test pressure equal to that specified under Division 1.81.40 of these Specifications. If not stated, the hydrostatic testing pressure shall be 150 psi over working pressure or 250 psi, whichever is greater, measured at the low point of the test section. The Owner has the right to require more stringent test criteria than stated in this Specification or in the pressure rating section if it is determined that field conditions warrant such measures. An acceptable test of pipe and fittings buried under or adjacent to concrete slabs or other structures must be performed prior to construction of the structure. The Owner will furnish the water necessary to fill the pipelines and for testing at a time of day when sufficient quantities of water are available for normal system operation. Fill the pipelines with water and allow to stand under pressure for a minimum of 24 hours to allow air to escape and allow the lining of the pipe to absorb water. The Contractor is responsible for the proper disposal of any waste, including water. Fittings and sections of pipe that cannot be pressure tested, such as connections to the existing system, shall be left exposed for a visual inspection under system pressure. Any visible leakage shall be corrected by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Owner regardless of the allowable leakage specified herein. Should the test section fail to meet the specified pressure test successfully, the Contractor shall locate and repair the defects and then retest the pipeline at their expense. Prior to calling out the Owner to witness the pressure test, the Contractor shall have all equipment completely set up, ready for operation, and have successfully performed the test to assure that the pipe is in a satisfactory condition. The Owner shall witness the test; if the test does not pass inspection for any reason, additional trips required to witness another test shall be done at the Contractor’s expense. Before applying the specified test pressure, air shall be expelled completely from the pipe, valves, and appurtenances. 15-8 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 The test shall be accomplished by pumping the main up to the required pressure; stop the pump for a minimum of 15 minutes up to a maximum of 60 minutes as directed by the Engineer, and then pump the main up to the test pressure again. During the test, the section being tested shall be observed for visible leakage. A clean container shall be used for holding water for pumping pressure on the main being tested. This makeup water shall be sterilized by the addition of chlorine to a concentration of 50 mg/l (ppm). Sections to be tested shall normally be limited to 1,500 feet. The Owner may require that the first section of pipe, not less than 1,000 feet in length, installed by each of the Contractor’s crews be tested in order to qualify the crew and/or the material. Pipe laying shall not continue more than an additional 1,000 feet until the first section has been tested successfully. Sections to be tested shall be isolated and pumped to test pressure. Test pressure shall be sustained for a minimum of 60 minutes with less than 2-percent loss in pressure throughout the test duration with Owner present and on site throughout test duration. If test results do not comply, Contractor shall repair leaks and retest until testing is passed in presence of Owner. Owner may bleed off pressure from pump to piping connection once test is passed to verify system piping was tested. 15.18.03 Valve Testing Part 3 - Execution Testing All valves shall be pressure tested. Do not exceed the rated working pressure of the valve when operating the valve. Bleed off test pressure prior to operating. Check all valve bonnet fasteners for tightness. Post-Installation Test all valves for water tightness under differential working pressure. To perform this test, pressurize pipe section with valve in place, close valve and relieve pressure on seat side of the valve. The valve shall not pass water during a 5-minute test period. Operate all valves at least once from closed-to-open-to-closed positions while valve is under working (not test) pressure. 15.20 PIPE AND FITTINGS 15.21 Common Work for Pipe and Fittings [CSI 33 05 00 or 40 05] Part 2 - Products Components Under no circumstance shall the fasteners be of lesser strength or higher corrosive potential than the materials being connected. If dissimilar metals are adjacent (for example: stainless steel flange connecting to ductile iron flange) a dielectric insulation kit shall be used. 15-9 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 Fasteners for pipe and fittings: Per AWWA standards unless otherwise specified. All relevant subsections of AWWA C100, C200, and C500. All bolts and studs shall be long enough so that no less than two threads extend beyond the face of the nut. Non-submerged flange bolts to be ASTM A307 Grade A, zinc plated. Finishes For conditions other than submerged, all nuts and bolts shall be zinc plated, and suitable for above and below grade locations as required. Where above grade/exposed piping is specially coated, the connecting nuts and bolts shall be coated using the same system unless directed otherwise by the Owner. Part 3 - Execution Construction All piping and related equipment to be joined shall be connected as shown on the Plans, specifications, as recommended by the manufacturer or as required by standard industry practices if not otherwise specified. Steel and stainless steel threads shall be protected against galling using steel thread sealing tape equal to Cobas steel thread sealing tape. Tape shall be specific to the steel type used. 15.21.02 Shackle (Threaded Rod) Restraints [CSI 33 05 09.33] Part 1 - General Definitions Anchor fastener: The item which connects to the fitting and which the shackle rod passes through. Such as a 90° eye bolt or shackle plate. Weathering steel: Steel alloy designed to resist corrosion. Often referred to using the genericized trade name Cor-Ten. Design Criteria Unless shown otherwise on the plans, use the following shackle rod sizes for 250 psi test pressure. 15-10 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 Pipe Size Minimum Number (#) and Diameter of Rods Undocumented SS cold drawn (35 Weathering Steel (45 steel or SS (30 ksi ksi minimum yield) ksi minimum yield) minimum yield) 4” (2) at ½” (2) at ½” (2) at ½” 6” (2) at ¾” (2) at ¾” (2) at ¾” 8” (3) at ¾” or (2) at 1” (3) at ¾” or (2) at 1” (2) at ¾” or (2) at 1” 10” (5) at ¾” or (3) at 1” (4) at ¾” or (2) at 1” (3) at ¾” or (2) at 1” 12” (7) at ¾” or (4) at 1” (6) at ¾” or (3) at 1” (4) at ¾” or (3) at 1” Contact Engineer for other sizes or pressure. Submittals Provide submittal for anchor fastener which includes strength rating in pounds. For shackle plates, include dimensional drawing. For high strength rods (cold drawn or weathering steel), provide submittals showing rod material and yield strength. Part 2 - Products Components Anchor fasteners must be a steel alloy. Ductile iron, cast iron, or any material deemed brittle in the opinion of the Owner are not allowed. Verify anchor fastener is appropriate for anchor location. All buried shackled thrust restraint systems shall be stainless steel or weathering steel. Exposed shackles, such as in a vault or mechanical room, may be non-weathering steel but if so, must be coated with epoxy paint system. Clean rust prior to painting. Material Yield Strength Corrosion (* = weathering steel) Resistant Type 304/316 SS Low (30 ksi) Yes ASTM A36 Low (36 ksi) No ASTM A588 * Med (45 ksi) Yes ASTM A709 GR 50W * Med (50 ksi) Yes ASTM A242 * Med (50 ksi) Yes ASTM A307 High (60 ksi) No ASTM F3125 A325 Type 1 High (90 ksi) No ASTM F3125 A325 Type 3 * High (90 ksi) Yes 15-11 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 All components of any stainless steel or weathering steel system shall include only stainless steel or weathering steel components. Bolts, nuts, washers, rods, and other components shall be one material and not intermixed. Shackle systems must provide a mechanism to prevent unthreading. Exposed shackles shall use double nuts. Buried shackle systems may use double nuts, single nut with tack weld, or single nut with center punch on outside rod thread. Provide washers at anchor fasteners. Install anchor fasteners on the opposite side of the flange or mechanical joint from the rod. Part 3 - Execution Installation For standard elongation restraint, space shackles roughly equally around the pipe. When restraint is intended to allow deflection movement without expansion, such as at a pump or tank connection, concentrate rods along the neutral axis of deflection. In other words, if vertical deflection is allowed, place rods along horizontal axis. Confirm proper orientation with Owner. Nuts shall be finger tightened to snug, then tightened by wrench one full turn. Do not overtighten. Field Quality Control For high strength rod, labels from packaging showing rod material must be given to the Owner in the field. If package labels are not available, Owner has the right to assume rods are not high strength and may require installation of additional rods and field coating. 15.22 Metal Pipe and Fittings 15.22.02 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings [CSI 33 05 19 or 40 05 19] Part 1 - General Design Requirements Ductile iron pipe shall have thickness designed in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50 and shall be based on laying conditions and internal pressures to meet the requirements of Division 1.81.40 unless listed as more stringent below. The pipe thickness shall not be less than that of Class 52 pipe. Flanged joints shall conform to ANSI Standard B16.1 and be of the class shown on the plans. Part 2 - Products Manufactured Units Pipe shall be cement-lined and asphaltic coated in accordance with ANSI Standard A21.4 (AWWA C104) unless otherwise specified and shall conform to ANSI Standard A21.51 (AWWA C151). 15-12 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 Rubber gasket pipe joints are to be fitted with Field Lok gaskets (restrained joint RJ) or equal or mechanical joint with Mega-Lug restraint (RJ) or equal in accordance with ANSI Standard A21.11 (AWWA C-111) and City of Arlington standards. When requested, furnish certification from the manufacturer of the pipe and gasket being supplied that inspection and all of the specified tests have been made, and the results comply with requirements of this standard. Ductile Iron Fittings All fittings shall be ductile iron where possible. Steel fittings will not be accepted where ductile iron is called out on the plans. Ductile iron fittings shall be short-body, cement-lined, and for the pressure rating noted in Division 1.81.40. Metal thickness and manufacturing processes shall conform to applicable portions of ANSI Standards A21.20, A21.11, B16.2, and B16.4. Standard cement lining shall be in accordance with ANSI Standard A21.4 (AWWA C104). Mechanical joint (MJ) with Mega-Lug restraint (restraining) or equal, ductile iron, compact fittings 3-inches through 24-inches shall be in accordance with AWWA C153 and City of Arlington standards. Flanged pipe spools shall be fabricated from minimum Class 52 wall thickness pipe and conform to ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15 with the exception that flanges shall be fabricated from ductile iron unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. Interior shall be cement lined. Ductile iron flange (FL) fittings shall be in accordance with AWWA C110 and fabricated from ductile iron unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents with a bolt pattern to match adjacent pipe. Gasket material for flanges shall be Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR, Buna-S), neoprene, nitrile rubber (NBR, Buna-N), chlorinated butyl, or cloth-inserted rubber. Gaskets shall be full-face type. Gaskets shall be a minimum â…›-inch thick. Type of ends shall be specified as mechanical joint with Mega-Lug restraint (RJ), plain end push on joint with Field Lok gaskets (RJ), or flanged (FL). Finishes For above grade and exposed pipes, including those inside structures, prepare surfaces and coat the exterior per Division 9.91.13.13. Part 3 - Execution Installation Install ductile iron water mains in accordance with AWWA C600. Provide tools and equipment, including any special tools required for installing each type of pipe used. The amount of deflection at each pipe joint shall not exceed 3-degrees per joint (11 inches over 18 feet), or the manufacturer’s printed recommended deflections, whichever is less. 15-13 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 15.22.03 Steel Pipe and Fittings [CSI 33 05 24.23 or 40 05 24.23] Part 1 - General References Unless otherwise stated, the latest edition for any commercial standards and all manufacturing tolerances referenced therein shall apply. ANSI/AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code- Steel ANSI/AWS B2.1 Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification ANSI/AWWA C200 Steel Water Pipe—6 In. (150 mm) and Larger ANSI/AWWA C205 Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe – 4 In. (100 mm) and Larger- Shop Applied ANSI/AWWA C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe ANSI/AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service—Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In. (100 mm through 3,600 mm) ANSI/AWWA C208 Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings ANSI/AWWA C209 Cold-Applied Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Special Sections, Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipe ANSI/AWWA C210 Liquid-Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines ANSI/AWWA C214 Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines ANSI/AWWA C215 Extruded Polyolefin Coatings for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines ANSI/AWWA C216 Heat-Shrinkable Cross-Linked Polyolefin Coatings for the Exterior of Special Sections, Connections, and Fitting ANSI/AWWA C218 Liquid Coating Systems for the Exterior of Aboveground Steel Water Pipelines and Fittings ANSI/AWWA C222 Polyurethane Coatings for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipe and Fittings ASME Section IX International Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code: Welding and Brazing Qualifications ANSI/ASME B36.10 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe AWWA M11 Steel Water Pipe: A Guide for Design and Installation 15-14 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 Design Requirements Pipe Pipe thickness as necessary to meet the pressure requirements in Division 1.81.40, and as follows: 1. Buried piping shall have a minimum pipe thickness of 0.25-inches. 2. Aboveground piping shall be Standard Weight or greater Schedule as required for the pressure requirements. Construct welded steel pipe in accordance with the ASME Welding Code and as shown in the Plans. Steel pieces shall be constructed as dimensioned to exact tolerances of ± 3/32-inch. Construction steel pipe in accordance with AWWA C200. Steel pipe shall be fabricated from steel manufactured to meet the requirements of ASTM A53, Type E or S, minimum Grade B. Design stress shall be half the yield stress of the steel. All longitudinal and girth seams, whether straight or spiral, shall be butt-welded using an approved electric-fusion-weld process. Buried piping shall be furnished principally in 50-feet net laying lengths with shorter lengths, field trim pieces and closure pieces as required by plan and profile for location of elbows, tees, reducers and other in-line fittings or as required for construction. Where grooved joints are used, pipe thickness shall be modified accordingly to maintain the hydrostatic test pressure compliance. Aboveground steel pipe and fittings 26 inches in diameter and smaller shall conform to ANSI Standard D36.10. Fittings Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, all specials and fittings shall conform to the dimensions of AWWA C208. Pipe material used in fittings shall be of the same material and pressure class as the adjoining pipe. Buried elbows shall have a minimum radius equal to 2½ times the pipe diameter and the maximum miter angle on each section of the elbow shall not exceed 11¼-degrees (one cut elbow up to 22 ½-degrees). Aboveground elbows shall have a radius equal to 1 times the pipe diameter. If elbow radius is less than 2½ times the pipe diameter, stresses shall be checked per AWWA M11 and the pressure class increased if necessary. Specials and fittings, unless otherwise shown on the Plans, shall be made of segmental welded sections from hydrostatically tested pipe, with ends compatible with the type of joint or coupling specified for the pipe. All welds made after hydrostatic testing of the straight sections of pipe shall be tested per the requirements of AWWA C200 Section 5.2.2.1. Joints Rolled Groove or Carnegie Rubber Gasket Joint 1. The standard joint for buried piping shall be a rolled groove or Carnegie rubber gasket joint unless otherwise noted on the Plans. Joints and gaskets shall conform to AWWA C200 and as shown in Chapter 8 of AWWA M11. 15-15 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 2. The joint shall be suitable for a working pressure equal to the class of pipe furnished and shall operate satisfactorily with a deflection angle, the tangent of which is not to exceed 1.00/D where D is the outside diameter of the pipe in inches with a pull-out of 1-inch. 3. Carnegie and rolled groove rubber gasket joints may be furnished only by a manufacturer who has furnished pipe with joints of similar design for comparable working pressure and pipe diameters that has been in successful service for a period of at least 5 years. Lap Weld 1. Lap weld joints shall conform to AWWA C200 and as shown in Chapter 8 of AWWA M11. 2. Use lap field welded joints where restrained joints are required or indicated on the Plans. The standard bell shall provide for a 2 ½-inch lap. The minimum lap shall be 1- inch. The maximum joint deflection or offset shall be a 1-inch joint pull. 3. Lap welded joints shall be welded either externally or internally. Provide holdbacks for coating and linings as shown on the approved shop drawings. “Weld-after-backfill” of interior welds may be performed any time after joint completion and backfilling has been completed. 4. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, all field joints shall be lap welded for diameters 48-inches and greater. Joints on pipe less than 48 inches in diameter may be lap welded, rolled groove or Carnegie rubber gasket joints. Mechanical Couplings 1. Mechanical couplings where indicated on the Plans shall be Romac 400, Smith Blair Style 411, Baker Style 200, Victaulic Depend-O-Loc or equal. 2. Insulating mechanical couplings where indicated on the Plans shall be double insulated Romac IC400, Smith Blair Style 416, Baker Style 216, or equal for working pressures up to 150 psi only. 3. Couplings for buried service shall have all metal parts painted with epoxy paint and conform to AWWA C210. 4. Pipe ends for mechanical couplings shall conform to AWWA C200 and M11. The shop applied outside coating shall be held back as required for field assembly of the mechanical coupling or to the harness lugs or rings. Paint harness lugs or rings and pipe ends with one shop coat of epoxy conforming to AWWA C210. 5. Pipe for use with sleeve-type couplings shall have plain ends at right angles to the axis. Flanges 1. Steel flanges smaller than 4-inch per ANSI B16.5, Class 150 or Class 300. Steel flanges 4-inches and larger per AWWA C207. All flanges rated for the specified working and hydrostatic testing pressures, but in no case shall be less than Class D. Supply documentation that flanged ends welded to the steel pipe and welded pieces are capable of the hydrostatic testing pressure. 15-16 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 2. Shop lining and coating shall be continuous to the end of the pipe or back of the flange. Flange faces shall be shop coated with a fusion bonded epoxy coating. 3. Gaskets shall be 1/8-inch thick minimum. Fasteners per Division 15.21. AWWA C207 Flanges Flange Class Diameter Working Pressure Maximum Test Pressure D 4-inch to 12-inch 175 psi 218 psi E 4-inch and larger 275 psi 343 psi F 4-inch and larger 300 psi 375 psi Corrosion Protection 1. All unwelded buried pipe joints shall be bonded for electrical continuity in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations unless otherwise specified in the plans. Submittals Shop drawings and calculations shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval prior to material order, including: 1. Wall thickness and diameter. Calculations for pipe design and fittings reinforcement and/or test data. 2. Layout showing the overall system with all major dimensions, stations, and elevations. Each piece shall be identified by mark number referenced to a pipe laying schedule and detail sheet. 3. Details of standard pipe, joints, specials, and fittings. 4. Calculations, details, and locations of joint restraint for thrust restraint. 5. Details of joint bonding and field welded joint restraint calculations. The Contractor shall submit previous experience of a minimum of five steel welding projects similar to this one. If requested by the Owner, supply specification of previous projects and written documentation that the construction met the specification. Part 2 - Products Source Quality Control Pipe cylinders, lining, coating, and fabrication of specials shall be the product of one manufacturer that has not less than 5 years successful experience manufacturing pipe of the type and size indicated. For projects containing 1,000 lineal feet or less of buried steel piping or for project involving both aboveground and buried steel piping, the products of up to two different manufacturers provided that each has not less than 5 years successful experience manufacturing pipe of the particular type and size indicated. The pipe manufacturer must have a certified quality assurance program, ISO 9001:2000 or other equivalent nationally recognized program as approved by the Owner. 15-17 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 Welds shall be constructed in accordance with ASME Welding Code. The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance to this tolerance and correct any dimensions or welding that does not meet this specification at their expense. All pipe shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture in accordance with the provisions of AWWA C200 and AWWA coating and lining standard as supplemented by the requirements herein. Except as modified herein, all materials used in the manufacture of the pipe shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C200 and AWWA coating and lining standards. The Contractor shall perform required tests at no additional cost to the Owner. The Engineer shall have the right to witness all testing conducted by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 48 hours advance notice of any testing. All welding procedures used to fabricate pipe shall be qualified under the provision of AWS B2.1 or ASME Section IX. Skilled welders, welding operators, and tackers who have had adequate experience in the methods and materials to be used shall do all welding. Welders shall maintain current qualifications under the provisions of AWS B2.1 or ASME Section IX. Machines and electrodes similar to those in the work shall be used in qualification tests. The Contractor shall furnish all material and bear the expense of qualifying welders. Internal bracing shall be provided for shipment if needed to maintain pipe shape. Finishes Aboveground Steel Pipe and Fittings: Lining and coating per Division 9.90. Buried Steel Pipe and Fittings: Provide lining and coatings as follows: Liquid-Epoxy Lining 1. Liquid-epoxy lining shall be per AWWA C210 to a minimum thickness of 16 mils, measured in accordance with SSPC-PA 2. Lining shall be continuous to the ends of the pipe except where field welding is indicated. 2. Lining repair shall be per AWWA C210 and manufacturer’s recommendations. Part 3 - Execution Installation Buried piping shall be bedded and backfilled per the plan details or manufacturer’s recommendations utilizing an E’ value for design check per AWWA M11 Chapter 6. Rolled Groove Rubber Gasket Joint 1. Clean, lubricate, and place gasket in grooved spigot and relieve tension by inserting a dull instrument under the gasket and completing at least two revolutions around the joint circumference. 2. Upon completion of insertion of spigot (including any angular deflection as shown on the approved shop drawing) and prior to releasing from slings, check the entire placement of the gasket with a feeler gauge per manufacturer’s recommendations. If 15-18 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 gasket has disengaged or rolled, immediately pull the joint apart and reinstall the joint with a new gasket if required. Again verify proper placement of gasket with feeler gauge. 3. Complete the interior of the joints with liquid epoxy per AWWA C210. Complete the exterior of the joints with heat-shrink sleeves per AWWA C216 and manufacturer’s recommendations. Lap Field Welded Joints 1. Clean exposed end of joint surfaces. 2. Provide a minimum overlap of 1-inch at any location around the joint circumference. 3. Field welders and field weld procedures shall be certified in accordance with AWS D1.1. 4. At the Contractor’s option, provide a full fillet weld per AWWA C206 either on the inside or outside of the pipe. Inside welding may be performed after backfilling in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 5. Testing of field welds shall be in accordance with AWWA C206. 6. Complete the interior of the joints with liquid epoxy per AWWA C210. Complete the exterior of the joints with heat-shrink sleeves per AWWA C216 and manufacturer’s recommendations. Field Quality Control The Contractor shall provide tools and equipment, including any special tools required for installing each particular type of pipe used. Pipe that is out-of-round shall be reshaped using methods provided by the pipe manufacturer. The Engineer reserves the right to reject pipe that is excessively out-of-round or damaged during reshaping. Testing For potable water pipe, disinfect and purity test per Division 15.05. Pressure test per Division 15.13 and 15.18. 15.30 VALVES 15.31 Common Work for Valves [CSI 40 05 51 or 33 14 19] Part 1 – General Design and Performance Requirements Valves noted on the Plans or in other parts of the Specifications shall meet the requirements herein. Valves shall be designed for the intended service. Valve suppliers shall review the design and certify that the valve provided in the submittal is appropriate for the application and will operate as shown and described. Any discrepancies from the design and the valves shall be brought to the Engineer’s attention during the bidding 15-19 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 process. Valves that do not operate as specified and per normal industry standards shall be replaced or modified so that they operate within the design parameters at the Contractor’s expense. Pressure rating shall be per Division 1.81.40 unless shown otherwise. Part 2 – Products Components If shear pins are installed with any valve, the manufacturer shall certify the shear pin(s) to fail between 95 to 99 percent of the operator shaft failure torque. Provide concrete supports for operators where required, as shown on the Plans. Buried valves shall be equipped with an AWWA 2-inch wrench nut with a minimum of 10 turns required to close the valve, unless otherwise noted on the Plans. Exposed valves shall be equipped with lever actuator for valves 3 inches and smaller, or handwheel actuator for valves 4 inches and larger, unless otherwise noted on Plans. Valves located at elevations higher than 6 feet above the finished floor shall be equipped with chainwheel operator. Buried valves where the operator nut is more than 3 feet below the valve box lid shall be provided with a solid shaft valve nut extension to reach between 18-inches and 30-inches of the ground surface. Extension shall attach to the nut with a set screw. Diameter of extension shall be appropriate for the valve size and length of extension, but under no circumstances shall be less than 1 inch for 4-foot-long extension rods, or 1.25 inch for rods longer than 4 feet. Extension shall function without excessive twisting. Part 3 - Execution Installation Install valves in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and as shown on the Plans. Verify alignment and adjustments after installation. Provide buried valves with all operators or valves boxes installed so that wrenches or operators perform freely and without binding or other interference. Bed and backfill buried valves according to the requirements of the pipe to which they are attached. 15.32 Isolation Valves 15.32.02 Resilient Wedge (Seat) Gate Valves [CSI 40 05 61.23] Part 1 – General Design Requirements All gate valves for water lines 3-inches to 48-inches shall be of the resilient, wedge-type, and shall meet or exceed the performance requirements of AWWA C509 or AWWA C515- Reduced-Wall, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service, unless shown otherwise. Valves shall be suitable for installation with the type and class of pipe being installed. Valve opening direction shall be counter-clockwise. Valves shall be rated for 250 psi working pressure. 15-20 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 Part 2 – Products Components The wedge shall be fully encapsulated with vulcanized SBR rubber or EPDM. Ends as shown on the plans. All exterior valve body bolting (bonnet, stuffing box, gear box) shall use Cor- Ten, 304 (18-8) SS, or 316 SS bolts and nuts. Buried valves shall have a non-rising stem (NRS). Non-buried valves on fire protection systems shall have outside stem and yoke (OS&Y). Other valves as shown on the plans. Unless shown otherwise on the plans, buried valves 14-inches and larger shall be installed horizontally with enclosed right angle (bevel) gear actuator and valves 20-inches and larger shall be equipped with 2-inch gate valve bypass system. Confirm configuration with the Owner prior to ordering. Part 3 - Execution Field Quality Control Where buried valves will be installed in a horizontal orientation and for buried valves 16-inch and larger in any orientation, operate the valve over the full range of travel in both directions prior to installation in the presence of the Owner to verify gate travels smoothly and without binding. Service or replace valves that do not travel smoothly. Installation Install valves in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as shown on the Plans. Verify alignment and adjustments after installation. Provide buried valves with all operators or valve boxes installed so that wrenches and operators perform freely and without binding or other interference. Bed and backfill buried valves according to requirements of the pipe to which they are attached. 15.34.31 Combination Back Pressure (Sustaining/relief) and Solenoid Shut-off valve (in Pump Station) [CSI 40 05 67.39] Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Valves shall be equal to Cla-Val Model 58-01 Combination Back Pressure (Sustaining/relief) and Solenoid Shut-off valve. Manufactured Units Combination Back Pressure (Sustaining/relief) and Solenoid Shut-off valve control shall be designed maintain upstream pressure within close limits. In operation, the valve opens fast to maintain steady line pressure but closes gradually to prevent surges. Provide valve with the capability that if a pressure reversal occurs, the valve closes drip-tight to prevent return flow. Factory pressure relief setting of 75 psi. Maximum pressure differential across the valve is expected to be 80 psi. 15-21 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 The valve shall be able to be controlled by SCADA to open via solenoid bypass shutoff for filling the 530 Zone reservoir in an emergency. Solenoid bypass shall be limited to a downstream pressure maximum of 530 feet HGL. 15.34.40 Pressure Reducing Valve (in Vault) [CSI 40 05 67.36] Part 2 – Products Manufacturers The valve shall be equal to Cla-Val Model 90-01. Manufactured Units The pressure reducing valve shall be set to open at any pressure below its preset setpoint and to close at any pressure above an adjustable deadband to maintain downstream pressure within 2.5 psi of the pressure setpoint. Downstream pressure control shall not be based on changing upstream pressures. The downstream pressure setpoint shall be 600 feet Hydraulic Grade Line (HGL). The normal valve pressure differential is 50 psi (710 to 600 feet HGL) and field adjustable between the range for each valve Optional features shall include: Flow clean strainer, flow control (closing), check valve feature (check valves with isolation valve), pressure gauge, speed control (opening) and valve position indicator. 6-Inch Valve shall be globe pattern. Body and cover shall be Ductile Iron. Disc retainer and diaphragm washer shall be cast iron. Trim shall be bronze. 1-inch shall be provided with available materials. Part 3 – Execution Install per manufacturer requirements and test with manufacturer representative present. 15.35 Air Valves [CSI 40 05 78] 15.35.02 Air Valves – Clean Water 15.35.02.01 Combination Air and Vacuum Valves – Clean Water [CSI 40 05 78.19] Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Combination air and vacuum valves shall be equal to APCO 143C or Val-Matic No. 201C. 15-22 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 Manufactured Units Provide air valve’s body and cover fabricated from cast iron. Provide internal parts, including float, seat, needle, linkage, level pins, retaining rings and screws fabricated from either stainless steel or bronze. Size as shown on the Plans. Part 3 – Execution Installation If not detailed on the Plans, valves shall be attached to water main via tap, brass pipe, and an isolation ball valve and fittings as necessary. Outlet shall be provided with a brass male by female threaded return bend to direct air away from any mechanical or electrical components. 15.40 PIPING SPECIALTIES 15.40.01 Dismantling Joint [CSI 40 05 06.13] Part 1 – General Design Criteria Dismantling joint shall be accessible and capable of repeated installations and removals and capable of the testing and working pressures as specified in Division 1.81.40. Joint adjustment range of no less than 2-inches for 12-inch diameter and smaller pipe, and 3-inches for 14-inch diameter and larger pipe. Joint assembly to include limiting rods to prevent pull-out. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Dismantling joint shall be Romac DJ400 with limit rods or equal. Part 3 – Execution Installation Install per the manufacturer’s instructions. Set the assembly at the midpoint of the adjustment range unless specifically called out otherwise on the Plans. 15.40.03 Pipe, Valve, and Conduit Supports [CSI 40 05 07] Part 1 - General Summary This section includes providing pipe supports, hangers, guides, and anchors. Related Sections Division 1.81.30 Seismic Restraint Division 5.05.23 Bolts and other Connectors 15-23 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 References Pipe supports furnished under this section shall comply in all respects with the requirements of the following standards. ANSI/ASME B31.1 Power Piping ANSI/MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture ANSI/MSS SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application Performance Standards Piping systems, including connections to equipment, shall be properly supported to prevent deflection and stresses. Supports shall comply with ANSI/ASME B31.1, except as otherwise indicated. Size hanger rods, supports, clamps, anchors, brackets, and guides in accordance with ANSI/MSS SP 58 and SP 69. Support plumbing drainage and vents in accordance with the Uniform Plumbing Code. Submittals Pipe Hanger/Support Design Calculations Shop drawings of engineered pipe hangers/supports, including details of concrete inserts. Drawings shall include location plan showing location of the hanger/support in relation to the structure and/or equipment. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Pipe supports, hangers, guides, and anchors shall be Anvil, Unistrut, Tolco, Standon, or equal. Flange supports shall be equal to Standon Adjustable Model S89 Flange Support. Pipe supports shall be equal to Standon Adjustable Model S92 Pipe Support. Both flange and pipe supports shall be equal to those manufactured by Material Resources, Hillsboro, Oregon. Components Provide and install all equipment necessary for compete support systems including, but not limited to, base, riser pipe, anchor bolts, hanger rod, support cradle or clamp, and fasteners. Except as otherwise noted, pipe support components shall comply with the types in ANSI/MSS SP-58. Engineered Supports: Pipe hangers, supports for piping and conduits (raceways), and all spring support assemblies shall be completely engineered. Freestanding Piping: Freestanding pipe connections to equipment, including chemical feeders and pumps, shall be firmly attached to fabricated steel frames made of angles, channels or I- beams anchored to the structure. Exterior, freestanding overhead piping shall be supported on fabricated pipe stands, consisting of pipe columns anchored to concrete footings, with horizontal, welded steel angles, and U-bolts or clamps installed to secure piping. 15-24 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 Point Loads: Any meters, valves, heavy equipment and other point loads on PVC, fiberglass and other plastic pipes shall be supported on both sides according to the manufacturer’s recommendations to avoid pipe stresses. Supports on plastic and fiberglass piping shall be equipped with extra wide pipe saddles or stainless-steel shields. No support shall have metal pieces in contact with plastic process piping. Finishes Unless otherwise noted, all fabricated pipe supports, other than stainless steel or non-ferrous supports, shall be blast-cleaned after fabrication and hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM 123. Other than stainless steel and non-ferrous supports, supports shall be coated in accordance with Division 9.90. Part 3 - Execution Installation Piping shall be rigidly anchored to walls, slabs, and ceilings by means of suitable pipe supports, wall brackets, or pipe hangers. Pipe supports, hangers, brackets, anchors, guides, and inserts shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions and ANSI/ASME B31.1. All concrete inserts for pipe hangers and supports shall be coordinated with the formwork. Stand-on Pipe Support: Adjust support, secure to pipe and secure to floor as recommended by the manufacturer. Riser Supports: Risers shall be supported on each floor with riser clamps and lugs, independent of the connected horizontal piping. Support Spacing: Pipe supports shall be placed to meet the following maximum spacing, unless otherwise noted or shown on the Plans: maximum vertical support spacing of 5 feet, and maximum horizontal support spacing of 10 feet. Support shall be provided at horizontal bends, base of risers (vertical bends), floor penetrations, connections to pumps, blowers, and other equipment, valves and appurtenances. Support spacing shall meet the local plumbing code where applicable. Support spacing may be increased from that noted above provided adequate calculations are provided supporting the change. Support Anchorage: Concrete anchors shall be as specified in Division 3, Concrete Anchors. All channel strut type supports shall have a minimum of 2 anchors per support. Suspend pipe hangers from hanger rods, secure with double nuts. Securely anchor plastic pipe, valves and headers to prevent movement during operation of valves. Anchor plastic pipe between expansion loops and direction changes to prevent axial movement through anchors. Provide ductile iron elbows or tees supported from floors with base fittings. Support base fittings with metal supports, or when indicated on the Plans, concrete piers. Do not use chains, plumbers’ straps, wire, or similar devices for suspending, supporting or restraining pipes. Install riser clamps at floor penetrations and where indicated on the Plans. 15-25 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 Field Quality Control Pipe supports and hangers shall be positioned in such a way as to produce an orderly, neat piping system. All hanger rods shall be vertical, without offsets. Hangers shall be adjusted to line up groups of pipes at the proper grade for drainage and venting, as close to ceilings or roofs as possible, without interference with other work. Properly support, suspend or anchor exposed pipe, fittings, valves and appurtenances to prevent sagging, overstressing or movement of piping and to prevent thrusts or loads on or against connected pumps, blowers or other equipment. 15.40.08 Valve Box – Cast Iron [CSI 33 05 81.23] Part 2 - Products Components Cast iron valve boxes shall be a complete unit composed of the following: Valve box Lid with recessed handle Extension stem for operator nuts more than 3 feet below grade Valve box assembly shall be adjustable to accommodate variable trench depths. Valve box assembly shall be rated for continuous traffic loading. Part 3 - Execution Installation Valve boxes shall be provided and installed for all buried valves. Install box plumb with surface and straight so that keys and operators do not bind. 15.40.09 Valve Box with Integral Valve Stem Extension [CSI 33 05 81.24] Part 2 - Products Manufacturers Valve box shall be equal to American Flow Control’s Trench Adapter. Components The stem assembly shall be of a telescoping design that allows for variable adjustment length. The material shall be galvanized steel square tubing. The stem assembly shall have a built-in device that keeps the stem assembly from disengaging at its fully extended length. The extension stem must be torque tested to 1,000-foot pounds. 15-26 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 Valve boxes shall be a complete unit composed of the following: Valve box Lid with recessed handle Extension operator Riser section Base section All moving parts of the extension stem shall be enclosed in housing to prevent contact with the soil. The valve box assembly shall be adjustable to accommodate variable trench depths. The entire assembly shall be made of cast (or ductile) iron and minimum ¼-inch heavy wall high-density polyethylene. All components shall be joined with a permanent locking design. The valve box top section shall be adaptable to fit inside a standard valve box upper section. Part 3 - Execution Installation Valve boxes shall be provided and installed for all buried valves. Install box plumb with surface and straight so that keys and operators do not bind. 15.40.11 Joint Restraints – Wedge Style [CSI 33 05 09.34] Part 1 - General Summary This specification is for wedge-action (tooth) style restraints. This type of restraint shall not be used where the Plans or specifications require True Restrained Joints (TRJ). Other terms used for TRJ may include “Bead-locked” or “Fabricated Restrained Joints”. Performance Requirements. All naturally unrestrained joints subject to unbalanced forces shall be restrained to resist testing and operational forces. Restraints shall be rated for the maximum testing and operational pressures. Restraints shall be designed specifically for the material and purpose of the pipe and joint. Provide the quantity of restraints required for fully restraining all working and testing forces. Submittals Provide manufacturer’s information describing applicability and performance ratings. Quality Assurance The Contractor is responsible for verifying compatibility of the pipe and restraint system proposed in their bid. 15-27 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 Part 2 - Products Manufacturers Mechanical Joints: EBAA Iron “Mega-Lug”, Romac “Romagrip”, or approved equals. Push-on Joints: US Pipe Field-Lok 350 (ductile iron), Ransom ReiberLok (PVC), EBAA Iron 1900 (PVC), or approved equals. If the Owner has construction standards addressing the type of restraints allowed, those standards shall take precedent over this specification unless specifically identified otherwise on the Plans. Components Set-screw type restraints are not permitted. Finishes Restraints in all buried applications, and in exposed areas when not being field coated, shall be coated at the factory with fusion bonded polyester based coating (e.g. Romac Romabond, EBAA Mega-bond, Ford Armorguard E-Coat) or approved equal. Part 3 - Execution Preparation Verify that the pipe surface where the restraints will affix is not damaged or corroded prior to installation. Any such damaged pipe shall be cut off and disposed of. Clean any dirt or debris from the surface of the pipe. Installation/Construction Install per the restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Bolted style restraints shall be tightened in an alternating pattern in stages, do not tighten circumferentially. If bolted restraint does not come with break-off head bolts, a torque wrench must be used. If pipes require deflection at the joints, perform the deflection prior to final tightening of the restraints. Do not exceed the manufacturer’s maximum deflection recommendations. Initial setting of wedges may use any commonly used hand tools until the wedge touches the pipe surface. Impact tools are not allowed for wedge engagement and final torqueing. Installation of restrained joint push-on pipe that will be deflected must be installed per the manufacturer’s instructions. In general, this requires the pipe to be inserted into the bell at a straight alignment, but not pushed home. The pipe can then be deflected. If the manufacturer’s instructions provide differing, or additional instructions, those instructions shall be followed. Bedding material must sands and/or angular gravels for proper soil-to-pipe adhesion and shall not be a clay, rounded gravel, pea gravel, washed rock, or other poorly graded material. Compaction of bedding around restrained pipe shall be performed in maximum 9-inch lifts using mechanical compaction equipment. Repair If restraints are removed for any reason, the restraints shall be disposed of and not reused. The section of pipe to which the restraints were secured shall be cut off and disposed of. 15-28 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 15.60 PRESSURE MEASUREMENT [CSI 40 73 00] 15.60.01 Common Work for Pressure Measurement [CSI 40 73 05] Part 1 – General Related Sections Division 17 - Electronic Pressure and Level Devices Design Requirements Pressure and level measurement devices shall be scaled and rated for the application. Part 3 – Execution Installation All devices shall be installed to be field serviceable without taking the facility out of service. Readouts shall be positioned to be easily read from a standing position and central to the room, unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer. 15.61 Pressure Gauges [CSI 40 73 13] Part 1 – General References ASME B40.100 (B40.1 Analog, B40.7 Digital) Performance Requirements Analog: Grade 2A (±0.5 percent of span) unless stated otherwise in the Products section. Digital: Grade 2A (±0.5 percent of span) or AR (±1 percent of reading) unless stated otherwise in the Products section. Submittals Provide catalog sheets showing dimensions, pressure range, accuracy and optional accessories. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Marsh, 3D Instruments, or approved equal. Materials Provide gauges per the table below. Gauges completely suitable for measuring potable water with wetted parts of brass, bronze, or stainless steel. 15-29 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 15 Location PRV Upstream PRV Downstream Full Scale 0-100 psi 0-150 psi Normal Operating Range 30-80 psi 50-120 psi Analog or Digital Analog Analog Surface or Stem Mount Stem Stem Connection Size 0.25” or 0.5" 0.25” or 0.5" Accuracy Grade See Perf. Req’ts See Perf. Req’ts Glycerin fill or Dry Glycerin Glycerin Face Size 2.5” or 4.5” 4.5” 4.5” Accessories Unless shown otherwise on the Plans, provide a block and bleed valve for each pressure gauge. Transcat 600/700 series, stainless steel, or approved equal. Do not use in chlorine rooms or chlorination systems. Part 3 - Execution Installation Install gauges where shown on the Plans. Support gauges adequately. Tighten only with the connection hex nut, do not twist the case. Field Quality Control Where a new gauge is connected directly to the plumbing of a pressure transmitter, the gauge must read within its accuracy grade compared to the transmitter, unless the transmitter is proven faulty. If the Engineer suspects any gauge is inaccurate, provide a calibrated gauge for comparison, or other method of verification acceptable to the Engineer. New gauges will be compared to each other in the field. Differences of more than 1.5% of the reading will be cause for rejection. Contractor to build a temporary testing manifold if the facility piping does not permit direct comparison of gauges in place. Replace or calibrate gauges that do not meet the accuracy requirements. 15-30 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\15 Mechanical.docx 8/20/24 10:33 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 16 Electrical 16.00 GENERAL The Contractor shall provide all labor, material, tools, equipment and services required to complete the furnishing, installation, wiring, connection, calibration, adjustment, testing and operation of all electrical equipment, devices and components as indicated and implied by the plans and specifications. Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” shall apply to all following sections whether directly referenced or not. The Contractor shall reference Division 1.25 regarding substitutes and “or-equals”. 16.05 Common Work for Electrical [CSI 26 05 00] Part 1 - General Summary Plans are diagrammatic and indicate general arrangements of systems and equipment, except when specifically dimensioned or detailed. The intention of the plans is to show size, capacity, approximated location, direction and general relationship of one work phase to another, but not exact detail or arrangement. Regulatory Requirements The Contractor shall coordinate and provide all permits, licenses, approvals, inspections by the authority having jurisdiction and other arrangements for work on this project and all fees shall be paid for by the Contractor. The Contractor shall include these fees in the bid price. Related Sections See the following sections for items that may be provided and/or installed with other electrical equipment. Division 10.14 Signs for electrical equipment Division 11.95.83 Space heater Division 17.50 Sensors and controls Codes and Standards Provide all electrical work in accordance with latest edition of National Electrical Code, National Electrical Safety Code, Washington State Electrical Code, and local ordinances. If any conflict occurs between government adopted code rules and these specifications, the codes are to govern. All electrical products shall bear a label from a certified testing laboratory recognized by the State of Washington. Recognized labels in the State of Washington are UL, ETL, and CSA-US. 16-1 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 Definitions Dry Locations: All those indoor areas which do not fall within the definitions below for wet, damp, or corrosive locations and which are not otherwise designated on the Plans. Wet Locations: All locations exposed to the weather, whether under a roof or not, unless otherwise designated on the Plans. Damp Locations: All spaces wholly or partially underground, or having a wall or ceiling forming part of a channel or tank unless otherwise designated on the Plans. Corrosive Locations: Areas where chlorine gas under pressure, sulfuric acid, or liquid polymer are stored or processed. These areas are identified on the Plans. The words “plans” and “drawings” are used interchangeably in this specification and in all cases shall be interpreted to mean “Plans”. The word “provide” shall be interpreted to mean furnish and install. Design Requirements Unless otherwise noted, provide enclosures as follows: 1. Indoors Unclassified Locations: NEMA Type 12 2. Corrosive Locations: NEMA Type 4X 3. Outdoors and/or Wet Locations: NEMA Type 4X 4. Electrical Rooms: NEMA Type 1 Submittals Provide submittals of each item specified in this division to engineer for approval in accordance with Division 1 of these specifications. Submittals for motor control centers, motor control panels, control panels, instrumentation panels, and pump control panels shall include at a minimum: a wiring diagram or connection schematic, and an interconnection diagram. Wiring Diagram or Connection Schematic 1. Include all devices in a system and show their physical relationship to each other including terminals and interconnecting wiring in assembly. This diagram shall be in a form showing interconnecting wiring only by terminal designations (wireless diagram). Interconnection Diagram 1. Show all external connections between terminals of equipment and outside points, such as motors and auxiliary devices. Show references to all connection diagrams which interface to the interconnection diagrams. Interconnection diagrams shall be of the continuous line type. Show bundled wires on a single line with the direction of entry/exit of the individual wires clearly shown. Identify all devices and equipment. Show terminal blocks as actually installed and identified in the equipment complete with individual terminal identification. All jumpers, shielding and grounding termination details not shown on the equipment connection diagrams shall be shown on the interconnection diagrams. Show spare wires and cables. 16-2 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 Provide submittal information for the following items: 1. Utility Meter Enclosure 2. Service Disconnect 3. Distribution Transformers 4. Circuit Breakers 5. Conduit and Fittings 6. Outlet and Junction Boxes 7. Electrical Handholes and Vaults 8. Wire and Cables 9. Light Fixtures 10. Other Electrical Components listed in this Division and/or required by the Engineer. Project Conditions Contractor shall keep all power shutdown periods to a minimum. Carry out shutdowns only after a shutdown schedule has been submitted and approved by both the Owner and the Engineer. Construction Power See Division 1.51 Part 2 - Products Source Quality Control Provide adequate space and fit for the electrical installation, including, but not limited to, determination of access-ways and doorways, shipping sections, wall and floor space, and space occupied by mechanical equipment. Provide electrical equipment that fits in the areas shown on the Plans. All equipment shall be readily accessible for maintenance, shall have electrical clearances in accordance with National Electric Code (NEC) and shall be installed in locations which will provide adequate cooling. Do not use equipment exceeding dimensions indicated or equipment or arrangements that reduce required clearances or exceed specified maximum dimensions unless approved by the Owner. Identification of Listed Products Electrical equipment and materials shall be listed for the purpose for which they are to be used, by an independent testing laboratory. When a product is not available with a testing laboratory listing for the purpose for which it is to serve, the inspection authority may require the product to undergo a special inspection at the manufacturer’s place of assembly. All costs and expenses incurred for such inspections shall be included in the original contract price. 16-3 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 Materials Use equipment, materials and wiring methods suitable for the types of locations in which they will be located, as defined in Definitions above. All materials and equipment specified herein shall, within the scope of UL Examination Services, be approved by the Underwriter’s Laboratories for the purpose for which they are used and shall bear the UL label. Components Fasteners for securing to walls, floors, and the like shall meet the requirements of Division 5.05.23. Accessories Wire Identification 1. Identify each wire or cable at each termination and in each pull-box using numbered and lettered wire markers. All electrically common conductors shall have the same number. Each electrically different conductor shall be uniquely numbered. Identify panelboard circuits using the panelboard identification and circuit number. Identify motor control circuits using the equipment identification number assigned to the control unit by the motor control center manufacturer and the motor control unit terminal number. Identify other circuits as approved by the Engineer. Identify each wire or cable in each pull-box with plastic sleeves having permanent markings. Conductors between terminals of different numbers shall have both terminal numbers shown at each conductor end. The terminal number closest to the end of the wire shall be the same as the terminal number. Finishes Refer to each electrical equipment section of these specifications for painting requirements of equipment enclosures. Part 3 - Execution Installation General 1. Complete the wiring, connection, adjustment, calibration, testing and operation of mechanical equipment having electrical motors and/or built-in or furnished electrical components in accordance with electrical code, UL listing requirements and manufacturer’s instructions. Install electrical components that are furnished with mechanical equipment. 2. Provide the size, type and rating of motor control devices, equipment and wiring necessary to match the ratings of motors furnished with mechanical equipment. 3. Complete the procurement, installation, wiring, connection, calibration, adjustment, testing and operation of all electrical devices, components accessories and equipment which is not shown or specified but which is nonetheless required to make the systems shown and specified properly functional. 16-4 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 Workmanship 1. Assign a qualified representative who shall supervise the electrical construction work from beginning to completion and final acceptance. 2. Provide all labor using qualified craftsmen, who have had experience on similar projects. 3. Ensure that all equipment and materials fit properly in their installations. Field Services 1. Provide field services of qualified technicians to supervise and check out the installation of the equipment, to supervise and check out interconnecting wiring, to conduct start-up and operation of the equipment, and to correct any problems which occur during testing and start-up. Installing Equipment 1. Provide the required inserts, bolts and anchors, and securely attach all equipment and materials to their supports. 2. Install all floor-mounted equipment on 3½-inch high reinforced concrete pads. 3. Install all equipment and junction boxes to permit easy access for normal maintenance. Cutting, Drilling, and Welding 1. Provide any cutting, drilling, and welding that is required for the electrical construction work. 2. Structural members shall not be cut or drilled, except when approved by the Engineer. Use a core drill wherever it is necessary to drill through concrete or masonry. Perform patch work with the same materials as the surrounding area and finish to match. Metal Panels 1. Mount all metal panels, which are mounted on, or abutting concrete walls in damp locations or any outside walls ¼-inch from the wall and paint the back side of the panels with a high build epoxy primer with the exception of stainless-steel panels. Film thickness shall be 10 Mils minimum. Seismic Requirements 1. See Division 1.81.30 Load Balance 1. Balance electrical load between phases as nearly as possible on panelboards, motor control centers, and other equipment where balancing is required. 2. When loads must be reconnected to different circuits to balance phase loads, maintain accurate record of changes made, and provide circuit directory that lists final circuit arrangement. 16-5 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 Field Quality Control Minor Deviations 1. The electrical plans are diagrammatic in nature and the location of devices, fixtures, and equipment is approximate unless dimensioned. Based on this, the right is reserved by the owner to provide for minor adjustments and deviations from the locations shown on the Plans without any extra cost. Deviations from the Plans and/or specifications required by code shall also be done, subsequent to Owner’s approval, without extra cost. 2. Plans indicate the general location and number of the electrical equipment items. When raceway, boxes, and ground connections are shown, they are shown diagrammatically only and indicate the general character and approximate location. Layout does not necessarily show the total number of raceways or boxes for the circuits required. Furnish, install, and place in satisfactory condition all raceways, boxes, conductors, and connections, and all of the materials required for the electrical systems shown or noted in the contract documents complete, fully operational, and fully tested upon the completion of the project. Project Record Plans 1. A set of Plans shall be maintained at the job site showing any deviations in the electrical systems from the original design. A set of electrical Plans, marked in red to indicate the routing of concealed conduit runs and any deviations from the original design, shall be submitted to the Owner for review prior to final acceptance. 2. After testing and acceptance of the project the Contractor shall furnish in the O&M manuals an accurate connection schematic and interconnection diagram for every service entrance panel, pump control panel, motor control center, and instrumentation panel provided this project. Cleanup and Equipment Protection Equipment Protection 1. Always exercise care after installation of equipment, motor control centers, control panels, etc., to keep out foreign matter, dust debris, and moisture. Use protective sheet metal covers, canvas, heat lamps, etc., as needed to ensure equipment protection. Cleaning Equipment 1. Thoroughly clean all soiled surfaces of installed equipment and materials upon completion of the project. Clean out and vacuum all construction debris from the bottom of all equipment enclosures. Painting 1. Repaint any electrical equipment or materials scratched or marred in shipment or installation, using paint furnished by the equipment manufacturer. Final Cleanup 1. Upon completion of the electrical work, remove all surplus materials, rubbish, and debris that accumulated during the construction work. Leave the entire area neat, clean and acceptable to the Owner. 16-6 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 2. Lamps and fluorescent tubes shall be cleaned, and defective units replaced at the time of final acceptance. 16.10 ELECTRICAL SITE WORK 16.10.1 Common Work for Electrical Site Work [CSI 33 71 19] Part 1 – General Summary The work included in this section consists of furnishing and installing conduit, fittings, handholes, pull vaults, warning tape, cables, wires, and related items, complete as specified herein and as indicated on the Plans for a complete and functional underground electrical system. Special vaults, grounding, trench backfill requirements may be specified with the particular equipment or electrical system involved. Related Sections Wire and cable per Section 16.60. Raceways and conduit per Section 16.70. Design Requirements Materials and equipment shall conform to the respective specifications and standards; and to be the specifications herein. Electrical rating shall be as indicated on Plans. Part 3 – Execution Construction Provide all excavation, trenching, and backfill required for the electrical work. Excavate to depths as required by Code, particular installation, or as shown on the Plans. Trench width and length as required by the installation or as shown. Trench bottom shall be free of debris and graded smooth. Where trench bottom is rock or rocky or contains debris larger than 1 inch or material with sharp edges, over excavate 3 inches and fill with 3 inches of sand. Separation between new electrical utilities and other utilities shall be 12 inches horizontal and 6 inches vertical minimum, except gas line separation shall be 12 inches both vertical and horizontal. Cross concrete or asphalt only after surface material has been saw cut to required width and removed. Backfill around raceways shall be 3-inches of pea gravel or sand for systems of 600 volt or less. Provide red marker tape over raceways below grade. Place backfill material to obtain a minimum degree of compaction of 95 percent of maximum density at optimum moisture content. Moisten backfill material as required to obtain proper compaction. Do not use broken pavement, concrete, sod, roots or debris for backfill. 16-7 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 16.10.2 Underground Marking Tape (Detectable Type) [CSI 33 05 97.23] Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Tape shall be Brady “Detectable Identoline – Buried Underground Tape”, or equal. Materials Underground marking tape shall be for location and early warning protection of buried power and communication lines. Tape shall be detectable by a pipe/cable locator or metal detector from above the undisturbed ground. Tape shall be nominally 2 inches wide with a type B721 aluminum foil core laminated between two layers of 5 Mil thickness polyester plastic. The plastic color shall be red for electrical lines and orange for telephone lines. Part 3 – Execution Installation Unless noted otherwise on Plans, install approved underground marking tape 12 inches above and directly over the conduit or raceway in all trenches. 16.10.3 Handholes and Pull Boxes [CSI 33 71 19.13] Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Handholes and Pull boxes shall be Oldcastle or approved equal unless specified otherwise on the Plans. Materials Provide handholes of reinforced precast concrete, or injection molded composite plastic material. Handholes shall include a base, a body, extensions and a cover. Provide handholes with a perimeter of 10 feet or more (e.g., 3 feet by 2 feet) with both pulling irons and cable racks. All hardware shall be stainless steel, or hot-dip galvanized after fabrication; cable racking and hardware, however, shall be non-metallic and corrosion resistant. If no handhole size is shown on the Plans, size units per NEC or provide 12 inches by 24 inches by 18 inches deep, whichever is larger. All handholes located in areas subject to vehicular traffic or where identified on Plans shall be ASSHTO, H-20 rated in accordance with ASTM C857. The lids to all pull boxes and vaults shall be permanently marked for its intended use, “signal” for all signal and instrumentation handholes and “electrical” for all power handholes. Letter shall be a minimum of 3-inches high. 16-8 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 Part 3 – Execution Installation Conduits entering handholes shall have grounding bushings installed and the conduit ends shall be sealed with Permagum sealing compound. Where conduits enter through sides of handholes, the penetration shall be made watertight. Use a core drill wherever it is necessary to drill through concrete. Perform patch work with the same materials as the surrounding area and finish to match. Pull boxes shall be provided at least every 150 feet on long straight runs. Spacing shall be reduced by 50 feet for each 90-degree bend. Install handholes flush with finished grade in all paved areas, roadways and walkways. All handhole edges shall be flush with final surface. 16.15 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS [CSI 26 05 26] Part 1 - General References Service and equipment grounding shall be per Article 250 of the NEC. Performance Requirements Verify that a low-resistance ground path is provided for all circuits so an accidental contact to ground of any live conductor will instantly trip the circuit. Part 2 - Products Components The grounding systems shall consist of the ground rods, grounding conductors, ground bus, ground fittings and clamps, and bonding conductors to water piping and structural steel as shown on the Plans. System components shall be as allowed in the NEC unless specified otherwise below: 1. Ground Rods: Ground rods shall be cone pointed copper clad Grade 40 HS steel rods conforming to ASTM B228. The welded copper encased steel rod shall have a conductivity of not less than 27 percent of pure copper. 2. Ground Conductors: Buried conductors shall be medium-hard drawn bare copper; other conductors shall be soft drawn copper. Sizes over No. 6 AWG shall be stranded. Coat all ground connections except the exothermic welds with electrical joint compound, non-petroleum type, UL listed for copper and aluminum applications. 3. Ground Rod Boxes: Boxes shall be a 9-inch diameter precast concrete unit with hot-dip galvanized traffic cover. Boxes shall be 12-inches deep minimum. Covers shall be embossed with the wording “Ground Rod”. 16-9 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 Part 3 - Execution General Grounding Installation When available a UFER ground per latest edition of NEC shall be provided as the primary means to ground the electrical system. Ground electrical service neutral at service entrance equipment to supplementary grounding electrodes. Ground each separately derived system neutral to nearest effectively grounded building structural steel member or separate grounding electrode. Provide a ground rod box for each ground rod to permit ready access to facilitate testing. Provide a ground wire in every conduit carrying a circuit of over 110 volts to ground. Make embedded or buried ground connections, taps and splices with exothermic welds. Coat ground connections. Bond metallic water piping at its entrance into each building. Motor Grounding Installation Extend equipment ground bus via grounding conductor installed in motor feeder raceway. Connect to motor frame. When using nonmetallic flexible tubing install an equipment grounding conductor connected at both ends to noncurrent-carrying grounding bus. Vault and Handhole Grounding Exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of equipment, conductor supports or racks, conduits, and other metal appurtenances, including any metal cover and its supporting ring, shall be bonded together and connected to a common ground. The size of the grounding means shall be as prescribed in the NEC. Where the grounding means is exposed, the grounding conductor shall be not smaller than #8 AWG copper. Ground Connections Above grade ground connections shall be exothermic weld, mechanical, or compression-type connectors; or brazing. Below grade ground connections shall be exothermic weld. Install all ground connections is strict accordance with connector manufacturer’s recommendations and methods. Testing Following completion of the grounding electrode system, if installed, measure ground resistance at each ground rod using the three-rod method. Submit results to engineer prior to final acceptance by the Owner. 16-10 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 Perform testing per NETA Standard ATS paragraph 7.13. Testing methods shall conform to NETA Standard ATS using the three-electrode method for large systems. Conduct tests only after a period of not less than 48 hours of dry weather. Furnish to the Engineer a test report with recorded data of each ground rod location. See Division 16.95.4. 16.20 UTILITY SERVICE 16.21 Electrical Service [CSI 26 21 00] Part 1 – General Description of Work Work consists of installation of new 300-amp, 480-volt, 3-phase underground service, pole-mounted transformer, and service entrance equipment. Scheduling Work with the Utility Company The Contractor shall be fully and completely responsible for all scheduling and coordination with the utility company. The Contractor shall coordinate and schedule power outages, power service for operation and construction, and power service as may be required prior to Certification of Occupancy. The Contractor shall make all necessary applications for service with the utility and shall notify the Owner in writing of any obligations that the Owner must fulfill for service to be started, installed, or modified. Contractor/Utility Interface Responsibilities The electrical utility providing service to these facilities is Snohomish County Public Utility District (PUD). During design, contact was made with Customer Service Representative, Dave Wood, who can be contacted by telephoning (360) 435-7508. The division of responsibilities stated below has been determined by coordination with the serving utility. The Contractor shall comply with all utility company standards and requirements. All utility charges for and related to the final permanent service to the facility will be paid by the Owner, directly to the utility company and not be included in the Contractor’s bid price. The Contractor shall notify the Owner (in writing) of any obligations or forms that the Owner is responsible to provide for service. The Contractor shall: Provide and install power hand hole for new utility service. Install new raceway and conductors for secondary service from the proposed power hand hole to the proposed Main Service Disconnect Switch including trenching, backfill, and restoration. Terminate service conductors at the Main Service Disconnect Switch. 16-11 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 Install the Main Service Disconnect Switch and Automatic Transfer switch as shown on the Plans. Install utility meter enclosure, current transformer enclosure, and raceways for utility revenue metering as shown on the Plans. Provide trench, backfill, and restoration for installation of the underground power service secondary from the utility pole to the power hand hole. Provide excavation, backfill, and restoration required for installation of the electrical handholes and vaults. The Contractor shall meet all the standard requirements for working in the right-of-way which includes a utility representative on site during work within the right-of-way. The Contractor shall be responsible for paying all cost for the representative to be on site. The Utility Company shall: Install new pole-mounted transformer on existing utility pole as shown on the Plans. Install new secondary raceway and conductors from the pole-mounted transformer to the proposed power hand hole including all raceways, conductors, and cable terminators. Trench, backfill, and restoration shall be provided by the Contractor. Terminate conductors on the secondary side of the transformer and in the power hand hole. Install current transformers (CT) in CT cabinet installed by the Contractor. Install a utility revenue meter in the proposed main revenue metering enclosure installed by the Contractor. Project Conditions Before submitting a bid, the Contractor shall become familiar with all the electrical service requirements that may affect the execution of their work. Standards and Codes Work involving service installation shall be done in accordance with the service utilities standards and the NEC. Service equipment shall be listed and labeled by UL as “suitable for use as service equipment”. 16.21.2 Electrical Utility Meter Enclosure [CSI 26 27 13] Manufacturers Meter enclosure shall be a Circle AW or equal and as required to meet the requirement of the serving utility. Installation shall be in vandal proof NEMA 3R enclosure with a lockable hinged door. Meter shall include a metal vandal screen that can be purchased from serving utility. Materials Contractor shall coordinate with the PUD on the type of metering required and shall provide all labor and material necessary to meet PUD requirements. 16-12 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 16.21.4 Circuit Breaker Service Disconnect Switch [CSI 26 28 16.13] Design The switch shall be heavy duty type, shall be quick-make, quick break, and shall be horsepower rated. The switch shall have blades as required to open all ungrounded conductors. The disconnect shall have a minimum available fault current withstand rating of 42,000 amperes unless noted otherwise on the Plans. Service equipment shall meet the requirements of the serving utility and shall be suitable for use as service equipment. Service entrance disconnect shall be furnished with a UL service entrance label. Manufacturers Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section for the service disconnect switch shall be products of: Eaton (Cutler Hammer) General Electric Schneider Electric (Square D) Siemens Or approved equal Materials The switch shall be pad-lockable in both the OFF or ON position. The enclosure shall be NEMA 3R rated unless noted otherwise on the Plans. The enclosure shall have interlocking cover to prevent opening door when switch is closed. The interlock shall include a defeating scheme. The enclosure shall be pad-lockable. Circuit breakers shall be molded case thermal-magnetic type and meet molded case circuit breaker specifications covered in Division 16.55.16. 16.30 BASIC PANEL EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES 16.31 Operating and Indicating Devices [CSI 26 09 00, 40 78 00] Part 1 - General Operating and indicating devices minimum rating shall be NEMA 13. Operator devices mounted in outdoor panels, corrosive areas or where exposed to moisture shall be NEMA 4X. 16-13 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 16.31.4 Indicating Lights [CSI 26 09 13.31, 40 78 16] Manufacturers Heavy-Duty, Watertight, and Corrosion-Resistant Type: Eaton/Cutler-Hammer, Type E34 Square D Co., Type SK Allen Bradley, Type 800H General Electric Co., Type CR 104P Manufactured Units Indicating lights shall be NEMA type 4/4X/13, corrosion resistant, water-tight, oil-tight, full voltage, push-to-test, high visibility 28 chips LED type. Pilot lights shall be rated for the proper operating voltage. Appropriate lens caps shall be provided as shown on Plans. 16.31.5 Selector Switch [CSI 26 09 16.21 40 78 19.21] Manufacturers Heavy-Duty, Watertight, and Corrosion-Resistant Type: Eaton/Cutler-Hammer, Type E34 Square D Co., Type SK Allen Bradley, Type 800H General Electric Co., Type CR 104P Manufactured Units Selector switches shall be NEMA type 4/4X/13, corrosion-resistant/watertight/oil-tight, type selector switches with contacts rated for 10 amperes continuous at proper operating voltage. Operators shall be black knob type. Units shall have the number of positions and contact arrangements and spring return function (if any) as shown on Plans. Units shall be single-hole mounting, accommodating panel thicknesses from 1/ 16-inch minimums to ¼-inch maximum. 16.32 Panel Relays [CSI 26 09 16, 40 78 53] Part 1 – General General Relays shall be provided as necessary to perform switching functions required of control panels and other control circuits as shown on the Plans and described in the technical specifications. Appropriate relay type and associated contacts shall be selected based on the 16-14 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 application from the control wiring diagrams or the functional description. Where timing relays and control relays require additional contacts, provide auxiliary control relays properly sized for the application. All contacts and relays shall be NEMA rated and UL recognized. The electrical life expectancy for the relay shall be over 500,000 operations at 120V AC, 10 amp; (over 200,000 operations at 120V AC, 10 amp for SPDT, 3PDT, and 4PDT). The mechanical life expectancy for the relay shall be over 50,000,000 operations. 16.32.1 Control Relays [CSI 26 09 16.31, 40 78 53.21] Manufacturers Square D Class 8501, Type K or R Allen Bradley 700 Type HA or HB IDEC RH Series; or equal Manufactured Units Relays for general purpose use shall be DPDT or 3PDT, 10-amp contacts with the appropriate coil voltage for the application. Relays shall be plug-in type with matching socket. All relays shall have LED indicators to signal when the coil is energized. Relay coils shall be rated for continuous duty. 16.35 Control Panel Accessories 16.35.1 Terminal Blocks [CSI 26 05 83 or 26 27 26] Part 2 – Products Manufactured Units Terminal blocks shall be one-piece, molded, plastic blocks with screw-type terminals and barriers rated for 600 volts. Terminals shall be double-sided and supplied with removable covers to prevent accidental contact with live circuits. Terminals shall have permanent, legible identification, clearly visible with the protection cover removed. Part 3 – Execution Installation All wires between panel-mounted equipment and other equipment shall be terminated at terminal blocks. Switches shall be terminated at the terminal blocks with crimp-type, pre-insulated, ring-tongue lugs. Lugs shall be of the appropriate size for their terminal block screws and for the number and size of the wires terminated. All wires shall be labeled with the circuit number and common function. 16-15 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 16.35.2 Nameplates [CSI 26 05 53, 10 14 23] Part 2 – Products Manufactured Units Standard nameplates shall be made of 1/ 16-inch thick machine engraved laminated phenolic 3/ having black letters not less than 16-inch high on white background. One-inch high lettering shall be used for the large nameplates required for the control panels and motor control centers. Part 3 – Execution Installation Nameplates shall be provided on all electrical devices including but not limited to motor control equipment, MCC cubicles, control stations, junction boxes, panels, motors, instruments, switches, indicating lights, meters, and all electrical equipment enclosures. Each motor control center compartment and control panel shall have a nameplate designating the equipment and its identifying number and size or rating. Data shall be as shown on the Plans and reviewed via the submittal process. Nameplates shall have name, number and/or function as is applicable for clear identification. Provide one large nameplate for each motor control center and/or control panel identifying the equipment as indicated on the Plans. Nameplates on steel panels shall be secured with stainless steel drive screws. Where it is proposed that nameplates will be secured with pressure sensitive tape or bonding cement, the process and samples shall be submitted to the Engineer for acceptance. Nameplates shall be provided for identifying all operator interface (lights, switches, etc.) and other devices that are located outside or inside the panels. Nameplates shall be provided for identifying all relays and devices that are located inside the panels. Special Functions Provide warning nameplates on all panels and equipment, which contain multiple power sources. Lettering shall be white on red background. 16.55 SWITCHES AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES [CSI 26 28 00] 16-16 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 16.55.1 Common Work for Switches and Protective Devices [CSI 26 18 05, 26 28 05] Part 1 - General Design Requirements Overcurrent devices shall be NEMA rated. Extra Materials Provide one fuse for each ungrounded conductor and a minimum of one spare fuse per phase of each ampacity and voltage used on the project. Deliver fuses to Owner at the completion of the project. Part 3 – Execution Installation Overcurrent protection devices and safety switches shall be centered 60 inches above the finished floor unless noted otherwise on the Plans. 16.55.16 Molded Case Circuit Breakers [CSI 26 28 16.14] Part 1 - General Design Requirements Breakers shall have the interrupting rating and trip rating indicated on the Plans. All breakers shall be calibrated for operation in an ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius. Part 2 - Products Manufactured Units Molded case circuit breakers shall be quick-make and quick-break type with wiping type contacts. Each breaker shall be provided with arc chutes and individual trip mechanisms on each pole consisting of both thermal and magnetic trip elements. Two and three pole breakers shall be common trip. Molded case circuit breakers shall be trip-free. Each breaker shall have trip indication independent of the “ON” or “OFF” positions. 16.55.18 Disconnect Switches [CSI 26 28 16.17] Part 1 - General Design Requirements Furnish and install disconnect switches conforming to NEMA KS 1, type HD, sized for the ampere and voltage as shown on the Plans and as required by the NEC and nameplate requirements of the equipment served. 16-17 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 Part 2 - Products Manufactured Units The switches shall be 600-volt type and horsepower rated. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided as indicated on the Plans. Part 3 – Execution Installation Provide additional disconnects if required by Code. 16.60 CONDUCTORS 16.61 Low Voltage Wire and Cable [CSI 26 05 19] Part 1 - General Design Requirements This section is for power and control conductors for 600 volts or less. All conductors shall be copper. Wire or cable not shown on the Plans or specified, but required, shall be of the type and size required for the application and in conformance with the applicable code. Part 2 - Products Materials Conductors 1. Solid and stranded copper wire shall be 600-volt Type THW, THWN, or THHW, Class B stranding, sizes #14 AWG, #12 AWG, and #10 AWG only. Use of THHN insulation shall not be allowed. Aluminum conductors shall not be allowed. 2. Stranded copper wire shall be 600-volt Type XHHW, Class B stranding, sizes #8 AWG and larger. Aluminum conductors shall not be allowed. Splices 1. For Lighting Systems and Power Outlets: Wire nuts shall be twist-on type insulated connectors utilizing an outer insulating cover and a means for connecting and holding the conductors firmly. 2. All Equipment: Crimp type connectors shall be insulated type, suitable for the size and material of the wires and the number of wires to be spliced and for use with either solid or stranded conductors. 3. Division 16 Equipment and Power Conductors: Bolted pressure connectors shall be suitable for the size and material of the conductors to be spliced. 4. All Equipment: Epoxy splice kits shall include epoxy resin, hardener, mold, and shall be suitable for use in wet and hazardous locations. 16-18 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 Terminations 1. Crimp type terminals shall be self-insulating sleeve type, with ring or rectangular type tongue, suitable for the size and material of the wire to be terminated, and for use with either solid or stranded conductors. 2. Terminal lugs shall be split bolt or bolted split sleeve type in which the bolt or set screw does not bear directly on the conductor. 3. Wire Markers shall be plastic sleeve type. Wire numbers shall be permanently imprinted on the markers. Finishes Color Coding: Provide color coding for all circuit conductors. Insulation color shall be white for neutrals and green for grounding conductors. An isolated ground conductor shall be identified with an orange tracer in the green body. Ungrounded conductor colors shall be as follows: 1. 120/208 Volt, 3 Phase: Red, black and blue. 2. 277/480 Volt, 3 Phase: Yellow, brown and orange. 3. 120/240 Volt, 1 Phase: Red and black. Part 3 – Execution Location (Installment) Schedule Provide the following conductors for the following applications: 1. Use stranded copper conductors for all power and control circuits unless noted otherwise on plans or below. Size as noted on the Plans. 2. Contractor may use solid copper conductors for lighting and receptacle circuits using screw-type terminals. Size as noted on the Plans. 3. Size #14 AWG wire or smaller shall not be allowed on power circuits. Installation Conductor Splices 1. Splices: Install all conductors without splices unless necessary for installation, as determined by the Engineer. Splices when permitted shall be completed using an approved splice kit intended for the type of conductor and the application. The splice shall be in accordance with the splice kit manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Underground Splices: All underground outdoor splices when approved by Engineer shall be completed in an accessible pullbox or handhole using an approved watertight epoxy resin splice kit rated for the application up to 600 volts. Splices will not be allowed to be direct buried. Conductor Identification 1. Except for interior lighting and receptacle circuits, identify each wire or cable at each termination and in each pullbox, junction box, handhole, and manhole using numbered 16-19 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 and lettered wire markers. All electrically common conductors shall have the same number. Each electrically different conductor shall be uniquely numbered. Identify panelboard circuits using the panelboard identification and circuit number. Identify motor control circuits using the equipment identification number assigned to the control unit by the motor control center manufacturer and the motor control unit terminal number. Identify other circuits as shown in the circuit schedule as favorably by the Engineer. 2. Conductors between terminals of different numbers shall have both terminal numbers shown at each conductor end. The terminal number closest to the end of the wire shall be the same as the terminal number. Testing Insulation Resistance Tests: For all circuits 150 volts to ground or more and for all motor circuits over ½ horsepower, test cables per NETA Paragraph 7.3.1. The insulation resistance shall be 20 megohms or more. Submit results to Engineer for review. 16.63 Signal Cable [CSI 27 15 00] Part 2 - Products Materials 600V Cat 5E Ethernet Cable 1. The Ethernet cable shall be shielded 600V UL rated. The use of a 300V rated cable in 480V cabinets is not acceptable. All Ethernet cable terminating outside of a telemetry panel shall be grounded at the telemetry panel only. 2. Ethernet cables shall be industrial type Ethernet cable, 4-pair and UL listed for installation in the Motor Control Center. Ethernet cables shall be Allen-Bradley Ethernet Cable with metal In-cabinet RJ45 Connectors, no substitutions. 300V Cat 5E Ethernet Cable 1. The Ethernet cable shall be shielded 300V UL rated. All Ethernet cable terminating outside of a telemetry panel shall be grounded at the telemetry panel only. 2. Ethernet cables shall be industrial type Ethernet cable, 4-pair, PoE (power over ethernet) rated and UL listed. Part 3 - Execution Installation Cable Installation 1. Cables shall be continuous from initiation to termination without splices. 2. Cable shielding shall be grounded at one end of the cable only. Bonding shall be to a single ground point only. Bonding from cable to cable in multiple run installations shall not be permitted. 16-20 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 3. Install instrumentation cables in separate raceway systems with voltages not to exceed 30 volts DC. Conductor Identification 1. Except for interior lighting and receptacle circuits, identify each wire or cable at each termination and in each pullbox, junction box, handhole, and manhole using numbered and lettered wire markers. All electrically common conductors shall have the same number. Each electrically different conductor shall be uniquely numbered. Identify panelboard circuits using the panelboard identification and circuit number. Identify motor control circuits using the equipment identification number assigned to the control unit by the motor control center manufacturer and the motor control unit terminal number. Identify other circuits as shown in the circuit schedule as determined by the Engineer. 2. Conductors between terminals of different numbers shall have both terminal numbers shown at each conductor end. The terminal number closest to the end of the wire shall be the same as the terminal number. Testing Insulation Resistance Tests: Perform insulation resistance on all circuits. Make these tests before any equipment has been connected. Test the insulation with a 500 Vdc insulation resistance tester with a scale reading 100 mega ohms. The insulation resistance shall be 20 mega ohms or more. Submit results to Engineer for review. 16.70 RACEWAYS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS [CSI 26 05 33] 16.71 Raceways [CSI 26 05 33.23] Part 1 – General Design Requirements Conduit sizes not noted on Plans shall be in accordance with NEC requirements for the quantities and sizes of wire installed therein. Grounding of the raceway, junction boxes, fittings and any other boxes is the responsibility of the Contractor. Ground conductors, bushings, connections, clamps and other materials as needed to ground the raceway system is the responsibility of the Contractor. All raceways shall be grounded in accordance with the NEC. Part 2 – Products Components Conduit and Fittings 1. Galvanized Rigid Steel (GRS): Rigid conduit shall be steel, hot dipped galvanized inside and out. The GRS must meet USA Standards Institute C80-1 Underwriters Laboratories 16-21 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 Standard UL6 and carry a UL label. Use cast threaded hub fittings and junction boxes for all rigid conduit except in locations not permitted by the NEC. 2. PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-GRS): PVC coated conduit shall meet the GRS standard above plus have a 40 Mil PVC factory applied PVC coating. 3. Nonmetallic Conduit: Nonmetallic Conduit shall be rigid PVC, Schedule 40 (PVC-40) or 80 (PVC-80). PVC conduit installed above grade shall be Schedule 80 extra heavy wall 90 degree Celsius. UL listed for aboveground use and UV resistant. Conduit shall be gray in color. Fittings shall be of the same material as the raceway and installed with solvent per the Manufacturer’s instructions. Conduit, fittings, and solvent shall all be manufactured by the same Manufacturer. 4. Flexible Metal Conduit (Flex-LT): Flexible conduit shall be interlocking single strip, hot dipped galvanized and shall have a polyvinyl chloride jacket extruded over the outside to form a flexible watertight raceway. Flexible conduit shall be American Brass Company Sealtite Type VA, General Electric Type UA or equal. 5. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): EMT shall be UL 797 and ANSI C80.3; steel tubing, hot dipped galvanized. EMT fittings shall be ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel, rain tight, insulated throat, compression type. Conduit and Cable Supports 1. Conduit Supports: Hot dipped galvanized framing channel shall be used to support groups of conduit. Individual conduit supports shall be one-hole galvanized malleable iron pipe straps used with galvanized clamp backs and nesting backs where required. Conduit support for PVC or PVC coated rigid steel shall be one-hole PVC or epoxy coated clamps or PVC conduit wall hangers. 2. Ceiling Hangers: Ceiling hangers shall be adjustable galvanized carbon steel rod hangers. Unless otherwise specified, hanger rods shall be ½-inch all-thread rod and shall meet ASTM A193. Hanger rods in corrosive areas and those exposed to weather or moisture shall be stainless steel. Conduit Sealants 1. Moisture Barrier Types: Sealant shall be a non-toxic, non-shrink, non-hardening, putty type hand applied material providing an effective barrier under submerged conditions. 2. Fire Retardant Types: Fire stop material shall be a reusable, non-toxic, asbestos-free, expanding, putty type material with a 3-hour rating in accordance with UL 1479. Provide products indicated by the manufacturer to be suitable for the type and size of penetration. Part 3 - Installation Raceway Applications Galvanized Rigid Steel (GRS) conduit shall be used in all locations unless noted otherwise below or on the Plans. ABOVE GRADE CONDUITS (non-corrosive areas) shall be: 1. GRS for power and control wiring. 16-22 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 2. GRS for instrumentation and telecommunications wiring. 3. GRS for motor leads from VFDs. 4. EMT for above-grade lighting circuits. ABOVE GRADE CONDUITS (wet or corrosive areas, NFPA 70 hazardous areas) shall be: 1. PVC-GRS for power and control wiring. 2. PVC-GRS for instrumentation and telecommunications wiring. 3. PVC-GRS for motor leads from VFDs. CONCEALED ABOVE GRADE CONDUITS shall be: 1. GRS for all wire and cable types in wood stud frame walls. 2. PVC-40 for power and control wiring in concrete block or brick walls. 3. PVC-40 for instrumentation and telecommunications wiring in CMU or brick walls. 4. GRS for motor leads from VFDs in CMU or brick walls. BELOW GRADE CONDUITS IN DIRECT EARTH (not under slabs-on-grade) shall be: 1. PVC-40 for power and control wiring. a) Sweeps and risers for transition of PVC from below grade to above grade shall be PVC-GRS. 2. PVC-GRS for instrumentation and telecommunications wiring. 3. PVC-GRS for motor leads from VFDs. UNDER SLABS-ON-GRADE CONDUIT shall be: 1. PVC-40 for power and control wiring a) Sweeps and risers for transition of PVC from below grade to above grade shall be PVC-GRS. 2. PVC-GRS for instrumentation and telecommunications wiring. 3. PVC-GRS for motor leads from VFDs. CONCRETE-ENCASED CONDUITS shall be: 1. PVC-40 for power and control wiring a) Sweeps and risers for transition of PVC from below grade to above grade shall be PVC-GRS. 2. PVC-40 for instrumentation and telecommunications wiring. a) Sweeps and risers for transition of PVC from concrete-encasement to above grade shall be PVC-GRS. 3. PVC-GRS for motor leads from VFDs. 16-23 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 ALL CONNECTIONS TO VIBRATING EQUIPMENT OR MOTORS shall be: 1. Liquidtight flexible metallic conduit for indoor, non-corrosive areas and all motor leads from VFDs. 2. Connection to equipment outdoors or in corrosive areas shall be with non-metallic liquidtight flexible conduit (except for motor leads from VFDs shall be flexible metallic.) Installation All conduits shall be concealed in the floor, walls, ceiling slab, or beneath the floor slab. Surface mounted conduit will not be accepted unless noted otherwise on the construction Plans. Size of Raceways: 1. Raceway sizes as shown on the Plans, if not shown on the Plans, then size in accordance with NFPA 70. 2. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, the minimum raceway size shall be: a) Conduit: ¾-inch All raceways shall contain a separate grounding conductor. Spare conduits shall contain one 3/ 16-inch diameter nylon pull rope. Conduit routing is shown diagrammatic on the Plans. Contractor is responsible for routing the conduits in a neat manner, parallel and perpendicular to walls and ceilings. Location of conduit ends are shown approximately. Contractor is responsible for ending conduits in location that will not conflict with electrical equipment. Route conduit ends to facilitate ease of equipment maintenance. Conduits extending from the floor to a device shall be located as close as possible to avoid creating a hazard. Conduit shall not be routed on exterior of structures except as specifically indicated on the Plans. Where water cannot drain to openings, provide drain fittings in the low spots of the conduit run. Securely fasten raceways at intervals and locations required by NEC, or the type of raceway employed. Provide all required openings in walls, floors and ceilings for conduit penetration. 1. Do not install one (1) inch and larger raceways in or through structural members (beams, slabs, etc.) unless approved by Engineer. 2. New Construction: Avoid cutting openings, where possible, by setting sleeves or frames in masonry and concrete, and by requesting openings in advance. 3. Existing Construction: Core drill openings in masonry and concrete. Avoid structural members and rebar. Conduit encasement or embedment in the earth shall be separated from the earth by at least 3-inches of concrete unless otherwise shown on the Plans. Plastic conduit spacers shall be 16-24 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 located five feet on centers. The spacers shall be secured to the conduits by wire ties. The conduits shall be watertight. Analog signal conduits shall be separated from power or control conduits. The separation shall be a minimum of 12-inches for metallic conduits and 24-inches for nonmetallic conduits. Install explosion-proof seal-offs in hazardous areas shown on the Plans and as required by the NEC. Plastic raceway joints shall be solvent cemented in accordance with recommendations of raceway manufacturer. All conduit openings not encased in a panel shall be sealed with duct seal. Wireway Installation 1. Straight sections and fittings shall be solidly bolted together to be mechanically rigid and electrically continuous. Dead ends shall be closed. Unused conduit openings shall be plugged. 2. Wireways shall be supported every 5 feet minimum. 16.72 Boxes and Enclosures 16.72.2 Outlet and Junction Boxes [CSI 26 05 33.16] Part 1 – General Design Requirements In corrosive areas, all junction boxes shall be NEMA 4X. Outlet boxes and switch boxes shall be designed for mounting flush wiring devices. Outlet boxes shall not be less than 4-inch square and 1½-inch deep. Ceiling boxes shall withstand a vertical force of 200 pounds for five minutes. Wall boxes shall withstand a vertical downward force of 50 pounds for five minutes. Part 2 – Products Materials Use cast boxes with threaded hubs for all rigid and intermediate conduits. Steel boxes may be used with rigid and intermediate conduits where cast boxes are not allowed by the NEC. All boxes shall be of proper size to accommodate devices, connectors, and number of wires present in the box. Boxes shall be readily accessible. Cast box bodies and cover shall be cast or malleable iron with a minimum wall thickness of â…›-inch at every point, and not less than ¼-inch at tapped holes for rigid conduit. Bosses are not acceptable. Mounting lugs shall be provided at the back or bottom corners of the body. Covers shall be secured to the box body with No. 6 or larger brass or bronze flathead screws. Boxes shall be provided with neoprene cover gaskets. Outlet boxes shall be of the FS types. Boxes shall conform to FS W-C-586C and UL 514. 16-25 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 Sheet metal boxes shall conform to UL 50, with a hot-dipped galvanized finish conforming to ASTM A123. Boxes and box extension rings shall be provided with knockouts. Boxes shall be formed in one piece from carbon-steel sheets. Non-metallic boxes shall be hot-compressed fiberglass, one-piece, molded with reinforcing of polyester material, with a minimum wall thickness of â…›-inch. Finishes Where only cast aluminum is available for certain types of fixture boxes, an epoxy finish shall be provided. 16.72.3 Watertight Enclosures [CSI 26 05 33.17] Part 2 – Products Manufacturers The watertight enclosure shall be equal to Hoffman. Materials Watertight enclosures for vault electrical outlets shall be molded from fiberglass reinforced polyester material. A hinged cover shall be gasketed and opened with quick release latches. The conduit penetrations shall be sealed watertight. Part 3 – Execution Installation An epoxy plug shall be installed in the conduit to prevent the migration of water into the conduit. The enclosure shall be NEMA rated and installed per all applicable codes. 16.75 WIRING DEVICES [CSI 26 27 26] 16.75.1 Common Work for Wiring Devices [CSI 26 27 26] Part 3 - Execution Installation Wiring Devices 1. Position of Outlets: All outlets shall be centered with regard to building lines, furring and trim, symmetrically arranged in the room or outside the structure. Device outlets shall be set plumb and shall extend flush to the finished surface of the wall, ceiling or floor without projecting beyond the same. 2. Unless otherwise noted, wall mounted outlet devices shall generally be 24-inches above the floor, 18 inches in architecturally treated areas, above process piping near process valve boards. Switches shall be 48 inches above the finished floor unless otherwise noted. 16-26 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 Installation of Wall Plates 1. Interior Dry Locations: Install plates so that all four edges are in continuous contact with the finished wall surfaces. Plaster filled will not be permitted. Do not use oversize plates or sectional plates. 2. Exterior and/or Wet Locations: Install plates with gaskets on wiring devices in such a manner as to provide a rain tight weatherproof installation. For receptacle devices, these plates shall maintain the weatherproof rating with an attachment plug inserted and be rated extra-duty. Cover type shall match box type. Testing After installation of receptacles, circuits shall be energized, and each receptacle tested for proper ground continuity, reversed polarity, and/or open neutral condition. GFI receptacles shall be tested with the circuits energized. Devices shall be tested with a portable GFI receptacle tester capable of circulating 7.5 milliamperes of current, when plugged in, between the “hot” line and “ground” to produce tripping of the receptacle. Resetting and tripping shall be checked at least twice at each GFI receptacle. Submit results of all field testing to the Engineer for review. 16.75.2 Receptacles [CSI 26 27 19] Part 1 – General Design Requirements Receptacles shall be heavy duty, high abuse, grounding type conforming to NEMA configurations, NEMA WD1 and UL 514 Standards. Part 2 – Products Materials Single and Duplex Receptacles 1. Indoor Clean Areas: Receptacles shall be duplex, 20 amp, NEMA 5-20R, and shall accept NEMA 5-15P and 5-15P plug caps. Receptacles shall be Hubbel 5362, General Electric 4108-2, or equal. Color shall be brown in industrial areas and ivory or white in office and laboratory areas. 2. Outdoor, Process, or Corrosive Areas: Receptacles shall be duplex, 20 amp, NEMA 5-20R, and shall accept NEMA 5-15P and 5-20P plug caps. Receptacle and plug caps shall be corrosion resistant, marine duty with yellow polycarbonate weatherproof lift covers. Receptacles shall be Hubbell 53CM62/53CM21 or equal. GFI Receptacles 1. Device shall be rated 20 amp, 2-pole, 3-wire, 120-volt, conforming to NEMA WD1.10 configuration. Device shall have a test and reset push buttons. GFI device shall be Hubbell 5362 or equal. 16-27 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 Surface Multiple Outlet Assemblies 1. Units shall have outlets on center-to-center spacing as shown on the Plans. Assembly shall conform to Article 353 of the NEC. 16.75.5 Plates [CSI 26 27 26.31] Part 1 – General Design Requirements Plates shall be of the style and color to match the wiring devices, and of the required number of gangs. Plates shall conform to NEMA WD1, UL 514, and ANSI C73. In noncorrosive indoor areas, device plates shall be made of sheet steel, zinc electroplated with chrome finish. Device plates in corrosive or outdoor areas shall be corrosion-resistant/marine-duty type with weather protective double doors. Device plates for explosion-proof equipment shall be factory provided with the equipment. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers As manufactured by Crouse-Hinds Appleton Or Equal Components Device plates shall be provided with engraved laminated phenolic nameplates with â…›-inch white characters on black background. Nameplates for switches shall identify panel and circuit number and area served. Nameplates for receptacles shall identify circuit and voltage if other than 120 volts, single-phase. 16.85 LIGHTING [CSI 26 50 00] 16.85.1 Common Work for Lighting Fixtures [CSI 26 50 05] Part 1 - General Design Requirements Fixtures shall be a standard, cataloged item general description as called for on the Plans. All fixtures shall be UL approved and so labeled. Provide suitable supports and mountings. 16-28 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 Part 2 – Products Manufacturers As shown on Plans. Equals will be accepted subject to City approval. 16.85.2 Lamps [CSI 26 06 50 or 26 50 06.13] Part 1 - General Design Requirements Provide all lamps as specified. Refer to the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Plans for the ordering information on lamps. Fluorescent lamps shall be standard type, not energy efficient type due to low temperature conditions. Lamps shall be new at the time of acceptance. Lamps shall be provided for all lighting fixtures. Warranty Lamps that fail within 90 days after acceptance by the Owner shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Approved manufacturers: Westinghouse Sylvania G.E. 16.85.3 Fixtures [CSI 26 06 50.16 or 26 50 06.16] Part 1 - General Design Requirements Fixtures shall be of the types, wattages, and voltages shown on the Plans, comply with UL 57, and shall be UL classified and labeled for intended use. Fixtures for use in hazardous locations shall be UL listed per UL Standard 844. 16-29 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 16.85.4 Ballast [CSI 26 50 06.18] Part 1 - General Design Requirements Fluorescent lamp ballast shall be UL “P” rated. Ballast shall be CBM certified and bear the UL label. Ballast shall be General Electric Maxi-Miser II, Advance Mark II, or equal. Ballasts in luminaries for exterior use shall provide reliable starting of lamps at 0 degrees Fahrenheit at 90 percent of the nominal line voltage. All locations, other than totally enclosed rooms, shall be considered exterior. Warranty Ballasts producing excessive noise (above 36 dB) or vibration will be rejected and shall be replaced at no expense to the Owner. 16.95 TESTING [CSI 26 08 00] 16.95.1 Common Work for Testing [CSI 26 08 05] Part 1 - General Scheduling and Coordination The Contractor shall inform the Engineer in advance of testing in accordance with the requirements listed in Division 1 of these specifications. Prior to scheduling the testing, the Contractor shall have satisfied themselves that the project area is properly cleaned up; all patching and painting deemed necessary properly completed; and all systems, equipment and controls are functioning as intended. Part 3 – Execution Site Testing Test all circuits for continuity, freedom from ground, and proper operation during progress of the work. Insulation Resistance, Continuity, and Rotation: Perform routine insulation resistance, continuity and rotation tests for all distribution and utilization equipment prior and in addition to tests performed by the testing laboratory specified herein. Conduct special test as required for service and/or system ground. 16-30 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 Arc Flash Study, Protection Device Coordination, and Short Circuit Analysis [CSI 26 05 73.13, 26 05 73.16, 26 05 73.19] Provide the services of a recognized independent testing laboratory or coordination analysis consultant for the proper system coordination of the protective devices furnished on this project. Submit the name and the qualifications of the laboratory or consultant for review by the Engineer; qualifications must include professional registration of proposed personnel as electrical engineers. The protective device on the line side closest to the fault or abnormal conditions shall isolate the problem portion of the system and minimize damage in that portion. The rest of the system shall be maintained in normal service. The coordination shall be in conformance with the recommendations of latest IEEE Standard 242. Provide an Arc Flash Hazard Study for the electrical distribution system shown on the Plans. The intent of the Arc Flash Hazard Study is to determine hazards that exist at each major piece of electrical equipment shown on the one-line diagrams. This includes switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, generators, transfer switches, and transformers. The study will include creation of Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels listing all items as required in NFPA 70E-2018. These labels serve as a guide to assist technicians and others in the selection of proper Personal Protective Equipment when working around exposed and energized conductors. The electrical contractor will install the labels. The arc flash hazard study shall consider all operating scenarios during normal conditions alternate operations, emergency power conditions, and any other operations, which could result in maximum arc flash hazard. The label shall list the maximum incidental energy calculated and the scenario number and description on the label. Submit the analysis that shall include arc flash, impedance, and short circuit calculations, list of any assumptions made and the analysis, the recommended settings of the protective devices, and the system time/current characteristic curves. The submittal shall be completed and submitted in conjunction with the circuit breaker submittal to allow time for review and re-submittal, if necessary, before the implementation of final settings and adjustments by the testing laboratory. Field Quality Control General 1. Conduct final test in the presence of Owner and/or their authorized representative. Contractor shall provide all testing instrumentation and labor required to demonstrate satisfactory operation of systems, equipment and controls. Operational Tests 1. Operational test all circuits to demonstrate that the circuits and equipment have been properly installed, adjusted and are ready for full-time service. Demonstrate the proper functioning of circuits in all modes of operation, and including alarm conditions, and demonstrate satisfactory interfacing with the data acquisition and alarm systems. 16-31 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 16.95.3 Conductor Test Report [CSI 26 08 13] Conductor Test Report Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: OWNER: Contractor Co. Name: Phone Number: Tested by: Test Date: Race- V C Operating Load Voltage Insulation Resistance - OHMS way Label (2) (3) VAB VCB VCA VAN VBN VCN A-B B-C C-A A-G B-G C-G (1) A B C D E F G 1. Refer to raceway and wire schedule and one-line diagram for description of feeder identified by label shown on this report 2. Visual Inspection – Check when completed 3. Continuity Test – Check when completed 16-32 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 16 16.95.4 Ground Electrode Resistance Test Report [CSI 26 08 15] Ground Electrode Resistance Test Report PROJECT: OWNER: Contractor Co. Name: Phone Number: Tested by: Test Date: Test Meter Type: Test Distance-D: Soil Conditions: Measured Resistance: DESCRIPTION OF TEST PROCEDURE, CONDITIONS, RESULTS: 16-33 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\16 Electrical.docx 8/14/24 11:18 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 17 Automatic Control 17.00 GENERAL This division covers all work necessary for furnishing, installing, adjusting, testing, documenting, and starting-up the Instrumentation and Control (I&C) and Telemetry System. Programmable logic controller (PLC) shall provide local, automatic control of on-site pumps. Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” shall apply to all following related subsections whether directly referenced or not. These specifications are an integral part of the contract documents for the I&C and Telemetry portion of this contract. The written descriptions of system performance contained herein are given to assist the Contractor in interpreting the contract plans but are not intended to be all-inclusive. The Contractor shall be aware that all automatic control systems do not require the same components and accessories for complete system operation. Therefore, these specifications do not include all accessories and appurtenances required for a complete system. The Contractor shall, however, provide all accessories and appurtenances to result in a completely operational system as required to meet the functional requirements of these documents. Where specific equipment specifications are given, they are used to represent the level of quality required by these documents. The system integrator has been selected by the Owner and is under a separate contract. 17.05 Common Work for Automatic Control [CSI 40 60 05] Part 1 - General Summary The work under this division covers construction specifically described in these specifications. Project Plans will be provided for this project. All work incidental and necessary to the completion of the project described herein shall be completed under the bid item listed in the bid proposal, and no other compensation will be allowed. The work generally consists of the following: Detailed system layout and design for the particular equipment bid in accordance with these functional specifications. Furnishing of I&C equipment including delivery, storage, software, programming, installation, testing, startup, and documentation. Providing operator maintenance manuals for all equipment and devices provided by this Contract. Providing system training to the operators of the proposed equipment. 17-1 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\17 Automatic Control.docx 8/14/24 11:20 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 17 Related Sections Division 16 Electrical References The project Plans are based on Instrument Society of America (ISA) standards numbers S5.1, S5.2, S5.3, and S5.4. The Contractor is encouraged to be familiar with these standards since the project plans do not contain wiring or ladder diagrams, but are based on the functional requirements of the ISA format. All equipment and materials shall conform to the latest revised editions of applicable standards published by the following organizations: American National Standards Institute (ANSI). Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). Underwriters' Laboratories (U/L). Instrument Society of America (ISA) All equipment and materials, and the design, construction, installation, and application thereof shall comply with all applicable provisions of the National Electrical Code (NEC), the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), and any applicable Federal, State, and local ordinances, rules and regulations. All materials and equipment specified herein shall be within the scope of Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) examination services, be approved by the UL for the purpose for which they are used and shall bear the UL label. All control panels shall bear a label by UL or by an approved testing authority for the completed assembled panel. Definitions Contractor: The Contractor, as distinct from the Control System Integrator, shall install panels and other materials furnished by the Control System Integrator and provide all materials and work necessary and thereby, satisfy all requirements that are within the scope of this section. Control System Integrator: A single firm preselected by the Owner under a separate Contract, who shall design and furnish the system, provide the instrument panels; provide the PLCs, RTU, Motor Control Panels, assemble and test the control panel equipment, and program PLCs, computers, and other instrument components and provide start-up and training services. The Control System Integrator for this contract shall be: Pumptech NW LLC. 17.06 Control System Integrator [CSI 40 61 13] Part 1 - General Division of Responsibility All instrumentation and industrial electronic systems shall be provided under the supervision of a single Control System Integrator, chosen by and under separate contract with the Owner. 17-2 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\17 Automatic Control.docx 8/14/24 11:20 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 17 Control System Integrator’s Responsibility The Control System Integrator shall be solely and completely responsible for the final design and assembly of the entire control system. Responsibilities include: Provision of, and the detailed design of, custom control panels and the motor control panel. The plans show general layout of the control panels. The Integrator shall provide detailed scaled design of all components on and in the control panels and determine specific requirements. The design of all interconnecting wiring of control equipment including remote control panels, packaged equipment panels, mechanical equipment with control components, etc. Testing of the control panels in the Control System Integrator’s shop. Coordinate with the Contractor for specific requirements and locations of raceway penetrations and field wiring in control panels. The Control System Integrator shall supply the Contractor with all necessary detailed installation plans and/or written instruction for installation of all control components and sensing devices for proper system operation. Programming of the PLC’s. Programming of the graphical touch screen operator interfaces (OI) on the control panels. Provide Startup and Training Services. General and Electrical Contractor’s Responsibilities The General and Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the following equipment and services: Review of the Control System Integrator’s submittals and wiring diagrams for coordination with space requirements, raceway requirements of field wiring, etc. Installation of the control panels provided by the Control System Integrator. Installation of the interconnecting wiring in accordance with these documents and the Control System Integrators wiring diagrams. Installation of I&C and Telemetry System components in accordance with these documents and plans or instructions of the Control System Integrator. Part 3 – Execution Preparation The Control System Integrator shall be responsible for the coordination and integration of control system with the motor control and other related equipment. The Control System Integrator shall communicate directly with the Manufacturer(s) and Supplier(s) of all related equipment to determine all details of the equipment, which may influence or affect the control system. The Control System Integrator shall determine all requirements for and shall cause 17-3 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\17 Automatic Control.docx 8/14/24 11:20 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 17 integration of the control system into a unified operating system. The Control System Integrator shall define all requirements for all interfacing equipment and shall supply all appurtenances, accessories and all such devices, which may be required for proper interfacing as part of the control system. The Control System Integrator shall be responsible to obtain submittal information on equipment supplied by other disciplines and to integrate them into the control system to form a complete working package as outlined by the contract documents. Installation The system shall be completely assembled in the shop by the Control System Integrator. All components and equipment shall be prewired to the maximum extent possible. All Process Control shall be done within the control panels unless specifically listed on the Plans as other. 17.90 TESTING, STARTUP, AND TRAINING 17.91 Tests and Inspections [CSI 40 61 21, 40 80 13] Part 1 - General Summary Materials, equipment, and construction included under this specification shall be inspected in accordance with the specifications. Testing shall be performed by the Control System Integrator in accordance with Division 16, and this and subsequent sections of this division. Testing shall be required to determine if installed equipment and system(s) will operate in the manner in which they are intended to operate. The decision of the Owner upon the acceptability of the test procedures and conformance shall be final. The work will not be accepted until all testing has been satisfactorily performed. Scheduling The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, instruments and services necessary to perform all specific functional testing of all installed equipment and systems at no additional cost. The Control System Integrator and Contractor shall submit to the Engineer and Owner a detailed field testing schedule. A preliminary schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer for review 60 days before testing. A final schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer for review 30 days before testing. Part 3 – Execution Field Quality Control Following installation by the Contractor, the Control System Integrator will verify the correctness of the interconnecting wiring and energize all control equipment in the field. Each point at the controller(s) shall be checked for proper functional operation through communication with the central computer. 17-4 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\17 Automatic Control.docx 8/14/24 11:20 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 17 Field Tests The Control System Integrator in conjunction with the Contractor shall conduct field tests of all panels, motor control centers, VFD’s, and instrumentation in the presence of the Engineer after installation of the equipment at the site. Testing shall be conducted by physically actuating signaling devices, installing temporary jumpers, or artificially imposing signals on the field wiring. This shall be done to establish proper operation of the field devices, the integrity of the field wiring, and the proper connection of field devices to the panels. The Contractor and Control System Integrator shall coordinate with the Engineer to provide for as complete testing of the control system as is practical prior to placing the equipment on line for actual control and monitoring. The Contractor and Control System Integrator shall make corrections or repairs to the wiring and/or devices as necessary to provide proper operation of the system. After the initial testing is complete, commissioning shall be accomplished by the Control Systems Integrator and Contractor, with the Owner and Engineer present. Commissioning shall include operation and verification of all control components and features of the entire control system. Each function shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Owner. Repairs Should any part of the system fail during the test, the test shall be rescheduled and repeated to the satisfaction of the Owner after repairs. 17.92 Startup [CSI 40 80 15] Part 1 – General Summary All testing, startup and operation shall not be cause for claims for delay by the Contractor, and all expenses accruing therefrom shall be deemed to be incidental to this contract. The Contractor shall make arrangement for all materials, supplies and labor necessary to efficiently complete the testing, startup and operation. Startup shall consist of testing, by a simulated operation, all operational equipment and controls. The purpose of these tests shall be to check that all equipment will function under operating conditions, that all interlocking controls and sequences are properly set, and that the facility will function as an operating unit. Scheduling Factory representatives of all major units shall be present for the startup phase. The test shall continue until it is demonstrated that all functions of controls and machinery are correct. Part 3 - Execution Field Quality Control When the installation of the Control System is substantially complete, the Contractor shall commence with calibration and field testing. Testing shall determine that all system 17-5 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\17 Automatic Control.docx 8/14/24 11:20 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 17 components connect up correctly to each other so that the system works as designed. Refer to section 17.91 for field testing requirements. All components of the control system shall be calibrated by the Control System Integrator after completion of installation. Each component shall be adjusted to be within the Manufacturer's required range and for the specific application. Components that cannot be properly calibrated or that are found to exceed the Manufacturer's specified range or accuracy shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. The control system shall be placed into operation by the Control Systems Integrator. The Control System Integrator shall calibrate all instruments, indicators, recorders, loops, etc. and shall provide a five-point calibration test results sheet for each calibrated instrument supplied by the Control System Integrator. The five-point calibration shall include one point at: Minimum input range value, Maximum input range value, Midrange input value, no other point less than 25 percent of span to any other point. Test forms shall identify each instrument tested, input conditions vs. output signal results in tabulated form, and shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to final commissioning. Repairs All deficiencies observed during the start-up will be corrected by the Contractor. 17-6 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\17 Automatic Control.docx 8/14/24 11:20 AM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 18 Measurement and Payment 18.0 GENERAL It is the intention of these specifications that performance of work under bid items shall result in complete construction, in proper operating condition, of improvements identified in these written specifications and accompanying plans. Work and material not specifically listed herein but required according to the plans and specifications and general practice shall be included in Contractor’s bid price in the most closely applicable bid item. If a minimum bid amount has been established for any item and the bidder’s entry is less than the minimum specified amount, the Owner will unilaterally revise the price to the minimum specified amount and recalculate the total. The recalculated total will be used by the Owner for award purposes and to fix the contract price amount and the amount of the contract bond. If a maximum or fixed bid amount has been established for any item and the bidder’s entry exceeds the maximum or fixed specified amount, the Owner will reduce the bid item price to the maximum or fixed specified amount and relocate the offsetting amounts to bid items of the Owner’s choosing. Bid Item 1 – Mobilization Lump sum price covers complete cost of furnishing, installing and testing, complete and in- place, all work and materials necessary to: move and organize equipment and personnel onto the job site; secure job site; provide and maintain necessary support facilities; obtain all necessary permits and licenses; prepare site for construction operations and maintain site and surrounding areas during construction. Payment shall be lump sum. This bid amount may not be more than 5 percent of value of total contract. Bid Item 2 – Staking and Project Control Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all surveying and staking control necessary to construct the improvements and provide permanent control references. Also included is the cost to survey and replace any existing monuments or markers disturbed during construction. Payment shall be lump sum. Bid Item 3 – Traffic Control Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all work, materials, and equipment necessary for traffic control as shown in the Plans and detailed in the technical specifications. Payment shall be lump sum. Bid Item 4 – Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all temporary erosion and sedimentation control relating to construction of improvements as shown on the Plans and specified herein. Work includes but is not limited to silt fence; catch basin inserts, silt socks; temporary trenching; temporary mulching; temporary plastic sheeting; control of water; restoration of damage caused by storm events; and all other work necessary for a complete 18-1 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\18 Measurement and Payment.docx 8/19/24 2:41 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 18 installation of all temporary sedimentation and erosion control facilities. Payment shall be lump sum. Bid Item 5 – Trench Safety and Shoring (RCW 39.04.180) Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of trench safety, shoring design, and installation, including: all labor, materials, and equipment as shown on the Plans, and detailed in the contract specifications, or as required by governing safety codes. Price includes design of the shoring system as required by applicable codes and standards, whether shown on the Plans or not. Payment shall be lump sum. Bid Item 6 – Unscheduled Excavation The unit price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all materials, equipment, and labor necessary for excavation and disposal that is beyond the limits shown on the project plans and is performed at the Owner’s request. Excavated material shall be replaced with import structural fill. Price includes haul and disposal of excavated material. Measurement shall be per cubic yard as measured in place. Bid Item 7 – Unscheduled Backfill The unit price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all materials, equipment, and labor necessary for unscheduled backfill per Division 2.11.5 Trench Backfill that is beyond the limits shown on the project plans and is performed at the Owner’s request. Measurement shall be per cubic yard of material as measured in place. Bid Item 8 – Rock Removal in Utility Trench The unit price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all materials, equipment, and labor necessary for excavation and disposal of boulders larger than 1.0 cubic yard (measured on average dimensions, not maximum), and bedrock. In-situ rock (bedrock) will only be paid for if the rock to be removed exceeds 12-inches depth. Also included in the cost is replacement of lost volume with import bedding and trench backfill. “Rock Removal”, per cubic yard. Cost shall include removal and disposal of rock. Materials and work for import backfill or bedding materials required for replacement of volume lost by removal of rock shall be included in this pay item. The unit price shall include any extra excavation and surface restoration that occurs if the rock is in boulder form and extends up to 4 feet away from the outside of the pipe as located on the plan. Should, in the opinion of the Inspector, removal of boulders results in the need to provide additional surface restoration, such restoration shall be entirely paid for under the unit prices for Buried Water Main. 18-2 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\18 Measurement and Payment.docx 8/19/24 2:41 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 18 Bid Item 9 – Dewatering Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of dewatering system design and approval to meet the requirements identified in these specifications, construction and maintenance of the dewatering system, and disposal of the excess groundwater. Payment shall be lump sum. Bid Item 10 – Site Work and Restoration Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all site work relating to construction of the water main and pump station improvements as shown on the Plans and specified herein. Work includes, but is not limited to: structure excavation, pothole of existing utilities, dewatering, backfill, and compaction; site grading; disposal of excess material; hydroseed; topsoil and fertilizer; removal of unsuitable materials; appurtenances; and all other work necessary for a complete installation of all site work related to the water main and pump station improvements. Site work and restoration for the PRV and blow off assembly will be paid for under their respective bid items. Payment shall be lump sum. Bid Item 11 – Buried Water Main Unit price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all materials, equipment, and labor necessary for construction of the buried water main as shown on the Plans and specified herein. Work includes but is not limited to: asphalt saw cutting, water main trenching and excavation; disposal of excess material; pipe bedding, water main pipe, fittings, valves, thrust blocking, trench backfill and compaction; temporary trench patch, materials and appurtenances and connections to existing water main and all other work necessary for a complete water main installation from and including the 12-inch expansion joint at the pump station building to the point of connection to existing water main. Payment shall be per lineal foot installed. Bid Item 12 – Fire Hydrant Assembly Unit price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all materials, equipment, and labor necessary for construction of the fire hydrant assembly as shown on the City Standard Details W-010, W-020, and W-03, and specified herein. Work includes but is not limited to: water main trenching and excavation; disposal of excess material; pipe bedding, pipe, fittings, valve, hydrant, trench backfill and compaction; concrete pad, concrete guard post, materials and appurtenances and connections to proposed water main and all other work necessary for a complete fire hydrant assembly installation. Payment shall be per lineal foot installed. Bid Item 13 – HMA CL. ½-Inch PG58H‐22 Per Ton price covers the complete cost for the HMA replacement, and testing including but not limited to surveying of existing pavement edges to match existing elevations at 25-foot intervals and low points, saw cut and tacking of edges to adjacent asphalt to remain, HMA procurement, hauling, placement and compaction, hot tar seal and paver sand to existing HMA edge sealing at finished elevation including, sawcutting beyond the existing sealed edges, or beyond failed “alligatored” pavement, all labor, equipment, materials, complete and in-place, as shown on the plans and specifications. Payment shall be per Ton as measured by 18-3 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\18 Measurement and Payment.docx 8/19/24 2:41 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 18 certified truck weight tickets and adjusted by visual estimate (as agreed to by the Owner) for any waste or haul away of unused HMA. Bid Item 14 – Structural Improvements Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all materials, equipment, and labor necessary for modifying the booster pump station structure complete as shown on the plans and detailed in the contract specifications including: cast-in-place concrete slabs and footings, timber framing, headers, doors, insulation; sheathing, sheathing repair, gypsum wall board, taping, surface texturing, miscellaneous metal work; waterproofing; patching; and all other work necessary for the complete structure improvements as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. Payment shall be lump sum. Bid Item 15 – Finishes Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for painting and coating all surfaces of the improvements as shown on the plans and detailed in the technical specifications. Payment shall be lump sum. Bid Item 16 – Packaged Pump Station Installation Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of offloading, installation, of the packaged pump station as shown on the plans and detailed in the contract specifications. Price shall include coordination with the packaged pump station manufacturer and shipper to coordinate delivery on site. Payment shall be lump sum. Note Pump Station procurement, shipping, and factory testing is NOT included with this bid item. Bid Item 17 – Mechanical Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for the mechanical work shown on the Plans, and detailed in the contract specifications, including all piping, valves, fittings, attachments, supports, within and below the building. Payment shall be lump sum. Bid Item 18 – SPUD Intertie PRV Vault and Sampling Station Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for the SPUD Intertie PRV Vault and sampling station as shown on the Plans, and detailed in the contract specifications, including all piping, valves, fittings, connections, vault, valve boxes, excavation, pipe bedding, backfill, compaction, thrust blocking, surface restoration, attachments, supports, and all other work necessary for a complete SPUD Intertie PRV Vault and sampling station. Payment shall be lump sum. Bid Item 19 – Electrical The lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for the electrical work shown on the Plans and detailed in the contract specifications. Cost shall include coordination with the power supplier and acquisition of the L&I electrical permit. Payment shall be lump sum. Note Generator and day tank procurement, shipping, and factory testing is NOT included with this bid item. 18-4 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\18 Measurement and Payment.docx 8/19/24 2:41 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 18 Bid Item 20 – Automatic Control Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for the automatic control system conduits, wires, landing and tagging as shown on the plans and detailed in the contract specifications. Payment shall be lump sum. All testing and startup will be complete by others and is NOT included in this bid item. Bid Item 21 – Heating and Ventilation Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for the heating and ventilation shown on the Plans, and detailed in the contract specifications, including all equipment not listed in other bid items. Price shall include cost of materials and installation of heaters, frames, and supports. Payment shall be lump sum. Bid Item 22 – Testing, Startup and Training Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all labor and materials necessary for testing and startup of the project as shown on the Plans and detailed in the contract specifications for water main testing, Automatic Transfer Switch testing, support for Pumptech (paid by the City directly) and the System integrator (paid by the City directly). Payment shall be lump sum. Partial payment of up to 50 percent of the total bid item cost is allowed no earlier than first Contractor-initiated testing date. Final 50 percent of payment shall not be paid until testing of the station is complete, and the pump station is completely operational, and staff trained as determined by the Owner and Engineer. Generator installation, testing, startup and training will be completed by others. Bid Item 23 – Demobilization and Cleanup Lump sum price covers complete cost of furnishing, installing, and testing, complete and in-place, all work and materials necessary to: move all personnel and equipment off site after contract completion; cleanup site prior to final acceptance; and accomplish all other items of work not specifically listed in other divisions. Payment shall be lump sum. This bid item will only be paid with final payment request. This bid amount may not be more than 5 percent of value of total contract. Bid Item 24 – Construction Records Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all mark-up plans necessary for the Owner to create accurate as-built records as detailed in the specifications. The work includes surveying all structures and utilities to determine their as-constructed locations and elevations, and records of all mechanical and electrical equipment for maintenance purposes. The price for this work will be $5,000. Failure to comply with the as- built requirements and furnish acceptable as-built records will result in the deletion of this bid item by change order. Payment for this work will not be made prior to the final payment. Payment shall be lump sum. 18-5 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\18 Measurement and Payment.docx 8/19/24 2:41 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. City of Arlington Summer 2024 640 Zone Booster Pump Station Division 18 Bid Item 25 – Operation and Maintenance Manuals Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all labor and materials necessary to provide two (2) hard copies and one (1) electronic copy of the Operations and Maintenance Manuals as described in the specifications and train the Owner’s personnel on site with manufacturer-certified representatives for the following items: Pumps and Motors; Power and Telemetry equipment as shown on the Plans and detailed in the contract specifications. Payment shall be lump sum. The price for this work will be $5,000. Partial payment of up to 20 percent ($1,000) of the total bid item cost is allowed prior to initial owner training. Final 80 percent ($4,000) of payment shall not be paid until Operations and Maintenance Manuals are determined complete by the Owner and Engineer. Payment shall be lump sum. Bid Item 26 – Force Account Owner and Engineer negotiated price set at $5,000 shall cover the complete cost of providing all labor and materials necessary to complete Owner directed miscellaneous work. Contractor shall not bill for work under this bid item unless directed to by the Owner in writing (mailed or e-mailed). Payment shall be agreed to in writing prior to work onset or by Owner directed force account per Standard Specifications without the 25-percent quantity price per unit modification. Payment may not be made for this bid item or may be more or less than $5,000 upon project closeout as agreed to by the Owner. 18-6 J:\Data\ARL\21-0233\30 Specs\Techs\18 Measurement and Payment.docx 8/19/24 2:41 PM © 2024 RH2 Engineering, Inc. APPENDIX A EASEMENTS KLEIN DANIEL J/KLEIN MATTHEW D 31062000300500 HARRIS JOHN T 31061900400700 ROW Survey (Metron) PUD Intertie SnoCo Parcel Lines (SnoCo) EMILY PROPERTIES LLC 31063000100100 RENGEN WAYNE 31062900200300 City of Arlington Assessor Parcels (SnoCo) PUD Intertie VF-GRND-CONC-E (PUD Intertie) Project Area Vicinity Map Legend VF-RWAY-E (ROW Survey) Scale: File: Aerial 2022 1:300 EasementLayouts2024/ PUDValve8.5x11_24 This data is provided ‘as is’ without warranty of any kind. The entire risk as to the results and performance of the data is assumed by you. Should the data prove defective, you assume the entire cost of all necessary servicing, repair, or correction. These data and corresponding attributes are not to be used for design purposes. Further, the City of Arlington does not warrant, guarantee, or make any representations regarding the use of, or results from the use of the Date: Cartographer: data in terms of correctness, accuracy, reliability, currentness, or otherwise; and you rely on the data and results solely at your own risk. There are known gaps and inaccuracies in the current data set and the provided information should be considered a draft and in-progress work. Washington State Law, Ch. 42.56 RCW, prohibits state and local agencies from providing access to lists of individuals intended for use for commercial purposes and thus, no commercial 6/20/2024 kdh/akc use may be made of any Data comprising lists of individuals contained herein. APPENDIX B1 GENERATOR SUBMITTAL City of Arlington Booster Pump Station Sourcewell City of Arlington 238 N Olympic Ave Arlington, WA 98223-1337 Daniel Wassom dan.wassom@cummins.com (206) 402-9541 503550 Rev _0 446495 SQ / PO 3842 Sales and Service TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION1PROJECTINFORMATION BillofMaterial SECTION2GENERATORSPECIFICATIONSHEETS GeneratorSpecificationSheet NAS6370 GeneratorDataSheet NAD6371 PowerCommandControl(PCC)SpecificationSheet PDS1569 AlternatorDataSheet ADS211 SoundDataSheet MSP4007 CoolingSystemDataSheet MCP2047 EPACertificate EPA2032 ExhaustSpecifcationSheet EDS3043 PrototypeTestSummary PTS636 SeismicCertifications VMA5107101C SECTION3GENERATORACCESSORIES CircuitBreakerDataSheetandInformation JDL36250CU33X FuelTankSpecificationSheet NAAC5868 Batteries C34HC BatteryChargerSpecificationSheet NAAC5943 CommandI/OModuleSpecificationSheet S1503 SECTION4GENERATORDRAWINGS&INTERCONNECTS GeneratorOutlineDrawing A060C858 EnclosureOutlineDrawing A060C609 FuelTankDrawing A057P198 FoundationDrawing FOUNDATION GeneratorOptionsDrawings A060G756 CircuitBreakerInstallationDrawing A055B603 SeismicInstallationDrawings A058C559 DCInterconnectWiringDiagram DCWD ACInterconnectWiringDiagram ACWD SECTION5ATSSPECIFICATIONS&DRAWINGS SpecificationSheet S6563 PowerCommandATSControlDataSheet S6543 SeismicCertification 1801393CRS001 OutlineDrawing A065J830 WithstandandCloseRatings A066N305 SECTION6STARTUP&WARRANTY PrestartupChecklist STARTUP GeneratorTrainingAgenda GENTRAINING TransferSwitchTrainingAgenda ATSTRAINING GeneratorWarrantyStatement A028U870 TransferSwitchWarrantyStatement 11180003 Project: City of Arlington Booster Pump Station Sourcewell Sales Order: SO-002452 Bill of Material Feature Code Description Qty Miscellaneous Sourcewell Pricing per Contract # 092222-CMM 1 C125D6D C125D6D, Diesel Genset, 60Hz, 125kW 1 Install-US-Stat U.S. EPA, Stationary Emergency Application C125 D6D C125D6D, Diesel Genset, 60Hz, 125kW A331-2 Duty Rating - Standby Power (ESP) L169-2 Emission Certification, EPA, Tier 3, NSPS CI Stationary Emergency L090-2 Listing - UL 2200 L193-2 NFPA 110 Type 10 Level 1 Capable L224-2 IBC Seismic Certification B184-2 Exciter/Regulator - Permanent Magnet Generator, 3 Phase Sensor R002-2 Voltage - 277/480, 3 Phase, Wye, 4 Wire BB88-2 Alternator - 60Hz, Reconnect, Full Output, 120C, 40C Ambient, Increased Motor Starting (IMS) F217-2 Aluminum Sound Attenuated Level 2 Enclosure, with Exhaust System P176-2 Enclosure Color - Green, Aluminum F252-2 Enclosure - Wind Load 180 MPH, ASCE7-10 F179-2 Skidbase - Housing Ready C301-2 Fuel Tank - Regional, Dual Wall, Sub Base, 24 Hour Minimum C309-2 High Fuel Level Alarm Panel C127-2 Fuel Water Separator C308-2 High Fuel Level Switch, 90% C310-2 Low Fuel Level Switch, 40% C312-2 Mechanical Fuel Gauge C314-2 5 Gallon Lockable Spill Containment Fuel Fill Box C315-2 Fuel Tank Vent Extension Kit, 12ft External Vents, 1 Normal, 2 Emergency C316-2 Valve - Fuel Tank, Over Fill Protection Valve, 95% C318-2 Switch - Fuel Tank, Rupture Basin H609-2 Control Mounting - Left Facing H703-2 PowerCommand 2.3 Controller H728-2 Meters - AC Output Analog (kVA) K796-2 Stop Switch - Emergency KS53-2 Signals - Auxiliary, 8 Inputs/8 Outputs H536-2 Control Display Language - English KV03-2 Load Connection - Single KX26-2 Circuit Breaker, Location A, 70A - 250A, 3P, LSI, 600 Volts AC, 100%, UL 0281 Circuit Breaker or Terminal Box (Position B) - None 0282 Circuit Breaker or Terminal Box (Position B) - None KB72-2 Bottom Entry, Right A366-2 Engine Governor - Electronic, Isochronous A422-2 Engine Starter - 12 Volt DC Motor D041-2 Engine Air Cleaner - Normal Duty A333-2 Battery Charging Alternator BB89-2 Battery Charger - 6 Amp, Regulated H389-2 Shutdown - Low Coolant Level E125-2 Engine Cooling - Radiator, High Ambient Air Temperature, Ship Fitted E089-2 Extension - Coolant Drain H669-2 Engine Coolant - 50% Antifreeze, 50% Water Mixture E153-2 Coolant Heater H706-2 Engine Oil L010-2 Test Record - Strip Chart Sales Order: SO-002452 - 06122024 - 16:40 Page 1 of 4 Project: City of Arlington Booster Pump Station Sourcewell Sales Order: SO-002452 L017-2 Test - Extended, Standby Load, 4 Hour L028-2 Genset Warranty - 2 Years Base L050-2 Literature - English A322-2 Packing - Skid, Poly Bag F065-2 Battery Rack H268-2 Extension - Oil Drain L260-2 Green Sound Level 2 Intake Baffle - Ship Loose L261-2 Ship Loose - Vent Kit A A057C503-FRD Kit, FUEL SYSTEM A048C543-FRD Fuel Tank, Extension Kit-1 Normal, 2 Emergency, 12ft A062H155-FRD KIT, ENCLOSURE (SL2 Duct) Miscellaneous (Ship Loose) Low-Low Fuel Switch 1 CXTC CXTC, CXT Series Transfer Switch with PowerCommand Control: 300A 1 CXT300 CXT300, Transfer Switch, PowerCommand, 300 Amp S043-7 Listing - UL 1008 A080-7 IBC Seismic Certification A035-7 Application - Utility to Genset B002-7 Cabinet - Type 3R N080-7 Cable Lugs - Mechanical, 2 - 600 MCM H024-7 UL1008 3 - Cycle Withstand Ratings A078-7 Transfer Mode - Delayed Transition A028-7 Poles - 3 (Solid Neutral) A044-7 Frequency - 60 Hz A091-7 System - 3 Phase, 4-Wire (Solid or Switched Neutral) R026-7 Voltage - 480 Volts AC C109-7 PC80 Control D403-7 Integrated High Accuracy Power Quality Metering M033-7 Genset Starting Battery - 12V DC M077-7 Premium Customer I/O G004-7 Transfer Switch Warranty - 2 Year Comprehensive A050-7 Packing - Wooden Crate Freight & other Factory direct delivery, off-loading by others. No additional storage, handling or rerouting 1 charges included. Flatbed delivery is available for an additional charge. Service - start up Startup & System Testing, 2hr Load Bank Test, 5x Loss-of-Power Test, Install Batteries, Change 1 & testing Fuel & Oil Filter After Testing Training During Startup Visit. Miscellaneous BATTERY GROUP 34: C34-HC 2 Spare parts Spare Parts & Tools; 3 sets of filters (fuel, oil, Air) & Battery Fluid Tester, Oil Filter Wrench, 1 Hydrometer, Digital Multimeter & Touch-up Paint. EXCEPTIONS AND CLARIFICATIONS: Exhaust System 6. Exception Entire exhaust system shall be wrapped in an insulation blanket. Providing factory mounted exhaust system in our level II enclosure. Switch Gear 1. Exception to switch gear, providing circuit breaker factory installed on the generator. COVID 19 SUPPLEMENTAL STATEMENT AS A RESULT OF THE OUTBREAK OF THE DISEASE COVID-19 ARISING FROM THE NOVEL CORONAVIRUS, TEMPORARY DELAYS IN DELIVERY, LABOUR OR SERVICES FROM CUMMINS AND ITS SUB-SUPPLIERS OR SUBCONTRACTORS MAY OCCUR. AMONG OTHER FACTORS, CUMMINS' DELIVERY OBLIGATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CORRECT AND PUNCTUAL SUPPLY FROM OUR SUB-SUPPLIERS OR SUBCONTRACTORS, AND CUMMINS RESERVES THE RIGHT TO MAKE PARTIAL DELIVERIES OR MODIFY ITS LABOUR OR SERVICE. WHILE CUMMINS SHALL MAKE EVERY COMMERCIALLY REASONABLE Sales Order: SO-002452 - 06122024 - 16:40 Page 2 of 4 Project: City of Arlington Booster Pump Station Sourcewell Sales Order: SO-002452 EFFORT TO MEET THE DELIVERY, SERVICE OR COMPLETION OBLIGATIONS SET FORTH HEREIN, SUCH DATES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE. INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE (IBC) CERTIFICATION The products in this quotation identified as meeting the requirements of the 2009 IBC have been certified by their respective manufactures via a combination of analytical testing and shaker table testing. Not all products have been shaker table tested. OFFICE OF STATEWIDE HEALTH PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT (OSHPD) OSHPD seismic requirements are continuing to evolve. Please contact Cummins for the most current requirements for meeting OSHPD applications. SELECTIVE COORDINATION FOR NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE (NEC) ARTICLE 700 AND 701 LOADS Cummins generators are equipped with the manufacturer's recommended circuit breaker. Information regarding this device can be supplied upon request. This quotation is not valid if any changes to this circuit breaker(s) is required to coordinate with other devices in the electrical distribution system. If changes are required, the customer must provide a copy of the coordination study listing the manufacturers part number of the disconnect device to be supplied with the generator and a revised quotation will be issued. TRANSFER SWITCH WITHSTAND AND CLOSE RATINGS Transfer switch(es), if included in this quotation, require a withstand and closing rating (WCR) capable of meeting the available upstream fault current (kAIC). The WCR may be based on a specific breaker rating or a time-based rating, and it is the responsibility of a qualified facility designer or engineer to verify compatibility. In the event that the proposed transfer switch(es) are not compatible, the transfer switch(es) will need to be re-quoted to ensure compatibility. A full listing of the WCR can be provided upon request and will be included as part of the submittal package. CUMMINS STANDARD EXCLUSIONS Exhaust System All off-engine piping, hangers, flanges, gaskets, bolts, insulation, other materials and labor to install. Fuel System All fuel piping and materials not limited to; supply, return, venting, valves, coolers, filters, pumps, fittings, primary fuel regulator, storage tank & senders, external to genset package. All fuel for testing and initial fill. Fuel tank vent extensions and flame arrestors unless specifically listed in the Bill of Materials. Cooling System Intake louvers, exhaust louvers, air dampers, sheet metal ducting, flex adapters, sound attenuators/baffles. All off engine piping, flexible connections, labor and coolant for remote cooling systems. Electrical All off-engine wiring, field terminations of wiring, and lugs other than those detailed in our submittal. Mounting Mounting bolts and anchors. Vibration isolators (if included) may be shipped loose for installation at the jobsite by others. Seismic engineering calculations. Electrical Testing Not limited to International Electrical Testing Association (NETA), infrared scanning, harmonic content or other independent agency testing of switchgear, switchboards, protective relays, circuit breaker, electrical coordination studies, arc flash studies and reactive load site testing. Environmental Testing Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), local air quality district or other Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), including acoustical. Sales Order: SO-002452 - 06122024 - 16:40 Page 3 of 4 Project: City of Arlington Booster Pump Station Sourcewell Sales Order: SO-002452 Programming All protective relay settings, breaker settings, PLC programming or other user configurable device programming. Documentation Electronic submittals and operation and maintenance manuals will be provided. Printed copies are available upon request, additional charges may apply. Miscellaneous Site specific labeling. Exhaust backpressure, airflow restriction or vibration analysis Design Cummins is not responsible for system design or engineering and does not guarantee system performance standards. Cummins will supply documentation and reasonable assistance to others responsible for system engineering, design and performance. Taxes and Permit Any applicable sales tax, permits, fees, licenses. Bonds Any bid bond, payment or performance bond or other type of bond. All items listed above are excluded and will only be supplied by Cummins if agreed upon, in writing, by a sales representative for Cummins. NOTES: Spec section; 16.91 & 16.92 reviewed for this proposal. All other specifications and drawings are excluded. Sales Order: SO-002452 - 06122024 - 16:40 Page 4 of 4 • •••••• •• •• •• ••••• • •• • • • ••• ••••• •••• •••• ••••••••• • •• •• ••• • • ••••• •• ••• •• • •• • •• • •• • •••••• ••• • •• • • •• •• •••••••••••• ••• •• ••••••••••• ••••• •••• • • • ••• • •• • ••• • •••• •••• ••••• ••••• ••••• • •••• •• • •••• •• ••••••••• •• ••• • ••••• •• ••••••••• • • • •••• •••• ••• •••• •••••• •••••••••••••••• ••• •• ••••••• ••• ••••••••• •••••••• • ••••• •••••••••••• ••••••• •••• •••••••• • • • •• •• •• • • ••••• •••••• •••• • ••••• ••• •••••• •• • • ••• •• ••••••• •••• •• •••••• •••••• ••• ••••• • • •••• ••• ••• ••• ••• •••• ••• •••••• •• • • • ••••••• •• •• •••• •• ••••• ••••• •••••••• ••• ••••• •••••••••••• ••••••• •• ••••• • ••• • •• • •• ••• • •• • •••• •• • •••••• •• •••••• •• •••• •• • ••• ••••• •• ••••••••• ••• ••• •••••••• • ••••• •••• •••• • ••• •••• ••• ••••••• •••• • • •••••••••• ••••• •• •• •• ••••••••• • •••• •••••• •• •••• •••• ••••• •••• ••••••••• • ••• •• • ••••••• ••• •••• ••••••••• •• ••• •••••• ••• ••••••• • •••• •• ••••••••••••• •••• •• • •••• ••• • • •• ••• • • ••• •• ••• ••••• • •••• ••• ••••• •••••• •••• ••••••• ••• •• •••••• • •••••• ••• ••••• • • • •••••••• ••• • •••• ••• •••• •••••• ••••••••• • ••• ••••••• •••••• • • ••• •• ••••• •••• •• •••• ••• ••• ••••• ••• •••• •••• • •• • • •••• •••• ••• ••••••• ••• •• •••• • •••• • •• •• ••••• • ••••• ••••• •••• ••• •••••• ••• ••• ••• ••••••••• •••••• •••••• ••••• ••• ••• ••••••••• •••••••• • •••••• ••• ••••• •• ••••••••• • • •••••• •••••• •• ••• • •••• •••••• ••••••••••• • ••••• • •••••••••• •••••••• •••••••••• •••••• •• •• •• • • • ••• ••• • •••• •••• •••• • • ••• •• • ••• •• •• • •• •••• •• ••••• •••••• •• •••• • ••••• •• ••••• •••• •••• •••• •• •• ••••• •••• •• •••• •••••• •••• ••••• ••• •• •••• ••••• • ••••• •••••• •••• ••••• ••• • ••••••• •••• •••• ••••• ••• •••••••••• •••• •• ••• •••••••••••• • •••• • •• ••• •• •••••• •••• •••• •••• ••••• ••••••••• •••• •• ••• •••• •• •••••••••• ••• ••••• ••• •••••• •••••••••••••• • • • • • •••• ••••• ••••••••• ••••• • •••• ••••••••••••••• •• ••••• •• ••• •• •• • ••••••• ••• •••• ••• •••• ••••••••• •• •• •• •• • •• •• •• • ••• •• • • • •• • • • • •• ••• •• • • • •• • • ••• •• •••••• ••••• • ••••••••••••••• • •••••••••• • • • •• ••• • • • • ••• •• •• •• • • •• ••• •••••• •• •••••• • •• • ••••• •• ••• • ••• •• ••••••• • •• •••• •••• • • • ••••••• ••••• ••••••••• •••• •••• • ••• • • •• •••• • •• ••• • •• • •• •• • •• ••• • ••• •• ••• • • •••• • •• •••• •• •••• •• • • • ••• •• • •• • • •• • •• • • •• •• •• • • • •• • • •••• •• • ••• • ••• • ••• • ••• • • • • ••••••• • • • •••• •• • ••• • ••• • ••• • ••• • • • • ••••••• • • • •••• •• • ••• • ••• • ••• • ••• • • • • ••••••• • • • •••• •• • ••• • ••• • ••• • ••• • • • • ••••••• • • ••• • ••• • • • ••••• • • • • •••••• •• • ••• ••••••••••• • • ••••••• • •• • • • ••••••• ••• •••• ••• • • •• ••••• •••••••• •••••••••• • • • • •••••••••••••••••••• •• • •• •• • •••••• ••••••• •• • ••• • • • ••••••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••••• ••••• • • • ••••• •••••••••••••••••• • ••••• • • • ••••••• •••••••••••• • •• • • •••••••• • ••••• ••••••••• ••••••••••• • •••••• • • • ••••••••••••• ••• • ••• ••• • •• • • •••••• •• • • • •• •••••••••••••••••••••• •• • ••• •••••• • • ••••• •• • • • •••• • •••• • • • •• •••• • ••••• •••••••••••• ••••••••••• •••••• • •••• ••••• • ••••••••• ••• • •••• • • ••••• • ••••••••• ••• • •• •••• • • •••• •••••••••••••••• • •••••••••••• •• • •• ••••••••••••••• •••• •••••••• • •••••••• •••••••• •••••••••• • • ••••••• •••••••••• • ••• ••••• • • • •• •• •• •• ••• ••• ••• • ••• •• • •••••••• ••••••••••••••••••• ••••• • ••• • ••••••• •••••••• • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• •••••••••••••••••••••• •• • •••••••• ••••••••••••••••• • ••••••••• •••••••• •••• • • • ••••• • ••••••••••••••• • •••••• •••• • •••••••• • • ••••• ••• •••• •••••••••• • •• • •• •••• • ••• ••• • •••• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • •••••• •••••••• • • • ••••• • •••• ••• •••••••••••••••••••••• ••• ••• •••••• •••• • • • ••• ••• •••••• • • • •• • •••••• • • •••••••••• • •••••••••••• •• •••••• •••••••• ••• ••••••• • •• ••••••••• • • ••••••• ••• •••• ••••••• ••••• • • •• • •••••••• • ••••••••••• •••••• • • •••• ••••••••• ••••••••••••••• ••• • • •• ••••••• •• •••••• ••• •••••• •• •••••••••• • • • •• • ••• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ••• •••••••••••••••••••• ••••• • •••••••••••••••• • ••• •••••••• •• •• • ••••••••• • • • •• • •••••••• • •••••••••• ••• •••••• •••••••• • • •• • ••• • • • ••••• •••• • •••• •• ••• • •••• ••• • •••• • ••••••• •••••••••• •••••••••• •••••••••••••••••••• •••••••••• •••••••••• • • •• •• ••••• • ••••••••• ••• ••• • • •• • • • ••••••• • •••••••• • • •• • • ••• •• •• •••••••••••• ••• • •••••••••••••••• •••••• ••• •••••• ••••••• •• ••••••••••••• ••••• •••••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••••• ••• ••••• • ••• • •••• • •••••• •• ••• • ••••••• •••• •• ••••••••••••• •• • •• • • ••• • ••••• •••• • •• • •••• •• •• ••• •• ••• ••••• ••••••• ••••••••••••• ••• • ••••• •••• • • ••• • •• • •• •••••••••••••• ••• •••••••••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••••••••• ••• ••••••••••• ••••••••••••• • •••• ••••••••••• ••••••••••••• • •••••••• ••• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ••• • ••• ••• • ••• ••• •• • •• •• • • •• • •• ••••• ••• ••••••• ••••••• •••••••••• ••• • • •••••••••• ••• •••••• •••••• ••• ••••••• ••• ••• • ••• ••••• ••••••••••••••• • ••• ••••• • • •••• • •• •••• •• • •• ••• • •••• •• • • • •••• ••• ••••••••• ••• • • •• •• ••• • • •• • • ••• ••••••••••••••••• • •••••••••••• •• ••• ••••• ••• •••• • ••••• • • • •••• •• • •• •• ••••• •••••• •• ••• ••••••••• •••• ••• ••••• ••• •••••••• •••••• • ••••• ••••••• • •••••• ••• ••• ••• • ••••••• • •••••• ••• ••• ••• • ••• • •• ••••• •••••••• • ••••••• • • •••••••• ••• • •••••••••••• ••••••••••••• ••••• •••• •••••••• ••• • •••••••••••• ••••••••••••• ••• •• • ••••••••••••••••••••••• • ••• ••• •••••••• ••••••• ••• • • •• •• ••• ••• • • ••• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ••• ••••••••••••• •••••••• •• • • •• ••• ••• • • • ••• • •• • ••• •• ••••• ••••• ••••••••••• • ••••••• •• ••• •• • •• •• • ••• •• • •••• • ••• • •• • ••••• •••••••••••••••••• • • •• • • •• ••• ••••• ••• •• • •• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••• •• ••••••••••••••• ••••••• • • •••••••••••••••• ••••• • ••••••• ••• •• • •••• • •• •••••••••••••••••••••••• •••• ••• •• • •• •••••••••••••••••••••• •••• • • ••••• • •••••••••••••••••••••••• ••••• ••••• ••• ••• • • ••••• •• ••••••• •••••••• •••••••••••••••• ••• • ••• • • • ••••• • • • • •••••• •• • ••• ••••••••••• • • ••••••• • •• • • • ••••••• ••• •••• ••••• • •• ••••• ••••••• ••• •• • •••• ••• •••••••••• •••• ••• •• ••• •• • •••••••••••••••••• ••• ••• •• • •• ••• • • •• •• ••• ••• • • ••• • ••• •••• • • •• ••• •••• • •• ••• •• • ••• •••• •••• • ••• •••••• ••••• •••••• ••• • • •• • •• •••• • • •• •• ••• •••••••• • ••••••••• •••••••• •••••••• • •••• • •• •• • •• • • •• •• ••• •• •••• • • • • •••••• ••• •• ••• •• • ••••••••• •••••• ••• ••• • •••• •• • • • ••• • • •••• ••••••••• •••••• • •• • ••• • ••••• •••• • •• • •••• •• •• ••• •• ••• •• •• • ••• •• ••• •••••• •••••••• ••••• ••• • ••••• •••• • • ••• • •• • •• •• •• • • •••••• • ••••• •••• • • ••• • •• • •• •• •• • • •• ••••••••••••• •••• ••• •••••• •••••••• •••••••• •••• •• ••••• ••• •• ••• •••••••••• ••••••• ••• •••••••• ••• •••• • ••••••••• • • •• • •• •• ••• •••••••• •••• • ••• ••••••• ••••• •• • •••• ••••• • •• ••••• ••••• ••••••• •• • •••••••• • • •• • •• • • • •• •• • • •••• •• • ••••• •• •••• ••••••• ••• ••••••••••••••••• • ••• • • •• • • •• • •••• • • • •• •• •• •• • •• •• • ••• •••••••• •••••• ••• •••••••••••••••••• ••••• • ••• ••••••••••••••••••• ••• • ••• ••••• • • ••• •••••••• •••••• • ••••• • ••• ••••• ••••• •••••••• • • ••• • • ••• •••• •••••••• ••• ••• ••• •••••••••••••• •• • •••• • • • ••• • • • •• • ••• • ••• •••• •• •••••••••••••• ••••• ••••• •• ••••• •••••••••• ••• ••••••••••• • ••••• • • •••••••• •• ••• ••••••• •••••• ••• •••••• •••••••••••• ••• ••••••• ••• ••• • ••••• ••• ••• ••• • ••••••••••• ••••• • •••••••• • • ••• ••••••••••• •••••••••••• ••••• ••••• ••••••• • •••••••• • •••••••••••••••• •••• ••••••••• ••••••• • •••••• ••• •••••••• • •••••••• •••• ••••••• ••••••••• • •• •••• • ••••• •••••••• ••• •• • • •• •• • ••• ••• • • •• • ••• ••••••• • • ••• ••••• •• • ••• ••••••••• •••• •••• •• ••• • • ••• •• • ••• • • ••• • • •• •••• • • •• • ••• •••••• • • ••••• • ••••••••••• • • • ••• ••• •• ••• • ••• •• • • ••••• •• • •• • ••• ••••••••••••• •• •••• •••••••••••••• • ••••••••••• ••••• ••••••• ••• • • ••• • • ••• ••• • ••• • •• ••• ••• • • •• ••• • ••• •• • • •• • •••• • • • •• •• •• • •••• • • •••••••••••••• • • ••• •••••• ••••• ••••• •••••••• ••••• • ••••• ••• •••• ••••••• • ••• •••• •• ••• ••••••••• • •••• •••• • • •• •• ••• • •• • • ••• • ••• ••• ••••• •• • ••• ••• •• •• ••• • ••• • •• • ••• • ••• • • ••• • • •• • •• • • • ••• • •• • ••• •••• •• • ••••• •• ••• •• • •••• •• •• ••••• •••••••••••••• ••••••••• ••••••• ••• •••••••••• •••• • •••••••• ••••• •• •••• • • • ••••• ••• ••• •• • •• •• ••• ••• •••••••••• • •• ••• ••••• •••••• ••••••••• ••• ••••••••••• • •••• ••• •••••••• •••• ••• • ••••• ••••• • ••• ••••• • • ••• •••••• •• •••••••• •••••• •••••• • ••• •••••••• ••• ••••••••• •••• ••••• •••• ••• ••••• ••••••••••••• ••••••••• ••••••• •••••••• •• ••••• ••• •••••• ••••••• ••••• ••••• •• •••••••••••• •••• • • •••• • •• •••• ••• •• •••••••••••••• ••••• •••• •• •• •• • •• • • • • ••• • •••• • ••• • •• •••• • •••• •• •••• •• • •••• •••• ••••• ••• ••••••• ••••••••••••• ••••• • ••••• ••••• • ••••• ••••••• •• ••• • •• • •• •• ••••••••• • • • • •••• ••••• •••• • •••••••••• •• •••• • • ••••••••• ••••••• •••••••• • ••• ••• ••• • • •••• •••••••••• •• •• • • •• •• •• •• ••• •• ••••••••••••• • ••••••••• ••• ••• • ••• • •• ••• ••• • • •• ••• • ••• •• • • •• • •••• • • • •• •• •• • •••• • • • ••••• ••• •••• •• ••• •••• •••• • •••••• ••••• ••••• ••••••••• ••••••• •••••••• • ••• ••• ••••••••••• ••••••• ••• ••••••• •••• ••••••••••••• •• ••••••• • ••• ••••••••••••• •• • •• • • • •• •• •••••• • • ••• •••••••••••••••••••• ••• •••• ••• ••••• •••••••• ••••• •••• ••••••••• • • ••••••••••• ••••• • ••• ••••••••••• •••••••••••• •••• •• • ••• •• ••••••••• •••••••• •• • ••• •• • ••• ••••••••••• •••••• ••• •• ••••• •••• • ••• •• •• •• •• • ••• • ••• •• ••• •• ••• ••• • •••• •• •• ••• • • • •• • •••• • •• ••• •••• •••• •• ••• • • ••• •• •• •• •• ••• • • ••••••• •••••••• ••••••• ••• • ••••• •••••• • •••• • ••••••• •••••••• •••••••• ••• ••• •••• •••••• •••••• • ••• •• ••• ••• ••••• • ••• ••• ••••• •••••••• • •••••• •••••• •••• •• •••••• • ••• •••• •••• •• •••• ••••• • ••• •••• • • ••• •••••• ••• ••••••••••••••• • ••••• •••• •••••••••••• •• •••• • ••• •••••••••• •••••••• •• •••••• •••• ••••••••• ••• • ••• • • • ••••• • • • • •••••• •• • ••• ••••••••••• • • ••••••• • •• • • • ••••••• ••• •••• ••• • • •••••• • ••• • ••••••••••• ••• •• ••••• •••••••••••• ••• • ••••• •••• • •• • •••• •• •• ••• •• ••• ••••••••• ••••• •••• •••••• ••• •••••• ••• •• ••• •••• •••••••••• •••••••••••••• •••• ••••••••• •• •••• ••••••• • ••• • •••••••• • ••••• • •••• •••• •••• ••••••• ••••••• • ••• •••• ••• ••• • • ••••••••••••••• •••••• • • ••• •••• ••• •• ••• •• ••• •• • ••• •••• •••• •••••••• ••••• ••••••••• ••• •• ••• • • • ••••• •••••••• •••••••• • •••• ••••• ••• •• ••• •••••••••••••• •• ••• • ••••• ••••• • • ••• • •• • •• •• •••••••••••• •••••• ••• • • •• ••• • • • ••••••••• •••••••• ••• •• • •• ••••• ••••••• ••••• •• ••• • • • ••••••••• ••••••• • •••••••• ••• •••••••• •••• •• ••••• • • ••• • • •• • ••• •••• • • • •• • •• • • • • •••• • • • • ••• • • ••••••••• • ••••• •• •••••••• • ••••••••• •• ••••••••••••••• •• • •••• •••••• •• ••••••• ••••• •••• ••••••• •••••••••••••• ••••••••••••• •••• ••••••• • •••• •••• • ••• ••• ••• •• •••••• •• ••••••••••• ••• • •• •••••• • ••• •••••• • •• •••••• • •••• ••• •••• •••••• •• •••••• • ••• •••••• • •• •••••• • •••••••• •• •••• •••• ••• • • ••••••• ••• ••• ••••• • •• • ••••••• • • • •••••• ••• • ••••• •• •••••••• • ••••••••• •• ••••••••• •• • •• ••••••• ••••••• •••••••••••• •••••••••• ••• •• •••••• •• ••• ••• ••••• •• •••••• • •• •• ••• •• • • • •• • • • • •• ••• ••• • •• • • • •• •••• • ••• • • ••••• •••• • ••••• •• •••••••• • ••••••••• •• ••••••••••••••• •• • •••• •••••• •• •••••• ••• •••• •••••• ••• ••• • •• •• ••••• • • •••• ••••••• •••• •• • • • •••••• • •••••••• •••• ••• • ••••••••••• •• • ••••••••••• • ••••••• ••••••• • • ••••• • ••• •••••• • •••••••• • ••••• ••• • •• ••••••••••• • •••• ••• • ••••• • •• ••• • • ••••••• ••• • • • •••• • • ••• • ••••• •• •••••••• • ••••••••• •• •••• •••••• •••••••••••• •• • •• ••• • ••• •••••••• ••••• •••••• ••••••••• •••• • •••••••• ••••• • •• • ••••• ••••••••••••••• •••••• •••• •••••• • ••• ••• • •••• ••• • •• •• ••• • • • • ••• • •• •• • • • •••• ••• • • • •••• •• • • • ••• • •••• • •• •• • •• • • •• • • •••••••• ••• •••••• •••••• • ••••••••• • •••• •••• • •• ••••• ••• • •••• • •• ••••••••••• • •••• ••• • • •• • ••• • • ••• •••• • •• ••• ••• • •• • • •• • • •• ••• • ••• • • • ••••• • • • • •••••• •• • ••• ••••••••••• • • ••••••• • •• • • • ••••••• ••• •••• ••• • • • • ••••• • ••••• • ••• • • • •••• ••••• •••• •••••• • • • •••• •••• ••••• •••• •••••••••• •• ••••••••• ••• ••••••••••••••• • •••• • •• • •••••• ••••••••••••••••••••••• • ••• •••• •••••••• •••••••• • •• ••• • •• ••• • •••••• • •• • •••••• • ••• ••• • •• • • • • • ••••••••• •••••••••• •••••••• ••• ••••• ••• ••• ••••• ••••••••••••• • • ••• •••••• •• •••• ••••• •••••••••• • •••••••• •••••• • •• •••••••• • ••••• •• ••••• ••••• • • • • •••• • •• •• • ••••••• • •••• •••••••••• •• ••• ••••••• •• • • ••••••••• •••••••• • ••• •• ••••••• •• • ••••••••••••••••••• •• • •• • •• • •••••• • ••• •• ••••••••• •• •••••• ••••• •••• •••••••• •• • •• • • • •• ••• • • • • •••••• ••••• • •• •••••• • ••••••• •• ••••• • •• •••••••••••••• • • • •••• • • ••• •••••••• • •• • • ••• • • •••• • •• •• •• ••• • ••• ••• •••••••• • ••• ••••• • • • •• ••••••• ••••••••• •• •• • • •• • •••••• ••••••• ••• ••••• •••••• • • • •• •• •• • ••• • • ••• • ••••••••• •••••••••• •• •••••••• •••• •• •••••• • ••• •• •• • • •••••• •••• • • ••• •• • •• ••••••• ••• ••••• ••••••• •• ••••••• • •• •••••• ••• • ••• • •••••• • • •• •• • ••• • • •••• • • ••• •• •• •••••••• •• •• • ••• • •• • • • • •• •• •••• •• ••• • •• • • •• ••• ••••••••••• •••••• ••••••• •• ••••••• •• • ••• • ••• •• • ••• • •• •••••• ••• •• •• • •• •• • • •••• •• • • • •• • ••••••••••••••• ••• ••••••••••••••• ••• ••••• • ••• •••• •• ••••• ••• ••••• ••• ••••••• • ••• ••• •••• • ••• ••••••• • ••• •• • ••• •••• •••• •••••••• • •••••• • • ••••• • • •• •••• • • • •••••• •• • ••• •••• ••• ••••••••• •••• ••• • •••• •• • ••• ••• •••••• •• •••••••••••• ••• ••••• •• • ••• •••• ••• •• ••• • • • •••••• • •• ••••• ••••• •• ••••••••• •••••• ••• •• ••• •••••• ••• •••••••••••• ••• ••• • ••••• •• • ••• • ••• ••• •••••• •• •••• •••••••••••• ••• • ••••• •• • • • • •• • • •• • ••••••• ••• • ••••• •••••••• ••• • •••••••• •• ••• ••• •••••••••• •• •••• ••••••••• •• • •••••• •••• •••••••• ••• • • • ••••••• • •• • • • •••••••••• •••• • •• • Generator set data sheet Model: C125D6D Frequency: 60 Hz Fuel type: Diesel KW rating: 125125 standbystandby 112.5 prime Emissions level: EPA Tier 3, Stationary emergency Exhaust emission data sheet: EDS-3043 Exhaust emission compliance sheet: EPA-2032 Sound performance data sheet: MSP-4007 Cooling performance data sheet: MCP-2047 Prototype test summary data sheet: PTS-636 StandbyStandby Prime Fuel consumption kW (kVA) kW (kVA) Ratings 125 (156) 112.5 (141) Load 1/4 1/2 3/4 FullFull 1/4 1/2 3/4 Full US gph 4.2 6.1 7.9 10.110.1 3.9 5.6 7.3 9.3 L/hr 15.89 23.08 29.90 38.23 14.76 21.20 27.63 35.20 StandbyStandby Prime Engine ratingrating rating Engine manufacturer Cummins Inc. Engine model QSB7-G5 Configuration Cast iron, in-line, 6 cylinders Aspiration Turbocharged and charge air cooled Gross engine power output, kWm (bhp) 242 (324) 208 (279) BMEP at set rated load, kPa (psi) 1493 (216) 1358 (197) Bore, mm (in) 107 (4.21) Stroke, mm (in) 124 (4.88) Rated speed, rpm 1800 Piston speed, m/s (ft/min) 7.44 (1464) Compression ratio 17.2:1 Lube oil capacity, L (qt) 17.4 (18.38) Overspeed limit, rpm 2250 Fuel flow Maximum fuel flow, L/hr (US gph) 103 (27.0) Maximum fuel inlet restriction with clean filter, mm Hg (in Hg) 127 (5.0) power.cummins.com ©2022 Cummins Inc. | NAD-6371-EN (07/22) A061F586 Standby Prime Air ratingrating rating Combustion air, m3/min (scfm) 13.9 (491) 13.53 (478) Maximum air cleaner restriction with clean filter, kPa (in H2O) 3.7 (15) Exhaust Exhaust flow at set rated load, m3/min (cfm) 33.01 (1166) 32.22 (1138) Exhaust temperature, C (F) 447.22 (837) 439.44 (823) Maximum back pressure, kPa (in H2O) 10 (40.19) 10 (40.19) Actual exhaust back pressure with CPG sound level 2 enclosure 8.7 (34.96) 7.83 (31.47) muffler, kPa (in H2O) Actual exhaust back pressure with CPG weather enclosure 6.5 (26.12) 5.85 (23.51) muffler, kPa (in H2O) Standard set-mounted radiator cooling Ambient design, C ( F) 50 (122) Fan load, kWm (HP) 14.02 (18.8) Coolant capacity (with radiator), L (US Gal) 22 (5.9) Cooling system air flow, m3/min (scfm) 305.82 (10800) Total heat rejection, MJ/min (Btu/min) 6.95 (6584) 6.4 (6066) Maximum cooling air flow static restriction, kPa (in H2O) 0.12 (0.5) Weight2 Refer to drawings for specific Unit wet weight kgs (lbs) 1340 (2955)weights and dimensions Notes: 1For non-standard remote installations contact your local Cummins Power Generation representative. 2Weights represent a set with standard features. See outline drawing for weights of other configurations. Derating factors Engine power available up to 3850 m (12633 ft.) at ambient temperatures up to 40° C (104° F) and Engine power available up to 3850 m (12633 ft.) at ambient temperatures up to 40° C (104° F) and StandbyStandby 2695 m (8842 ft2695 m (8842 ft.) at 50° C (122° F). Consult your Cummins distributor for temperature and ambient ) at 50° C (122° F). Consult your Cummins distributor for temperature and ambient rrequirements outside these parameters.equirements outside these parameters. Engine power available up to 3136 m (10290 ft.) at ambient temperatures up to 40° C (104° F) and Prime 2466 m (8090 ft.) at 50° C (122° F). Consult your Cummins distributor for temperature and ambient requirements outside these parameters. Ratings definitions Limited-time running power Base load (continuous) power Emergency standby power (ESP):Emergency standby power (ESP): (LTP): Prime power (PRP): (COP): Applicable for supplying power to Applicable for supplying power to Applicable for supplying power Applicable for supplying power varying electrical load for the a constant electrical load for to varying electrical load for continuously to a constant duration of power interruption of a limited hours. Limited Time unlimited hours. Prime Power electrical load for unlimited reliable utility source. Emergency Running Power (LTP) is in (PRP) is in accordance with hours. Continuous Power Standby Power (ESP) is in accordance with ISO 8528. ISO 8528. Ten percent overload (COP) is in accordance with accordance with ISO 8528. Fuel capability is available in ISO 8528, ISO 3046, Stop power in accordance with accordance with ISO 3046, AS 2789, DIN 6271 and ISO 3046, AS 2789, DIN 6271 and AS 2789, DIN 6271 and BS 5514. BS 5514. BS 5514. North America 1400 73rd Avenue N.E. Minneapolis, MN 55432 USA Phone 763 574 5000 Fax 763 574 5298 ©2022 Cummins Inc. All rights reserved. Cummins is a registered trademarks of Cummins Inc. PowerCommand, AmpSentry, InPower and “Our energy working for you.” are trademarks of Cummins. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. Specifications are subject to change without notice. power.cummins.com NAD-6371-EN (07/22) A061F586 Alternator data Standard Alternators Single phase2 Three Phase1 Maximum temperature rise 125 °C 125 °C above 40 °C ambient Feature code BB88-2 B946-2 B986-2 B952-2 B943-2 BB86-2 BB88-2 Alternator data sheet number ADS-211 ADS-208 ADS-208 ADS-209 ADS-208 ADS-208 ADS-211 120/208, Voltage ranges 120/240 120/208 120/240 347/600 277/480 127/220 127/220, 277/480 R098, R020, Voltage feature code R104 R098-2 R106-2 R114-2 R002-2 R020-2 R106, R002 Surge kW 201.6 208.4 210 211.4 210 209.1 213.4 Motor starting kVA (at 90% 672 422 422 516 422 422 672 sustained voltage) Shunt Refer to alternator Motor starting kVA (at 90% 791 497 497 607 497 497 791 sustained voltage) PMG datasheet for project Full load current amps at 521 434 376 150 188 410 188 to 434 standby rating specific temperature ratings Alternator data Standard Alternators Single phase2 Three phase1 Maximum temperature rise 105 °C 105 °C 105 °C 105 °C 105 °C 105 °C 105 °C above 40 °C ambient Feature code BB87-2 BB93-2 BB94-2 BB95-2 BB92-2 BB85-2 BB87-2 Alternator data sheet number ADS-211 ADS-209 ADS-209 ADS-209 ADS-209 ADS-209 ADS-211 120/208, Voltage ranges 120/240 120/208 120/240 277/480 347/600 127/220 127/220, 277/480 R098, R020, Voltage feature code R104-2 R098-2 R106-2 R002-2 R114-2 R020-2 R106, R002 Surge kW 201.6 208.4 210 211.4 210 209.1 213.4 Motor starting kVA (at 90% 672 516 516 516 516 516 672 sustained voltage) Shunt Motor starting kVA (at 90% 791 607 607 607 607 607 791 sustained voltage) PMG Full load current amps at 521 434 376 188 150 410 188 to 434 standby rating Notes: 1 Single phase power can be taken from a three phase generator set at up to 2/3 set rated 3-phase kW at 1.0 power factor 2Full single phase output up to full set rated 3-phase kW at 1.0 power factor Formulas for calculating full load currents: Three phase output Single phase output kW x 1000 kW x SinglePhaseFactor x 1000 Voltage x 1.73 x 0.8 Voltage Warning: Back feed to a utility system can cause electrocution and/or property damage. Do not connect to any building’s electrical system except through an approved device or after building main switch is open. North America 1400 73rd Avenue N.E. Minneapolis, MN 55432 USA Phone 763 574 5000 Fax 763 574 5298 ©2022 Cummins Inc. All rights reserved. Cummins is a registered trademarks of Cummins Inc. PowerCommand, AmpSentry, InPower and “Our energy working for you.” are trademarks of Cummins. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. Specifications are subject to change without notice. power.cummins.com NAD-6371-EN (07/22) A061F586 Specification Sheet PowerCommand® 2.3 Control System Control System Description Features The PowerCommand control system is a 320 x 240 pixels graphic LED backlight LCD. microprocessor-based generator set monitoring, Multiple language support. metering and control system designed to meet the AmpSentryâ„¢ protective relay - true alternator demands of today’s engine driven generator sets. The overcurrent protection. integration of all control functions into a single control system provides enhanced reliability and Real time clock for fault and event time stamping. performance, compared to conventional generator set Exerciser clock and time of day start/stop. control systems. These control systems have been Digital voltage regulation. Three phase full wave designed and tested to meet the harsh environment in FET type regulator compatible with either shunt or which gensets are typically applied. PMG systems. Generator set monitoring and protection. 12 and 24 VDC battery operation. Modbus® interface for interconnecting to customer equipment. Warranty and service. Backed by a comprehensive warranty and worldwide distributor service network. Certifications - suitable for use on generator sets that are designed, manufactured, tested and certified to relevant UL, NFPA, ISO, IEC, Mil Std., CE, UKCA and CSA standards. power.cummins.com ©2019 Cummins Inc. | PDS-1569 | PD00000157 | (02/22) PowerCommand Digital Environmental protection - The control system is designed for reliable operation in harsh environments. The main Genset Control control board is a fully encapsulated module that is protected from the elements. PCC 2300 Modbus interface for interconnecting to customer equipment. Configurable inputs and outputs - Four discrete inputs and four dry contact relay outputs. Warranty and service - Backed by a comprehensive warranty and worldwide distributor service network. Certifications - Suitable for use on generator sets that are designed, manufactured, tested and certified to relevant UL, NFPA, ISO, IEC, Mil Std., CE and CSA standards. Base Control Functions Description HMI Capability The PowerCommand generator set control is suitable for Operator adjustments - The HMI includes provisions for use on a wide range of generator sets in non-paralleling many set up and adjustment functions. applications. The PowerCommand control is compatible Generator set hardware data - Access to the control and with shunt or PMG excitation style. It is suitable for use with software part number, generator set rating in kVA and reconnectable or non-reconnectable generators, and it can generator set model number is provided from the HMI or be configured for any frequency, voltage and power InPower. connection from 120-600 VAC Line-to-Line. Data logs - Includes engine run time, controller on time, Power for this control system is derived from the generator number of start attempts, total kWh, and load profile (control set starting batteries. The control functions over a voltage logs data indicating the operating hours at percent of rated range from 8 VDC to 30 VDC. kW load, in 5% increments. The data is presented on the Features operation panel based on total operating hours on the generator.) 12 and 24 VDC battery operation. Fault history - Provides a record of the most recent fault Digital voltage regulation - Three phase full wave FET conditions with control date and time stamp. Up to 32 type regulator compatible with either shunt or PMG events are stored in the control non-volatile memory. systems. Sensing is three phase. Alternator data Full authority engine communications (where applicable) - - Voltage (single or three phase Line-to-Line and Line-to- Provides communication and control with the Engine Neutral) due to thermal Control Module (ECM). - Current (single or three phase) AmpSentry” protection provides industry-leading alternator overcurrent protection: - kW, kVar, power factor, kVA (three phase and total) - Time-based generator protection applicable to both - Frequency line-to-line and line-to-neutral, that can detect an AmpSentry: 3x current regulation for downstream unbalanced fault condition and swiftly react tripping/motor inrush management. Thermal damage appropriately. Balanced faults can also be detected curve (3-phase short) or fixed timer (2 sec for 1- Phase by AmpSentry and appropriate acted upon. Short or 5 sec for 2-Phase short). Reduces the risk of Arc Flash overload or electrical faults Engine data by inverse time protection - Starting battery voltage Common harnessing - with higher feature Cummins - Engine speed controls. Allows for easy field upgrades. - Engine temperature Generator set monitoring - Monitors status of all critical engine and alternator functions. - Engine oil pressure Digital genset metering (AC and DC). - Engine oil temperature Genset battery monitoring system to sense and warn - Intake manifold temperature against a weak battery condition. - Comprehensive Full Authority Engine (FAE) data (where Configurable for single or three phase AC metering. applicable) Engine starting - Includes relay drivers for starter, Fuel Service adjustments - The HMI includes provisions for Shut Off (FSO), glow plug/spark ignition power and switch adjustment and calibration of generator set control B+ applications. functions. Adjustments are protected by a password. Generator set protection – Protects engine and alternator. Functions include: Real time clock for fault and event time stamping. Exerciser clock and time of day start/stop. Advanced serviceability - using InPowerâ„¢, a PC-based software service tool. power.cummins.com ©2019 Cummins Inc. | PDS-1569 | PD00000157 | (02/22) Service adjustments (continued) Time delay start and stop (cooldown) - Configurable for - Engine speed governor adjustments time delay of 0-300 seconds prior to starting after receiving a remote start signal and for time delay of 0-600 - Voltage regulation adjustments seconds prior to shut down after signal to stop in normal - Cycle cranking operation modes. Default for both time delay periods is 0 - Configurable fault set up seconds. - Configurable output set up Alternator Control - Meter calibration The control includes an integrated three phase Line-to- - Display language and units of measurement Line sensing voltage regulation system that is compatible with shunt or PMG excitation systems. The voltage Engine Control regulation system is a three phase full wave rectified and SAE-J1939 CAN interface to full authority ECMs (where has an FET output for good motor starting capability. applicable). Provides data swapping between genset and Major system features include: engine controller for control, metering and diagnostics. Digital output voltage regulation - Capable of regulating 12 VDC/24 VDC battery operations - PowerCommand will output voltage to within +/-1.0% for any loads between no operate either on 12 VDC or 24 VDC batteries. load and full load. Voltage drift will not exceed +/- 1.5% Temperature dependent governing dynamics (with for a 40 ºC (104 ºF) change in temperature in an eight electronic governing) - modifies the engine governing hour period. On engine starting or sudden load control parameters as a function of engine temperature. acceptance, voltage is controlled to a maximum of 5% This allows the engine to be more responsive when warm overshoot over nominal level. The automatic voltage and more stable when operating at lower temperature regulator feature can be disabled to allow the use of an levels. external voltage regulator. Isochronous governing - (where applicable) Capable of Droop voltage regulation - Control can be adjusted to controlling engine speed within +/-0.25% for any steady droop from 0-10% from no load to full load. state load from no load to full load. Frequency drift will not Torque-matched V/Hz overload control - The voltage roll- exceed +/-0.5% for a 33 °C (60 °F) change in ambient off set point and rate of decay (i.e. the slope of the V/Hz temperature over an 8 hour period. curve) is adjustable in the control. Droop electronic speed governing - Control can be Fault current regulation - PowerCommand will regulate adjusted to droop from 0 to 10% from no load to full load. the output current on any phase to a maximum of three Remote start mode - It accepts a ground signal from times rated current under fault conditions for both single remote devices to automatically start the generator set phase and three phase faults. In conjunction with a and immediately accelerate to rated speed and voltage. permanent magnet generator, it will provide three times The remote start signal will also wake up the control from rated current on all phases for motor starting and short sleep mode. The control can incorporate a time delay circuit coordination purpose. start and stop. Protective Functions Remote and local emergency stop - The control accepts a ground signal from a local (genset mounted) or remote On operation of a protective function the control will (facility mounted) emergency stop switch to cause the indicate a fault by illuminating the appropriate status LED generator set to immediately shut down. The generator on the HMI, as well as display the fault code and fault set is prevented from running or cranking with the switch description on the LCD. The nature of the fault and time engaged. If in sleep mode, activation of either emergency of occurrence are logged in the control. The service stop switch will wakeup the control. manual and InPower service tool provide service keys and procedures based on the service codes provided. Sleep mode - The control includes a configurable low current draw state to minimize starting battery current Protective functions include: draw when the genset is not operating. The control can Battle Short Mode also be configured to go into a low current state while in auto for prime applications or applications without a When enabled and the battle short switch is active, the battery charger. control will allow some shutdown faults to be bypassed. If Engine starting - The control system supports automatic a bypassed shutdown fault occurs, the fault code and engine starting. Primary and backup start disconnects are description will still be annunciated, but the genset will achieved by one of two methods: magnetic pickup or not shutdown. This will be followed by a fail to shutdown main alternator output frequency. The control also fault. Emergency stop shutdowns and others that are supports configurable glow plug control when applicable. critical for proper operation are not bypassed. Please refer to the control application guide or manual for list of Cycle cranking - Is configurable for the number of starting these faults. cycles (1 to 7) and duration of crank and rest periods. Control includes starter protection algorithms to prevent the operator from specifying a starting sequence that might be damaging. power.cummins.com ©2019 Cummins Inc. | PDS-1569 | PD00000157 | (02/22) Derate The derate function reduces output power of the genset in response to a fault condition. If a derate command occurs while operating on an isolated bus, the control will issue commands to reduce the load on the genset via contact closures or modbus. Configurable Alarm and Status Inputs The control accepts up to four alarm or status inputs (configurable contact closed to ground or open) to indicate a configurable (customer-specified) condition. The control is programmable for warning, shutdown or status indication and for labeling the input. Emergency Stop Annunciated whenever either emergency stop signal is received from external switch. Full Authority Electronic Engine Protection Engine fault detection is handled inside the engine ECM. Fault information is communicated via the SAE- J1939 data link for annunciation in the HMI. General Engine Protection Low and high battery voltage warning - Indicates status AmpSentry Maintenance Mode (AMM) - Instantaneous of battery charging system (failure) by continuously tripping, if AmpSentry Maintenance mode is active monitoring battery voltage. (50mS response to turn off AVR excitation/shutdown Weak battery warning - The control system will test the genset) for arc flash reduction when personnel are near battery each time the generator set is signaled to start genset. and indicate a warning if the battery indicates High AC voltage shutdown (59) - Output voltage on any impending failure. phase exceeds preset values. Time to trip is inversely Fail to start (overcrank) shutdown - The control system proportional to amount above threshold. Values adjustable will indicate a fault if the generator set fails to start by from 105-125% of nominal voltage, with time delay the completion of the engine crack sequence. adjustable from 0.1-10 seconds. Default value is 110% for Fail to crank shutdown - Control has signaled starter to 10 seconds. crank engine but engine does not rotate. Low AC voltage shutdown (27) - Voltage on any phase has Cranking lockout - The control will not allow the starter dropped below a preset value. Adjustable over a range of to attempt to engage or to crank the engine when the 50-95% of reference voltage, time delay 2-20 seconds. engine is rotating. Default value is 85% for 10 seconds. Function tracks reference voltage. Control does not nuisance trip when Alternator Protection voltage varies due to the control directing voltage to drop, AmpSentry protective relay - A comprehensive such as during a V/Hz roll-off during synchronizing. monitoring and control system integral to the Under frequency shutdown (81 u) - Generator set output PowerCommand Control System that guards the frequency cannot be maintained. Settings are adjustable electrical integrity of the alternator and power system from 2-10 Hz below reference governor set point, for a 5-20 by providing protection against a wide array of fault second time delay. Default: 6 Hz, 10 seconds. conditions in the generator set or in the load. It also Under frequency protection is disabled when excitation is provides single and three phase fault current regulation switched off, such as when engine is operating in idle speed so that downstream protective devices have the mode. maximum current available to quickly clear fault Over frequency shutdown/warning (81 o) - Generator set is conditions without subjecting the alternator to operating at a potentially damaging frequency level. potentially catastrophic failure conditions. Thermal Settings are adjustable from 2-10 Hz above nominal damage curve (3-Phase short) or fixed timer (2 sec for governor set point for a 1-20 second time delay. Default: 6 1-Phase short, 5 sec for 2-Phase short). See document Hz, R1053 for a full-size time over current curve. 20 seconds, disabled. power.cummins.com ©2019 Cummins Inc. | PDS-1569 | PD00000157 | (02/22) Overcurrent warning/shutdown - Thresholds and time - Configurable relay outputs: Control includes (4) relay delays are configurable. Implementation of the thermal output contacts (3 A, 30 VDC). These outputs can be damage curve with instantaneous trip level calculated configured to activate on any control warning or shutdown based on current transformer ratio and application fault as well as ready to load, not in auto, common alarm, power rating. common warning and common shutdown. Loss of sensing voltage shutdown - Shutdown of - Ready to load (generator set running) signal: Operates generator set will occur on loss of voltage sensing when the generator set has reached 90% of rated speed inputs to the control. and voltage and latches until generator set is switched to Field overload shutdown - Monitors field voltage to off or idle mode. shutdown generator set when a field overload condition occurs. Communications Connections Include: Over load (kW) warning - Provides a warning - PC tool interface: This RS-485 communication port allows indication when engine is operating at a load level the control to communicate with a personal computer over a set point. running InPower software. Adjustment range: 80-140% of application rated kW, - Modbus RS-485 port: Allows the control to communicate 0-120 second delay. Defaults: 105%, 60 seconds. with external devices such as PLCs using Modbus Reverse power shutdown (32) - Adjustment range: protocol. 5-20% of standby kW rating, delay 1-15 seconds. Note - An RS-232 or USB to RS-485 converter is required Default: 10%, 3 seconds. for communication between PC and control. Reverse Var shutdown - Shutdown level is adjustable: - Networking: This RS-485 communication port allows 15-50% of rated Var output, delay 10-60 seconds. connection from the control to the other Cummins Default: 20%, 10 seconds. products. Short circuit protection - Output current on any phase is more than 175% of rating and approaching the MechanicalDrawings thermal damage point of the alternator. Control includes algorithms to protect alternator from repeated over current conditions over a short period of time. Field Control Interface Input signals to the PowerCommand control include: - Coolant level (where applicable) - Fuel level (where applicable) - Remote emergency stop - Remote fault reset - Remote start - Battleshort - Rupture basin - Start type signal - Configurable inputs - Control includes (4) input signals from customer discrete devices that are configurable for warning, shutdown or status indication, as well as message displayed Output signals from the PowerCommand control include: - Load dump signal: Operates when the generator set is in an overload condition. - Delayed off signal: Time delay based output which will continue to remain active after the control has removed the run command. Adjustment range: 0 – 120 seconds. Default: 0 seconds. power.cummins.com ©2019 Cummins Inc. | PDS-1569 | PD00000157 | (02/22) PowerCommand Human Two tactile feel membrane switches dedicated to control of circuit breaker (where applicable). Machine Interface Allows for complete genset control setup. HMI320 Certifications: Suitable for use on generator sets that are designed, manufactured, tested and certified to relevant UL, NFPA, ISO, IEC, Mil Std., CE and CSA standards. LCD languages supported: English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, Greek, Dutch, Portuguese, Finnish, Norwegian, Danish, Russian and Chinese Characters. Communications connections include: PC tool interface - This RS-485 communication port allows the HMI to communicate with a personal computer running InPower. This RS-485 communication port allows the HMI to Description communicate with the main control board. This control system includes an intuitive operator Mechanical Drawing interface panel that allows for complete genset control as well as system metering, fault annunciation, configuration and diagnostics. The interface includes five genset status LED lamps with both internationally accepted symbols and English text to comply with customer’s needs. The interface also includes an LED backlit LCD display with tactile feel soft-switches for easy operation and screen navigation. It is configurable for units of measurement and has adjustable screen contrast and brightness. The run/off/auto switch function is integrated into the interface panel. All data on the control can be viewed by scrolling through screens with the navigation keys. The control displays the current active fault and a time-ordered history of the five previous faults. Features Software LED indicating lamps: InPower (beyond 6.5 version) is a PC-based software -Genset running service tool that is designed to directly communicate to PowerCommand generator sets and transfer switches, to -Remote start facilitate service and monitoring of these products. -Not in auto Environment -Shutdown The control is designed for proper operation without -Warning recalibration in ambient temperatures from -40 ºC to +70º C -Auto (-40 ºF to 158 ºF) and for storage from -55 ºC to +80 ºC (-67 -Manual and stop ºF to 176 ºF). Control will operate with humidity up to 95%, non-condensing. 320 x 240 pixels graphic LED backlight LCD. The HMI is designed for proper operation in ambient Four tactile feel membrane switches for LCD defined temperatures from -20 ºC to +70 ºC (-4 ºF to 158 ºF) and for operation. The functions of these switches are storage from -30 ºC to +80 ºC (-22 ºF to 176 ºF). defined dynamically on the LCD. The control board is fully encapsulated to provide superior Seven tactile feel membrane switches dedicated resistance to dust and moisture. Display panel has a single screen navigation buttons for up, down, left, right, membrane surface, which is impervious to effects of dust, ok, home and cancel. moisture, oil and exhaust fumes. This panel uses a sealed Six tactile feel membrane switches dedicated to membrane to provide long reliable service life in harsh control for auto, stop, manual, manual start, fault environments. reset and lamp test/panel lamps. The control system is specifically designed and tested for resistance to RFI/EMI and to resist effects of vibration to provide a long reliable life when mounted on a generator set. The control includes transient voltage surge suppression to provide compliance to referenced standards. power.cummins.com ©2019 Cummins Inc. | PDS-1569 | PD00000157 | (02/22) Certifications Warranty PowerCommand meets or exceeds the requirements of the All components and subsystems are covered by an express following codes and standards: limited one year warranty. Other optional and extended - NFPA 110 for level 1 and 2 systems. factory warranties and local distributor maintenance agreements are available. - ISO 8528-4: 1993 compliance, controls and switchgear. - CE marking: The CE marking is only valid when equipment is used in a fixed installation application. Material compliance declaration is available upon request. - UKCA marking: The UKCA marking is only valid when equipment is used in a fixed installation application. Material compliance declaration is available upon request. - EN50081-1,2 residential/light industrial emissions or industrial emissions. - EN50082-1,2 residential/light industrial or industrial susceptibility. - ISO 7637-2, level 2; DC supply surge voltage test. - Mil Std 202C, Method 101 and ASTM B117: Salt fog test. - UL 6200 recognized and suitable for use on UL 2200 Listed generator sets. - CSA C282-M1999 compliance - CSA 22.2 No. 14 M91 industrial controls. - PowerCommand control systems and generator sets are designed and manufactured in ISO 9001 certified facilities. For more information contact your local Cummins distributor or visit power.cummins.com ©2019Cummins Inc. All rights reserved. Cummins is a registered trademark of Cummins Inc. PowerCommand, AmpSentry, InPower and “Our energy working for you.” are trademarks of Cummins Inc. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. Specifications are subject to change without notice. PDS-1569 | PD00000157 | (02/22) Alternator data sheet Frame size: UC3H Characteristics Weights: Wound stator assembly: 478 lb 217 kg Rotor assembly: 505 lb 229 kg Complete alternator: 1356 lb 615 kg Maximum speed: 2250 rpm Excitation current: Full load: 2Amps No load: 0.5 Amps Insulation system: Class H throughout 1 ∅ Ratings (1.0 power factor) 60 Hz 50 Hz (Based on specific temperature rise at 40 °C Double delta 4lead Double delta ambient temperature) 110-120 120/240 120/240 220-240 125 °C rise ratings kW/kVA 143/143 156/156 120/120 105 °C rise ratings kW/kVA 131/131 141/141 110/110 3 ∅ Ratings (0.8 power factor) Upper broad range LBR* 347/600 Broad range (Based on specified temperature rise 120/208 139/240 190-208 110/190 120/208 127/220 at 40 °C ambient temperature) 240/416 277277/480/480 380-416 347/600 220/380 240/415 254/440 kW 200 220 200 220 170 170 160 150 °C Rise ratings kVA 250 275 250 275 212 212 200 kW 190 204 190 204 160 160 152 125 °C Rise ratings kVA 238 255 238 255 200 200 190 kW 175 188 175 188 146 146 138 105 °C Rise ratings kVA 219 235 219 235 182 182 172 kW 150 163163 150 163 126 126 120 80 °C 80 °C Rise ratingsRise ratings kkVAVA 188 204204 188 204 158 158 150 3 ∅ Reactances (per unit, ±10%) (Based on full load at 105 °C rise rating) Synchronous 2.13 1.72 1.85 1.91 1.88 1.57 1.32 Transient 0.17 0.14 0.15 0.15 0.16 0.13 0.11 Subtransient 0.12 0.10 0.10 0.09 0.11 0.09 0.08 Negative sequence 0.14 0.11 0.12 0.11 0.12 0.10 0.08 Zero sequence 0.08 0.07 0.07 0.07 0.07 0.06 0.05 3 ∅ Motor starting Maximum kVA (Shunt) 672 672 672 467 (90% sustained voltage) (PMG)(PMG) 791791 791 791 583 Time constants (Sec) Transient 0.042 0.042 0.042 0.042 Subtransient 0.012 0.012 0.012 0.012 Open circuit 1.100 1.100 1.100 1.100 DC 0.012 0.012 0.012 0.012 Cummins Inc. Data and specification subject to change without notice ADS-211f (06/19) Alternator data sheet Frame size: UC3H Windings (@ 20°C) Stator resistance (Line to Line, Ohms) 0.0300 0.0260 0.0430 0.0300 Rotor resistance (Ohms) 1.8000 1.8000 1.8000 1.8000 Number of leads 12 12 6 12 * Lower broad range 110/190 thru 120/208, 220/380 thru 240/416. Cummins Inc. Data and specification subject to change without notice ADS-211.DOCX (10/17) Sound Data C125D6D QSB7-G5 NR3 60Hz Diesel A-weighted Sound Pressure Level @ 7 meters, dB(A) See notes 2, 5 and 7-11 listed below 8 Position (Note 2) Position Applied Average Configuration Exhaust Load 1 2 3 4 56 78 Standard – Infinite 100% 84 86 87 87 82 88 88 87 87 Unhoused Exhaust Standby F216-2 Weather 100% Mounted 86 86 82 86 83 88 82 85 85 Aluminum Standby F231-2 Sound 100% Attenuated Level 1, Mounted 83 79 73 74 74 74 74 80 78 Standby Aluminum F217-2 Sound F217-2 Sound 100% Attenuated Level 2, MouMountednted 7272 7272 7070 7272 7272 7272 7171 7272 7272 SStandbytandby AlAluminumuminum Average A-weighted Sound Pressure Level @ 1 meter, dB(A) See notes 1, 5 and 7-14 listed below Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) Overall Applied Sound Configuration Exhaust Load 16 31.5 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 16000 Pressure Level Standard – Infinite 100% N/A 45 68 80 88 91 91 90 88 85 90 98 Unhoused Exhaust Standby F216-2 Weather 100% Mounted N/A 42 67 82 89 88 89 87 84 79 83 95 Aluminum Standby F231-2 Sound 100% Attenuated Level 1, Mounted N/A 45 61 74 80 80 81 79 75 76 74 87 Standby Aluminum F217-2 Sound F217-2 Sound 100% Attenuated Level 2, MouMountednted N/A 4545 62 7272 7777 7676 7676 7575 7272 7171 66 83 SStandbytandby AlAluminumuminum A-weighted Sound Pressure Level @ Operator Location, dB(A) See notes 1, 3, 5 and 7-14 listed below Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) Overall Applied Sound Configuration Exhaust Load 16 31.5 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 16000 Pressure Level Standard – Infinite 100% N/A 42 68 79 84 89 89 90 88 88 91 97 Unhoused Exhaust Standby F216-2 100% Weather Mounted N/A 41 66 78 82 84 81 80 77 74 80 90 Standby Aluminum F231-2 Sound Attenuated 100% Mounted N/A 50 65 74 80 81 81 77 74 73 65 87 Level 1, Standby Aluminum F217-2 Sound F217-2 Sound Attenuated Attenuated 100% MountedMounted N/A 50 66 7575 80 7979 7878 7575 7272 7171 61 85 Level 2, SStandbytandby AluminumAluminum Cummins Inc. Data and specification subject to change without notice MSP-4007c (06/19) Sound Data C125D6D QSB7-G5 NR3 60Hz Diesel A-weighted Sound Power Level, dB(A) See notes 1, 3 and 6-14 listed below Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) Overall Applied Sound Configuration Exhaust Load 16 31.5 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 16000 Power Level Standard – Infinite 100% N/A 62 85 97 105 108 108 107 105 103 108 115 Unhoused Exhaust Standby F216-2 100% Weather Mounted N/A 60 84 100 106 106 107 104 101 97 100 113 Standby Aluminum F231-2 Sound Attenuated 100% Mounted N/A 63 79 92 98 98 99 97 93 94 92 105 Level 1, Standby Aluminum F217-2 Sound F217-2 Sound Attenuated Attenuated 100% MountedMounted N/A 6464 80 90 95 9494 9494 93 90 89 8484 102102 Level 2, SStandbytandby AluminumAluminum Exhaust Sound Power Level, dB(A) See notes 4 and 6-14 listed below Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) Overall Applied Sound Configuration Load 16 31.5 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 16000 Power Level Open Exhaust 100% N/A 62 94 108 116 117 114 112 112 104 91 122 (No Muffler) Standby Global Notes: 1. Sound pressure levels at 1 meter are measured per the requirements of ISO 3744, ISO 8528-10, and European Communities Directive 2000/14/EC as applicable. The microphone measurement locations are 1 meter from a reference parallelepiped just enclosing the generator set (enclosed or unenclosed). 2. Seven-meter measurement location 1 is 7 meters (23 feet) from the generator (alternator) end of the generator set, and the locations proceed counterclockwise around the generator set at 45° angles at a height of 1.2 meters (48 inches) above the ground surface. 3. Sound Power Levels are calculated according to ISO 3744, ISO 8528-10, and/or CE (European Union) requirements. 4. Exhaust Sound Levels are measured and calculated per ISO 6798, Annex A. 5. Reference Sound Pressure Level is 20 μPa 6. Reference Sound Power Level is 1 pW (10-12 Watt) 7. Sound data for remote-cooled generator sets are based on rated load without cooling fan noise. 8. Sound data for the generator set with infinite exhaust do not include the exhaust noise contribution 9. Published sound levels are measured at CE certified test site and are subject to instrumentation measurement, installation, and manufacturing variability. 10. Unhoused/Open configuration generator sets refers to generator sets with no sound enclosures of any kind. 11. Housed/Enclosed/Closed/Canopy configuration generator sets refer to generator sets that have noise reduction sound enclosure installed over the generator set and usually integrally attached to the skid base/base frame/fuel container base of the generator set. 12. Published sound levels meet the requirements India's Central Pollution Control Board (Ministry of Environment & Forests), vide GSR 371 (E), which states the A-weighted sound level at 1 meter from any diesel generator set up to a power output rating of 1000kVA shall not exceed 75 dB(A). 13. For updated noise pollution information for India see website: http://www.envfor.nic.in/legis/legis.html 14. Sound levels must meet India's Ambient Air Noise Quality Standards detailed for Daytime/Nighttime operation in Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000 Cummins Inc. Data and specification subject to change without notice MSP-4007c (06/19) Cooling System Data C125D6D High Ambient Air Temperature Radiator Cooling System Max Cooling @ Air Flow Static Restriction, Housed in Free Air, No Air Unhoused (inches water/mm water) Discharge Restriction Sound Sound Sound 0.0/0.0 0.25/6.4 0.5/12.7 0.75/19.1 1.0/25.4 Weather Level 1 LLevel 2evel 2 Fuel Rating Duty Maximum allowable ambient temperature, degree C Type (kW) 60 StandbyStandby 125125 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 DieselDiesel Hz Prime 112.5 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 Notes: 1. Data shown are anticipated cooling performance for typical generator set. 2. Cooling data is based on 1000 ft (305 m) site test location. 3. Generator set power output may need to be reduced at high ambient conditions. Consult generator set data sheet for derate schedules. 4. Cooling performance may be reduced due to several factors including but not limited to: Incorrect installation, improper operation, fouling of the cooling system, and other site installation variables. Cummins Inc. Data and specification subject to change without notice MCP-2047a (09/18) 2024 EPA Tier 3 Exhaust Emission Compliance Statement C125D6D Stationary Emergency 60 Hz Diesel Generator Set Compliance Information: The engine used in this generator set complies with Tier 3 emissions limit of U.S. EPA New Source Performance Standards for stationary emergency engines under the provisions of 40 CFR 60 Subpart IIII. Engine Manufacturer: Cummins Inc. EPA Certificate Number:EPA Certificate Number: RCEXL0409AAD-018RCEXL0409AAD-018 Effective Date: 5/10/2023 Date Issued: 5/10/2023 EPA Engine Family (Cummins Emissions Family): RCEXL0409AAD Engine Information: Model: QSB7-G5 NR3 Bore: 4.21 in. (106.9 mm) Engine Nameplate HP: 324 Stroke: 4.88 in. (124 mm) Type: 4 Cycle, In-line, 6 Cylinder Diesel Displacement: 408 cu. in. (7 liters) Aspiration: Turbocharged and Charge Air Cooled Compression ratio: 17.2:1 Emission Control Device: Exhaust stack diameter: 4 in. (101.6) Diesel Fuel Emission Limits D2 Cycle Exhaust Emissions Grams per BHP-hr Grams per kWm-hr NOX + NOX + CO PM CO PM NMHC NMHC EPA Emissions Limit 3.0 2.6 0.15 4.0 3.5 0.20 Test methods: EPA emissions recorded per 40 CFR Part 60, 89, 1039, 1065 and weighted at load points prescribed in the regulations for constant speed engines. Diesel fuel specifications: Cetane number: 40-50, Reference: ASTM D975 No. 2-D, 300-500 ppm Sulphur Reference conditions: Air Inlet Temperature: 25 °C (77 °F), Fuel Inlet Temperature: 40 °C (104 °F). Barometric Pressure: 100 kPa (29.53 in Hg), Humidity: 10.7 g/kg (75 grains H2O/lb) of dry air; required for NOx correction, Restrictions: Intake Restriction set to a maximum allowable limit for clean filter; Exhaust Back Pressure set to a maximum allowable limit.. Tests conducted using alternate test methods, instrumentation, fuel or reference conditions can yield different results. Engine operation with excessive air intake or exhaust restriction beyond published maximum limits, or with improper maintenance, may result in elevated emission levels. Cummins Inc. Data and specification subject to change without notice EPA-2032g (10/23) Exhaust Emission Data Sheet C125D6D 60 Hz Diesel Generator Set Engine Information: Model: Cummins QSB7-G5 NR3 Bore: 4.21 in. (106.9 mm) Type: 4 cycle, in-line, 6 cylinder diesel Stroke: 4.88 in. (123.9 mm) Aspiration: Turbocharged and Charge Air Displacement: 408 cu. in. (6.7 liters) Cooled Compression Ratio: 17.2:1 Exhaust Stack Diameter: 4 in (101.6 mm) Emission Control Device: Turbocharged and Charge Air Cooled 1/4 1/2 3/4 FullFull Full Performance Data Standby Standby Standby Standby Prime BHP @ 1800 RPM (60 Hz) 74.2 116 158 200.9 182.8 Fuel Consumption (gal/Hr) 4.2 6.1 7.9 9.8 9.0 Exhaust Gas Flow (CFM) 588.2 840.7 1081.9 1166.0 1138.9 Exhaust Gas Temperature (°F) 656.3 738.8 800.4 837.9 823.5 Exhaust Emission Data HC (Total Unburned Hydrocarbons) 0.33 0.22 0.13 0.08 0.10 NOx (Oxides of Nitrogen as NO2) 1.84 1.88 1.93 2.43 2.20 CO (Carbon Monoxide) 1.97 1.42 0.88 0.58 0.70 PM (Particulate Matter) 0.18 0.14 0.10 0.07 0.08 Smoke (Bosch) 0.75 0.70 0.65 0.54 0.59 Sulfur Dioxide (SO2) 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.16 0.16 All values (except smoke) are cited: g/BHP-hr Test Conditions Data is representative of steady-state engine speed (± 25 RPM) at designated genset loads. Pressures, temperatures, and emission rates were stabilized. Fuel Specification: ASTM D975 No. 2-D diesel fuel with 0.03-0.05% sulfur content (by weight), and 40-48 cetane number. Fuel Temperature: 99 ± 9 °F (at fuel pump inlet) Intake Air Temperature: 77 ± 9 °F Barometric Pressure: 29.6 ± 1 in. Hg Humidity: NOx measurement corrected to 75 grains H2O/lb dry air Reference Standard: ISO 8178 The NOx, HC, CO and PM emission data tabulated here are representative of test data taken from a single engine under the test conditions shown above. Data for the other components are estimated. These data are subjected to instrumentation and engine-to-engine variability. Field emission test data are not guaranteed to these levels. Actual field test results may vary due to test site conditions, installation, fuel specification, test procedures and instrumentation. Engine operation with excessive air intake or exhaust restriction beyond published maximum limits, or with improper maintenance, may results in elevated emission levels. Cummins Inc. Data and specification subject to change without notice EDS-3043a (09/18) Prototype Test Support (PTS) 60 Hz test summary Generator set models Representative prototype C125D6DC125D6D Model: C200D6D C150D6D Engine: QSB7-G5 NR3 C175D6D Alternator: UCDI274K The following summarizes prototype testing conducted on the designated representative prototype of the specified models. This testing is conducted to verify the complete generator set electrical and mechanical design integrity. Prototype testing is conducted only on generator sets not sold as new equipment. Maximum surge power: 211.5 kW Steady state performance: The generator set was evaluated to determine the stated The generator set was tested to verify steady state operating maximum surge power. performance. It was within the specified maximum limits. Alternator temperature rise: Voltage regulation: ± 0.5% The highest rated temperature rise (20 °C) test result are Random voltage variation: ± 0.5% reported as follows to verify that worst case temperature Frequency regulation: Isochronous rises do not exceed allowable NEMA MG1 limits for class H Random frequency variation: ± 0.25% insulation. Tests were conducted per IEEE 115, rise by resistance and embedded detector, with rated voltages. Only the highest temperatures are reported. Transient performance: The generator set was tested with the listed alternator to verify single step loading capability as required by NFPA 110. Torsional analysis and testing: Voltage and frequency response on load addition or rejection The generator set with UCDI274K was tested to verify that were evaluated. The following results were recorded at 0.8 the design is not subjected to harmful torsional stresses. A power factor: spectrum analysis of the transducer output was conducted over the speed range of 1710 to 1890 RPM. Full load acceptance: Voltage dip: 29.4% Cooling system: 49 °C ambient 0.5 in H2O restriction Recovery time: 3.3 seconds Frequency dip: 20.3% The cooling system was tested to determine ambient Recovery time: 4.4 seconds temperature and static restriction capabilities. The test was performed at full rated load elevated ambient temperature Full load rejection: under static restriction conditions. Voltage rise: 32.7% Recovery time: 1.4 seconds Durability: Frequency rise: 11% The generator set was subjected to a 500 hour endurance Recovery time: 2.1 seconds test replicating field duty cycles operating at variable load All data based on 0.8 power factor: up to the standby rating based upon MIL-STD-705 to verify structural soundness and durability of the design. Harmonic analysis: Electrical and mechanical strength: (per MIL-STD-705B, Method 601.4) The generator set was tested to several single phase and Line to Line Line to Neutral three phase faults to verify that the generator can safely withstand the forces associated with short circuit Harmonic No load Full load No load Full load conditions. The generator set was capable of producing full rated output at the conclusion of the testing. 3 0.0 0.1 0.2 1.1 5 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 7 0.7 2.2 0.7 2.2 9 0.0 0.0 0.7 1.2 11 0.0 0.2 0.1 0.2 13 0.1 0.1 0.0 0.1 15 0.0 0.0 0.2 0.4 Cummins Inc. Data and specification subject to change without notice PTS-636a (09/18) Please see CB outline drawing for lug and termination details Please see CB outline drawing for lug and termination details 7.52 [191] .20 [5.1] 6.22 (Mounting Hole) [158] 1.3 [33] 1.38 1.38 [35] [35] 2.06 [52.4] 4.12 [104.7] .16 [4] 1.38 .86 [35] [21.9] 1.37 [34.8] .73 1.76 [18.6] [44.7] 2.6 .99 [66.1] [25.2] 5.57 [141.5] 5.74 [145.8] 6.67 [169] in. [mm] .53 [13.4] 1.06 [27] 5.0 [127] 3.44 3.24 2.87 3.24 3.74 [87.4] [82.4] [72.9] [82.4] [95.1] 1.91 4.25 [48.5] [108] ALL DIMENSIONS ARE APPROXIMATE.Please see CB outline drawing ALSO REFER TO TECHNICAL DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTATION. for lug and termination details PowerPactâ„¢ H-, J-, and L-Frame Circuit Breakers J- Trip Units Micrologicâ„¢ 3 Trip Units Micrologic 3 trip units can be used on PowerPact H-, J-, and L-Frame circuit breakers with performance levels D/G/J/L. 3.2 30 3540 4 8 16 4 6 8 tr 25 45 2 3 10 16 20 50 1 2 12 15 60 .5 16 1.5 15 Ir (A) tr @ 6 Ir Ii (x In) Ir Ii They provide: • standard protection of distribution cables • indication of: — overloads (using LEDs) — overload tripping (using the SDx relay module). Circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic 3 trip units can be used to protect distribution systems supplied by transformers. Protection Settings are made using the adjustment rotary switches. Overloads: Long time protection (Ir) Inverse time protection against overloads with an adjustable current pick-up Ir set using a rotary switch and an adjustable time delay tr. Neutral protection • On 3-pole L-frame circuit breakers, neutral protection is not possible. • On four-pole L-frame circuit breakers, neutral protection may be set using a three-position switch: — switch position 4P 3D: neutral unprotected — switch position 4P 3D + N/2: neutral protection at half the value of the phase pick-up, (0.5 x Ir) — switch position 4P 4D: neutral fully protected at Ir 06114622 200225250 4 816 4 5 6 175 300 2 3 8 16 150 350 112 0 125 450 .5 16 1.5 12 Ir (A) Tr @ 6 Ir Ii (x In) Ii Indicators Front indicators • The green “Ready” LED blinks slowly when the electronic trip unit is ready to provide protection. It Front Indicators indicates the trip unit is operating correctly. • Orange overload pre-alarm LED: steady on when I > 90% Ir • Red overload LED: steady on when I > 105% Ir 06114621 Remote indicators An overload trip signal can be remotely checked by installing an SDx relay module inside the circuit breaker. This module receives the signal from the Micrologic electronic trip unit through an optical link and makes it available on the terminal block. The signal is cleared when the circuit breaker is reclosed. See page 94. x SDX Module 58 05/2012 â„¢ © 2011–2012 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved PowerPactâ„¢ H-, J-, and L-Frame Circuit Breakers Trip Units Table 50: Micrologicâ„¢ 3 Trip Unit Ratings In at 104°F (40°C)1 60 A 100 A 150 A 250 A 400 A 600 A250 A H-frame X X X Circuit Breaker J-frame X L-frame X X X Micrologic 3.2 / 3.3 trip units L Long-time protection Ir Value depending on sensor rating (In) and setting on rotary switch In =60 A Ir = 1520 25 30 35 40455060 Pick-Up (A) In = 100 A Ir = 3540 45 50 60 708090100 Tripping between In = 150 A Ir = 50 607080 90 100 110 125 150 1.05 and 1.20 Ir In = 250 A Ir = 70 80 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 In = 400 A Ir = 125 150 175 200 225 250 300 350 400 In = 600 A Ir = 200 225 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 tr 0.5 124 816 Time Delay (s) 1.5 x Ir 15 25 50 100 200 400 Accuracy 0 to -20% 6 x Ir 0.5 124 816 7.2 x Ir 0.35 0.7 1.4 2.8 5.5 11 Thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping I Instantaneous 60 A 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 15 100 A 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 15 150 A 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 15 Ii x Pick-up (A) 250 A 1.5 234 56 8 10 12 accuracy ± 15% 400 A 1.5 234 56 8 10 12 600 A 1.5 234 56 8 10 11 Non-tripping time 10 ms Maximum break time 50 ms for I > 1.5 Ii Micrologic 3.2S / 3.3S trip unitsMicrologic 3.2S / L Long-time protection Ir Value depending on sensor rating (In) and setting on rotary switch In =60 A Ir = 1520 25 30 35 40455060 Pick-Up (A) In = 100 A Ir = 3540 45 50 60 708090100 Tripping between In = 150 A Ir = 50 607080 90 100 110 125 150 1.05 and 1.20 Ir In = 250 A= 250 A Ir == 70 80 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 In = 400 A Ir = 125 150 175 200 225 250 300 350 400 In = 600 A Ir = 200 225 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 tr non-adjustable Time Delay (s) 1.5 x Ir 400 Accuracy 0 to -20% 6 x Ir 16 7.2 x Ir 11 Thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping S Short-time protection Pick-up (A) Isd - Ir x... 1.5 234 56 7 8 10 accuracy ± 10% tsd non-adjustable Time delay (ms) Non-tripping time 20 Maximum break time 80 I Instantaneous Ii x In 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 15 Pick-up (A) Non-tripping time 10 ms accuracy ± 15% Maximum break time 50 ms for I > 1.5 Ii 1 If the trip units are used in high-temperature environments, the Micrologic trip unit setting must take into account the thermal limitations of the circuit breaker. See the temperature derating information on page 126. 59 © 2011–2012 Schneider Electric â„¢ 05/2012 All Rights Reserved MICROLOGICâ„¢ ELECTRONIC TRIP UNITS Micrologicâ„¢ 3.2/3.2S/5.2A or E/6.2A or E2/3.2S/ Instantaneous Trip Curve 250A 250A J-Frame The time-current curve information is to be used for application and coordination purposes only. Notes: 1. There is a thermal-imaging effect that can act to shorten the long-time delay. The thermal imaging effect comes into play if a current above the long-time delay pickup value exists for a time and then is cleared by the tripping of a downstream device or the circuit breaker itself. A subsequent overload will cause the circuit breaker to trip in a shorter time than normal. The amount of time delay reduction is inverse to the amount of time that has elapsed since the previous overload. Approximately 20 minutes is required between overloads to completely reset thermal-imaging. 2. Total clearing times shown include the response times of the trip unit, the circuit breaker opening, and the extinction of the current. 3. In = Maximum dial setting of Ir. 250A J-Frame: In = 250A = Max Ir setting Curves apply from -35ºC to +70ºC (-31ºF to +158ºF) ambient temperature. Drawing No. S1A8146900 © 2011 Schneider Electric all rights reserved March 2011 MICROLOGICâ„¢ ELECTRONIC TRIP UNITS Micrologicâ„¢ 3.2S Long Time/3.2S Short Time Trip Curve 250A 250A J-Frame The time-current curve information is to be used for application and coordination purposes only. Notes: 1. There is a thermal-imaging effect that can act to shorten the long-time delay. The thermal imaging effect comes into play if a current above the long-time delay pickup value exists for a time and then is cleared by the tripping of a downstream device or the circuit breaker itself. A subsequent overload will cause the circuit breaker to trip in a shorter time than normal. The amount of time delay reduction is inverse to the amount of time that has elapsed since the previous overload. Approximately 20 minutes is required between overloads to completely reset thermal-imaging. 2. Total clearing times shown include the response times of the trip unit, the circuit breaker opening, and the extinction of the current. Curves apply from -35ºC to +70ºC (-31ºF to +158ºF) ambient temperature. Drawing No. S1A8146800 © 2011 Schneider Electric all rights reserved March 2011 Specification sheet Dual wall sub-base diesel fuel tanks - 10-200 kW generator sets Description ® Cummins offers two series of fuel tanks (basic series and regional series) for the 10~125 kW diesel generator sets. The “basic” series of fuel tanks provide economical solutions for areas with no or minimal local/regional code requirements on diesel fuel tanks. The footprint of “basic” tanks matches the generator set’s footprint. The “regional” series of fuel tanks provide flexible and upgradable solutions for areas with extensive local/regional code requirements on diesel fuel tanks. The footprint of the “regional” series of fuel tanks extends beyond the generator set to allow room for installation of optional features at factory or accessories in the field for meeting local/regional code requirements or customer specification on diesel fuel tanks. All fuel tanks and optional features are compatible with factory installed enclosures. These tanks are constructed of heavy gauge steel and include an internally reinforced baffle structure for supporting the generator set. The fuel tank design features fewer seams and welds for better corrosion resistance performance. These tanks are pre-treated with a conversion coating and then finished with a textured powder paint. The paint has superior UV and chemical resistance with best-in-class adhesion, flexibility, and durability to resist chipping and substrate corrosion. Both interior compartments are treated with a rust preventative for extended corrosion protection. These tanks are UL and ULC Listed as secondary containment generator base tanks. Inner and outer containments are leak checked per UL and ULC testing procedures to ensure their integrity. These fuel tanks are offered in various sizes to satisfy different fuel capacities requirements. Compatible generator set model Engine D1703M V2203M 4BT3.3-G5 4BTAA3.3-G7 QSB5-G5 QSB7-G5G5 C10D6 C20D6 C25D6 C50D6 C50D6C C125D6D C15D6 C30D6 C60D6 C60D6C C150D6D Generator set C35D6 C80D6C C175D6D model names C40D6 C100D6C C200D6D C125D6C power.cummins.com ©2023 Cummins Inc. | NAAC-5868-EN PD00001466 (06/23) Regional fuel tanks Standard features: Fuel level gauge g - Provides direct reading of fuel level. UL 142 and ULC-S601 listed - Minimum 110% ToTopp mounted.mounted. secondary IBC 2012 and 2015 certified - All optional Electric fuel level sender with gauge - Allows features are seismically certified with this range of tanks remote electrical monitoring of fuel tank level. Flying and generator sets. Requires factory-installed 2 ft vent leads for customer connection. extensions or higher. Tank to foundation clearance - 2-inch bolt-thru risers allow UL 142 & ULC-S601 listed - Minimum 125% visual inspection under tank including rodent barrier. secondary containment capacity. Spill containment box for fuel fill Spill containment box for fuel fill - 5 gallon capacity- 5 gallon capacity g NFPA & IFC - Capable of meeting NFPA 30, NFPA witwithh inteintegral drain (to tank). Lockable lid. gral drain (to tank). Lockable lid. 110, and IFC codes with available factory-installed Overfill prevention valve Overfill prevention valve - Shuts off fuel flow during fillingg optional features. at approximately 95% full*. Includes fill down tube, as at approximately 95% full*. Includes fill down tube, as Emergency pressure relief vents - Ensure adequate needed, to terminate within 6” of the bottom of the fuel needed, to terminate within 6” of the bottom of the fuel ventilation of the primary and secondary tank compartments tank. Uses a 2 inch type “F” cam lock adapter for filling.tank. Uses a 2 inch type “F” cam lock adapter for filling. under extreme temperature and emergency conditions. High fuel switch High fuel switch - Activates at 90% of full fuel level. - Activates at 90% of full fuel level. Normal atmospheric vent - “Mushroom” style vent FlyingFlying leads for customer connection. leads for customer connection. ensures adequate venting of the primary tank during fill, High fuel alarm panel Higgph fuel alarm panel - Provides audible - Provides audible & visual & visual generator set running, and temperature variations. Raised alarmalarm when fuel level reaches 90% of full fuel level. when fuel level reaches 90% of full fuel level. above fuel fill. Fill drop tube - Terminates fuel fill location within 6” of Raised fuel fill - Includes lockable sealed fuel cap. the bottom of the fuel tank. Lifting eyes - Allow lifting of fuel tank with generator Vent extensions Vent extensions - Terminate normal and emergency gy set installed. vventsents (both primary and secondary) a minimum of 12 ft(p y(both primary and secondary) a minimum of 12 ft Optional features: aboabove the bottom of tank. ve the bottom of tank. Secondary containment basin switch (rupture switch) Secondary containment basin switch (rupture switch)y( p - Seismic vent extensions - 2 ft normal and emergency Activates a warning in the event of a primary tank leak.Activates a warning in the event of a primary tank leak. (both primary & secondary) extensions to meet SSide Mounted. ide Mounted. IBC/OSHPD seismic requirements. Low fuel level switch Low fuel level switch - Activates a warning when 40%- Activates a warning when 40% of the fuel is left in the tank.the fuel is left in the tank. * The OFPV inherently shuts off fuel at approximately 2” below the top of the fuel tank. Some tanks will shut off below this 95% fill level. *Picture is for reference only. See outline drawing for tank specific information by model. power.cummins.com ©2023 Cummins Inc. | NAAC-5868-EN PD00001466 (06/23) Regional tanks Generator Actual set Fuel run Actual Standby consumption Tank Minimum Tank Nominal Tank time run power Generator Engine (100% load, feature run time dimensions dry usable w/o time output set model model Standby) code feature (L x W x H) weight* volume OFPV w/OFPV kW gal/hr hr inch lbs gal hr hr C301-2 24 180x40x21 1477 351 34 30 C301-2 24 180x40x21 1477 351 34 30 C303-2 48 180x40x42 2302 737 72 69 125 C125D6D 125 C125D6D 10.1 10.1 C305-2 72 180x40x42 2302 737 72 69 C307-2 96 180x65.5x35.3 3552 1055 104 98 C301-2 24 180x40x21 1477 351 30 26 150 C150D6D 11.7 C303-2 48 180x40x42 2302 737 63 59 QSB7-G5 QSB7-G5 C305-2 72 180x65.5x35.3 3552 1055 90 84 C301-2 24 180x40x21 1477 351 26 23 175 C175D6D 13.3 C303-2 48 180x40x42 2302 737 55 52 C305-2 72 180x65.5x35.3 3552 1055 79 74 C301-2 24 180x40x21 1477 351 24 21 200 C200D6D 14.9 C303-2 48 180x40x42 2302 737 49 47 C305-2 72 180x65.5x35.3 3552 1055 72 66 Certifications/standards/codes UL 142 Listed - Cummins dual wall sub-base tanks are UL Listed and constructed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 142 “steel aboveground tanks for flammable and combustible liquids,” as a “secondary containment generator base tank” NFPA - Cummins tanks are built in accordance with all applicable NFPA codes: - NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids code - NFPA 37 - Standard for Installation and use of Stationary Combustible Engine and Gas Turbines - NFPA 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems ISO9001 - This product was designed and manufactured in facilities certified to ISO9001. ULC - Cummins tanks are built in accordance with all applicable ULC codes For more information contact your local Cummins distributor or visit power.cummins.com ©2023 Cummins Inc. All rights reserved. Cummins is a registered trademark of Cummins Inc. PowerCommand, AmpSentry, InPower and “Our energy working for you.” are trademarks of Cummins Inc. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. Specifications are subject to change without notice. NAAC-5868-EN PD00001466 (06/23) Specification Sheet Battery Charger-6 Amp A045D925 60Hz/50Hz Description Features Cummins® fully automatic battery chargers are Protection – Surge protected to IEEE and EN designed to both recharge your batteries, and extend standards. All models include single pole cartridge your battery’s life in applications where it is stored for type fuses mounted on the printed circuit board to long periods of time. This charger can handle poor protect against input or output overcurrent. power quality, exposure to extreme weather and Lightweight and Silent – Lighter than transformer rough handling. types, completely silent but still provides full output To maximize battery life, a 3-stage charging cycle is when overloaded outlets drop AC voltage below the implemented. The three charging stages are bulk normal 115V. stage, absorption stage and maintenance stage. Monitoring – Status LED indicators are provided to During the bulk stage, the charger uses its full amp show the condition or charging status of the battery. output to do the heaviest charging, quickly bringing When the red LED is on, it indicates that the battery your battery to about 75% of capacity. In the is discharged and is recharging at the ‘BULK’ rate. absorption stage, the current slows, adjusting for When both the red and green LEDs are on, the maximum charging efficiency while it gently tops off battery is charging at the ‘midrange’ rate. When the the battery to about 98% of capacity. green LED is on, the battery is 90% charged and During the maintenance stage, a lower, closely- ready for use. regulated, constant voltage is applied to maintain full Construction – Made using epoxy-potted cases charge and prevent discharge. making it the ultimate in durability, completely Unlike some “trickle chargers,” the float charger waterproof and able to withstand numerous caustic won’t apply more current than necessary to maintain chemicals and gases, as well as being shockproof. full charge. Batteries can be connected indefinitely, Fault Indication – The charger senses and without harm; in fact, the float charge extends indicates the following fault conditions: Defective or battery life. damaged cells, under-voltage at the battery, battery drawing more current than charger can replace, loss of power or extremely low AC voltage at the charger, other battery fault conditions and charger failure. Compatibility – Works with Sealed Lead Acid (SLA), Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) and Gel type batteries. Low Electromagnetic and Radio Frequency Interference – This product meets FCC class B for conducted and radiated emissions. Listed – This product is UL listed according to the UL 1236 Standard. Warranty – This product has a two-year warranty power.cummins.com ©2022 Cummins Inc. | NAAC-5943-EN PDA059R693 (03/22) Specifications Performance and Physical Characteristics Output: Nominal voltage 12 VDC Float voltage – 12 V batteries 13.0-13.6 VDC at 0-2 amps Maximum output current 6 A @ 12 VDC nom Input: Voltage AC 115, 208, 240 ±10%, 90-135 Frequency 60 Hz ±5% Battery: Maximum battery size 150 Amp Hours Maximum recharge time 20 hours Approximate net weight 4 lbs. (1.81 Kg) Approximate dimensions: height x width x 2.25 x 6.4 x 3.5 (57 x 162 x 89) depth-in(mm) Ambient temperature operation: At full rated -40°F to 122 °F (-40 °C to 50 °C) output Warning: Back feed to a utility system can cause electrocution and/or property damage. Do not connect generator sets to any building electrical system except through an approved device or after building main switch is open. Warning: For professional use only. Must be installed by a qualified service technician. Improper installation presents hazards of electrical shock and improper operation, resulting in severe personal injury and/or property damage. For more information contact your local Cummins distributor or visit power.cummins.com ©2022 Cummins Inc. All rights reserved. Cummins is a registered trademark of Cummins Inc. PowerCommand, AmpSentry, InPower and “Our energy working for you.” are trademarks of Cummins Inc. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. Specifications are subject to change without notice. NAAC-5943-EN PDA059R693 (03/22) Specification sheet PowerCommand® input/output expansion module AUX 101 and AUX 102 Description Features The PowerCommand AUX 101 input/output module and the Up to sixteen (16) configurable Form-C relays provide AUX 102 input/output expansion module provide up to easy control of system equipment such as lamps, sixteen (16) relay output and up to twelve (12) louvers, motors and pumps. LED status of each relay. discrete/analog inputs for auxiliary control and monitoring of Up to twelve (12) configurable discrete inputs for the power system. monitoring equipment status and faults. Equipment Analog/discrete inputs can be used for system fault status and faults will be annunciated. expansion and/or generator set metering. Up to eight (8) analog inputs. Analog inputs can be Relay outputs can be used for controlling equipment such as assigned one of seven preprogrammed functions: motors, louvers, lamps, fans and pumps. The relays may be Oil temperature configured individually from the genset control operator interface or using InPowerâ„¢ software. Exhaust temperature The AUX 101 and AUX 102 modules are compatible with Fuel level genset controls supporting a PCCNet network and require a Ambient temperature twisted pair connection. This includes the PCC 1301 control. Alternator RTD AUX 101 - Contains eight (8) Form-C relay output sets and Speed bias (for manual paralleling only) eight (8) discrete/analog inputs. Voltage bias (for manual paralleling only) AUX 102 - Easily connects to the AUX 101 to provide an additional eight (8) Form-C relay outputs and (4) additional Two 5 VDC voltage sources for use with active discrete inputs. senders. Four programmable current sources for use with resistive senders. Two status LEDs: DS1 (green) indicates the AUX 101 is connected to the network and operating normally DS2 (red) indicates the AUX 101 has lost its connection or is not connected to the network Device number indicator. Seven segment LED used to uniquely define more than one AUX 101 on the same network. May be connected at any point in the PCCNet network. Plug-and-play networking - No binding required. Pluggable terminal blocks allow easy one-time wiring. Less wiring makes installation and system upgrades quick and easy PowerCommand controls are supported by a worldwide network of independent distributors who provide parts, service and warranty support. UL Listed and labeled; CSA certified; CE and UKCA compliant. power.cummins.com ©2017 Cummins Inc. | S-1503-UKCA-UPDATE (02/22) Specifications Relay ratings (AUX 101) Signal requirements Normally closed: 3 A at 250 VAC or 30 VDC Network connections: RS485, twisted-pair 78 kbps Normally open: 5 A at 250 VAC or 30 VDC Control power: 5-40 VDC Relay ratings (AUX 102) Current 2 A at 125 VAC, 2 A at 30 VDC 200 mA typical at 12 V, no active relay Input ratings (AUX 101) 100 mA typical at 24 V, no active relay Active low inputs 800 mA at 12 V, all relays active Maximum voltage 24 VDC (inputs 1 - 6) Terminations for control power accept wire up to 16 ga. Maximum voltage 40 VDC (inputs 7 - 8) Environment Network length The AUX 101 and AUX 102 are designed for proper Maximum 1219 m (4000 ft) operation in ambient temperatures from -40 °C to +60 °C (-40 °F to +140 °F) and for storage from -40 °C to +80 °C Approved wiring (-40 °F to +176 °F). Modules will operate with humidity up Cat 4 or Cat 5 (stranded) to 95%, non-condensing Configurations All configurations are stored in the main genset control and Relay outputs are modified from the generator set control HMI or using Outputs can be configured to energize on occurrence of InPower PC software. any event or fault code supported by the genset control. The relay outputs default to the following: Discrete/analog inputs: Each AUX 101 input can be configured as discrete or AUX 101 analog. AUX 102 inputs are discrete only. Discrete inputs 1 - Low oil pressure have the following configuration options: 2 - High engine temperature Active high or active low 3 - Charger AC failure Event, warning or shutdown 4 - Battery (low, weak, high) Programmable text (displayed on genset HMI and 5 - Engine overspeed InPower software) 6 -Fail-to-start Analog inputs have a set of predefined functions and can only be configured on certain module inputs. Below is a list 7 - Not-in-auto of functions and possible module inputs: 8 - Generator set running Input 1 - Voltage bias (-3 to +3 VDC)* Input 2 - Speed bias (0 to +5 VDC)* AUX 102 Inputs 3 – 6 9 - Pre-low oil pressure Oil temperature 10 - Pre-high engine temperature 11 - Low coolant level* Exhaust temperature 12 - Low fuel level* Ambient air temperature 13 - Low coolant temperature Fuel level 14 - Common alarm Alternator temperature 15 - Not defined Inputs are defaulted to disabled 16 - Not defined * Please note that speed and voltage bias interfaces are for manual paralleling only and must not be used with automatic paralleling controls. power.cummins.com ©2017 Cummins Inc. | S-1503-UKCA-UPDATE (02/22) Dimensions Ordering information Part number Description 0541-1291 AUX 101 Digital Input/output Module - Base – PCC 1301 0184-0263 AUX 101 Digital Input/output Module - Base – PCC 1301 on DN and GN model generator sets 0630-3142 AUX 102 Digital Input/output Module wiring diagram - Instruction sheet C693 0541-0772 AUX 102 Digital Input/output Module - Expansion PCCNet logo Look for this logo on spec sheets of PCCNet compatible devices. For more information contact your local Cummins distributor or visit power.cummins.com ©2017 Cummins Inc. All rights reserved. Cummins is a registered trademark of Cummins Inc. PowerCommand, AmpSentry, InPower and “Our energy working for you.” are trademarks of Cummins Inc. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. Specifications are subject to change without notice. S-1503-UKCA-UPDATE (02/22) PLEASE SEE ADDED NOTE PLEASE SEE ADDED NOTE PLEASE SEE ADDED NOTE NOTE: THIS DRAWING IS NOT TO BE USED FOR ANY STUB UP DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION. PLEASE REFER TO THE FOUNDATION DRAWING FOR EXACT STUB UP DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION. Drawing Name: A060C859 Revision: A Part Name: A060C858 Revision: A ECO-176532 Sheet 1 of 3 Drawing Name: A060C859 Revision: A Part Name: A060C858 Revision: A ECO-176532 Sheet 2 of 3 Drawing Name: A060C610 Revision: B Part Name: A060C609 Revision: B ECO-181040 Sheet 1 of 3 Drawing Name: A060C610 Revision: B Part Name: A060C609 Revision: B ECO-181040 Sheet 2 of 3 Drawing Name: A057P199 Revision: A Part Name: A057P198 Revision: A ECO-170441 Sheet 1 of 4 Drawing Name: A057P199 Revision: A Part Name: A057P198 Revision: A ECO-170441 Sheet 2 of 4 CSSNA POWERGEN Drawing Name: A060G757 Revision: A Part Name: A060G756 Revision: A ECO-176532 Sheet 1 of 4 Drawing Name: A060G757 Revision: A Part Name: A060G756 Revision: A ECO-176532 Sheet 2 of 4 Regulatory Review and Approval is required prior to changing this item per Drawing Name: A055B604 Revision: E PGG 1-01-01-116. This item impacts compliance with these External Regulations: Part Name: A055B603 Revision: E UL,CSA ECO-181477 Sheet 1 of 7 Regulatory Review and Approval is required prior to changing this item per Drawing Name: A055B604 Revision: E PGG 1-01-01-116. This item impacts compliance with these External Regulations: Part Name: A055B603 Revision: E UL,CSA ECO-181477 Sheet 2 of 7 Regulatory Review and Approval is required prior to changing this item per Drawing Name: A055B604 Revision: E PGG 1-01-01-116. This item impacts compliance with these External Regulations: Part Name: A055B603 Revision: E UL,CSA ECO-181477 Sheet 5 of 7 Regulatory Review and Approval is required prior to changing this item per Drawing Name: A058C560 Revision: B PGG 1-01-01-116. This item impacts compliance with these External Regulations: Part Name: A058C559 Revision: B IBC,OSHPD ECO-182667 Sheet 1 of 7 Regulatory Review and Approval is required prior to changing this item per Drawing Name: A058C560 Revision: B PGG 1-01-01-116. This item impacts compliance with these External Regulations: Part Name: A058C559 Revision: B IBC,OSHPD ECO-182667 Sheet 2 of 7 Regulatory Review and Approval is required prior to changing this item per Drawing Name: A058C560 Revision: B PGG 1-01-01-116. This item impacts compliance with these External Regulations: Part Name: A058C559 Revision: B IBC,OSHPD ECO-182667 Sheet 4 of 7 Regulatory Review and Approval is required prior to changing this item per Drawing Name: A058C560 Revision: B PGG 1-01-01-116. This item impacts compliance with these External Regulations: Part Name: A058C559 Revision: B IBC,OSHPD ECO-182667 Sheet 6 of 7 CSSNA POWER GEN CSSNA POWER GEN PowerCommand® X-Series Transfer Switch PowerCommand®80 Control Automatic (Open/Closed Transition) Non-Automatic 40 A - 800 A Description The X-Series transfer switches are designed for operation and switching of electrical loads between primary and alternate power sources. They can be used in utility-generator set, utility-utility, generator set-generator set, or three- source system (dual standby) application types. The X-Series transfer switches are suitable for use in emergency, legally required and optional standby applications. The transfer switch monitors both power sources, signals the generator set to start and automatically transfers the load to the alternate power source. When the preferred power source returns and has stabilized, the load is automatically transferred back. The X-Series transfer switches are available in closed transition operations. By briefly paralleling the two sources (for 100 ms or less), the transfer from the alternate source back to the normal source occurs without power interruption to the loads. Features Withstand and Closing Ratings (WCR) –The X-Series Advanced transfer switch mechanism – Patented transfer switches have the highest UL1008 0.05 s (3 mechanism design allows for high survivability in extreme cycle) Time Duration and 0.5 s (30 cycle) Short-Time fault current conditions. Actuator designed for high ratings in the industry. The high ratings provide the strength locking capability, ensuring electrical contacts freedom to use any upstream overcurrent protective remain closed when needed to be closed. device to protect the transfer switch which vastly simplies Main contacts – Heavy-duty silver alloy contacts used the task of power system selective coordination. with multi-leaf arc chutes are rated for motor loads or total PowerCommand®80 control –A sophisticated, fully system load transfer. featured microprocessor-based control with LED backlit Ease of service and access – Built-in plug-and-play colored LCD display and tactile-feel soft-switches for control with minimized point-to-point connections and easy operation and screen navigation. compatible terminal markings simplify servicing. Access 3-Position mechanism –The 3-position mechanism space is ample. Door-mounted controls are field- allows for independent source actuation (i.e. source programmable; no special tools are required. transfer is not dependent on the position of the opposing Complete product line – Cummins is a single source source). The transfer switch is either closed on Source supplier with full scope of systems offering, integration and 1, closed on Source 2 or in a center off, neutral position capability. (not closed on either source). Thus, provides safe transfer operation for large stored energy loads by allowing the Warranty and service - Products are backed by a residual voltage to decay to a safe level before transfer. comprehensive warranty and a worldwide network of distributors with factory-trained service technicians. S-6563 (Issued: 08/2022) cummins.com Model naming structure Transfer switch mechanism • Transfer switch mechanism is electrically operated and mechanically held in the Source 1 and Source 2positions. The transfer switch incorporates electrical and mechanical interlocks for open and programmed transition only to prevent inadvertent interconnection of the sources. • Independent break-before-make action is used for both 3-pole and 4-pole / simultaneously switched neutral. This design allows use of sync check operation when required, or control of the operating speed of the transfer switch for proper transfer of motor and rectifier-based loads (programmed transition feature). For closed transition, make-before-break action with the use of sync check allows for uninterrupted power when transferring between available sources. • True 4-pole switching allows for proper ground (earth) fault sensing and consistent, reliable operation for the life of the transfer switch. The neutral poles of the transfer switch have the same ratings as the phase poles and are operated by a common crossbar mechanism, eliminating the possibility of incorrect neutral operation at any point in the operating cycle, or due to failure of a neutral operator. • High pressure silver alloy contacts resist burning and pitting. Separate arcing surfaces further protect the main contacts. Contact wear is reduced by multiple leaf arc chutes that cool and quench the arcs. Barriers separate the phases to prevent interphase flashover. A transparent protective cover allows visual inspection while inhibiting inadvertent contact with energized components. • Switch mechanism, including contact assemblies, is UL 1008 certified to verify suitability for applications requiring high endurance switching capability for the life of the transfer switch. Withstand and closing ratings are validated using the same set of contacts, further demonstrating the robust nature of the design. S-6563 (Issued: 08/2022) cummins.com High Endurance Mechanism power cassette • Cassette design ensures that all phases and neutral are switched at the same speed, providing true four pole operation. • Encapsulated contactor design increases phase to phase isolation and reduces possibility of arcing between phases. • New design eliminates a common failurepoint in many transfer switches by not using electrical connections made of braided metal in the mechanism’s current path. • Simple design with fewer parts minimizes failure modes and maximizes product reliabilty. Actuator design for high strength locking capabilities ensures electrical contacts remian closed during a fault. Electromagnetic forces Alternating current The innovative design of the High Endurance Mechanism The High Endurance Mechanism (HEM) is designed to minimize the contact damage during a fault condition thus retaining its capability to carry up to 100 % of its rated load. Electromagnetic forces developed during a fault cause a conventional transfer switch’s contacts to blow open, producing destructive arcing that often results in extensive internal damage to the switch. Typically, after a conventional switch experiences a fault, its contacts, arc chutes and in some cases its control needs to be replaced. On the other hand, the blow-on technology utilized by the HEM, uses that same electromagnetic energy to hold the contacts closed during a fault, practically eliminating arcing, contact damage, and performance degradation. With the high short-time ratings of this innovative blow-on technology, costly repairs or inconvenient downtime can be minimized after a fault. Heavy duty opening springs enable fast Durable automotive opening times, grade microswitches extinguishing the for higher reliability arc faster Opening solenoids Arc Suppression Technology designed for maximizing contact life Main closing solenoids Highly reliable modular architecture utilizing stacked switching cassettes S-6563 (Issued: 08/2022) cummins.com One control for complete simplicity • The revolutionary PowerCommand®80 transfer switch control delivers unrivaled adaptability, connectivity and intelligence. • Highly advanced and customizable control designed to work in a wide variety of applications. • Intuitive, easy to navigate HMI with color display. • Integrated advanced high-accuracy metering with harmonic analysis capability provides a simplified but highly accurate way to monitor and detect power quality problems and also capture energy usage data. • Integrated automatic load management capability provides the ability to easily set up downstream load management schemes without the need for additional hardware or complicated setup. • Fully integrated networking solutions (Modbus® RS485 and TCP/IP communications). Remote monitoring via PowerCommand Cloudâ„¢ with the use of an external gateway. • Integrated control dc power supply provides the capability to connect up to three independent dc sources. • Detailed event logging with enhanced fault codes, alert lists, power event history, and source statistics enhances diagnostic capability during service events and provides the ability to meet any reporting requirements. • Please see the PowerCommand® 80 control specification sheet for the full description, benefits and features. Specifications Voltage rating Up to 600 Vac, 50 or 60 Hz Arc interruption Multiple leaf arc chutes provide dependable arc interruption. A full current-rated solid neutral bar with lugs is optional on enclosed 3-pole Neutral bar transfer switches. Two isolated contacts (one for each source) indicating switch position are provided for customer use. Contacts are normally open, and close to indicate Auxiliary contacts connection to the source. Wired to terminal block for easy access. Rated at 10 A continuous and 250 Vac maximum. An additional two contacts are available with the premium Customer I/O option. UL recognized, and CSA-certified. Operating temperature -40 ËšF (-40 ËšC) to 140 ËšF (60 ËšC) Storage temperature -40 ËšF (-40 ËšC) to 140 ËšF (60 ËšC) Humidity Up to 95 % relative, non-condensing Altitude Up to 10,000 ft (3,048 m) without derating Voltage surge performance and testing in compliance with the requirements of Surge withstand ratings IEEE C62.41 (Category B3) and IEEE C62.45. Will not exceed 6 cycles at 60 Hz with normal voltage applied to the actuator Total transfer time (source-to-source) and without programmed transition enabled. Transfer switch mechanisms are equipped with means to manually transfer. All Manual operation* sources must be de-energized before manual operation is attempted. * See Operator Manual for further details. S-6563 (Issued: 08/2022) cummins.com UL 1008 short-circuit withstand/closing (WCR) and short-time current ratings B Frame C FrameC Frame D Frame 0.05 s 0.05 s0.05 s 0.5 s 0.05 s 0.5 s [3-cycle] [3-cycle][3-cycle] [30-cycle] [3-cycle] [30-cycle] (kA) (kA)()(kA) (kA) (kA) (kA Amperage Rating (A) WCR values WCR values WCR values are at 240 are at 480 are at 600 Vac and Vac and WCR values are at 600 Vac and below Vac below below 40 35 30 25 70 35 30 25 125 35 30 25 150 35 30 25 65 35 225 35 30 25 65 35 260 35 30 25 65 35 300 35 30 25 65 35 400 35 30 25 65 35 600 65 35 85 50 800 85 50 All 0.05 seconds (3-cycle) ratings are the short-circuit WCR and all 0.5 seconds (30-cycle) ratings are short-time current ratings. Mechanical cable lug capacity Maximum Cables Per Frame Amperage Rating (A) Size Part Number Phase 2 4 AWG - 250 MCM B 40-400 A042W626 1 3/0 - 600 MCM 4 1/0 - 250 MCM1/0 - 250 MCM A062G017 2 4 AWG - 600 MCM4 AWG - 600 MCM C 150-600150-600 2 4 AWG - 600 MCM4 AWG - 600 MCM 0332-2770 (Neutral) 4 1/0 - 250 MCM1/0 - 250 MCM 6 1/0 - 250 MCM A062G017 3 4 AWG - 600 MCM D 600-800 6 1/0 - 250 MCM 0332-2770 (Neutral) 3 4 AWG - 600 MCM All lugs are 90 °C rated and accept copper or aluminium wire unless indicated otherwise. Refer to the latest NFPA 70 Article 310 - Conductors for general wiring for the ampacity calculations. Compression cable lug capacity Maximum Cables per Phase Size (MCM) Part Number Manufacturer/Model Number B Frame C Frame D Frame 600 N/A 2 3 A060T181* BURNDY/YA39A5 * Configurable option Additional hardware is required for compression lug installation. Refer to lug installation drawing for more details. All lugs are 90 °C rated and accept copper or aluminum wire unless indicated otherwise. Refer to the latest NFPA 70 Article 310 - Conductors for general wiring for the ampacity calculations. S-6563 (Issued: 08/2022) cummins.com Enclosure access for cable installation and maintenance Access Amperage Frame Rating (A) Type 1 Type 3RType 3R Type 4 Type 4X Type 12 B 40-400 Front Front* C 150-600150-600 FrontFront D 600-800 * Only offered for B-frame with premium enclosure option. Ensure minimum working space clearance is maintained in front of the transfer switch per NEC. Additional front clearance is needed to remove the mechanism. Refer to the outline drawing. All frames allow for top and bottom cable entry. X-Series drawing part numbers Outline Drawing WCR Label Wiring Diagram Amperage Frame Rating (A) Open/ Interconnect Type 1 & Type Type 4,12 0.05 s 0.05 s 0.5 s Closed Interconnect Delayed U-G* & 3R & 4X [3[3-cycle]cycle] [30-cycle] Transition G-G**** Transition U-U** A065J828 N/A A062C458 (208V, 240V)/ B 40-400 A066L719 N/A N/A A063C029*** A063C030 A062C147 A065J829***** (480V, 600V) C 150-150-600 A065J830A065J830 A066N305A066N305 A066N307 A063C050 A063C049 A063J161*** A063J162 D 600-800 A065J831 A066N306 A066N308 * U-G stands for Utility-Generator Set ** U-U stands for Utility-Utility *** Drawing contains wiring for NEC Start Integrity **** G-G stands for Generator Set-Generator Set ***** Only offered for B-frame with premium enclosure. S-6563 (Issued: 08/2022) cummins.com Product codes for C-Frame submittal detail Model Standards CXTC_CXT150 150 A, C frame CXTC_A064-7 UL/NFPA 20 fire pump compliant CXTC_CXT225 225 A, C frame CXTC_A080-7 IBC seismic certificationCXTC_A080-7 IBC seismic certification CXTC_CXT260 260 A, C frame CXTC_A085-7 OSHPD seismic pre-approval certification CXTC_CXT300 300 A, C frameCXTC_CXT300 300 A, Cframe CXTC_S043-7 UL 1008 listing [STANDARD]CXTC_S043-7 UL 1008 listing [STANDARD] CXTC_CXT400 400 A, C frame Control CXTC_CXT600 600 A, C frame CXTC_C109-7 PC80 control [STANDARD]CXTC_C109-7 PC80 control [STANDARD] Transfer modes Control options CXTC_A077-7 Open transition/in-phase [STANDARD] CXTC_D403-7 Integrated high accuracy power quality CXTC_D403-7 Integrated high accuracy power quality CXTC_A078-7 Open transition/time delayed (programmed)CXTC_A078-7 Open transition/time delayed (programmed) meteringmetering CXTC_A079-7 Closed transition CXTC_L214-7 Load shed from standby source CXTC_A088-7 Non-automatic transition CXTC_M079 Integral control power supply Poles Customer input/output CXTC_A028-7 3-poles [STANDARD]CXTC_A028-7 3-poles [STANDARD] CXTC_M076-7 Standard - 5 digital inputs, 6 digital outputs, CXTC_A029-7 4-poles, switched neutral 2 dry-contact outputs Application CXTC_M077-7 Premium - includes Standard plus 2 digital CXTC_M077-7 Premium - includes Standard plus 2 digital CXTC_A035-7 Utility to generator set [STANDARD]CXTC_A035-7 Utility to generator set [STANDARD] inputs, 6 digital outputs, 2 dry-contact outputinputs, 6 digital outputs, 2 dry-contact output CXTC_A036-7 Utility to utility Protective relays CXTC_A037-7 Generator set to generator set CXTC_M045-7 IEEE protective relays, 62PL parallel Performance ratings timer, 86 lock-out CXTC_A087-7 UL 1008 30-cycle short-time withstand CXTC_M046-7 IEEE protective relays, 62PL paralleltimer, ratings 86 lock-out, 32R reverse power with 1-phase sensing CXTC_H024-7 UL 1008 3-cycle CXTC_H024-7 UL 1008 3-cycle shorshort-current withstand t-current withstand CXTC_M047-7 IEEE protective relays, 62PL paralleltimer, ratings [STANDARD]ratings [STANDARD] 86 lock-out, 32R reverse power with 3-phase sensing Frequency Cable lugs CXTC_A044-7 60 Hz [STANDARD]CXTC_A044-7 60 Hz [STANDARD] CXTC_N069-7 No cable lugs, bus stabs CXTC_A045-7 50 Hz CXTC_N080-7 Cable lugs, mechanical, 2-600 MCMCXTC_N080-7 Cable lugs, mechanical, 2-600 MCM Phase CXTC_N084-7 Cable lugs, compression, 2-600 MCM CXTC_A089-7 1-phase, 3-wire (solid or switched neutral) Power quality meter CXTC_A090-7 3-phase, 3-wire (no neutral) CXTC_D010-7 Utility grade PQM, 3-wire, for delta systems CXTC_A091-7 3-phase, 4-wire (solid or switched neutral)CXTC_A091-7 3-phase, 4-wire (solid or switched neutral) CXTC_D011-7 Utility grade PQM, 4-wire, for wye systems Voltage Surge protective device (SPD) CXTC_R021-7 208 V CXTC_M060-7 S1 SPD, 120 kA, for wye systems CXTC_R023-7 240 V CXTC_M062-7 S1 SPD, 120 kA, for delta systems CXTC_R026-7 480 VCXTC_R026-7 480V CXTC_M064-7 S1 SPD, 240 kA, for wye systems CXTC_R027-7 600 V CXTC_M066-7 S1 SPD, 240 kA, for delta systems Cabinet CXTC_M068-7 S2 SPD, 120 kA, for wye systems CXTC_M070-7 S2 SPD, 120 kA, for delta systems CXTC_B001-7 Type 1: Indoor use, provides some protection CXTC_M072-7 S2 SPD, 240 kA, for wye systems against dirt (similar to IEC type IP30) [STANDARD] CXTC_M074-7 S2 SPD, 240 kA, for delta systems CXTC_B002-7 Type 3R: Intended for outdoor use, provides CXTC_B002-7 Type 3R: Intended for outdoor use, provides some protection from dirt, rain and snow (similar to IEC type some protection from dirt, rain and snow (similar to IECtype Warranty IP34)IP34) CXTC_G004-7 2-years, comprehensive [STANDARD]CXTC_G004-7 2-years, comprehensive [STANDARD] CXTC_B003-7 Type 4: Indoor or outdoor use, provides CXTC_G007-7 5-years, comprehensive some protection from wind-blown dust and water spray CXTC_G014-7 3-years, comprehensive (similar to IEC type IP65) CXTC_G015-7 10-years, comprehensive CXTC_B010-7 Type 12: Indoor use, some protection from Shipping dust (similar to IEC type IP61) CXTC_A050-7 Packing - wooden crate [STANDARD]CXTC_A050-7 Packing - wooden crate [STANDARD] CXTC_B025-7 Type 4X: Stainless steel, indoor or outdoor CXTC_A051-7 Packing - export box use, provides some protection from corrosion (similar to IEC Request for quotation Type IP65) CXTC_Z555-7 Nonconfigurable specification (ETO) Mounting options(Required to support switch weight for elevated Accessories mounting applications.) • Refer to the Parts Manual CXTC_B053-7 Wall mount Miscellaneous options CXTC_M080-7 Anti-condensation cabinet heater Build Location CXTC_Z111-7 Manufactured/Assembled in U.S. S-6563 (Issued: 08/2022) cummins.com Codes and standards All switches are UL 1008 Listed with UL 50E Type Rated cabinets and UL Listed CU-AL All switches comply with NEMA ICS 10. terminals. All switches are certified to CSA C22.2 All switches comply with IEEE 446 No. 178.1-14 Transfer switches and C22.2 Recommended Practice for Emergency and No. 94.2 Enclosures for Electrical Standby Power Systems. Equipment. All switches comply with NFPA 20, 70, 99 and 110 (Level 1). RoHS All switches are RoHS compliant. Suitable for use in emergency, legally required and Standby and Critical ® All switches are designed and manufactured NEC Operations Power Systems (COPS) ISO in facilities certified to ISO 9001. applications per NEC 700, 701, 702 and 708. IBC® All switches are certified to IBC 2018. OSHPD All switches are certified to CBC 2019. All switches have been tested to meet the the following Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standards: EN 61000-4-3 Radiated Immunity EN 61000-4-4 Electrical Fast Transients EMC EN 61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge EN 61000-4-6 Conducted Immunity EN 61000-4-8 Power Frequency Magnetic Field EN 61000-6-2 Generic Immunity Standard For more information, please contact your local Cummins distributor or visit cummins.com Our energy working for you.â„¢ ©2021 Cummins Inc. All rights reserved. Cummins is a registered trademark of Cummins Inc. PowerCommand, AmpSentry, InPower and“Our energy working foryou.”are trademarks of Cummins Inc. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. Specifications are subject to change without notice. NAS-6563-EN PD00000749 (Last revised: 11/2023) S-6563 (Issued: 08/2022) cummins.com PowerCommand® 80 Transfer Switch Control X-Series TransferSwitches and B-Series Bypass- Isolation Transfer Switches Description The revolutionary PowerCommand® 80 Transfer Switch Control delivers unrivaled adaptability, connectivity, and intelligence. Designed by Cummins experts, the PowerCommand® 80 is a single integrated control. In addition, the control features a highly customizable customer inputs/outputs which can be tailored to suit a wide range of application requirements. The control human machine interface (HMI) includes a LED backlit LCD display with tactile-feel soft-switches for easy operation and screen navigation. All data on the control can be viewed by scrolling through screens with the navigation keys. Forward and backward navigation functionality is also provided. The control displays the current active fault, fault occurrences and time-ordered history of the 256 previous faults with respect to Real Time Clock Stamp and Engine Running Time. Features Integrated advanced high accuracy metering –Built- in Integrated control DC power supply –The power capability to measure and display power, energy and total supply board is integrated into the main control module. harmonic distortion (THD) provides a simplified but highly The three diode isolated inputs provide the capability to accurate way to monitor and detect power quality connect up to three independent DC sources. problems and capture energy usage data. Diagnostics and reporting –Detailed event logging with Integrated Automatic Load Management (ALM) – enhanced fault codes, alert lists, power event history, and Built-in capability to easily setup downstream load source statistics enhances diagnostic capability management schemes for up to two loads without the during service events and provides the ability to meet any need for additional hardware or complicated setup. reporting requirements. Integrated network communication –Built-in Ease of service and access – Built-in plug-and-play communication capability: Modbus RTU RS485 control with minimized point-to-point connections and connection (1 serial port), Modbus TCP/IP Ethernet compatible terminal markings simplify servicing. connection (2 ethernet ports) and external USB port for Complete product line – Cummins is a single source service tool interface. supplier with full scope of power system solutions, PowerCommand Cloudâ„¢ ready –The control is integration and service capability, from paralleling fully integrated to support remote monitoring via to system level controls, switchgear and remote PowerCommand Cloudâ„¢ with the use of an external connectivity. gateway. Warranty and service – Products are backed by a comprehensive warranty and a worldwide network of distributors with factory-trained service technicians. S-6543 (Issued: 11/2020) cummins.com PowerCommand® 80 Control Isometric (ISO) projection: front views Isometric (ISO) projection: rear view Human Machine Interface (HMI) capabilities LED indicators on source avail- LED indicates which source is ability and status connected 3 security levels: password protected access levels to sen- sitive displays and settings Tactile push button to Initiate or Cancel a test At glance LED indicators of Tactile push button to Override system status timers Tactile push button to Reset Rich information from the main events display: • 4.3” high brightness LCD display UV protected overlay – Tested • Transfer switch name, date & using the best in-class test time, security lock (when user chambers password is enabled) • Source indicator with contex- tual icons. White ring indicat- ing preferred source Tactile push buttons for control • S1 and S2 average voltage navigation and programming • Load kVA • Active Banner showing“com- ing up next”: Time delays, Tactile push buttons to go Back inhibits, test statues to the previous screen, return to the home screen or dismiss any dialog box Additional LCD display features include: • 480x(RGB)x272 pixels (4.3”) color graphics • Ability to set brightness • Backlight timers • Ability to test all the LEDs S-6543 (Issued: 11/2020) cummins.com Human Machine Interface (HMI) main screens Main Menu Description Screen Image Gives information about the Alerts active system events in chronological order. Shows the system event list with date and time of all the warnings, alerts, etc. Up to History 256 events are captured. Data is maintained through power outage. Statistics Shows collected source data. Gives information regarding Voltage, Current, Voltage Source 1 Harmonics and Phase Angle of Source 1 Gives information regarding Voltage, Current, Voltage Source 2 Harmonics and Phase Angle of Source 2 Gives information regarding Current, Voltage, Power, Energy, Load Current Harmonics and Voltage Harmonics Shows the information regarding About system current version and model. Provides system configuration Setup options. Setup screens are password protected. Event logging: • Log and Display critical events on front screen • Record’s real time stamped events including s, min, h, date. Data will be maintained through a power outage • User trend data is logged (20-30 pieces of information captured) S-6543 (Issued: 11/2020) cummins.com Control functions Transfer Inhibit Unexpected Operation When transfer inhibit external input is active, the control Unexpected operation is the undesired behavior in which does not automatically transfer the tranfer switch to a switch opens or closes without an active command. standby source even when the preferred source fails. The feature then outputs an event code to indicate that an unexpected operation has occurred. For example, Retransfer Inhibit preferred/standby source unexpected operation. When retransfer inhibit external input is active, the control does not automatically retransfer the tranfer switch to a Test - Remote, Local, Network preferred source even when the preferred source returns. Test feature allows the user to automatically test the standby source and the transfer switch. The test Override command can be issued from three sources (remote, local, network). Override is an external signal which allows the user to bypass the following features: Transfer Inhibit, Retransfer The test has following types available: Inhibit, Transfer Time Delay, Retransfer Time Delay, • Preferred/Standby Engine Start Time Delay. • Without load For example, if override is active while Transfer Inhibit • With load is active, then, Transfer Inhibit is bypassed/ignored and • Test button control proceeds with transfer operation. Transfer to standby – This feature keeps the load connected to the standby source for the specified Automatic Load Management (ALM) duration, regardless of the preferred source availability. The control has the integrated capability to automatically Transfer to standby is canceled automatically if the add or shed loads downstream of the transfer switch by standby source fails. controlling feeder breakers. When the load is energized by a generator set, this functionality can help prevent Fail to Disconnect overloading the source and ensure only the higher priority This feature monitors the time for which both the sources loads remain energized. are paralleled (in a closed transition type method) and declares a fault (failed to disconnect) if the sources stay Load sequencing: paralleled for time more than fail to disconnect time limit. • Load Add 1.Block – Load 1 and Load 2 will be added simultanously to the source after the duration of the Preferred Source Selection initial time delay load add (configurable delay) Using this feature the user can swap the priority of the 2.Sequential – Load 1 then load 2 will be added sources which are preferred and standby. sequentially after predefined time delays • Load shed – This type of load sequencing automatically Source Inversion removes low priority loads. If the generator set frequency Using this feature the user can swap the physical source drops below a threshold for a predefined duration, load is designations of Source 1 and Source 2 on the transfer shed before and overload or underfrequency fault occurs. switch such that there is no need for rewiring source When the generator source is stable again, the loads are connections if source inversion is needed. Source automatically added back sequentially. inversion is simple via the HMI settings in the field. Mechanism Failures Exerciser The control implements event codes for the four types of This feature helps to prevent the typical electro- mechanism failures: mechanical issues that could arise if equipment is not • Preferred/Standby source fail to close operated for long period of time. Up to 12 exercise • Preferred/Standby source fail to open schedules and up to 12 exception schedules are When a source connection is expected to open/close and supported. the operation does not occur in expected time, the fault is There are two sub features: exerciser schedules and declared and control runs into not-in-auto mode. exception schedules. Exerciser schedules are the schedules in time which initiate the test (automatic Real Time Clock testing of standby source) at the scheduled time intervals. This feature is used by the control for fault and event time Exception schedules are set up to bypass any predefined stamping and as a reference for exerciser schedules and exerciser schedules. For example, an automatic test on exception schedules. the standby source is initiated for every time interval defined in an exerciser schedule. If an exception schedule has been defined for a certain time and date, the exerciser scheduled test will not occur during that period. S-6543 (Issued: 11/2020) cummins.com Control functions Source Availability Automatic changeover This feature monitors the frequency and voltage sensors This feature is primarily for a GEN-GEN prime power on the preferred and standby sources to determine application. System switches the preferred and standby and declare the availability status of the two sources, sources, after every calibrated number of hours. The irrespective of which source is connected to the load. It purpose of the automatic changeover is to balance loads declares the states as event codes. Preferred/Standby on generator set in a gen/gen application. It will change Available - active inactive. the source priority based on the Automatic Source Priority Changeover Threshold Hrs. Automatic Changeover Configurable Input/Output functionality is used for Prime Power applications, when the generator set run for extended time intervals. This feature allows the configurable inputs to be configured to perform any of the below assignable input functions and configurable output pins to perform any of Alternate Preferred Source the below assignable output functions: This feature is primarily for a GEN-GEN dual standby configuration. The control switches the preferred source Assignable input functions: every time the upstream ATS is requested to start one of • Remote Test the generator sets, and power the loads; when enabled • Remote Override using the configuration. This feature is used to keep the • Transfer to Standby running time equally distributed between both generator • Transfer Inhibit sets. • Retransfer Inhibit • Battery Charger Fault Non-Automatic Mode (X-Series only) • Preferred Source Shutdown Fault Active Non-Automatic switches are used only for optional standby • Standby Source Shutdown Fault Active applications. The non-automatic transfer mode can be set • External Fault (1 input with customerizablemessage) in either as local/remote using a 2-position switch installed • Load Shed on the transfer switch. Local operation allows the user to • Dual Standby Start Inhibit transfer/retransfer based on the position of a non-auto- mode source selection switch position. Remote operation Assignable output functions: allows an external input signal to transfer/retransfer. No • Preferred Source Start automatic exercisers or tests are performed while in this • Standby Source Start mode. • Preferred Source Available • Standby Source Available Real-time power source data • Preferred Source Connected The control displays real-time power source data for three • Standby Source Connected phase, two phase, single phase configurations (Source 1 • Test Active and Source 2). • Fault Code Functions (up to 4 can be assigned) • Elevator Pretransfer Time Delays • Synchronizer Enable The following adjustable time delays are built into the • Load Contact 1 transfer switch control. External modules to accomplish Load Contact 2 these delays are not required. • Normal to Emergency Time Delay (adjustable from 0 to Voltage sensing 15,549 s) 3-phase sensing on Source 1 and Source 2 (up to 600 • Time Delay Retransfer (adjustable from 0 to 15,549 s) Vac with no need for additional PTs). • Program Transition Time Delay: (adjustable duration of0 seconds to 600 s) Current sensing • Time Delay Engine Start (adjustable from 0 to 3,600 s) 3-phase and neutral CT connection. • Time Delay Engine Cooldown (adjustable from 0 to 3,600 s) Dual Standby • Elevator Time Delay (adjustable from 0 to 600) This is a configuration type of how a system can be • Elevator Post Transfer Time Delay (adjustable from 0to designed with two ATS; one for the primary source (called 600 s) lead/local ATS) and the other for the pair of standby sources (called upstream ATS). S-6543 (Issued: 11/2020) cummins.com Control functions Integrated high accuracy power quality metering Source Statistics Capable of monitoring the following parameters: The control displays the following source statistics: • Current (A) • Total Time Load Energized • Total Power (kW) • Number of Transfers • Reactive Power (kvar) • Number ofRetransfers • Apparent Power (kVA) • S1 Number of Failures • Power Factor (PF) • S2 Number of Failures • Energy (kWh) • S1 Connected and Available • Reactive Energy(kvarh) • Total Time on S1 • Apparent Energy (kVAh) • S2 Connected and Available • THD (%) • Total Time on S2 • Transfer Time Load metering capability is fully integrated into the main • Last Transfer Due to Failure transfer switch control. Additional external modules are not required. Events The control displays information on up to 256 events The following parameters are measured and displayed displayed in chronological order, beginning with the most with the minimum accuracies listed in parenthesis: recent event, about either source. The event information • Line and Neutral Current (0.25 %) shall include the following: • Line to Line and Line to Neutral Voltage (0.25 %) • Fault codes • Frequency (0.03 Hz) • Active time delays • Power Factor (0.25 %) • Power system changes • Apparent Power (0.25 %) • Tests and exercises • Active Power (0.25 %) • User-driven inputs (e.g., override, transfer inhibit) • Reactive Power (0.50 %) • Apparent Energy (0.50 %) • Active Energy (0.50 %) • Reactive Energy (0.70 %) • Total Harmonic Distortion (THD), Current (<1.00 %)* • Average THD, Current (<1.00 %)* • Total Harmonic Distortion (THD), Voltage (<1.00 %)* • Average THD, Voltage (<1.00 %)* • Phase angle • Phase rotation * 60Hz system –THD calculations include up to the 46thharmonic Supported applications Application Types • Utility - Utility • Utility - Generator Set • Generator Set - Generator Set • Three-Source System (Dual Standby) Communications The PowerCommand® 80 Transfer Switch Control features a fully integrated network capability. Features include: • Integrated Modbus®RTU RS485 connection (1 isolated serial port) • Integrated Modbus®TCP/IP Ethernet connection (2 Ethernet ports) • Exterior USB port for service tool interface mounted on the transfer switch door • PowerCommand Cloudâ„¢ Ready via an external gateway Safety Service connection is accessible from the outside of the transfer switch cabinet (accessible without being exposed to high voltage). S-6543 (Issued: 11/2020) cummins.com Protection Phase rotation sensing Overvoltage sensing • Time Delay: 100 ms • 3-phase normal, 3-phase emergency • Accuracy: ±2 % Under-Voltage sensing • Pick-Up: 95 % to 99 % of Drop-Out setting • Drop-Out: 105 % to 135 % of nominal voltage • 3-phase normal, 3-phase emergency • Drop-Out Time Delay: 0.5 s to 120.0 s • Accuracy: ±2 % • Pick-Up: 85 % to 98 % of nominalvoltage Over/under frequency sensing • Drop-Out: 75 % to 98 % of Pick-Up setting • Drop-Out Time Delay: 0.1 s to 1.0 s • Normal and emergency • Accuracy: ±0.05 Hz High Neutral Current sensing • Pickup: ±5 % to ±20 % of nominal frequency • Drop-Out: ±1 % beyond Pick-Up setting • Sensor Enable: On/Off • Drop-Out Time Delay: 0.1 s to 15.0 s • Warning Threshold: 100 % to 150 % • Warning Delay: 10 s to 60 s Voltage imbalance sensing • Drop-Out: 2 % to 10 % • Pick-Up: 90 % of Drop-Out setting • Time Delay: 2.0 s to 20.0 s Loss of single phase detection • Time Delay: 100 ms Environment Control operates over an ambient temperature range: -40 ºC to 70 ºC. (Surrounding the Operating control) LCD display operates over an ambient temperature range of -20 ºC to +70 ºC without Temperature Range 3 heaters, 85 % RH (absolute humidity limit 46 g/m ). Storage The control operates after being exposed to Storage Temperatures in the range of -40 ºC to 80 Temperature Range ºC. The LCD display functions after being exposed to storage temperatures of -30 ºC to 80 ºC. Altitude The control operates over the altitude range of 0-5000 m above sea level. Control as installed in the transfer switch enclosure complies with NEMA 4X and IP65 at the Ingress Protection switch level. Providing resistance from rain, sand, moisture, dust and snow. S-6543 (Issued: 11/2020) cummins.com Codes and Standards UL Recognized to both UL 1008 and CSA C22.2 No. 178.1. Evaluated against UL 508 Capable of being used on systems and UL 50E – NEMA 4X for use on the UL compliant with NFPA 20, 70, 99 and 110 1008 Listed X-Series and B-Series transfer (Level 1). switches. The control is IEEE C37.90.2 certified. Control and display as installed in a tansfer switch enclosure complies with NEMA 4X Capable of being used on IEEE 446 and IP65 at the transfer switch level - if the compliant systems; Recommended Practice transfer switch enclosure is also NEMA 4X & for Emergency and Standby Power Systems. IP65 compliant. Capable of being used on systems suitable for use in emergency, legally required and RoHS The control is RoHS compliant. NEC® Standby and Critical Operations Power Systems (COPS) applications per NEC 700, 701, 702 and 708. The control is tested to meet the the following CE Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standards for EN 61000 series (electromagnetic compatibility) and EN 55011 (electromagnetic emissions): EN 61000-4-3 Radiated Immunity EN 61000-4-4 Electrical Fast Transients EN 61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge EMC EN 61000-4-6 Conducted Immunity EN 61000-4-8 Power Frequency Magnetic Field EN 61000-6-2 Generic Immunity Standard EN 55011 Class B Radio-Frequency Disturbance CISPR 16-2-3 Disturbance and Immunity For more information, please contact your local Cummins distributor or visit cummins.com Our energy working for you.â„¢ ©2023 Cummins Inc. All rights reserved. Cummins is a registered trademark of Cummins Inc. PowerCommand, AmpSentry, InPower and“Our energy working foryou.”are trademarks of Cummins Inc. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. Specifications are subject to change without notice. NAS-6543-EN PD00000530 (Last revised: 01/2024) S-6543 (Issued: 11/2020) cummins.com SPECIAL SEISMIC CERTIFICATION COMPLIANCE REPORT SUMMARY 1801393-CRS-001-R4 Manufacturer: Cummins Power Generation Model Line: CXS, CXT, CXR Automatic Transfer Switches (Non-Service Entrance Models) For specific models included in this seismic certification, see 1801393-CR-001. Product Type: Automatic Transfer Switch Issue Date: October 13, 2021 Expiration Date: December 31, 2025 Equipment Manufacturer: Company: Cummins Power Generation Address: 1400 73rd Avenue NE - MS OF182 Fridley, MN 55432 Telephone: 1-800-286-6467 Website: www.cummins.com Seismic Certification Parameters: Building Code: CBC 2019 Certification Basis: Shake table testing Test Criteria: ICC-ES AC156 Seismic Level(s): SDS=1.85 g for z/h = 1.0 (rooftop installation) SDS=2.96 g for z/h = 0.0 (ground level installation) Importance Factor: IP=1.5 Structural integrity and functional compliance verified following testing. Mounting: Varies Compliance Report Notes: Specific products included in this special seismic certification are outlined in 1801393-CR-001, issued by TRU Compliance, a division of Structural Integrity Associates, Inc. Detailed information relating to certification levels, construction details, options, and mounting arrangements are included therein. This compliance report is limited by, and necessarily dependent on, the construction of the product and the accuracy of the information provided by the Equipment Manufacturer. Therefore, this report is valid only for the components and systems as they were configured and manufactured at the time of testing or evaluation. Any alterations to the product or its components could result in a decrease in seismic performance and thus render the resultant conclusions void. Refer to 1801393-CR-001 for all requirements, limitations, and special conditions of approval. For more information, please contact the Equipment Manufacturer or the Seismic Certification Agency. This ISO 17065 Certification fulfills the requirements of the TRU Compliance Certification Standard for Seismic, Wind, and Physical Security Performance, Revision 6, dated April 29, 2021 plus the standards referenced above. Seismic Certification Agency: Company: TRU Compliance, by Structural Integrity Associates, Inc. Decision Maker: Andy Coughlin, SE License Number: S6082 (California) Address: 5215 Hellyer Ave., Suite 210 San Jose, CA 95138 Telephone: 844-TRU-0200 E-mail: acoughlin@structint.com Verify current listings at www.trucompliance.com/certification-database TRU Compliance, by Structural Integrity Associates, Inc. 844-TRU-0200 | info@trucompliance.com 11APR2022 12:37 GMT Document Generated: Cummins Data Classification: This document (and the information shown thereon) is Part Number: A065J830 Part Revision: E Cummins Confidential Confidential and Proprietary and shall not be disclosed to others Part Name: OUTLINE,ENCLOSURE in hard copy or electronic form, reproduced by any means, or used for any purpose without written consent of Cummins Inc. Drawing Category: Detail State: Released Sheet 1 of 7 11APR2022 12:37 GMT Document Generated: Cummins Data Classification: This document (and the information shown thereon) is Part Number: A065J830 Part Revision: E Cummins Confidential Confidential and Proprietary and shall not be disclosed to others Part Name: OUTLINE,ENCLOSURE in hard copy or electronic form, reproduced by any means, or used for any purpose without written consent of Cummins Inc. Drawing Category: Detail State: Released Sheet 2 of 7 11APR2022 12:37 GMT Document Generated: Cummins Data Classification: This document (and the information shown thereon) is Part Number: A065J830 Part Revision: E Cummins Confidential Confidential and Proprietary and shall not be disclosed to others Part Name: OUTLINE,ENCLOSURE in hard copy or electronic form, reproduced by any means, or used for any purpose without written consent of Cummins Inc. Drawing Category: Detail State: Released Sheet 3 of 7 11APR2022 12:37 GMT Document Generated: Cummins Data Classification: This document (and the information shown thereon) is Part Number: A065J830 Part Revision: E Cummins Confidential Confidential and Proprietary and shall not be disclosed to others Part Name: OUTLINE,ENCLOSURE in hard copy or electronic form, reproduced by any means, or used for any purpose without written consent of Cummins Inc. Drawing Category: Detail State: Released Sheet 4 of 7 08MAY2023 21:04 GMT Document Generated: Cummins Data Classification: This document (and the information shown thereon) is Part Number: A066N305 Part Revision: B Cummins Confidential Confidential and Proprietary and shall not be disclosed to others Part Name: LABEL,RATING in hard copy or electronic form, reproduced by any means, or used for any purpose without written consent of Cummins Inc. Drawing Category: Detail State: Released Sheet 1 of 2 Cummins Sales and Service C Pre Commissioning Inspection Form The intent of this form is for the contractor to prepare for equipment to be commissioned by a certified Cummins Field Service Power Generation Technician. Filling out this form is required and will minimize delays due to equipment failing to meet requirements. Completing this checklist in its entirety should minimize the need for additional billing beyond the previously provided commissioning quote. The items listed are the responsibility of the contractor and not Cummins Sales and Service. Project Name/End User: _______________________________________ Contractor: _________________________________________________ ddress: ______________________ Contact:___________________ ON SITE INFORMATION On-Site Contact Information: _______________________________________ Address: _______________________________________________________ Sub location of Generator (ie. Roof, basement, floor): ______________________ Does the facility have the following: Loading Dock Elevator Access (from parking to generator): Page 1 ON SITE INFORMATION CONTINUED YES NA NO Is the facility occupied and is customer aware there will be power outages after generator is started? Will there be any site safety training needed for technician prior to beginning? On site contact for training: __________________________ Will customer representative be on site for operator training? On site contact for operator training: _____________________________ MECHANICAL LOCATION AND PLACEMENT OF THE GENERATOR SET YES NA NO Generator is properly secured to pad or vibration isolators Generator Enclosure and/or Room is free of all debris No airflow obstructions to the engine or generator are present for cooling combustion (See -030 or Installation manual of generator set) Room is designed for adequate inlet and outlet airflow GASEOUS FUEL Natural Gas/LP Vapor/LP Liquid YES NA NO Natural gas and/or LPG fuel supply is connected. Fuel piping is the appropriate size based on full-load CFH/BTU requirement. Pipe size after service regulator: _________________ Service regulator(s), (if supplied), fuel strainer(s), flexible fuel line(s) and manual shut off are installed Fuel pressure after service regulator is:___________inches of H2O I have read and fully understand the fuel requirements for this equipment, I am verifying that the piping and fuel supply meets or exceeds those requirements. I also understand failure to meet the requirements will result in additional charges. ________________________________ ____________________________ Contractor “requestor” Signature Date Page 2 DIESEL FUELED GENERATORS YES NA NO Flexible fuel connections, (supply and return) are connected to generator and piping. Day tank installed, wired and plumbed (lines free of obstruction) to genset and main fuel tank if applicable. Only black iron pipe for fuel lines, never use copper or galvanized pipe. All tanks filled with enough fuel to perform startup and testing. A return line from engine to day tank and day tank to main tank should be in place EXHAUST SYSTEM YES NA NO Exhaust wrapped or isolated to prevent accidental activation of fire protection devices and sprinklers. Exhaust flex-pipe is installed at engine exhaust outlet (The silencer and flex-pipe are supplied with the generator set). Silencer is installed with appropriate supports (no weight should be placed on the exhaust outlet of the genset). Exhaust system has proper expansion joints and wall thimbles (Thimbles are required for wall or roof penetration). GENERATOR ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS YES NA NO Load conductors connected to breakers Flexible connections used on all conduit connections to the generator set output box Remote start interconnection stranded wiring is installed between the generator set and the automatic transfer switch(s) and annunciator. AC Power conductors in dedicated conduit separate from any DC control or network wiring Ground fault connected/functioning on generator, if supplied AC power wired to the coolant heaters (Do NOT energize) Check for AC oil pan heater, control heater or generator winding heater (Needing AC wiring) Generator is grounded in compliance with local codes If applicable, louver motors are operational and connected to generator controls Page 3 GENERATOR ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONTINUED YES NA NO Annunciator mounted in a location where someone can observe a fault of the remote generator system Where is annunciator located? ______________________ Are there additional ancillary devices/equipment that need to be integrated into the system? If yes, please define__________________ Battery charger mounted (free of vibration, weather, accessible for an operator to observe easily) and connected to the appropriate AC and DC wiring to operate the charger. TRANSFER SWITCH ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS YES NA NO Conductors connected for Utility, Load and Emergency Remote start interconnection stranded wiring is installed between the generator set and the automatic transfer switch(s). Four Pole Transfer Switch: Is generator neutral grounded? DAY OF STARTUP YES NA NO Training of facility personnel will be done on the same day as start up. Additional trips for operational training will be an additional charge. Can transfer switch be tested at time of generator startup? (There will be a power interruption) Note: After hours testing could result in additional charges. If the associated switchgear and/or ATS(s) are not Cummins, will the manufacturer's representative be on site? Exercise with or without load? ___________________ If known, Transfer Time delay set recommendations Generator Set to exercise Day:_______ Time:_______ ________________________________ ____________________________ Contractor “requestor” Signature Printed Name Date: _______________ Please complete this form and return to schedule start up within business days prior to schedule startup. I understand that the start-up date may have to be rescheduled at my expense if the above items have not been completed properly. Page 4 INSTRUCTION OF OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE Generator Training will be conducted by a factory-trained maintenance specialist in transfer switches. Training duration will be approximately 1 hour with a question-and-answer session to last as long as needed to satisfy the owner. LESSON PLAN I. Safety a. General safety precautions b. Equipment safety code c. Electrical shock and arc flash II. Equipment operation a. Engine/generator operation process b. Fundamental operating principals of the engine/generator c. Identification of all equipment components – mechanical, electrical, and electronic d. Standard operating procedures – start-up, monitoring, shutdown, and E-stop reset III. Component description a. Identify each component’s function – engine/generator and automatic transfer switch – and their relationship to one another, if applicable IV. Preventative maintenance a. Inspection procedures i. Inspection with equipment in operation ii. Potential trouble symptoms b. Procedures for testing equipment after maintenance has been performed V. Equipment troubleshooting a. Alarms / display messages b. Procedures c. Symptom list d. Probable cause and recommended correction e. How to obtain service “HANDS-ON” DEMONSTRATION The instructor will demonstrate the engine/generator functionality in auto and manual modes. Disclaimer Training is for informational purposes only. If you have any specific safety or operational questions refer to the Operators Manual and/or Sequence of Operations documentation. June 2023 INSTRUCTION OF OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE Transfer Switch Training will be conducted by a factory-trained maintenance specialist in transfer switches. Training duration will be approximately 1 hour with a question-and-answer session to last as long as needed to satisfy the owner. LESSON PLAN I. Safety a. General safety precautions b. Equipment safety code c. Electrical shock and arc flash II. Introduction / overview III. Components a. External components b. Controls / instrument panels c. Settings IV. Operating Instructions a. Manual / Auto modes b. How to change settings c. Settings d. Description of operation in transition phases e. Bypass and isolation (if applicable) V. Preventative maintenance inspection procedures a. Inspection with equipment in operation b. Potential trouble symptoms VI. Planned maintenance requirements a. Procedures for testing equipment after maintenance has been performed VII. Service Events a. Alarms / display messages b. Procedures c. Symptom list VIII. Troubleshooting a. Probable cause and recommended correction “HANDS-ON” DEMONSTRATION The instructor will demonstrate the automatic transfer switch by simulating a power outage. This will allow the engine to start and pick up the emergency load. This will only be done with the owner’s approval. Disclaimer Training is for informational purposes only. If you have any specific safety or operational questions refer to the Operators Manual and/or Sequence of Operations documentation. June 2023 Limite arrant En ironmental Protection A enc Stationar Emer enc EPA SE is defined as being the maximum power available during a variable electrical Commercial Generatin Set power sequence, under the stated operating This limited warranty applies to all Cummins Power conditions, for which a generator set is capable of Generation branded commercial generating sets delivering in the event of a utility power outage or and associated accessories (hereinafter referred to under test conditions and used in strict accordance as Product ). with the EPA NSPS for stationary engines, CFR part , subparts IIII and , where a reliable utility This warranty covers any failures of the Product, must be present. The permissible average power under normal use and service, which result from a output over hours of operation shall not exceed defect in material or factory workmanship. of the EPA-SE. arrant Perio Data Center Contin o s DCC is defined as the The warranty start date is the date of initial start up, The warranty start date is the date of initial start up, maximum power which the generator is capable of first rental, demonstration or 1 months after factory delivering continuously to a constant or varying ship date, whichever is sooner. See table for details. ship date, whichever is sooner. See table for details. electrical load for unlimited hours in a data center application. Contin o s Power COP is defined as being the maximum power which the generating set is capable ase arrant Co era e D ration of delivering continuously whilst supplying a constant hiche er occ rs first electrical load when operated for an unlimited Ratin Months Ma ors number of hours per year. No overload capability is COP 1 nlimited available for this rating. PRP 1 nlimited Prime Power PRP is defined as being the TP 1 hrs maximum power which a generating set is capable of ESP ESP hrs h delivering continuously whilst supplying a variable EPA-SE nlimited electrical load when operated for an unlimited DCC nlimited number of hours per year. The permissible average power output over hours of operation shall not arranty start date for designated rental and oil and gas model exceed of the PRP. For applications requiring Products is determined to be date of receipt of Product by the end permissible average output higher than stated, a customer. COP rating should be used. C mmins Power Generation Limite Time R nnin Power LTP is defined as Res onsi ilities the maximum power available, under the agreed In the event of a failure of the Product during the operating conditions, for which the generating set is warranty period due to defects in material or capable of delivering for up to hours of operation workmanship, Cummins Power Generation will only per year. be responsible for the following costs Emer enc Stan Power ESP is defined as the All parts and labor required to repair the maximum power available during a variable electrical Product. power power sequence, under the stated operating sequence, under the stated operating Reasonable travel expenses to and from the conditions, for which a generating set is capable of Product site location. delivering in the event of a utility power outage or ty Maintenance items that are contaminated or under test conditions for up to h hours of operation damaged by a warrantable failure. per year. The permissible average power output over hours of operation shall not exceed of the Owner Res onsi ilities ESP. The owner will be responsible for the following Effective Date --1 Page 1 of A Issue Notifying Cummins Power Generation Damage to parts, fixtures, housings, distributor or dealer within days of the attachments and accessory items that are discovery of failure. not part of the generating set. Installing, operating, commissioning and maintaining the Product in accordance with This limited warranty does not cover costs resulting Cummins Power Generation’s published from policies and guidelines. Difficulty in gaining access to the Product. Providing evidence for date of Damage to customer property. commissioning. Providing sufficient access to and reasonable A “Data center” is defined as a dedicated facility that ability to remove the Product from the house computers and associated equipment for data installation in the event of a warrantable storage and data handling. failure. Incremental costs and expenses associated Reliable utility is defined as utility power without with Product removal and reinstallation routine or regularly scheduled black-outs. resulting from non-standard installations. Costs associated with rental of generating Please contact your local Cummins Power sets used to replace the Product being Generation Distributor for clarification concerning repaired. these limitations. Costs associated with labor overtime and premium shipping requested by the owner. CUMMINS PO ER GENERATION RIG T TO All downtime expenses, fines, all applicable FAILED COMPONENTS taxes, and other losses resulting from a warrantable failure. Failed components claimed under warranty remain the property of Cummins Power Generation. Limitations Cummins Power Generation has the right to reclaim This limited warranty does not cover Product failures any failed component that has been replaced under resulting from warranty. Inappropriate use relative to designated power rating. E ten e arrant Inappropriate use relative to application Cummins Power Generation offers several levels of guidelines. Extended arranty Coverage. Please contact your Inappropriate use of an EPA-SE application local Cummins Power Generation Distributor for generator set relative to EPA’s standards. details. Normal wear and tear. www.power.com Improper and/or unauthori ed installation. Negligence, accidents or misuse. T E ARRANTIES SET FORT EREIN ARE T E ack of maintenance or unauthori ed repair. SOLE ARRANTIES MADE CUMMINS Noncompliance with any Cummins Power PO ER GENERATION IN REGARD TO T E Generation published guideline or policy. PRODUCT CUMMINS PO ER GENERATION se of improper or contaminated fuels, MA ES NO OT ER ARRANTIES E PRESS OR coolants or lubricants. IMPLIED OR OF MERC ANTA ILIT OR Improper storage before and after FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE commissioning. Owner’s delay in making Product available IN NO E ENT IS CUMMINS PO ER after notification of potential Product problem. GENERATION LIA LE FOR INCIDENTAL OR Replacement parts and accessories not CONSE UENTIAL DAMAGES authori ed by Cummins Power Generation. se of Battle Short Mode. This limited warranty shall be enforced to the Owner or operator abuse or neglect such as maximum extent permitted by applicable law. This operation without adequate coolant or limited warranty gives the owner specific rights that lubricants overfueling overspeeding lack of may vary from state to state or from urisdiction to maintenance to lubricating, cooling or air urisdiction. intake systems late servicing and maintenance improper storage, starting, warm-up, run-in or shutdown practices, or for Product Model Number progressive damage resulting from a Product Serial Number defective shutdown or warning device. Date in Service Effective Date --1 Page of A Issue Limited 2 Year Comprehensive Extended Limited 2 Year Comprehensive Extended Owner Responsibilities: Warranty – G004Warrantyy – G004 The owner will be responsible for the following: Notifying Cummins Power Generation Transfer Switch and Paralleling Systems distributor or dealer within 30 days of the discovery of failure. When purchased, this limited extended warranty Installing, operating, commissioning and applies to all Cummins Power Generation branded maintaining the Product in accordance with Transfer Switches, Paralleling Systems and Cummins Power Generation’s published associated accessories (hereinafter referred to as policies and guidelines. "Product"). Providing evidence for date of commissioning. This warranty covers any failures of the Product, Providing sufficient access to and reasonable under normal use and service, which result from a ability to remove the Product from the defect in material or factory workmanship. installation in the event of a warrantable failure. Warranty Period:Warranty Period: The warranty start date is the date of initial start up, The warranty start date is the date of initial start up, In addition, the owner will be responsible for: ffirst rental, demonstration or 18 months after factory irst rental, demonstration or 18 months after factory y ship date, whichever is sooner. The coverage ship date, whichever is sooner. The coveragep, Incremental costs and expenses associated duration is 2 years from warranty start date. duration is 2 years from warranty start date. with Product removal and reinstallation resulting from non-standard installations. Costs associated with rental of generating Cummins Power Generation sets used to replace the Product being Responsibilities: repaired. In the event of a failure of the Product during the Costs associated with labor overtime and extended warranty period due to defects in material premium shipping requested by the owner. or workmanship, Cummins Power Generation will All downtime expenses, fines, all applicable only be responsible for the following costs: taxes, and other losses resulting from a warrantable failure. All parts and labor required to repair the Product. Limitations: Reasonable travel expenses to and from the This limited extended warranty does not cover Product site location. Product failures resulting from: Maintenance items that are contaminated or Inappropriate use relative to designated damaged by a warrantable failure. power rating. Inappropriate use relative to application guidelines. Failures due to normal wear, corrosion, varnished fuel system parts, lack of reasonable and necessary maintenance, unauthorized modifications and/or repair, and use of add-on or modified parts. Improper and/or unauthorized installation. Owner’s or operator’s negligence, accidents or misuse. Noncompliance with any Cummins Power Generation published guideline or policy. Improper storage before and after commissioning. Owner’s delay in making Product available after notification of potential Product problem. Limitations Continued: Replacement parts and accessories not authorized by Cummins Power Generation. Use of Battle Short Mode Owner or operator abuse or neglect such as: operation without adequate coolant or Effective Date: 01-January-2017 Page 1 of 1118-0003 (Issue 5) lubricants; overfueling; overspeeding; lack of CUMMINS POWER GENERATION RIGHT TO maintenance to lubricating, cooling or air FAILED COMPONENTS: intake systems; late servicing and maintenance; improper storage, starting, Failed components claimed under warranty remain warm-up, run-in or shutdown practices, or for the property of Cummins Power Generation. progressive damage resulting from a Cummins Power Generation has the right to reclaim defective shutdown or warning device. any failed component that has been replaced under Damage to parts, fixtures, housings, warranty. attachments and accessory items that are not part of the generating set. THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH HEREIN ARE THE SOLE WARRANTIES MADE BY CUMMINS This limited extended warranty does not cover costs POWER GENERATION IN REGARD TO THE resulting from: PRODUCT. CUMMINS POWER GENERATION Difficulty in gaining access to the Product. MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR Damage to customer property. IMPLIED, OR OF MERCHANTABILITY OR Repair of cosmetic damage to enclosures. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT IS CUMMINS POWER www.cumminspower.com GENERATION LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. This limited extended warranty shall be enforced to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law. This limited extended warranty gives the owner specific rights that may vary from state to state or from jurisdiction to jurisdiction. Product Model Number:_______________________ Product Serial Number:________________________ Date in Service:______________________________ Effective Date: Page 2 of 1118-0003 () APPENDIX B2 PUMP SKID SUBMITTAL CITY OF ARLINGTON 640 ZONE BOOSTER PUMP SKID PROJECT NO. P02.493.1 EQUIPMENT: Qty 3, CR95-2 and Qty 2, CR15-4; controls, pressure tank, valves, piping and appurtenances OWNER: CITY OF ARLINGTON 238 NORTH OLYMPIC AVE ARLINGTON, WA 98223 SUBMITTED BY: PumpTechLLC(ref#168694) 12020 SE 32ND ST, STE 2 BELLEVUE, WA 98005 PH: 425-644-8501 CONTACT: JIM JOYCE 4/5/2024 Table of Contents Submittal - Arlington Booster Skid (ref#168694) 1 Table of Contents 2 Tab #1 - General Arrangement Drawing 5 Dwg #M06539 - Rev B 6 Tab #2 - Pump Information 9 CR 95-2 Pump 10 Pump Data 11 Performance Curves 14 Pump Dimensions 16 CR 15-4 Pump 17 Pump Data 18 Performance Curves 21 Pump Dimensions 23 Wiring Diagram 24 Tab #3 - Miscellaneouse Equipment 25 Booster Tank 26 Pressure Gauge 29 Pressure Transmitter 31 0-50psi 31 0-200psi 33 Check Valve 35 Butterfly Valve 36 Ball Valve 42 Flowmeter - Shipped Loose 46 Tab #4 - Piping Information 154 Flanges 155 Hex Bushing 156 Union 157 Elbow 158 Street Elbow 159 Nipples 160 Gaskets 163 Adj Pipe Saddle Clamp Support 165 Isolation Mount 166 Flex Hose 167 Tab #5 - Control Panel 168 Electrical Shematic 169 Panel Exterior View 181 Plot Devices View 182 Right Side Door Labeling 183 Bill of Materials for Front View 184 Control Panel Backplate View 185 Bill of Materials for Panel Backplate 186 Component Data Sheets 189 Enclosure and Aux Parts 190 Enclosure Light Switch 191 Panel Lights 192 VFD 194 Communication Cards for Danfoss VFD's 202 Accessories for Danfoss FC202 VFD 214 HMI Cover Kit 215 Main Current Breaker Disconnect 216 Main Circuit Breaker 217 125amps Circuit Breaker and Lightning Transformer 221 100Amps Branch Disconnects 224 LE Series Class J Fuse Blocks 228 JKS Fast-acting Class J Fuses 230 Time-delay Fuses 233 Fuse Holders 234 Miniature Circuit Breaker 235 Strikesorb 30 Module Series 238 VFD Input Line Reactors 240 Input of VFD 242 Macromatic 245 Cooling Fans and Exhaust Vents 247 Filterfans 252 Exhaust Filters 254 Pfannenberg Sizing Software 256 APC Back-UPS 268 Control Transformer 271 Power Supply Unit 274 Ethernet Switch 281 PanelView Plus 7 Operator Interface 286 CompactLogix 5380 289 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 306 Relay Interface Modules 316 Type 3 Surge Protection Device 321 Harting Programming Port 330 Socket 333 Fast-Acting Glass Tube Fuses 335 Fused Terminals 337 Distribution Blocks 348 Cords 353 Ground Lugs 355 2.5mm Gray Terminal Blocks 357 2.5mm Blue Terminal Blocks 360 2.5mm Ground/PE Terminal Blocks 363 End Cover 365 End Clamp 366 TAB #1 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWING TAB #2 PUMP INFORMATION CR 95-2-2 A-G-A-E-HQQE Pump Submittal Data PROJECT: UNIT TAG: QUANTITY: TYPE OF SERVICE: REPRESENTATIVE: SUBMITTED BY: DATE: ENGINEER: APPROVED BY: DATE: CONTRACTOR: ORDER NO.: DATE: CR 95-2-2 A-G-A-E-HQQE Vertical, multistage centrifugal pump with suction and discharge ports on the same level. The pump head and base are in cast iron - all other wetted parts are in stainless steel (EN 1.4301) Note! Product picture may differ from actual product Conditions of Service Pump Data Motor Data Liquid temperature range: -4 .. 248 °F Rated power - P2: 25 HP Maximum ambient temperature: 104 °F Rated voltage: 230/460 V Shaft seal: HQQE Mains frequency: 60 Hz Product number: 99918388 Enclosure class: IP55 Insulation class: F Motor protection: NONE Motor type: WEG Eta 1/1: 91.7 % H CR 95-2-2, 3*460 V, 60Hz [ft] Q = 350 US GPM H = 140 ft 240 36 42 100 %48 n = 86 % (51.4Hz) / 3044 rpm 54 60 Pumped liquid = Water 220 66 Liquid temperature during operation = 68 °F 69 Density = 62.29 lb/ft³ 200 90 % 70.8 180 160 69 80 % 140 66 120 70 % 60 100 54 60 % 80 48 50 % 60 40 40 % 42 20 25 % 36 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 Q [US GPM] P1 NPSH [kW] [ft] 25 50 20 40 15 30 10 20 5 P1 (motor+freq.converter) = 13.29 kW 10 NPSH = 8.83 ft 0 0 Company name: Created by: Phone: Date: 29/11/2023 H CR 95-2-2, 3*460 V, 60Hz Description Value [ft] General information: 240 36 42 100 %48 Product name: CR 95-2-2 A-G-A-E-HQQE 54 60 Product No: 99918388 220 66 69 EAN number: 5715114132602 200 90 % Technical: 70.8 180 Pump speed on which pump data are based: 3530 rpm 160 69 Rated flow: 500 US GPM 80 % Rated head: 153.2 ft 140 66 120 70 % Maximum head: 232 ft 60 Actual impeller diameter: 6.07 in 100 54 60 % Stages: 2 80 48 Impellers: 2 50 % 60 Number of reduced-diameter impellers: 2 40 40 % Low NPSH: N 42 20 25 % Pump orientation: Vertical 36 Shaft seal arrangement: Single 0 Code for shaft seal: HQQE 0 100 200 300 400 500 Q [US GPM] Approvals for drinking water: NSF/ANSI 61,NSF/ANSI 372 Q = 350 US GPM H = 140 ft n = 86 % (51.4Hz) / 3044 rpm Pumped liquid = Water Curve tolerance: ISO9906:2012 3B Density = 62.29 lb/ft³ Pump version: A Liquid temperature during operation = 68 °F P1 NPSH Model: A [kW] [ft] Cooling: IC 411 Materials: 25 50 Base: Ductile cast iron Base: EN 1563 EN-GJS-500-7 20 40 Base: ASTM A536-84 65-45-12 15 30 Impeller: Stainless steel Impeller: EN 1.4301 10 20 Impeller: AISI 304 5 10 Material code: A Code for rubber: E 0 0 P1 (motor+freq.converter) = 13.29 kW Bearing: WC/WC NPSH = 8.83 ft 15.0016.50 7.509.025.91 5.51 13.8010.808.863.94 4x0.73 31.50 4 X G 1/2N/A8x0.71 G 1/2 15.70 23.60 Support bearing: Graflon 11.1014.20 20.90 Material certified according to: European standards Installation: 11.10 14.20 20.90 Maximum ambient temperature: 104 °F Maximum operating pressure: 232.06 psi Max pressure at stated temp: 232 psi / 250 °F 23.60 Type of connection: ANSI Size of inlet connection: 4 inch 15.70 G 1/2 G 1/2 Size of outlet connection: 4 inch Pressure rating for connection: 150 lb Flange size for motor: 284TSC 31.50 8x0.71 Connect code: G N/A 4 X G 1/2 Liquid: 4x0.73 5.917.509.02 Liquid temperature range: -4 .. 248 °F 5.51 8.86 3.94 Electrical data: 10.80 13.80 Motor standard: NEMA 15.00 16.50 Motor type: WEG Rated power - P2: 25 HP Power (P2) required by pump: 25 HP Mains frequency: 60 Hz Rated voltage: 3 x 230/460 V T11 T12 T10 T11 T12 T10 Service factor: 1.25 T5 T6 T4 T5 T6 T4 Rated current: 57.6/28.8 A T8 T9 T7 T8 T9 T7 Starting current: 630 % Full load SF current: 72/36 A 208-230VT2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 Cos phi - power factor: 0.88 L2 L3 L1 460//380-415L2 L3 L1 Rated speed: 3545 rpm IE efficiency: IE3 91,7% IE Efficiency class: IE3 / NEMA Premium Motor efficiency at full load: 91.7 % Motor efficiency at 3/4 load: 91.7 % Motor efficiency at 1/2 load: 91 % Number of poles: 2 Company name: Created by: Phone: Date: 29/11/2023 Description Value Enclosure class (IEC 34-5): IP55 Insulation class (IEC 85): F Built-in motor protection: NONE Motor No: 99883249 Controls: Frequency converter: None Others: DOE Pump Energy Index CL: 0.93 Net weight: 646 lb Gross weight: 908 lb Shipping volume: 44.2 ft³ Thrust handling device: N Country of origin: US Custom tariff no.: 8413.70.2040 Company name: Created by: Phone: Date: 29/11/2023 99918388 CR 95-2-2 A-G-A-E-HQQE 60 Hz H CR 95-2-2, 3*460 V, 60Hz [ft] 260 240 36 42 100 %48 54 60 220 66 69 200 90 % 70.8 180 160 69 80 % 140 66 120 70 % 60 100 54 60 % 80 48 50 % 60 40 40 % 42 20 25 % 36 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 Q [US GPM] Q = 350 US GPM H = 140 ft n = 86 % (51.4Hz) / 3044 rpm Pumped liquid = Water Liquid temperature during operation = 68 °F Density = 62.29 lb/ft³ P1 NPSH [kW] [ft] 30 60 25 50 20 40 15 30 10 20 5 10 0 0 P1 (motor+freq.converter) = 13.29 kW NPSH = 8.83 ft Company name: Created by: Phone: Date: 29/11/2023 99918388 CR 95-2-2 A-G-A-E-HQQE 60 Hz cos phi CR95-2-2 + WEG 18.5 kW 3*460 V, 60 Hz, SF = 1,25 I eta [A] eta 0.8 cos phi 40 I 0.6 30 0.4 20 0.2 10 0.0 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 P2 [HP] P2 = 15.7 HP cos phi = 0.87 Eta = 88.3 % I = 19.27 A n P1 [rpm] [kW] 3000 n 30 P1 (motor+freq.converter) 2000 20 1000 10 0 0 P1 (motor+freq.converter) = 13.29 kW n = 86 % / 3044 rpm Submittal Data 11.10 14.20 20.90 23.60 15.70 G 1/2 G 1/2 31.50 8 x 0.71 4 X G 1/2 N/A 4 x 0.73 5.917.509.02 5.51 8.86 3.94 10.80 13.80 15.00 16.50 Materials: Base: Ductile cast iron Base: EN 1563 EN-GJS-500-7 Base: ASTM A536-84 65-45-12 Impeller: Stainless steel Impeller: AISI 304 Impeller: EN 1.4301 Material code: A Code for rubber: E 28 32 32 1a 36 9 10 10a 113 109 105 2 110 18 25 38 2c 38 44a 2d 3 47d 3a 37 47c 51 55 48 49b 26a 65 49 45 44 49a 65 65 45 45 4a 4 47d 47d 47 47c 48 47a 49b 48 49 49a 49b 6 65 49 45 49a 56 4 47d 65 47c 45 48 4 51 47d 49b 47c 49 48 65 65 49b 45 44 45 49 4a 37 47d 65 47 45 44 47a 26c 48 26b 49b 51 440b 440 49 440a 6 6 56 56 CR 15-4 A-G-J-A-E-HQQE Pump Submittal Data PROJECT: UNIT TAG: QUANTITY: TYPE OF SERVICE: REPRESENTATIVE: SUBMITTED BY: DATE: ENGINEER: APPROVED BY: DATE: CONTRACTOR: ORDER NO.: 176113 DATE: CR 15-4 A-GJ-A-E-HQQE Vertical, multistage centrifugal pump with suction and discharge ports on the same level. The pump head and base are in cast iron. All other wetted parts are in stainless steel (EN 1.4301)(AISI 304) Product photo could vary from the actual product Conditions of Service Pump Data Motor Data Liquid: Water Max pressure at stated temperature: 232 psi / 250 °F Rated power - P2: 7.5 HP Temperature: 68 °F Liquid temperature range: -4 .. 248 °F Rated voltage: 230/460 V Specific Gravity: 1.000 Maximum ambient temperature: 104 °F Main frequency: 60 Hz Shaft seal: HQQE Enclosure class: IP55 Product number: 99917480 Insulation class: F Motor protection: NONE Motor type: WEG Eff. 1/1: 89.5 % H CR 15-4, 3*460 V, 60Hz eta [ft] [%] Pumped liquid = Water Liquid temperature during operation = 68 °F Density = 62.29 lb/ft³ 250 100 200 80 150 60 100 40 50 20 0 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 Q [US gpm] P NPSH [HP] [ft] P1 8 40 P2 6 30 4 20 2 10 0 0 Company name: Pumptech, LLC Created by: Pumptech, LLC Phone: 5036596230 Date: 3/12/2024 Project: Client: Reference number: Client number: Contact: H CR 15-4, 3*460 V, 60Hz eta Description Value [ft] [%] General information: Product name: CR 15-4 A-GJ-A-E-HQQE Product No.: 99917480 EAN: 5715114122900 250 100 Technical: Rated pump speed: 3467 rpm 200 80 Rated flow: 90.3 US gpm Rated head: 206 ft 150 60 Maximum head: 266.4 ft Actual impeller diameter: 4.13 in Stages: 4 100 40 Impellers: 4 Number of reduced-diameter impellers: 0 50 20 Low NPSH: N Pump orientation: Vertical 0 0 Shaft seal arrangement: Single 0 20 40 60 80 100 Q [US gpm] Code for shaft seal: HQQE Pumped liquid = Water Liquid temperature during operation = 68 °F Approvals: CURUS Density = 62.29 lb/ft³ Approvals for drinking water: NSF/ANSI 61 P NPSH [HP] [ft] Curve tolerance: ISO9906:2012 3B 10 50 Pump version: A P1 Model: A 8 40 Cooling: IC 411 P2 Materials: 6 30 Base: Cast iron Base: EN 1561 EN-GJL-200 4 20 Base: ASTM A48-25B Impeller: Stainless steel 2 10 Impeller: EN 1.4301 Impeller: AISI 304 0 0 6.9311.808.4610.10 5.006.500.793.54 5.122.564.92x0.564 21.10 1 X G 1/2 8x0.910.79x G 1/2 8.80 17.00 Material code: A 11.007.95 Code for rubber: E 7.95 Bearing: SIC 11.00 Installation: Maximum ambient temperature: 104 °F Maximum operating pressure: 232.06 psi 17.00 Max pressure at stated temperature: 232 psi / 250 °F Max pressure at stated temperature: 232 psi / -4 °F 8.80 G 1/2 G 1/2 Type of connection: ANSI / JIS Size of inlet connection: DN 50 8x0.91 x0.79 Size of outlet connection: DN 50 21.10 1 X G 1/2 Pressure rating for connection: PN 25 5.006.50 0.79 Flange rating inlet: 300 lb 3.54 Flange size for motor: 213TC 5.12 2.56 6.93 4.92 4 x0.56 Connect code: GJ 11.80 8.46 10.10 Liquid: Pumped liquid: Water Liquid temperature range: -4 .. 248 °F Selected liquid temperature: 68 °F Density: 62.29 lb/ft³ T4 T5 T6 T4 T5 T6 T1-BLU T2-WHT Electrical data: T3-ORG T4-YEL Motor standard: NEMA T7 T8 T9 T7 T8 T9 T5-BLK T6-GRY Motor type: WEG LOW HIGH T7-PNK T8-RED VOLTAGE VOLTAGE Rated power - P2: 7.5 HP T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T9-BRK RED Power (P2) required by pump: 7.5 HP L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 Main frequency: 60 Hz INTERCHANGE ANY TWO LINE WIRES TO REVERSE THE ROTATION Rated voltage: 3 x 230/460 V Service factor: 1.15 Rated current: 17.3/8.67 A Starting current: 760 % Full load SF current: 19.9/9.97 A Company name: Pumptech, LLC Created by: Pumptech, LLC Phone: 5036596230 Date: 3/12/2024 Project: Client: Reference number: Client number: Contact: Description Value Cos phi - power factor: 0.89 Rated speed: 3530 rpm IE efficiency: IE3 89,5% IE Efficiency class: IE3 / NEMA Premium Motor efficiency at full load: 89.5 % Motor efficiency at 3/4 load: 88.5 % Motor efficiency at 1/2 load: 87.5 % Number of poles: 2 Enclosure class (IEC 34-5): IP55 Insulation class (IEC 85): F Built-in motor protection: NONE Motor Number: 99882381 Controls: Frequency converter: None Others: DOE Pump Energy Index CL: 0.91 Net weight: 240 lb Gross weight: 256 lb Shipping volume: 13.1 ft³ Country of origin: MX Custom tariff no.: 8413.70.2040 Company name: Pumptech, LLC Created by: Pumptech, LLC Phone: 5036596230 Date: 3/12/2024 Project: Client: Reference number: Client number: Contact: 99917480 CR 15-4 A-GJ-A-E-HQQE 60 Hz H CR 15-4, 3*460 V, 60Hz eta [ft] [%] 250 100 200 80 150 60 100 40 50 20 0 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 Q [US gpm] Pumped liquid = Water Liquid temperature during operation = 68 °F Density = 62.29 lb/ft³ P NPSH [HP] [ft] 10 50 P1 8 40 P2 6 30 4 20 2 10 0 0 Company name: Pumptech, LLC Created by: Pumptech, LLC Phone: 5036596230 Date: 3/12/2024 Project: Client: Reference number: Client number: Contact: 99917480 CR 15-4 A-GJ-A-E-HQQE 60 Hz cos phi CR15-4 + WEG 5.5 kW 3*460 V, 60 Hz, SF = 1,15 I eta [A] eta cos phi 0.8 16 0.6 I 12 0.4 8 0.2 4 0.0 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 P2 [HP] n P1 [rpm] [kW] 3600 n 3400 10 P1 3200 8 3000 6 2800 4 2600 2 2400 0 Company name: Pumptech, LLC Created by: Pumptech, LLC Phone: 5036596230 Date: 3/12/2024 Project: Client: Reference number: Client number: Contact: 99917480 CR 15-4 A-GJ-A-E-HQQE 60 Hz 0.56 6.50 x 5.00 4 2.564.92 8.4610.10 x 0.79 0.91 0.79 x 8 G 1/2 11.00 5.12 6.9311.80 7.95 G 1/2 1 X G 1/2 8.80 3.54 17.00 21.10 Note! All units are in [in] unless otherwise stated. Disclaimer: This simplified dimensional drawing does not show all details. Company name: Pumptech, LLC Created by: Pumptech, LLC Phone: 5036596230 Date: 3/12/2024 Project: Client: Reference number: Client number: Contact: 99917480 CR 15-4 A-GJ-A-E-HQQE 60 Hz T2-WHTT4-YELT6-GRYT8-RED T1-BLUT3-ORGT5-BLKT7-PNKT9-BRK RED T6 T9 T5 T8 T2 T3 L2 L3 T4 T7 T1 L1 VOLTAGE HIGH T6 T9 T3 L3 T5 T8 T2 L2 T4 T7 T1 L1 INTERCHANGE ANY TWO LINE WIRES TO REVERSE THE ROTATION VOLTAGE LOW All units are [in] unless otherwise presented. TAB #3 MISCELLANEOUSE INFORMATION Commercial Water Systems Tanks For Commercial & Industrial Applications Amtrol pre-pressurized, potable water well tanks are engineered to reduce surge and ensure minimum pump run time in municipal well systems and high pressure booster pump applications. Available in diaphragm, full acceptance and partial acceptance bladder designs, all Well-X-Trol well tanks are made in the USA at our ISO 9001:2008 registered facilities. ASME tanks meet Section VIII, Division I standards. Well-X-Trol Diaphragm Series Diaphragm design; industry’s thickest. Meets NSF/ANSI 61 standards. Antimicrobial liner neutralizes bacteria NAF 2016 compliant. on contact. Factory pre-charge: 30 psig. Patent pending Turbulatorâ„¢ diffuser Maximum operating temperature: 200° F. agitates incoming water to prevent sediment build-up. A Clean Water Technologyâ„¢ Antimicrobial Liner and Turbulator work together to keep tank surfaces clean and healthy. B WX-403C -125 SGR Antimicrobial Liner Protection WX-403C (ASME) 125 PSI Rating with Sight Glass & Restraints Neutralizes bacteria on contact. Safe, Silver-Ion technology only targets Non-ASME Diaphragm Series Specifications active microorganisms. Shipping Weight (lbs.) Compound is molded into the water reservoir Max. System Model Tank Accept. A B Conn.1 Max. Working lining to last the life of the tank. Volume Diameter Height Pressure Number Volume NPTF (Gallons) (Inches) (Inches) (Gallons) (Inches) 150 PSI Water Bacteria WX-401 18 11 16 31 196 WX-402 25 11 16 40 1 113 Silver Ion Release WX-403 34 11 16 49 1 120 WX-404 68 34 24 48 1¼ 232 Liner WX-405 90 34 24 59 1¼ 255 Surface WX-406 110 34 24 70 1¼ 313 WX-407 132 46 30 57 1¼ 450 ASME Diaphragm Series Specifications Silver Ions Liner Max. System Shipping Weight (lbs.) Tank A B 1 Model Accept. Conn. Max. Working Pressure Volume Diameter Length Number Volume NPTF Fresh Water Turbulatorâ„¢ (Gallons) (Inches) (Inches) (Gallons) (Inches) 125 PSI 150 PSI 175 PSI 250 PSI 300 PSI WX-401C 18 11 16 31 1 77 96 110 126 133 Patented diffuser agitates incoming WX-402C 25 11 16 40 1 93 113 125 145 160 water stream. WX-403C 34 11 16 49 1 115 120 145 183 200 Water-jet scrubbing action prevents WX-404C 68 34 24 48 1¼ 227 232 313 411 432 sediment buildup. WX-405C 90 34 24 59 1¼ 252 255 384 433 460 Eliminates stagnant water in WX-406C 110 34 24 70 1¼ 286 335 402 475 500 VFD applications. WX-407C 132 46 30 57 1¼ 436 450 510 570 625 1 Helps extend the life of the tank. Malleable Iron system connection. Commercial Water Systems Tanks Well-X-Trol® Full Acceptance Bladder Series Replaceable, full acceptance bladder design. Heavy duty butyl bladder; industry’s thickest. Bladder meets NSF/ANSI 61 standards. NAF 2016 compliant. Factory pre-charge: 25 psig. Maximum operating temperature: 240°F. WX-448C -175 SGR WX-448C (ASME) 175 PSI Rating with Sight Glass & Restraints Non-ASME Full Acceptance Bladder Series Specifications Max. System Shipping Weight (lbs.) Model Tank Accept. A B Conn.1 Max. Working Pressure Volume Diameter Height Number Volume NPTF (Gallons) (Inches) (Inches) (Gallons) (Inches) 100 PSI 150 PSI WX-421 158 158 30 75 2 388 N/A WX-422 211 211 30 93 2 454 N/A A WX-423 264 264 36 82 3 506 N/A WX-424 317 317 36 95 3 571 N/A WX-426 422 422 48 82 3 971 N/A WX-427 528 528 48 96 3 1,222 N/A WX-447 53 53 24 45 2 N/A 289 WX-448 80 80 24 59 2 N/A 338 WX-449 106 106 24 73 2 N/A 350 WX-450 132 132 24 87 2 N/A 392 B WX-451 158 158 30 73 2 N/A 587 WX-452 211 211 30 91 2 N/A 627 WX-453 264 264 36 86 3 N/A 752 (Bladder Only) WX-454 317 317 36 98 3 N/A 840 WX-455 370 370 36 110 3 N/A 930 WX-456 422 422 48 82 3 N/A 1,418 WX-457 528 528 48 97 3 N/A 1,500 Tank pressure rating: ASME Full Acceptance Bladder Series Specifications Max. System Shipping Weight (lbs.) 125psi Model Tank Accept. A B Conn.1 Max. Working Pressure Volume Diameter Height Number Volume NPTF (Gallons) (Gallons) (Inches) (Inches) (Inches) 125 PSI 150 PSI 175 PSI 250 PSI 300 PSI WX-447C 53 53 24 45 2 263 289 368 420 462 WX-448C 80 80 24 59 2 315 338 430 492 540 A WX-449C 106 106 24 73 2 319 350 440 507 557 WX-450C 132 132 24 87 2 351 392 454 570 627 WX-451C 158 158 30 73 2 493 587 680 813 894 WX-452C 211 211 30 91 2 602 627 694 1,007 1,107 WX-453C 264 264 36 86 3 676 752 846 1,095 1,204 WX-454C 317 317 36 98 3 762 840 959 1,264 1,390 WX-455C 370 370 36 110 3 843 930 1,060 1,350 1,485 WX-456C 422 422 48 82 3 1,154 1,418 1,655 1,700 1,826 B WX-457C 528 528 48 97 3 1,331 1,500 1,870 2,231 2,450 WX-4WX-458C58C 660 660 60 8484 4 1,4501,450 1,740 2,030 2,320 2,750 WX-459C 792 792 60 99 4 2,169 2,385 3,036 3,470 3,690 (Bladder Only) WX-460C 925 925 60 107 4 2,300 2,530 3,220 3,680 3,910 WX-461C 1,056 1,056 60 121 4 2,638 2,900 3,695 4,220 4,485 WX-462C 1,320 1,320 72 104 4 3,500 3,850 4,900 5,600 5,950 WX-463C 1,980 1,980 72 140 4 4,100 4,510 5,740 6,560 6,970 1Malleable Iron system connection. D80 Series Dry or Liquid Filled • Stainless Steel Case Specifications Models Wetted Parts D82B (dry) Bronze tube, D82LFB (liquid filled) brass socket Lead-Free (PBF) Meets NSF/ANSI Standards 372 and 61 D83SS (dry) 316 Stainless steel D83LFSSD83LFSS (liquid filled) tube & socket(liquid filled) Dial Sizes 11/2", 2", 21/2", 4" Fill Glycerine, other fills available Glycerine See Optional Features Section Movement D82: Brass D83D83: : 316 Stainless steel316 Stainless steel 11/2", 2", 21/2", 4" UTILITY GAUGES Dial Sizes Connection Lower male or center back male, Lower (Lower back male 4” Dial only) ±1.6% Accuracy (1% Optional) Case 304 stainless steel, D82LFB shown Stainless Steel Case stem-mounted flangeless Ring Crimped 304 stainless steel Glycerine Fill Standard Window Acrylic Pointer Plain, black finished The Trerice D80 Series Industrial • Optional features and case Gauge is designed for rugged style variations available: Dial Face Aluminum, white background with Please consult the Options black graduations and markings performance requirements at an & Accessories Section for economical cost. This liquid filled Accuracy ±1.6% Full Scale details. gauge is furnished with a stainless (1% available as an option) steel case and crimped ring. Wetted • For correct use and Maximum Temperature parts are either bronze tube with application of all pressure 150°F (65°C) gauges, please refer to: Lead-Free (PBF) brass socket or Pressure Gauge Standard Approximate Shipping Weight stainless steel. ASME B40.100. 11/2" Dial Size: 0.4 lbs [0.18 kg] 2" Dial Size: 0.4 lbs [0.18 kg] Note: “NEW” Range Codes 21/2" Dial Size: 0.5 lbs [0.23 kg] 4" Dial Size: 1.0 lbs [0.45 kg] HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: D82LFB 25 02 L A 300 Model Dial Size Connection Connection Units of Range Code Size Location Measure D82LFB 15 11/2 01 1/8 NPT* L Lower Lower A psi See Standard psi D83LFSS 20 D83LFSS 2" 02 1/4 NPT** B Back D psi/kPa Ranges D82B 25 25 21/2" " 04 1/2 NPT*** Note: “NEW” D83SS 40 4" Range Codes * 1/8 NPT connection size not available with 4" dial size. ** 1/4 NPT connection size not available with 11/2" dial size. *** 1/2 NPT connection size only available with 4" dial size. 14 12950 W. Eight Mile Road •  Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 •  TEL:248/399-8000 •  FAX: 248/399-7246 •  www.TRERICE.com D80 Series All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters. Dry or Liquid Filled • Stainless Steel Case Standard Ranges Note: “NEW” Range Codes UTILITY GAUGES psi Ranges (A) D82 D83 NEW OLD Range Range Specific Figure Minor Figure Minor Code Code Range Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions 30/0 010 30" Hg to 0 5 0.5 5 0.5 30/15 020 30" Hg to 15 psi 10/5 1/0.5 10/5 1/0.5 30/30 030 30" Hg to 30 psi 10/5 1/1 10/5 1/1 30/60 040 30" Hg to 60 psi 10/10 2/1 10/10 2/1 30/100 050 30" Hg to 100 psi 30/20 2/2 30/20 2/2 30/150 060 30" Hg to 150 psi 30/30 5/2 30/30 5/2 30/300 070 30" Hg to 300 psi 30/50 5/5 30/50 5/5 15 080 0 to 15 psi 3 0.2 3 0.2 30 090 0 to 30 psi 5 0.5 5 0.5 60 100100 0 to 60 psi 10 1 10 1 0 to 60 psi 10 1 100 110 0 to 100 psi 10 1 10 1 160 120 0 to 160 psi 20 2 20 2 200 130130 0 to 200 psi 20 2 20 2 0 to 200 psi 20 2 300 140 0 to 300 psi 50 5 50 5 400 150 0 to 400 psi 50 5 50 5 600 160 0 to 600 psi 100 10 100 10 1000 180 0 to 1000 psi 100 20 100 20 1500 190 0 to 1500 psi 300 20 300 20 2000 200 0 to 2000 psi 200 20 200 20 3000 210 0 to 3000 psi 500 50 500 50 1.18 [30] 5000 220 0 to 5000 psi 1000 100 1000 100 Ranges over 5000 PSI are not available on D82LFB. 10000 230 0 to 10000 psi N/A N/A 2000 200 Lower back male 15000 240 0 to 15000 psi N/A N/A 3000 200 4” Dial only For dual scale ranges specify the appropriate Units of Measure: D (psi/kPa) followed by the corresponding A (psi) Range Code Dial Size C E F J M 11/2" D82 1.85 [47] 1.50 [38] 0.32 [8] 1.06 [27] 1.61 [41] 11/2" D83 1.85 [47] 1.50 [38] 0.32 [8] 1.06 [27] 1.61 [41] 2" D82 2.28 [58] 1.89 [48] 0.39 [10] 1.14 [29] 2.05 [52] 2" D83 2.28 [58] 2.05 [52] 0.35 [9] 1.18 [30] 2.05 [52] 21/2" D82 2.68 [68] 2.24 [57] 0.39 [10] 1.18 [30] 2.44 [62] 21/2" D83 2.68 [68] 2.32 [59] 0.51 [13] 1.38 [35] 2.44 [62] 4" D82 4.29 [109] 3.07 [78] 0.47 [12] 1.42 [36] 3.90 [99] 4" D83 4.29 [109] 3.94 [100] 0.75 [19] 1.93 [49] 3.94 [100] 15 12950 W. Eight Mile Road •  Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 •  TEL:248/399-8000 •  FAX: 248/399-7246 •  www.TRERICE.com Item Based Datasheet Pressure transmitter Model A-10 Modelcode type: A-10 Item number: 50426427 Pressure transmitter Model A-10 Pressure range 0...50 psig0...50 psig Overload Safety 2 times Vacuum tightness yes OUTPUT SIGNAL Output signal 4 ... 20 mA, 2-wire Permissible load in Ω Settling time < 1 ms POWER SUPPLY Power supply 8...30 V DC Total current Current signal, max. 25 mA consumption ACCURACY INFORMATION non-linearity 0.5% BFSL Long-term drift ≤ ±0.1 % of span TEMPERATURE ERROR OPERATING ENVIRONMENT CONDITIONS Temperature range of 0...+80 °C medium Permissible ambient temperature Shock resistance Service life 100 million load cycle MATERIALS Wetted parts Non-wetted parts PROCESS CONNECTION Process Connection 1/4 NPT ELECTRICAL CONNECTION © Copyright by WIKA: Reproduction of this document is prohibited 08/03/2024 Page 1 of 2 WIKA Instrument, LP E-mail: info@wika.com Phone: (+1) 770-513-8200 1000 Wiegand Boulevard WEB: http://www.wika.com Fax: (+1) 770-338-5118 LAWRENCEVILLE, GA 30043 US Federal Tax ID: 74-1304350 Item Based Datasheet Pressure transmitter Model A-10 Modelcode type: A-10 Item number: 50426427 Electrical Connection valve connector, size A Ingress Protection pin assignment el. UB=1, 0V=2 connection ELECTRICAL SAFETY Short-circuit resistance S+ vs. U- Reverse polarity protection Insulation voltage DC 500 V CE-CONFORMITY, APPROVALS AND CERTIFICATES CE conformity Approvals cULus © Copyright by WIKA: Reproduction of this document is prohibited 08/03/2024 Page 2 of 2 WIKA Instrument, LP E-mail: info@wika.com Phone: (+1) 770-513-8200 1000 Wiegand Boulevard WEB: http://www.wika.com Fax: (+1) 770-338-5118 LAWRENCEVILLE, GA 30043 US Federal Tax ID: 74-1304350 Item Based Datasheet Pressure transmitter Model A-10 Modelcode type: A-10 Item number: 50398083 Pressure transmitter Model A-10 Pressure range 0...200 psig0...200 psig Overload Safety 2 times Vacuum tightness yes OUTPUT SIGNAL Output signal 4 ... 20 mA, 2-wire Permissible load in Ω Settling time < 1 ms POWER SUPPLY Power supply 8...30 V DC Total current Current signal, max. 25 mA consumption ACCURACY INFORMATION non-linearity 0.5% BFSL Long-term drift ≤ ±0.1 % of span TEMPERATURE ERROR OPERATING ENVIRONMENT CONDITIONS Temperature range of 0...+80 °C medium Permissible ambient temperature Shock resistance Service life 100 million load cycle MATERIALS Wetted parts Non-wetted parts PROCESS CONNECTION Process Connection 1/4 NPT ELECTRICAL CONNECTION © Copyright by WIKA: Reproduction of this document is prohibited 08/03/2024 Page 1 of 2 WIKA Instrument, LP E-mail: info@wika.com Phone: (+1) 770-513-8200 1000 Wiegand Boulevard WEB: http://www.wika.com Fax: (+1) 770-338-5118 LAWRENCEVILLE, GA 30043 US Federal Tax ID: 74-1304350 Item Based Datasheet Pressure transmitter Model A-10 Modelcode type: A-10 Item number: 50398083 Electrical Connection valve connector, size A Ingress Protection pin assignment el. UB=1, 0V=2 connection ELECTRICAL SAFETY Short-circuit resistance S+ vs. U- Reverse polarity protection Insulation voltage DC 500 V CE-CONFORMITY, APPROVALS AND CERTIFICATES CE conformity © Copyright by WIKA: Reproduction of this document is prohibited 08/03/2024 Page 2 of 2 WIKA Instrument, LP E-mail: info@wika.com Phone: (+1) 770-513-8200 1000 Wiegand Boulevard WEB: http://www.wika.com Fax: (+1) 770-338-5118 LAWRENCEVILLE, GA 30043 US Federal Tax ID: 74-1304350 Wafer Check Valve Silent Check Model 888VFD Sizes 2" Thru 6" / 50 mm & 150 mm Flomatic Corporation Materials BUTTERFLY VALVE Item # Qty Description Material ASTM 11 Body (Epoxy Coated) Ductile Iron A536 65-45-12 2 1 Bushing Bronze C95400 3 1 Snap Ring Stainless Steel 302 4 1 Spring Stainless Steel 302 5 1 Poppet Stainless Steel CF8M 316 6* 1 O'Ring* EPDM 5778-70 7 1 Seat Ring Stainless Steel CF8M 316 8 1 O'Ring EPDM 5778-70 *RESILIENT SEATING IS STANDARD Max Temp 200°F (93°C) Max Inlet Pressure @ 150º F (65ºC) 150# 300 psi (21bar) Max Inlet Pressure @ 150º F (65ºC) 300# 500 psi (34bar) MSS SP-125 Compliant Dimensions PATENT # 6,024,121 Size AB C D Weight # of Bolts Bolt Size by Flange Part # inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm lbs kg 150# 300# 150# 300# 2 50 2434VFD 2-13/32 61 2-5/8 67 4-1/4 108 51/64 20 4 2 4 8 5/8 x 5-1/4 5/8 x 5-1/2 2-1/2 65 2432VFD 2-43/64 68 2-7/8 73 5 127 57/64 23 6 3 4 8 5/8 x 5-1/4 3/4 x 6-1/2 3 80 2435VFD 3-1/4 83 3-1/8 79 5-3/4 146 3/4 19 9 4 4 8 5/8 x 6-1/4 3/4 x 7 4 100 2436VFD 4-1/4 108 4 102 7 178 1-3/64 27 16 7 8 8 5/8 x 7 3/4 x 8 5 125 2433VFD 5-1/4 133 4-3/4 121 8-3/8 213 1-11/32 34 21 10 8 8 3/4 x 7-3/4 3/4 x 9 6 150 2437VFD 5-29/32 150 5-1/2 140 9-3/4 248 1-27/32 47 34 15 8 12 3/4 x 8-3/4 3/4 x 10 Flomatic Corporation can accept no responsibility for possible errors in catalogues, brochures and other printed material. Flomatic Corporation reserves the right to alter its products without notices. This also applies to product already agreed. All trademarks in this material are property of the respective companies. All rights reserved. ©2020 Flomatic Corporation. The drawings & information on this drawing sheet are the sole & exclusive property of Flomatic Corporation. Any reproduction, distribution, display or use of these drawings or information in whole or in part without written authorization of Flomatic Corporation is strictly prohibited. www.flomatic.com FLOMATIC CORPORATION GLENS FALLS, N.Y. 12801 July 20, 2016 PHONE (518) 761-9797 Dwg No: S888VFD-1ST Rev G (2/20) FAX (518) 761-9798 RESILIENT SEATED BUTTERFLY VALVESTTERFLY VALVES BRAY.COM TABLE OF CONTENTS Body Style Size Range Pressure Range Page Series 20 Wafer 1”-20” (25mm-500mm) 150 psi (10.3 bar) 6 Series 21 Lug 2”-20” (50mm-500mm) 150 psi (10.3 bar) Series 22 Wafer 2”-20” (50mm-500mm) 150 psi (10.3 bar) Lug 2”-20” (50mm-500mm) 150 psi (10.3 bar) 8 Series 23 Double Flanged 24” (600mm) 150 psi (10.3 bar) 2”-12” (50mm-300mm) 175 psi (12 bar) Series 30 Wafer 14”-20” (350mm-500mm) 150 psi (10.3 bar) 10 2”-12” (50mm-300mm) 175 psi (12 bar) Series 31 Lug 14”-20” (350mm-500mm) 150 psi (10.3 bar) Series 31H Lug 2”-20” (50mm-500mm) 250 psi (17.2 bar) 11 Series 31U Lug 2”-12” (50mm-300mm) 285 psi (20 bar) 12 2”-12” (50mm-300mm) 175 psi (12 bar) Series 3A Double Flanged 14 14”-20” (350mm-500mm) 150 psi (10.3 bar) Series 3AH Double Flanged 2”-20” (50mm-500mm) 250 psi (17.2 bar) 15 Series 32 Wafer 22”-36” (550mm-900mm) 75 psi (5.2 bar) 18 Series 33 Wafer 22”-36” (550mm-900mm) 150 psi (10.3 bar) 18 Series 35 Double Flanged 22”-120” (550mm-3000mm) 75 psi (5.2 bar) 20 Series 36 Double Flanged 22”-120” (550mm-3000mm) 150 psi (10.3 bar) 20 Series 35F Double Flanged 32”-60” (800mm-1500mm) 75 psi (5.2 bar) 21 Series 36H Double Flanged 22”-60” (550mm-1500mm) 232 psi (16 bar) 21 Actuators & Accessories 22 INTERNATIONAL COMPATIBILITY ACTUATOR MOUNTING Valve mounting top flanges meet ISO 5211 All Bray actuators including handles, gear bolt circle standards for direct mounting of operators, pneumatic and electric actuators manual operators and power actuators. All mount directly to Bray resilient seated valves. Bray valves have extended necks which allow No brackets are required. This allows for for at least 2” piping insulation. simple installation in the field, minimizes possible misalignment and reduces overall height. 2 | BRAY.COM FEATURES AND BENEFITS 1”- 20” (25mm - 500mm) ISOLATION FROM LINE MEDIA POLYESTER COATING Bray’s seat design and internal disc to stem connection The Bray standard polyester isolates the line media from the body and stem. body coating is a hard, gloss red finish. The polyester INTERNAL DISC TO STEM CONNECTION coating provides excellent Series 30/31 Sizes 2”– 20” (50mm–500mm) corrosion and wear resistance. Bray offers Double "D" precision machined flats on the Chemical Resistant stem and in the disc. The Series 30/31 internal, non-wetted connections eliminate exposed external Resistant to dilute acids and disc to stem connections. alkalies, petroleum solvents, alcohols, greases and oils. The disc and the stem connection minimizes hysteresis and produces maximum strength engagements. All stem Weatherability designs incorporate a blowout proof feature. Resistant to humidity, water and ultraviolet radiation. Abrasion and Impact Resistant NYLON 11 COATING Nylon 11 has superior corrosion resistance and has been used successfully in many applications such as water, cement, food and seawater. Weatherability Bray’s Nylon 11 coating has been salt spray tested in excess of 2000 hours and used in seawater immersion service for over 30 years without any deterioration of the coating resulting in no corrosion to the coated metal components. Abrasion and Impact Resistant SEACORR® COATING This proprietary coating for actuators provides superior SEAT DESIGN product protection in corrosive conditions, tested to The seat is designed to seal with slip-on or weld-neck ASTM B-117. flanges and the molded o-ring eliminates the need for flange gaskets. The tongue and groove locks the seat in place and makes the valve dead end capable. Tongue and Groove Other customer specified coating materials are available. Please consult your local Bray representative for your specific application. All Bray valves are pressure tested to 110% of rated pressure to assure bubble tight shutoff. RESILIENT SEATED BUTTERFLY VALVES | 3 SEAT MATERIALS Series 20, 21, 3A, 30, 31, 32, 33, 35, 36 400 350 300 250 EPDM HTEPDM BUNA-N FKM Polyurethane Neoprene 200 1500 1000 500 Rated Operating Temperature (ºF)0 -20 PEROXIDE CURED EPDM FKM -20°F to 250°F (-29°C to 121°C) 0°F to 400°F (-18°C to 204°C) Bray’s peroxide cured EPDM (Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer) FKM is the ASTM D1418 designation for Fluorinated Hydrocarbon seats have a higher resistance to abrasion, lower compression set, Elastomers (Fluoroelastomers) such as Viton® (DuPont). FKM has and higher temperature capabilities than sulfur cured seats. some outstanding characteristics such as improved acid, oil, and temperature resistance over other seat materials. As a standard seat offering, Bray’s peroxide cured EPDM is the most universal and economical seat material used in our resilient seated POLYURETHANE butterfly valves. All of Bray’s peroxide cured EPDM seats are food -20°F to 175°F (-29°C to 80°C) grade and can be certified to NSF-61. Polyurethane seats are primarily used because of their resistance HTEPDM to abrasive wear. Polyurethane can be used in a reasonably broad -20°F to 300°F (-29°C to 150°C) range of services and will withstand severe impact, recover its original shape after distortion and resist abrasion better than HTEPDM is a proprietary rubber blend offered by Bray to increase the other elastomers. thermal resistance properties of standard EPDM and is formulated to provide long term service at elevated temperatures for hot NEOPRENE SEAT (Black or White) water. HTEPDM Food Grade seats are suitable for sanitary 0°F to 180°F (-18°C to 82°C) applications as well as standard industrial uses. Neoprene is an all-purpose polymer with desirable characteristics BUNA-N (Black or White) including high resiliency with low compression, resistance to 0°F to 212°F (-18°C to 100°C) vegetable and animal oil, and flame resistance. This sealing material is excellent for refrigerants, ammonia and Freon, and is BUNA-N is the commonly used name for Nitrile synthetic rubber. principally used in pulp and (non-bleached) paper lines. Neoprene Nitrile is a copolymer of acrylonitrile and butadiene. BUNA-N is not recommended for strong oxidizing acids, chlorinated is sometimes referred to as NBR, Nitrile, or Hycar. BUNA-N solvents, esters, ketones, aromatic hydrocarbons or hydraulic is a general purpose seat material particularly suitable for fluids. White neoprene is generally used in sanitary applications hydrocarbon service. BUNA-N is a standard Bray seat material and while the black grade provides better abrasion and oil resistance. food grade is available for sanitary applications. 4 | BRAY.COM SERIES 30/31 2”- 20” (50mm-500mm) The Bray Series 30/31 features a high strength one 4", 6" PRESSURE RATINGS piece stem design utilizing an efficient internal BIDIRECTIONAL BUBBLE TIGHT SHUT OFF – Standard Disc* disc to stem connection. This resilient seated Downstream flanges and disc in closed position butterfly valve provides a primary and secondary seal between the disc and seat as well as the stem Series 30/31 /31 2”-12” (50-300mm)2”-12” (50-300mm) 175 psi (12 bar)175 psi (12 bar) and seat which ensures the total encapsulation of Standard Disc* 14”-20” (350-500mm) 150 psi (10.3 bar) the line media and zero external leakage. DEAD END SERVICE – Lug Bodies and Standard Disc* No downstream flanges and disc in closed position 2”-12” (50-300mm) 75 psi (5.2 bar) Series 31 14”-20” (350-500mm) 50 psi (3.4 bar) BODY: 250 psi (17.2 bar) CWP *For low pressure (50 psi) applications, Bray offers a standard reduced disc diameter to decrease seating torques and extend seat life, thus increasing the valve’s performance and reducing actuator costs. VELOCITY LIMITS FOR ON/OFF SERVICES FLUIDS: 30 ft/sec (9 m/s) GASES: 175 ft/sec (54 m/s) 1 –STEM RETAINING ASSEMBLY: The stem is retained in the body by means of a unique stainless steel Spirolox® retaining ring, a thrust washer and two 1 C-rings, manufactured from brass as standard, stainless steel upon request. 2 2 –STEM BUSHING: Non-corrosive, heavy duty acetal 3 bushing absorbs actuator side thrust. 3 –STEM SEAL: Double “U” cup seal design is self- adjusting and gives positive sealing in both directions. 4 –PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SEALS: These seals prevent line media from coming in contact with the stem or body. The primary seal is an interference fit of 8 the molded seat flat with the disc hub. The secondary seal is created because the stem diameter is greater than 4 the diameter of the seat stem hole. 5 –BODY: One piece wafer or lug style. Polyester coating for excellent corrosion resistance. Nylon 11 coating is available as an option. 6 6 –SEAT: Bray’s tongue and groove seat design provides complete isolation of flowing media from the body. The 7 seat also features a molded o-ring which eliminates the use of flange gaskets. 7 –DISC: Casting is spherically machined and hand polished to provide a bubble tight shutoff, minimum 5 torque, and longer seat life. Bray’s resilient Nylon 11 coating comes as standard. 8 –STEM: Precision double “D” disc to stem connection drives the disc without the need for screws or pins. The close tolerance, double “D” connection that drives the valve disc is an exclusive feature of the Bray valve. Disassembly of the Bray stem is just a matter of pulling the stem out of the disc. 10 | BRAY.COM MATERIAL SELECTION OPTIONSCTIOON OPTIONS BODY DISC STEM SEAT Cast Iron Nylon 11 Coated Ductile Iron 416 Stainless Steel BUNA-N Food Grade Ductile Iron 316 Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel EPDM Food Grade Carbon Steel Nickel Aluminum Bronze 316 Stainless Steel FKM* Aluminum Coated Ductile Iron Monel® K500 White BUNA-N Food Grade Halar® Coated Ductile Iron Bonded EPDM 304 Stainless Steel Bonded BUNA-N Duplex Stainless Steel Super Duplex Stainless Steel Hastelloy® Standard Option *FKM is the ASTM D1418 designation for fluorinated hydrocarbon elastomers (also called fluoroelastomers). Monel® is a registered trademark of The International Nickel Company, Inc. Halar® is a registered trademark of Solvay Solexis, Inc. Hastelloy® is a registered trademark of Haynes International, Inc. SERIES 31H 2”-20” (50mm-500mm) Series 31H Lug valves are drilled and tapped to meet ASME Class 125/150 and PN16 flanges. Series 31H valves are designed for manual operation only. PRESSURE RATINGS STANDARD MATERIAL SELECTIONS BIDIRECTIONAL BUBBLE TIGHT SHUT OFF Body Cast Iron AND DEAD END SERVICE Ductile Iron 2”-20” (50-500mm) 250 psi (17.2 bar) Disc Nickel Aluminum Bronze BODY: 250 psi (17.2 bar) CWP Nylon 11 Coated Ductile Iron 316 Stainless Steel VELOCITY LIMITS FOR ON/OFF SERVICES Stem 416 Stainless Steel FLUIDS: 30 ft/sec (9 m/s) GASES: 175 ft/sec (54 m/s) Seat Bonded EPDM Bonded BUNA-N Material availability depends on valve size and series. Other materials are available. Please consult your local Bray representative for your specific application. RESILIENT SEATED BUTTERFLY VALVES | 11 76F-100-A SERIES Stainless Steel Full Port Ball Valve Female NPT Thread, 1/4”-3” 1000 CWP (psig), Cold Non-Shock. (See referenced P/T chart) 150 psig Saturated Steam. Vacuum Service to 29 inches Hg. MSS SP-110 compliant. FEATURES • Investment cast components • Fire safe to API 607 (requires -24 suffix) • Reinforced seats • Meets NACE MR0175 (2000) & MR0103 (2012) • Blow-out-proof stem design • CSA CGA 3.16-M88 (Requires “GS” suffix) • Adjustable packing gland • NSF/ANSI 61 Section 8, Annex G (1/4” to 2”) • Stainless Steel lever and nut • NSF-372, Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content (1/4” to 2”) F OPTIONS AVAILABLE: ( More information in Section J) 7 8 • Minimum quantities apply • To specify an option, replace the “01” standard suffix with the suffix of the option. • To specify multiple options, replace the “01” suffix with the desired suffixes in the 6 11 2 10 numerical order shown below. NOTE: Not all suffixes can be combined together. 5 1 E (SUFFIX) OPTION SIZES -01 Standard Configuration All -P -01- BSPP (Parallel) Thread Connection 1/2” to 2” -T -01- BSPT (Tapered) Thread Connection 1/2” to 3” -02- Stem Grounded 1/2” to 3” -04- 2.25” Stem Extension (Carbon Steel, Zinc Plated) 1/2” to 2” 4 9 -08- 90º Reversed Stem 1/2” to 2” B 3 C -11- Therma-Sealâ„¢ Insulating Tee Handle 1/4” to 2” A -14- Side Vented Ball (Uni-Directional) 3/8” to 3” Graphite packing, PTFE body seal, RPTFE bearing -24- 1/2” to 3” (Fire Safe API 607, 6th edition, ISO 10497:2010) -27- SS Latch-Lock Lever & Nut 1/4” to 3” -30- Cam-Lock and Grounded 1/2” to 2” -32- SS Tee Handle & Nut 1/2” to 2” -39- SS Hi-Rise Locking Wheel Handle, SS Nut 1/2” to 2” STANDARD MATERIAL LIST D -40- Cyl-Loc and Grounded 1/2” to 2” PART MATERIAL -44- Seal Welded 1/4” to 3” 1 Stem packing MPTFE -45- Less Lever & Nut 1/2” to 3” 2 Stem bearing RPTFE -46- Latch Lock Lever - Lock in Closed Position Only 1/2” to 2” A276-316SS (1/4” to 2”, except 1.25”) -47- SS Latch Lock Oval Handle 1/2” to 2” 3 Ball A276-316SS or A351-CF8M stainless (1.25”) -48- SS Oval Handle (No Latch) & Nut 1/4” to 2” A351-CF8M stainless (3”) 4 Seat (2) RPTFE -49- No Lubrication. Assembled Dry. 1/2” to 3” ASTM A276-316SS (1/4” & 3/8”) -56- Multifill Seats & Packing 1/2” to 3” 5 Retainer ASTM A351-CF8M stainless (1/2” to 3”) -57- Oxygen Cleaned 1/4” to 3” 6 Gland A276-316 Stainless Steel -60- Static Grounded Ball & Stem 1/2” to 3” 7 Stem A276-316 Stainless Steel -GS CSA CGA 3.16 All 8 Lever nut 304 Stainless Steel 9 Body Seal RPTFE (1/2” to 3”) 10 Body A351-CF8M 11 Lever and grip SS w/vinyl PRODUCT SIZE A B C D E F WT. NUMBER 76F-101-01 1/4” 0.37 0.95 1.91 1.12 1.60 3.85 0.47 76F-102-01 3/8” 0.37 0.95 1.91 1.12 1.60 3.85 0.44 76F-103-01A 1/2” 0.50 1.21 2.35 1.27 1.73 3.85 0.57 76F-104-01A 3/4” 0.81 1.39 2.77 1.62 1.96 3.85 0.91 76F-105-01A 1” 1.00 1.67 3.34 2.00 2.27 4.75 1.38 * LEAD FREE: The wetted surfaces of this product shall contain no more than 0.25% lead by weighted average. Complies with Federal Public Law 76F-106-01A 1.25” 1.25 1.96 3.92 2.73 3.21 7.77 4.17 111-380. ANSI 3rd party approved and listed. 76F-107-01A 1.5” 1.50 2.05 4.10 2.92 3.31 7.77 4.69 76F-108-01A 2” 2.00 2.37 4.74 3.75 3.69 7.77 6.90 FOR PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE RATINGS, 76F-100-01A 3” 3.00 3.70 7.40 5.68 5.23 10.00 22.40 REFER TO PAGE M-12, GRAPH NO. 8 REV. 11APR16 A-18 www.apollovalves.com Customer Service (704) 841-6000 FLOW DATA For Apollo® Ball Valves The listed Cv “factors” are derived from actual flow testing, in the Apollo® Ball Valve Division, Conbraco Industries, Inc., Pageland, South Carolina. These tests were completed using standard “off the shelf” valves with no special preparation and utilizing standard schedule 40 pipe. It should be understood that these factors are for the valve only and also include the connection configuration. The flow testing is done utilizing water as a fluid media and is a direct statement of the gallons of water flowed per minute with a 1 psig pressure differential across the valve/ connection unit. Line pressure is not a factor. Because the Cv is a factor, the formula can be used to estimate flow of most media for valve sizing. FLOW OF LIQUID FLOW OF GAS ΔP (ΔP) (P2) Q = C Q = 1360 C V √ SpGr V √ (SpGr) (T) (Q)2 (SpGr) 5.4 x 10-7 (SpGr) (T) (Q)2 or ΔP = or ΔP = (Cv)2 (Cv)2 (P 2) Where: Where: Q = flow in US gpm Q = flow in SCFH ΔP = pressure drop (psig) ΔP = pressure drop (psig) SpGr = specific gravity at flowing temperature SpGr = specific gravity (based on air = 1.0) Cv = valve constant P = outlet pressure–psia (psig + 14.7) 2 T = (temp. °F + 460) Cv = valve constant CAUTION: The gas equation shown, is valid at very low pressure drop ratios. The gas equation is NOT valid when the ratio of pressure drop (ΔP) to inlet pressure (P1) exceeds 0.02. NOTE: Only use the gas equation shown if (P1-P2)/P1 is less than 0.02. Cv FACTORS FOR APOLLO VALVES SIZE (IN.) VALVE 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1.25 1.5 2 2.5 3468 10 12 70B-140 Series 8.4 7.2 15 30 43 48 84 108 190 370 670 -- -- -- -- 70-100/200 Series 8.4 7.2 15 30 43 48 84 108 190 370 670 -- -- -- --- 70-300/400 Series -- -- 15 30 43 48 84 108 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 70-600 Series 2.3 4.5 5.4 12 14 21 34 47 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 70-800 Series 8.4 7.2 15 30 43 48 84 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 71-AR Series -- -- -- 30 43 48 84 108 190 370 -- -- -- -- -- 71-100/200 Series -- -- -- 30 43 48 84 108 190 370 -- -- -- -- -- 72-100/900 Series -- -- 26 48 65 125 170 216 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 73A-100 Series 8.4 7.2 15 30 43 48 84 108 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 73-300/400 Series -- -- 26 48 65 125 170 216 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 74-100 Series 8.4 7.2 15 30 43 48 84 108 190 370 670 -- -- -- -- 75-100 Series 8.4 7.2 15 30 43 48 84 108 190 370 670 -- -- -- -- 76-AR Series 8.4 7.2 15 30 43 48 84 108 190 370 670 -- -- -- -- 76F-100 Series 8.1 15 15 51 68 125 177 389 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 76FJ-100 Series 8.1 15 15 51 68 125 177 389 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 76FK-100 Series 8.1 15 15 51 68 125 177 389 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 76-100 Series 8.4 7.2 15 30 43 48 84 108 190 370 -- -- -- -- -- 76-300/400 Series -- -- 26 48 65 125 170 216 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 76-600 Series 2.3 4.5 5.4 12 14 21 34 47 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 76J-100 Series 8.4 7.2 15 30 43 48 84 108 190 370 -- -- -- -- -- 76J-AR Series 8.4 7.2 15 30 43 48 84 108 190 370 670 -- -- -- -- 76K-100 Series 8.4 7.2 15 30 43 48 84 108 190 370 -- -- -- -- -- 76K-AR Series 8.4 7.2 15 30 43 48 84 108 190 370 670 -- -- -- -- 7K-100 Series -- -- 15 51 68 125 177 389 503 -- -- -- -- -- -- 77-AR Series 8.1 15 15 51 68 125 177 389 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 77C-100/200 Series 4.5 7.2 16 36 68 125 177 389 503 -- -- -- -- -- -- 77D-140 Series 4.5 7.2 16 36 68 125 177 389 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- continued on next page M-3 Copyright ©2016 Apollo Valves, Manufactured by Conbraco Industries - Printed in the USA FLOW DATA For Apollo® Ball Valves Cv FACTORS FOR APOLLO VALVES (continued from M-3) SIZE (IN.) VALVE 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1.25 1.5 2 2.5 3468 10 12 77D-640 Series -- -- -- 11 24 35 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 77G-UL Series 4.5 7.2 16 36 68 125 177 389 503 -- -- -- -- -- -- 77W Series -- -- 16 36 68 125 177 389 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 77-100/200 Series 8.1 15 15 51 68 125 177 389 503 -- -- -- -- -- -- 79 Series 8.5 8.5 9.8 32 44 66 148 218 440 390 -- -- -- -- -- 80 Series 8.4 7.2 15 30 43 48 84 108 190 370 -- -- -- -- -- 82-100/200 Series 8.1 14 26 51 68 120 170 376 510 996 1893 -- -- -- -- 83A/83B Series 8.1 14 26 51 68 120 170 376 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 83R-100/200 Series -- -- -- -- -- -- 170 376 -- 996 1893 -- -- -- -- 86A/86B Series 8.1 14 26 51 68 120 170 376 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 86R-100/200 Series -- -- -- -- -- -- 170 376 -- 996 1893 -- -- -- -- 87A-100 Series -- -- -- -- -- -- 86 104 234 375 673 1099 1902 3890 -- 87A-200 Series -- -- 15 19 75 -- 195 410 545 1021 2016 4837 9250 15170 22390 87A-700 Series -- -- -- -- -- -- 86 104 234 375 673 1099 1902 3890 -- 87A-900 Series -- -- 15 19 75 -- 195 410 545 1021 2016 4837 9250 15170 22390 87A-F00 Series -- -- -- -- 75 -- 195 410 545 1021 2016 4837 -- -- -- 87B-100 Series -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 375 673 1099 1902 3890 -- 87J-100 Series -- -- -- -- -- -- 86 104 234 375 673 1099 1902 3890 -- 87J-200 Series -- -- 15 19 75 -- 195 410 545 1021 2016 4837 9250 15170 22390 87J-700 Series -- -- -- -- -- -- 86 104 234 375 673 1099 1902 3890 -- 87J-900 Series -- -- 15 19 75 -- 195 410 545 1021 2016 4837 9250 15170 22390 87K-100 Series -- -- -- -- -- -- 86 104 234 375 673 1099 1902 3890 -- 87K-200 Series -- -- 15 19 75 -- 195 410 545 1021 2016 4837 9250 15170 22390 87K-700 Series -- -- -- -- -- -- 86 104 234 375 673 1099 1902 3890 -- 87K-900 Series -- -- 15 19 75 -- 195 410 545 1021 2016 4837 9250 15170 22390 88A-100 Series -- -- -- -- -- -- 86 104 234 375 673 1099 1902 3890 -- 88A-200 Series -- -- 15 19 75 -- 195 410 545 1021 2016 4837 9250 15170 22390 88A-700 Series -- -- -- -- -- -- 86 104 234 375 673 1099 1902 3890 -- 88A-900 Series -- -- 15 19 75 -- 195 410 545 1021 2016 4837 9250 15170 22390 88A-F00 Series -- -- -- -- 75 -- 195 410 545 1021 2016 4837 -- -- -- 88B-100 Series -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 375 673 1099 1902 3890 -- 89-100 Series 8.4 7.2 15 30 43 48 84 108 190 370 -- -- -- -- -- 9A-100 Series 8.3 6.7 5.7 10 16 25 40 62 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 90-100 Series 8.3 6.7 5.7 10 16 25 40 62 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 92-100 Series 8.3 6.7 5.7 10 16 25 40 62 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 93-100 Series 8.3 6.7 5.7 10 16 25 40 62 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 94A-100/200 Series 6 7 19 34 50 104 268 309 629 1018 1622 -- -- -- -- 96-100 Series 8.3 6.7 5.7 10 16 25 40 62 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 399-100 Series 8.4 7.2 15 30 43 48 84 108 190 370 -- -- -- -- -- 489-100 Series 8.4 7.2 15 30 43 48 84 108 190 370 -- -- -- -- -- M-4 www.apollovalves.com Customer Service (704) 841-6000 PRESSURE TEMPERATURE RATINGS 1000 CWP (CS) ASTM A216-WCB (GRAPH 7) 1000 CWP (SS) ASTM A351-CF8M (GRAPH 8) M-12 www.apollovalves.com Customer Service (704) 841-6000 5W4C1 A 1.2.3. - . Ue I v B I L 1 2 A S1 E1 E2 S2 GND E S 6 5 7 8 4 37 36 42 41 1 2 n.c. n.c. n.c. 5 7 4 37 42 41 B E E1 E2 GND 2 1 3 4 AB 12 331 2 A B 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4...20 mA 6 4 5 1 0/4...20 mA + + – 3 _ 2 1 2 3 12345 1 2 3 1 2 3 A A 4 B B A 4 B 1 2 3 A A 4 B B A 4 B 1 2 3 4 5 5 1 2 3 PE = PPM=P DN≤300 DN≥350 PE = PPM=P PE = PPM=P 3. + 2. – PE≠PPM=P PE = P ≠ PPM 3. + 2. – PE≠P ≠PPM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a b [%] 2.5 2.0 0.5 % 1.5 0.2 % 1.0 0.5 0 0 1 2 4 6 8 10 [m/s] v 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 32 [ft/s] [%] 2.5 2.0 0.5 % 1.5 0.2 % 1.0 0.5 0 0 [m/s] v 0 v0.5 v0.2 vmax [ft/s] [%] +30 +20 +10 0 –10 –20 –30 10⁰ 10¹ 10² 10³ 10⁴ 10⁵ 10⁶ [ S/cm]μ 1 2 h 2 x DN 5 x DN L > 10 m (33 ft) 1 2 2 3 ≥ 5 × DN ≥ 2 × DN ≥ 2 × DN ≥ 0 × DN ≥ 2 × DN ≥ 1 × DN ≥ 2 × DN 100 [mbar] 8 m/s 7 m/s 6 m/s 5 m/s 4 m/s 3 m/s 10 max. 8° 2 m/s d D 1 m/s 1 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 d / D [ S/cm]μ 200 100 Lmax 5 [m] 10 100 200 Lmax []ft 0 200 400 600 3 ( 10) ≤≤ 17 (0.67) = = 14 (0.55) 5.8 (0.23) 210.5 (8.29) 5.8 (0.23) 149 (5.85) ø 20…70 3 x TX 25 ( 0.79…2.75)ø 4 x SW 10 ~102 (~ 4.0) 1 TA [°F] [°C] 140 60 100 40 20 0 0 -20 -40 -40 -20 -10 010 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 [°C] TF 0 50 100 150 200 [° ]F [psi] [bar] 600 40 PN40 500 35 30 400 25 PN25 300 20 15 200 PN16 10 PN10 100 5 PN 6 0 0 -30 -20-10 010 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 [°C] -20 0 50 100 150 200[° ]F [psi] [bar] 900 60 800 50 700 600 40 Class300 500 30 400 300 20 200 10 Class150 100 0 0 -30 -20-10 010 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 [°C] -20 0 50 100 150 200[° ]F [psi] [bar] 900 60 800 50 700 Class300 600 40 500 30 400 300 20 Class150 200 10 100 0 0 -30 -20-10 010 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 [°C] -20 0 50 100 150 200[° ]F [psi] [bar] 30 400 300 20 20K 200 10 10K 100 0 0 -30 -20-10 010 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 [°C] -20 0 50 100 150 200[° ]F [psi] [bar] 160 11 ClassD 10 140 9 102 8 0 0 -30 -20-10 010 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 [°C] -20 0 50 100 150 200[° ]F [psi] [bar] 30 400 300 20 200 TableE 10 100 0 0 -30 -20-10 010 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 [°C] -20 0 50 100 150 200[° ]F [psi] [bar] 25 300 20 PN16 15 200 10 100 5 0 0 -30 -20 -10 010 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 [°C] -20 0 50 100 150 200[° ]F [psi] [bar] 25 12 300 20 15 200 10 100 5 0 0 -30 -20 -10 010 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 [°C] -20 0 50 100 150 200[° ]F [psi] [mbar] 7 500 450 DN50 DN65 6 (2") (2½") 400 5 350 DN80 (3") 300 4 250 3 200 2 150 100 1 50 0 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 [m /h]³ 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 [gal/min] [psi] [mbar] 13 900 12 800 DN250 11 DN125 DN150 DN200 (10") 10 700 (5") (6") (8") 9 600 DN100 8 (4") 7 500 DN300 6 400 (12") 5 300 4 3 200 2 100 1 0 0 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 [m /h]³ 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 [gal/min] A G H I E F K D L M A G P N F Q A G B C E F K D L M C A B E D L C A B E F D L C A B E F D L DN ≤ 300 (12") DN 300 … 600 (14 … 24") DN 700 (28")≥  6.4 (0.25)  6.5 (0.26)  9 (0.35) H H A H A B B AD D D t = 2 (0.08) t = 2 (0.08) t = 2 (0.08) A G H I E F K D L M A G P N F Q A G B C E F K D L M C A B E D L C A B E F D L DN ≤ 300 (12") DN 300 … 600 (14 … 24") DN 700 (28")≥  6.4 (0.25)  6.5 (0.26)  9 (0.35) H H A H A B B AD D D t = 2 (0.08) t = 2 (0.08) t = 2 (0.08) 1 2 3 8 47 12 3 5 6 1 2 3 4 4 4 3 12 1 2 3 4 5 5 5 1 open 3 press 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 TAB #4 PIPPING INFORMATION  inch inch SIZE L SW SIZE L SW 1/4"x1/8" 0.60 0.63 11/2"x1" 1.50 2.05 3/8"x1/8" 0.65 0.71 11/2"x11/4" 1.50 2.05 3/8"x1/4" 0.65 0.71 2"x1/4" 1.42 2.48 1/2"x1/8" 0.83 1.02 2"x3/8" 1.42 2.48 1/2"x1/4" 0.83 1.02 2"x1/2" 1.46 2.48 1/2"x3/8" 0.83 1.02 2"x3/4" 1.46 2.48 3/4"x1/8" 0.94 1.18 2"x1" 1.46 2.48 3/3/4"x1/4"4"x1/4" 00.94.94 1.11.188 2"x11/4" 1.46 2.48 3/4"x3/8" 0.94 1.18 2"x11/2" 1.46 2.48 3/3/4"x1/2"4"x1/2" 00.94.94 1.11.188 21/2"x1" 1.77 3.19 1"x1/8" 1.06 1.38 21/2"x11/4" 1.77 3.19 1"x1/4" 1.06 1.38 21/2"x11/2" 1.77 3.19 1"x3/8" 1.06 1.38 21/2"x2" 1.77 3.19 1"x1/2" 1.06 1.38 3"x1" 1.87 3.72 1"x3/4" 1.06 1.38 3"x11/4" 1.87 3.72 11/4"x1/4" 1.18 1.77 3"x11/2" 1.85 3.74 11/4"x3/8" 1.18 1.77 3"x2" 1.85 3.74 11/4"x1/2" 1.18 1.77 3"x21/2" 1.85 3.74 11/4"x3/4" 1.18 1.77 4"x11/4" 2.03 4.72 11/4"x1" 1.18 1.77 4"x11/2" 2.07 4.72 11/2"x3/8" 1.50 2.05 4"x2" 2.05 4.72 11/2"x1/2" 1.50 2.05 4"x21/2" 2.05 4.72 11/2"x3/4" 1.50 2.05 4"x3" 2.05 4.72 inch SIZE L 1/8" 0.71 0.59 1/4" 0.83 0.71 3/8" 0.94 0.71 1/2" 1.07 0.83 3/4" 1.38 0.94 1" 1.65 1.14 1-1/4" 2.05 1.30 1-1/2" 2.26 1.34 2" 2.73 1.50 2-1/2" 3.62 1.61 3" 4.17 1.85 4" 5.28 2.09 AMERICAN TORUSEAL® FLANGE GASKET SIZES 2”- 64”, NOMINAL 1/8” THICKNESS FULL FACE RUBBER GASKET ● Positive sealing for ductile iron flanged piping. ● Full Face design - assures ready field assembly and precise placement. Superior to conventional full face or ring gaskets. ● Ideal for general purpose use, also rigorous use such as long-span installations. ● Rated for 350 psi water working pressure, 250 psi for 30” and larger. ● Available in SBR, EPDM, Nitrile, Neoprene, and FKM. Clean flange faces and faced pipe ends aced pipe ends ● SBR, EPDM, Nitrile and FKM certified to ANSI/NSF-61 thoroughly prior to installation. Do not use ation. Do not use joint or gasket compounds with Toruseal® s with Toruseal® ● Meets ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 gaskets (assemble joints dry).dry). ● Holes to match ANSI A21.10, A21.15 and B16.1 Class *Pressure rating designated is maximumed is maximum water working pressure and is based onnd is based on 125 flange drilling. the maximum rating of C110, C115 or10, C115 or C153 flanges. AMERICAN Toruseal®N Toruseal® ● For use with standard flange bolts. gaskets meet the description of "speciallytion of "specially designed gaskets" shown in the in the APPROXIMATE BOLT TORQUE AND WEIGHTA appendices of AWWA C110, C111, and10, C111, and C115, and "special gaskets" shown in thekets" shown in the body of AWWA C111. Pipe Size PressureRating* Gasket Weight Aprox. Bolt (in.) (psi) (lbs.) Torque** (ft-lbs.) **Bolt torque applicable only to joints with nly to joints with 2 350 0.2 100 Toruseal® gaskets. 3 350 0.2 100 † The 64" Toruseal® gasket contains an ket contains an 4 350 0.3 100 additional torus to accommodate bolting a modate bolting a 6 350 0.4 150 64" C115 or C153 flange to a standard 66" to a standard 66" 8 350 0.5 150 flange. 10 350 0.8 200 12 350 1.0 200 AMERICAN Toruseal® gaskets are noraskets are nor- 14 350 1.1 250 mally black and furnished of SBR rubber per ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. This 16 350 1.3 250 rubber compound is NSF 61 certified for 18 350 1.3 300 contact with potable water and is 20 350 1.5 300 otherwise physically superior to red rubber 24 350 1.8 400 some- times used with flanged joints. 30 250 2.4 400 Other types of rubber are available on 36 250 2.7 500 special order. 42 250 4.6 500 48 250 5.8 500 54 250 6.8 600 60 250 8.0 600 64† 250 12.5 600 Specification Rubber Products, Inc. P.O. Box 568 • Alabaster, AL 35007 • 205-663-2521 or 800-633-3415 specrubber@specrubber.com• www.specrubber.com Garlock 98206 MATERIAL PROPERTIES*: Color: Black Composition: EPDM Elastomer with sulfur cure Durometer, Shore A, +/=5: 80 Temperature2, °F (°C) Minimum: -40 (-40) Maximum: +275 (+135) Pressure2, Maximum, psig (bar): 175 (12) 2 P x T (max.) , psig x °F (bar x °C): 30,000 (900) Finish Available Thru 1/8”: Cloth Over 1/8”: Smooth Meets Specification: NSF 61 (National Sanitation Foundation), ASTM-D-1330 Grade I and II PHYSICAL PROPERTIES*: ASTM D412 Tensile Strength, psi (N/mm2): 1500 (10.4) ASTM D412 Elongation, %: 185 ASTM D395 B Compression Set, 25% Deflection, Max. % 22 hours at 158°F (70°C): 25 ASTM D149 Dielectric Properties, range, volts/mil. Sample conditioning 1/8” None <2 ASTM F586 Design Factors “m” factor: 1 “y” factor, psi (N/mm2): 200 (1.4) ASTM D2000 Line Call Out: 4BA815A14B13C12 Notes: This is a general guide and should not be the sole means of selecting or rejecting this material. * Values do not constitute specification Limits 2 When approaching the maximum or minimum ratings consult Garlock Applications Engineering an EnPro Standon Model C92 Adjustable Pipe Saddle Clamp Support The "Standon" model #C92 saddle clamp support is a two piece, full circle clamp specifically designed to fit ductile iron pipe. It comes supplied with two bolts and nuts to retain the matching top saddle. The C92 is perfect for installations where seizmic activitiy may be present. A neoprene liner is available for IPS size pipe for a perfect fit. Accepts standard IPS pipe - No threading required. Comes complete with over-sized anchorable base plate. Available in sizes 2" through 36". Also available in 100% 304 Stainless Steel. MATERIAL Saddle Strap: ASTM A36 Collar/ Base Cups: ASTM A53 D.O.M. tubing ASTM A36; rolled thread Threaded Stud: Grade ASTM A307 Base Plate: ASTM A36 Sheet Steel - .25" plate Optional Material: 100% 304 Stainless Steel FABRICATION 100% MIG welding, electrode All welds: E70XX Saddles: Formed to ductile iron radius. FINISH All pipe supports have a corrosion resistant, galvanized finish. DIMENSIONS MINIMUM SUPPORT PIPE STRAP THREAD BASE EXTENSION DIST. TO SIZE O.D. SIZE STUD PLATE PIPE REQ'D FLOOR 2" 2.5" 3/8" x 2" 1" x 6" 4"x6"x¼" 2" SCH. 40 7" 2½" 3" 3/8" x 2" 1" x 6" 4"x6"x¼" 2" SCH. 40 7" 3" 3.96" 3/8" x 2" 1" x 6" 4"x6"x¼" 2" SCH. 40 7" 4" 4.80" ½" x 2" 1" x 6" 8"x8"x¼" 2" SCH. 40 7" 6" 6.90" ½" x 2" 1" x 6" 8"x8"x¼" 2" SCH. 40 7" 8" 9.05" ½" x 2" 1" x 6" 8"x8"x¼" 2" SCH. 40 7" 10" 11.10" ½" x 2" 1" x 6" 8"x8"x¼" 2" SCH. 40 7" 12" 13.20" ½" x 2" 1" x 6" 8"x8"x¼" 2" SCH. 40 7" CITY OF ARLINGTON 18204 59th Avenue NE, Arlington, WA 98223 INSPECTIONS: 360-403-3417 - Permit Center: 360-403-3551 BUILDING PERMIT 17003 91ST AVE NE Permit #: 6216 PERMIT EXPIRES 180 DAYS AFTER Parcel #: 31052500103000 DATE OF ISSUANCE. Scope of Work: Rehabilitation of existing reservoir building and installation of new Valuation: 137280.00 skid mounted booster pump station with generator pad OWNER APPLICANT CONTRACTOR ARLINGTON CITY OF City of Arlington Trico Companies LLC 18204 59TH DRIVE NE 154 W Cox Ave 15066 Josh Wilson Road ARLINGTON, WA 98223 Arlington, WA 98223 Burlington, WA 98233 360-403-3526 360-757-2373 LIC: 603 251 163 EXP: 05/31/2025 LIC: TRICOCL886Q8 EXP: 11/28/2024 MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR PLUMBING CONTRACTOR LIC #: EXP: LIC #: EXP: JOB DESCRIPTION PERMIT TYPE: COMMERCIAL ALTERATION CODE YEAR: 2021 STORIES: 1 CONST. TYPE: VB DWELLING UNITS: OCC GROUP: U; Utility BUILDINGS: OCC LOAD: PERMIT APPROVAL The issuance or granting of this permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or approval of, any violation of this Code or any other ordinance or order of the City, of any state or federal law, or of any order, proclamation, guidance advice or decision of the Governor of this State. To the extent the issuance or granting of this permit is interpreted to allow construction activity during any period of time when such construction is prohibited or restricted by any state or federal law, or order, proclamation, guidance advice or decision of the Governor of this State, this permit shall not authorize such work and shall not be valid. The building official is authorized to prevent occupancy or use of a structure where in violation of this Code, any other City ordinances of this jurisdiction or any other ordinance or executive order of the City, or of any state or federal law, or of any order, proclamation, guidance advice or decision of the Governor. The building official is authorized to suspend or revoke this permit if it is determined to be issued in error or on the basis of incorrect, inaccurate or incomplete information, or in violation of any City ordinance, regulation or order, state or federal law, or any order, proclamation, guidance or decision of the Governor. I AGREE TO COMPLY WITH CITY AND STATE LAWS REGULATING CONSTRUCTION AND IN DOING THE WORK AUTHORIZED THEREBY; NO PERSON WILL BE EMPLOYED IN VIOLATION OF THE LABOR CODE OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON RELATING TO WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE AND RCW 18.27. THIS APPLICATION IS NOT A PERMIT UNTIL SIGNED BY THE BUILDING OFFICIAL OR HIS/HER DEPUTY AND ALL FEES ARE PAID. IT IS UNLAWFUL TO USE OR OCCUPY A BUILDING OR STRUCTURE UNTIL A FINAL INSPECTION HAS BEEN MADE AND APPROVAL OR A CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY HAS BEEN GRANTED. IBC110/IRC110. SALES TAX NOTICE: Sales tax relating to construction and construction materials in the City of Arlington must be reported on your sales tax return form and coded City of Arlington #3101. 11/19/2024 Applicant Signature Date Building Official Date CONDITIONS SEE REDLINED DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. ADHERE TO THE APPROVED PLANS. APPROVED JOB COPY SHALL BE ONSITE FOR INSECTIONS. CALL FOR INSPECTIONS. The property owner shall ensure that the construction project complies with all applicable zoning codes and regulations. The property owner shall also ensure that the construction project does not cause any adverse impact on the surrounding environment or community. The property owner shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary permits and approvals from the relevant authorities before commencing construction. The property owner shall ensure that the construction project complies with all applicable design review requirements. THIS PERMIT AUTHORIZES ONLY THE WORK NOTED. THIS PERMIT COVERS WORK TO BE DONE ON PRIVATE PROPERTY ONLY. ANY CONSTRUCTION ON THE PUBLIC DOMAIN (CURBS, SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS, MARQUEES, ETC.) WILL REQUIRE SEPARATE PERMISSION. PERMIT FEES Date Description Fee Amount 11/20/2024 Processing/Technology $25.00 11/20/2024 Building Permit $1,811.26 11/20/2024 Building Plan Review $1,181.26 Total Due: $3,017.52 Total Payment: $3,017.52 Balance Due: $0.00 CALL FOR INSPECTIONS Call by 3:30 pm for next day inspection, allow 48 hours for Fire Inspections When calling for an inspection please leave the following information: Permit Number, Type of Inspection being requested, and whether you prefer morning or afternoon INSPECTION INFORMATION Pass/Fail CITY OF ARLINGTON INSPECTION CARD No building construction shall be commenced until permit holder INSPECTION RECORD SHALL or his agent has posted this Inspection Record Card in a REMAIN AT JOB SITE conspicuous place on the premises. OWNER: CONTRACTOR: JOB ADDRESS: LOT NUMBER TYPE GROUP NATURE of WORK: USE of BUILDING: PERMIT No: DATE ISSUED: INSPECTOR MUST SIGN ALL SPACES PERTAINING TO THIS JOB DEPARTMENT INSPECTION DATE(S) PASS FAIL INITIALS FOOTING BUILDING FOUNDATION (360) 403-3417 UNDERFLOOR SHEARWALL PLUMBING (groundwork) ROUGH PLUMBING GAS PIPING ROUGH HEATING & VENTILATION FRAMING INSULATION WALLBOARD (SHEAR/RATED WALLS) CEILING GRID STRUCTURAL SLAB CROSS CONNECTION CONTROL IN PREMISE (360) 403-3417 GRADING TEMPORARY TECSP ASBUILTS APPROVED MAINTENANCE BOND STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM PAVING, SIGNAGE & MARKINGS LANDSCAPING CONDITIONS ONSITE UTILITIES WATER ONSITE UTILITIES SEWER Sewer OFFSITE UTILITIES WATER (360) 403-3508 OFFSITE UTILITIES SEWER SEWER PRETREATMENT Water CROSS CONNECTION CONTROL PREMISE (360) 403-3526 SIDE SEWER/ CLEANOUT/FINAL WATER SERVICE INSTALLATION WATER SERVICE FINAL (360) 403-3417 HYDRO/FLUSH UNDERGROUND**INCL FDC FIRE ALARM /AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER HOOD SUPPRESSION SYSTEM FINAL FIRE WALK-THROUGH (360) 403-3417 FINAL INSPECTION ALL SIGNATURE BLOCKS MUST BE COMPLETE          !" #$%&'()#*+$&* ,&*-.&&/$-(01234$5$#&* 67!8" #$%&'()#*+$&* 67!8699:: ;<&=>- 67!8?@? ()#*+$&*C<DE F A?B @8! -)/5/21//-*G5*.1(H-)) I8 F JFJF; K7 1$#)#$#-/L5()#*+$&*H5M+&>NO1(H-))L(P MQ&2 A!RST -P5O#)#$5$#&*&'-=#/$#*+(-/-(>&#(O1#)N#*+5*N#*/$5))5$#&*&'*-H/U#N2&1*$-N O&&/$-(3123/$5$#&*H#$P+-*-(5$&(35N V7W8 FX EM AYWZ ;X "W[RA: @8:W!8 \. ]!!W8!^W _`_$#)#$% a @9 a::W9     Kb: ; D  ; Z ._Gc AW: d0G 6::e89 f(#/$#*g&/$-(  05(Q-)h NN(-//-+5)G-/Q(#3$#&*H*-(52- H*-(0P&*- ,&*#*+ ED$P-(-/&1(Q- ci F ; ; F                !"#!"!#!$#%&'()*+, !"#-"!#!$ !"#-"!#!$./0 +,)1  234567 ( 1 8  )9 ( 1 8  )1 8  <  &!=> ?  @ !=$  8  .& :**;()0 !&!=A 9  @ ?!=> ?  )1 8  "# "!#!$ ./0 +, )0;():+ -&0  B 9 @   <  !=$   $&)C$ B D    B  E  B  B :**;()0 "# "!#!$ +   F0)+++, )1  )0;():+ G '  + ) F 9" 9 H!I&## .9F                  !!"   !!"  # $   %&'()*( +   ,- *(      .& -/00123456789145:;7<4=> ?1@A841=14BC7145 ?<28@;;2645041D> > ?E;45F4114BC7145 A21 ?1@A841G> @841@;H1@I7<F14BC7145@8;4@<:8202=8= ?J7<7JCJ>55K14H@1L02=8= 7<841I2<<4I8H28902=8=9217M2<8@;H@17<=;@H  001234567892<57872<= %). N..#/(-DO P"Q  R/+  S)+ T-) .> - R/U- -/ V@1I4;K+G G "Q!"!WX  "Q!"!WXE  $!YPZ" [G$\!Z" "Q!"]^$E G _2<7<F+E$89414=2C1I4V125CI872<`?81@I872< " 28+D;2Ia+